Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 Application Guide

Lenovo RackSwitch G8272
Application Guide
For Networking OS 8.2
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in the
Safety information and Environmental Notices and User Guide documents on the Lenovo Documentation CD
and the Warranty Information document that comes with the product.
First Edition (April 2015)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Portions © Copyright IBM Corporation 2014.
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General
Services Administration “GSA” contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.
Lenovo and the Lenovo logo are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . .
Who Should Use This Guide . .
What You’ll Find in This Guide .
Additional References . . . . .
Typographic Conventions . . .
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 19
.20
.21
.25
.26
Part 1:. Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 1. Switch Administration . . . . . . . . .
Administration Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browser-Based Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Switch Management Ports. . . . . . . .
Using the Switch Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Secure Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using SSH with Password Authentication . . .
Using SSH with Public Key Authentication . . .
Using a Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Simple Network Management Protocol. . . .
BOOTP/DHCP Client IP Address Services . . . . . . .
DHCP Host Name Configuration . . . . . . . . .
DHCP SYSLOG Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global BOOTP Relay Agent Configuration . . . . .
Domain-Specific BOOTP Relay Agent Configuration.
DHCP Option 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Login Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup vs. the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idle Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Strict Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceptable Cipher Suites . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Strict Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSL/TLS Version Limitation . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2. Initial Setup . . . . . . .
Information Needed for Setup . . . . .
Default Setup Options . . . . . . . . .
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration . . . .
Setup Part 3: VLANs . . . . . . . . .
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration . . . . .
IP Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
Loopback Interfaces . . . . . . . .
Default Gateways . . . . . . . . .
IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
.30
.30
.31
.31
.32
.33
.33
.34
.34
.35
.38
.39
.39
.40
.40
.41
.41
.42
.44
.44
.45
.47
.48
.49
.49
. 51
.52
.52
.53
.54
.56
.58
.59
.59
.60
.61
.61
3
Setup Part 5: Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Optional Setup for Telnet Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 3. Switch Software Management .
Loading New Software to Your Switch . . .
Loading Software via the ISCLI . . . . .
Loading Software via BBI . . . . . . .
USB Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB Boot. . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB Copy . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Boot Management Menu . . . . . . .
Recovering from a Failed Upgrade .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
65
. 66
. 66
. 67
. 68
. 68
. 69
. 70
. 70
Part 2:. Securing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Chapter 4. Securing Administration . . . . . . . .
Secure Shell and Secure Copy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring SSH/SCP Features on the Switch. . . .
Configuring the SCP Administrator Password . . .
Using SSH and SCP Client Commands . . . . . .
SSH and SCP Encryption of Management Messages .
Generating RSA Host Key for SSH Access . . . . .
SSH/SCP Integration with Radius Authentication . .
SSH/SCP Integration with TACACS+ Authentication
End User Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations for Configuring End User Accounts .
Strong Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listing Current Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging into an End User Account . . . . . . . .
Password Fix-Up Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
75
. 76
. 76
. 77
. 77
. 79
. 79
. 79
. 79
. 80
. 80
. 80
. 81
. 82
. 82
. 82
Chapter 5. Authentication & Authorization Protocols .
RADIUS Authentication and Authorization . . . . . .
How RADIUS Authentication Works . . . . . . .
Configuring RADIUS on the Switch . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Authentication Features in Lenovo N/OS .
Switch User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Attributes for Lenovo N/OS User Privileges
TACACS+ Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How TACACS+ Authentication Works . . . . . .
TACACS+ Authentication Features in Lenovo N/OS .
Command Authorization and Logging . . . . . .
Configuring TACACS+ Authentication on the Switch
LDAP Authentication and Authorization . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
83
. 84
. 84
. 84
. 85
. 86
. 86
. 88
. 88
. 88
. 90
. 90
. 92
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
95
. 96
. 97
. 98
Chapter 6. 802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control .
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN . . . . . .
EAPoL Authentication Process . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EAPoL Message Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
EAPoL Port States . . . . . . .
Guest VLAN . . . . . . . . . .
Supported RADIUS Attributes . .
EAPoL Configuration Guidelines .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 7. Access Control Lists . .
Summary of Packet Classifiers . . . .
Summary of ACL Actions . . . . . .
Assigning Individual ACLs to a Port .
ACL Order of Precedence . . . . . .
ACL Metering and Re-Marking . . . .
ACL Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . .
Viewing ACL Statistics . . . . . . .
ACL Configuration Examples . . . .
VLAN Maps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Storm Control Filters . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.99
.99
100
102
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 103
. 104
. 106
. 106
. 107
. 107
. 108
. 109
. 110
. 112
. 114
Part 3:. Switch Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Chapter 8. VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLANs Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLANs and Port VLAN ID Numbers . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVID/Native VLAN Numbers . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Tagging/Trunk Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Topologies and Design Considerations . . . . .
Multiple VLANs with Tagging/Trunk Mode Adapters
VLAN Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . .
Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Private VLAN Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9. Ports and Trunking . . . . .
Configuring QSFP+ Ports . . . . . . . . .
Trunking Overview . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Trunk Requirements . . . . . . .
Static Trunk Group Configuration Rules .
Configuring a Static Port Trunk . . . . .
Link Aggregation Control Protocol . . . . .
LACP Overview . . . . . . . . . . .
Static LACP Trunks . . . . . . . .
LACP Port Modes . . . . . . . . . . .
LACP Individual . . . . . . . . .
LACP Minimum Links Option . . . . .
Configuring LACP . . . . . . . . . .
Configurable Trunk Hash Algorithm . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 117
. 118
. 118
. 118
. 119
. 120
. 124
. 124
. 126
. 127
. 127
. 127
. 128
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 129
. 130
. 132
. 133
. 133
. 133
. 134
. 136
. 136
. 137
. 137
. 138
. 139
. 139
. 140
Contents
5
Chapter 10. Spanning Tree Protocols . . . . . .
Spanning Tree Protocol Modes . . . . . . . . . . .
Global STP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVRST Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bridge Protocol Data Units . . . . . . . . . . .
Bridge Protocol Data Units Overview . . . .
Determining the Path for Forwarding BPDUs .
Simple STP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Groups. . . . . . . .
Using Multiple STGs to Eliminate False Loops
VLANs and STG Assignment . . . . . . . .
Manually Assigning STGs . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for Creating VLANs . . . . . . .
Rules for VLAN Tagged/Trunk Mode Ports. .
Adding and Removing Ports from STGs . . .
The Switch-Centric Model . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Multiple STGs . . . . . . . . . .
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . .
Port States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RSTP Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . .
RSTP Configuration Example. . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . .
MSTP Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Internal Spanning Tree . . . . . . . .
MSTP Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . .
MSTP Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . .
Port Type and Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge/Portfast Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
144
145
145
146
146
146
146
149
151
151
151
152
153
153
154
155
156
158
158
158
158
160
160
160
160
161
163
163
163
Chapter 11. Virtual Link Aggregation Groups . . . .
VLAG Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAGs versus Port Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring VLAGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic VLAG Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAG Configuration - VLANs Mapped to MSTI
Configuring Health Check . . . . . . . . . .
VLAGs with VRRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring VLAGs in Multiple Layers . . . . . .
VLAG with PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traffic Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Health Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
165
168
168
170
171
173
175
176
182
185
185
186
Chapter 12. Quality of Service . .
QoS Overview . . . . . . . . . .
Using ACL Filters . . . . . . . .
Summary of ACL Actions . . .
ACL Metering and Re-Marking .
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
187
188
189
189
190
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using DSCP Values to Provide QoS . . . . . .
Differentiated Services Concepts . . . . .
Per Hop Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSCP Re-Marking and Mapping . . . . .
DSCP Re-Marking Configuration Examples
Using 802.1p Priority to Provide QoS . . . . .
Queuing and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . .
Control Plane Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
WRED with ECN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How WRED/ECN work together . . . . .
Configuring WRED/ECN. . . . . . . . .
WRED/ECN Configuration Example. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 13. Precision Time Protocol .
Ordinary Clock Mode . . . . . . .
Transparent Clock Mode . . . . . .
Tracing PTP Packets . . . . . . . .
Viewing PTP Information . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
191
191
192
193
194
194
197
198
198
199
199
200
201
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205
. 206
. 206
. 207
. 207
Part 4:. Advanced Switching Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Chapter 14. OpenFlow . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenFlow Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenFlow Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenFlow Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table-Miss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fail Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenFlow Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Path ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sFlow Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenFlow Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring OpenFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Example 1 - OpenFlow Boot Profile
Configuration Example 2 - Default Boot Profile .
Feature Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 15. Deployment Profiles . .
Available Profiles . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Profiles . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Configuration Changes . . .
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 211
. 212
. 212
. 212
. 213
. 213
. 215
. 220
. 221
. 221
. 222
. 224
. 224
. 224
. 226
. 226
. 229
. 231
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 233
. 234
. 235
. 236
Chapter 16. Virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Chapter 17. VMready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
VE Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Contents
7
8
Defining Server Ports . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM Group Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local VM Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distributed VM Groups . . . . . . . . . . .
VM Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing a Distributed VM Group. . . .
Assigning Members . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing the Configuration . . . . .
Removing Member VEs . . . . . . . . .
VMcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Distributed Switch . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Migrating to vDS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtualization Management Servers . . . . . .
Assigning a vCenter. . . . . . . . . . .
vCenter Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting the vCenter . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . .
VMware Operational Commands . . . . .
Pre-Provisioning VEs . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM Policy Bandwidth Control . . . . . . . .
VM Policy Bandwidth Control Commands .
Bandwidth Policies vs. Bandwidth Shaping
VMready Information Displays . . . . . . .
VMready Configuration Example. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 18. FCoE and CEE . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel over Ethernet . . . . . . . .
The FCoE Topology . . . . . . . . . .
FIP Snooping Requirements . . . . . .
Converged Enhanced Ethernet . . . . . . .
Turning CEE On or Off . . . . . . . .
Effects on Link Layer Discovery Protocol.
Effects on 802.1p Quality of Service . . .
Effects on Flow Control . . . . . . . .
FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping . . . .
Global FIP Snooping Settings . . . . . .
FIP Snooping for Specific Ports . . . . .
Port FCF and ENode Detection . . . . .
FCoE Connection Timeout . . . . . . .
FCoE ACL Rules . . . . . . . . . . .
FCoE VLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing FIP Snooping Information . . .
Operational Commands . . . . . . . .
FIP Snooping Configuration . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
240
240
241
243
243
243
244
244
245
246
248
248
248
249
250
250
250
251
252
252
253
254
255
255
255
257
261
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
263
265
265
266
267
267
267
268
269
270
270
270
271
271
271
272
272
273
273
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
FCoE Forwarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring FCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel Services . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCF VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Full Fabric Zoning. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zonesets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining and Activating Zoning. . . . . . . .
Changing the Active Zoneset . . . . . . . . .
FCF Scalability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Priority-Based Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Global Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFC Configuration Example . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Transmission Selection . . . . . . . . .
802.1p Priority Values . . . . . . . . . . . .
Priority Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PGID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Priority Values to a Priority Group
Deleting a Priority Group. . . . . . . . .
Allocating Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange . . . . .
DCBX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring DCBX . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
275
275
275
276
276
277
277
278
279
280
281
282
282
284
284
285
285
286
286
286
287
290
290
292
Chapter 19. Edge Virtual Bridging . .
EVB Operations Overview . . . . . . .
VSIDB Synchronization . . . . . .
VLAN Behavior. . . . . . . . . .
Manual Reflective Relay . . . . . .
VSIDB - IPv6 Support . . . . . . .
EVB Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsupported features . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 295
296
296
297
297
298
299
301
301
Chapter 20. Static Multicast ARP . .
Configuring Static Multicast ARP . . . .
Configuration Example . . . . . .
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 303
. 304
. 304
. 305
Chapter 21. Unified Fabric Port . . . . .
UFP Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Ports Modes . . . . . . . . . . . .
vPort-S-Tag Mapping . . . . . . .
vPort-VLAN Mapping . . . . . . .
UFP vPort Mode . . . . . . . . .
UFP Bandwidth Provisioning . . . . . . .
UFP Strict Bandwidth Provisioning Mode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 307
. 308
. 309
. 309
. 309
. 309
. 312
. 312
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
Contents
9
Using UFP with Other RackSwitch G8272 Features
Layer 2 Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Increased VLAN Limits . . . . . . . . . .
VMReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.1Qbg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFP Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: Access Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Trunk Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: Auto-VLAN Mode . . . . . . .
Example 4: Tunnel Mode . . . . . . . . .
Example 5: FCoE Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Example 6: Layer 2 Failover Configuration . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
313
313
313
313
313
314
314
315
317
318
319
320
Part 5:. IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10
Chapter 22. Basic IP Routing . . . . . . . .
IP Routing Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Between IP Subnets . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Subnet Routing . . . . . . . . . .
Using VLANs to Segregate Broadcast Domains
Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . .
ARP - Local Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Address Translation . . . . . . . . .
Static NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unidirectional NAT Translation . . . . .
Network Address Port Translation . . .
Dynamic NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAT Proxy ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global NAT Settings . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling and Limitations . . . . . . . . . .
ECMP Static Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECMP Route Hashing . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring ECMP Static Routes . . . . . .
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
325
326
326
327
328
328
331
332
333
334
334
334
335
335
336
337
337
338
339
Chapter 23. Policy-Based Routing .
PBR Policies and ACLs . . . . . .
Applying PBR ACLs . . . . . . .
Configuring Route Maps . . . . .
Match Clauses . . . . . . . .
Set Clauses. . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Health Check . . .
Example PBR Configuration . . . .
Configuring PBR with other Features
Unsupported Features . . . . . .
Dynamic PBR . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Limitations. . . .
Example Configuration . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
341
341
341
342
342
342
343
345
346
346
347
347
347
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 24. Routed Ports. . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Routed Port . . . . . . .
Configuring OSPF on Routed Ports .
OSPF Configuration Example . .
Configuring RIP on Routed Ports . .
RIP Configuration Example . . .
Configuring PIM on Routed Ports . .
PIM Configuration Example . .
Configuring BGP on Routed Ports . .
Configuring IGMP on Routed Ports .
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
Chapter 25. Internet Protocol Version 6 .
IPv6 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Address Format . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Address Types . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration . . . . .
IPv6 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neighbor Discovery. . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Applications . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Configuration Examples . . . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 349
. 349
. 351
. 351
. 352
. 352
. 352
. 353
. 353
. 354
. 354
. 355
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 357
. 358
. 359
. 360
. 362
. 363
. 364
. 366
. 367
. 368
Chapter 26. IPsec with IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . .
IPsec Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using IPsec with the RackSwitch G8272 . . . . . . .
Setting up Authentication . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an IKEv2 Proposal . . . . . . . . .
Importing an IKEv2 Digital Certificate . . . .
Generating an IKEv2 Digital Certificate. . . .
Enabling IKEv2 Preshared Key Authentication
Setting Up a Key Policy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Manual Key Policy . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Dynamic Key Policy . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 371
. 372
. 373
. 373
. 374
. 374
. 375
. 375
. 375
. 377
. 379
Chapter 27. Routing Information Protocol .
Distance Vector Protocol . . . . . . . . . .
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIPv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIPv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIPv2 in RIPv1 Compatibility Mode. . . . .
RIP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIP Configuration Example . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 381
. 382
. 382
. 382
. 383
. 383
. 383
. 384
. 385
Chapter 28. Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How IGMP Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Capacity and Default Values . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 387
. 388
. 389
. 390
Contents
11
IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMPv3 Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Snooping Configuration Guidelines . . . . .
IGMP Snooping Configuration Example . . . . . .
Advanced Configuration Example: IGMP Snooping .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure IGMP Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Configuration Example: IGMP Relay . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional IGMP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FastLeave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Multicast Router. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 29. Multicast Listener Discovery .
MLD Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How MLD Works . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLD Querier. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Mrouters . . . . . . . . . .
MLD Capacity and Default Values . . . . .
Configuring MLD . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 30. Border Gateway Protocol .
Internal Routing Versus External Routing .
Route Reflector . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . .
Forming BGP Peer Routers . . . . . . .
Static Peers. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Peers . . . . . . . . . . .
Loopback Interfaces . . . . . . . . . .
What is a Route Map? . . . . . . . . . .
Next Hop Peer IP Address . . . .
Incoming and Outgoing Route Maps .
Precedence. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Overview . . . . . . .
Aggregating Routes. . . . . . . . . . .
Redistributing Routes . . . . . . . . . .
BGP Communities . . . . . . . . . . .
BGP Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Route Paths in BGP. . . . . . .
Equal Cost Multi-Path . . . . . . . .
Multipath Relax . . . . . . . . . .
12
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
391
391
392
392
394
395
396
397
397
401
404
404
405
406
406
407
410
413
413
413
414
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
423
424
425
427
428
428
428
430
430
431
431
432
432
434
434
435
436
438
438
438
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
BGP Failover Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Default Redistribution and Route Aggregation Example . . . . . . . . . . 441
Chapter 31. OSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of OSPF Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of OSPF Routing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neighbors and Adjacencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Link-State Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Shortest Path First Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Versus External Routing . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv2 Implementation in Lenovo N/OS . . . . . . . . .
Configurable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning the Area Index . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Area ID to Assign the OSPF Area Number .
Attaching an Area to a Network . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electing the Designated Router and Backup . . . . . .
Summarizing Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Plain Text OSPF Passwords . . . . . .
Configuring MD5 Authentication . . . . . . . . .
Host Routes for Load Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loopback Interfaces in OSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPF Features Not Supported in This Release. . . . . .
OSPFv2 Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: Simple OSPF Domain . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Virtual Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: Summarizing Routes . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying OSPF Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Implementation in Lenovo N/OS . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Differences from OSPFv2 . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Requires IPv6 Interfaces . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Uses Independent Command Paths . . . .
OSPFv3 Identifies Neighbors by Router ID . . . . .
Other Internal Improvements . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Configuration Example. . . . . . . . . . . .
Neighbor Configuration Example . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 443
. 444
. 444
. 445
. 446
. 446
. 448
. 448
. 449
. 449
. 450
. 450
. 451
. 451
. 452
. 452
. 452
. 453
. 454
. 454
. 455
. 456
. 456
. 457
. 458
. 458
. 459
. 460
. 462
. 466
. 467
. 468
. 468
. 468
. 468
. 469
. 469
. 469
. 469
. 472
Chapter 32. Service Location Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Active DA Discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
SLP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Chapter 33. Protocol Independent Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
PIM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Contents
13
Supported PIM Modes and Features . . . . . . .
Basic PIM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Globally Enabling or Disabling the PIM Feature.
Defining a PIM Network Component . . . . .
Defining an IP Interface for PIM Use . . . . .
PIM Neighbor Filters . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Sparse Mode Settings . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Rendezvous Point . . . . . . .
Influencing the Designated Router Selection . .
Specifying a Bootstrap Router . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Loopback Interface . . . . . . .
Using PIM with Other Features. . . . . . . . . .
PIM Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . .
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
477
478
478
478
478
479
481
481
481
482
482
484
485
Part 6:. High Availability Fundamentals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Chapter 34. Basic Redundancy .
Trunking for Link Redundancy. .
Virtual Link Aggregation . . . .
Hot Links . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Delay . . . . . . .
Preemption . . . . . . . .
FDB Update . . . . . . . .
Configuration Guidelines . .
Configuring Hot Links . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
491
492
492
493
493
493
493
493
494
Chapter 35. Layer 2 Failover .
Monitoring Trunk Links . . . .
Setting the Failover Limit . . .
Manually Monitoring Port Links
L2 Failover with Other Features
Static Trunks . . . . . . .
LACP . . . . . . . . . .
Spanning Tree Protocol . .
Configuration Guidelines . . .
Configuring Layer 2 Failover. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
495
495
496
497
498
498
498
498
499
499
Chapter 36. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
VRRP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRRP Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRRP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Master VRRP Router . . . . . .
Failover Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active-Active Redundancy . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Router Group . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lenovo N/OS Extensions to VRRP . . . . . . . .
Virtual Router Deployment Considerations . . . .
High Availability Configurations . . . . . . . . .
VRRP High-Availability Using Multiple VIRs .
VRRP High-Availability Using VLAGs . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
501
502
502
503
504
505
505
505
506
507
509
509
513
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Part 7:. Network
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Chapter 37. Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLDP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling or Disabling LLDP . . . . . . . .
Global LLDP Setting . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit and Receive Control . . . . .
LLDP Transmit Features . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Interval . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Interval. . . . . . . . . . .
Time-to-Live for Transmitted Information
Trap Notifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the LLDP Transmit State . . .
Types of Information Transmitted . . . .
LLDP Receive Features . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Information Received . . . . .
Viewing Remote Device Information . .
Time-to-Live for Received Information . .
LLDP Example Configuration . . . . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 517
518
519
519
519
520
520
520
520
521
521
522
524
524
524
526
528
Chapter 38. Simple Network Management Protocol .
SNMP Version 1 & Version 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring SNMP Trap Hosts . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Images and Configuration Files . . . . . . .
Loading a New Switch Image . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Saved Switch Configuration. . . . . .
Saving the Switch Configuration . . . . . . . .
Saving a Switch Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 529
530
531
533
536
543
544
544
545
545
Chapter 39. NETCONF . . . . .
NETCONF Overview . . . . . .
XML Requirements . . . . . . .
Installing the NETCONF Client . .
Using Juniper Perl Client . . . .
Establishing a NETCONF Session .
NETCONF Operations . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 547
. 548
. 549
. 550
. 552
. 553
. 555
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents
15
Protocol Operations Examples .
<get-config> . . . . . . .
<edit-config> . . . . . . .
<copy-config> . . . . . .
<delete-config> . . . . . .
<lock> . . . . . . . . . .
<unlock>. . . . . . . . .
<get> . . . . . . . . . .
<close-session> . . . . . .
<kill-session> . . . . . . .
<get-configuration> . . . .
<get-interface-information>
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
556
556
557
559
560
560
561
562
563
563
564
565
Part 8:. Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Chapter 40. Remote Monitoring .
RMON Overview. . . . . . . .
RMON Group 1—Statistics . . .
RMON Group 2—History . . . .
History MIB Object ID . . . .
Configuring RMON History .
RMON Group 3—Alarms . . . .
Alarm MIB objects . . . . .
Configuring RMON Alarms .
RMON Group 9—Events . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 41. sFlow . . . .
sFlow Statistical Counters . .
sFlow Network Sampling . .
sFlow Example Configuration
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
571
571
572
573
573
573
574
574
574
576
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
577
577
577
578
Chapter 42. Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Part 9:. Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Appendix A. Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Appendix B. Getting help and technical assistance. . . . . . . . . . 585
Appendix C. Notices . . . . . . . .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recycling Information. . . . . . . . . .
Particulate Contamination . . . . . . . .
Telecommunication Regulatory Statement .
16
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
587
589
590
591
592
593
Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . .
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . .
Avis de Conformité à la Réglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . .
Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . .
European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement . . . . . .
Germany Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japan VCCI Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement . . . . . . .
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A statement . . . . . .
People’s Republic of China Class A electronic emission statement . . . .
Taiwan Class A compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
594
594
594
594
594
594
595
596
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
597
597
598
599
600
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Contents
17
18
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Preface
The Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 Application Guide for Lenovo N/OS 8.2 describes how to
configure and use the Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 software on the RackSwitch
G8272 (referred to as G8272 throughout this document). For documentation on
installing the switch physically, see the Installation Guide for your G8272.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
19
Who Should Use This Guide
This guide is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in
configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with
Ethernet concepts, IP addressing, Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration
parameters.
20
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
What You’ll Find in This Guide
This guide will help you plan, implement, and administer Lenovo N/OS software.
Where possible, each section provides feature overviews, usage examples, and
configuration instructions. The following material is included:
Part 1: Getting Started
This material is intended to help those new to N/OS products with the basics of
switch management. This part includes the following chapters:

Chapter 1, “Switch Administration,” describes how to access the G8272 to
configure the switch and view switch information and statistics. This chapter
discusses a variety of manual administration interfaces, including local
management via the switch console, and remote administration via Telnet, a
web browser, or via SNMP.

Chapter 2, “Initial Setup,” describes how to use the built-in Setup utility to
perform first-time configuration of the switch.

Chapter 32, “Service Location Protocol,” describes the Service Location Protocol
(SLP) that allows the switch to provide dynamic directory services.

Chapter 3, “Switch Software Management,” describes how to update the N/OS
software operating on the switch.
Part 2: Securing the Switch

Chapter 4, “Securing Administration,” describes methods for using Secure Shell
for administration connections, and configuring end-user access control.

Chapter 5, “Authentication & Authorization Protocols,” describes different
secure administration for remote administrators. This includes using Remote
Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS), as well as TACACS+ and LDAP.

Chapter 6, “802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control,” describes how to
authenticate devices attached to a LAN port that has point-to-point connection
characteristics. This feature prevents access to ports that fail authentication and
authorization and provides security to ports of the G8272 that connect to blade
servers.

Chapter 7, “Access Control Lists,” describes how to use filters to permit or deny
specific types of traffic, based on a variety of source, destination, and packet
attributes.
Part 3: Switch Basics
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 8, “VLANs,” describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks
(VLANs) for creating separate network segments, including how to use VLAN
tagging for devices that use multiple VLANs. This chapter also describes
Protocol-based VLANs, and Private VLANs.

Chapter 9, “Ports and Trunking,” describes how to group multiple physical
ports together to aggregate the bandwidth between large-scale network devices.
Preface
21

Chapter 10, “Spanning Tree Protocols,” discusses how Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP) configures the network so that the switch selects the most efficient path
when multiple paths exist. Covers Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP),
Per-VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST), and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP).

Chapter 11, “Virtual Link Aggregation Groups,” describes using Virtual Link
Aggregation Groups (VLAG) to form trunks spanning multiple VLAG-capable
aggregator switches.

Chapter 12, “Quality of Service,” discusses Quality of Service (QoS) features,
including IP filtering using Access Control Lists (ACLs), Differentiated Services,
and IEEE 802.1p priority values.

Chapter 13, “Precision Time Protocol,” describes the configuration of PTP for
clock synchronization.
Part 4: Advanced Switching Features

Chapter 14, “OpenFlow,” describes how to create an OpenFlow Switch instance
on the RackSwitch G8272.

Chapter 15, “Deployment Profiles,” describes how the G8272 can operate in
different modes for different deployment scenarios, adjusting switch capacity
levels to optimize performance for different types of networks.

Chapter 16, “Virtualization,” provides an overview of allocating resources
based on the logical needs of the data center, rather than on the strict, physical
nature of components.

Chapter 14, “Virtual NICs,” discusses using virtual NIC (vNIC) technology to
divide NICs into multiple logical, independent instances.

Chapter 17, “VMready,” discusses virtual machine (VM) support on the G8272.

Chapter 18, “FCoE and CEE,” discusses using various Converged Enhanced
Ethernet (CEE) features such as Priority-based Flow Control (PFC), Enhanced
Transmission Selection (ETS), and FIP Snooping for solutions such as Fibre
Channel over Ethernet (FCoE).

Chapter 19, “Edge Virtual Bridging (EVB) discusses the IEEE 802.1Qbg—a
standards-based protocol that defines how virtual Ethernet bridges exchange
configuration information. EVB bridges the gap between physical and virtual
network resources, thus simplifying network management.

Chapter 20, “Static Multicast ARP discusses the configuration of a static ARP
entry with multicast MAC address for Microsoft’s Network Load Balancing
(NLB) feature to function efficiently.

Chapter 21, “Unified Fabric Port describes how UFP logically subdivides a
high-speed physical link connecting to a server NIC. UFP provides a switch
fabric component to control the NIC.

Chapter 22, “Basic IP Routing,” describes how to configure the G8272 for IP
routing using IP subnets, BOOTP, and DHCP Relay.

Chapter 23, “Policy-Based Routing describes how to configure the G8272 to
forward traffic based on defined policies rather than entries in the routing table.
Part 5: IP Routing
22
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Chapter 24, “Routed Ports describes how to configure a switch port to forward
Layer 3 traffic.

Chapter 25, “Internet Protocol Version 6,” describes how to configure the G8272
for IPv6 host management.

Chapter 26, “IPsec with IPv6,” describes how to configure Internet Protocol
Security (IPsec) for securing IP communications by authenticating and
encrypting IP packets, with emphasis on Internet Key Exchange version 2, and
authentication/confidentiality for OSPFv3.

Chapter 27, “Routing Information Protocol,” describes how the N/OS software
implements standard Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for exchanging
TCP/IP route information with other routers.

Chapter 28, “Internet Group Management Protocol,” describes how the N/OS
software implements IGMP Snooping or IGMP Relay to conserve bandwidth in
a multicast-switching environment.

Chapter 29, “Multicast Listener Discovery,” describes how Multicast Listener
Discovery (MLD) is used with IPv6 to support host users requests for multicast
data for a multicast group.

Chapter 30, “Border Gateway Protocol,” describes Border Gateway Protocol
(BGP) concepts and features supported in N/OS.

Chapter 31, “OSPF,” describes key Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) concepts
and their implemented in N/OS, and provides examples of how to configure
your switch for OSPF support.

Chapter 33, “Protocol Independent Multicast,” describes how multicast routing
can be efficiently accomplished using the Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
feature.
Part 6: High Availability Fundamentals

Chapter 34, “Basic Redundancy,” describes how the G8272 supports
redundancy through trunking, and hotlinks.

Chapter 35, “Layer 2 Failover,” describes how the G8272 supports
high-availability network topologies using Layer 2 Failover.

Chapter 36, “Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol,” describes how the G8272
supports high-availability network topologies using Virtual Router Redundancy
Protocol (VRRP).
Part 7: Network Management
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 37, “Link Layer Discovery Protocol,” describes how Link Layer
Discovery Protocol helps neighboring network devices learn about each others’
ports and capabilities.

Chapter 38, “Simple Network Management Protocol,” describes how to
configure the switch for management through an SNMP client.

Chapter 39, “NETCONF,” describes how to manage the G8272 using the
Network Configuration Protocol (NETCONF), a mechanism based on the
Extensible Markup Language (XML).
Preface
23
Part 8: Monitoring

Chapter 40, “Remote Monitoring,” describes how to configure the RMON agent
on the switch, so that the switch can exchange network monitoring data.

Chapter 41, “sFlow, described how to use the embedded sFlow agent for
sampling network traffic and providing continuous monitoring information to a
central sFlow analyzer.

Chapter 42, “Port Mirroring,” discusses tools how copy selected port traffic to a
monitor port for network analysis.

Appendix A, “Glossary,” describes common terms and concepts used
throughout this guide.

Appendix B, “Getting help and technical assistance,” provides details on where
to go for additional information about Lenovo and Lenovo products.

Appendix C, “Notices,” contains copyright and trademark notices.
Part 9: Appendices
24
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Additional References
Additional information about installing and configuring the G8272 is available in
the following guides:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 Installation Guide

Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 Industry-Standard CLI Reference Guide for Lenovo
N/OS 8.2
Preface
25
Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.
Table 1. Typographic Conventions
Typeface or
Symbol
Meaning
Example
ABC123
This type is used for names of
commands, files, and directories
used within the text.
View the readme.txt file.
It also depicts on-screen computer Main#
output and prompts.
26
ABC123
This bold type appears in
command examples. It shows text
that must be typed in exactly as
shown.
Main# sys
<ABC123>
This italicized type appears in
command examples as a
parameter placeholder. Replace
the indicated text with the
appropriate real name or value
when using the command. Do not
type the brackets.
To establish a Telnet session,
enter:
host# telnet <IP address>
This also shows book titles,
special terms, or words to be
emphasized.
Read your User’s Guide
thoroughly.
[ ]
Command items shown inside
brackets are optional and can be
used or excluded as the situation
demands. Do not type the
brackets.
host# ls [­a]
|
The vertical bar ( | ) is used in
command examples to separate
choices where multiple options
exist. Select only one of the listed
options. Do not type the vertical
bar.
host# set left|right
AaBbCc123
Click the Save button.
This block type depicts menus,
buttons, and other controls that
appear in Web browsers and other
graphical interfaces.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 1: Getting Started
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
27
28
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 1. Switch Administration
Your RackSwitch G8272 (G8272) is ready to perform basic switching functions
right out of the box. Some of the more advanced features, however, require some
administrative configuration before they can be used effectively.
The extensive Lenovo Networking OS switching software included in the G8272
provides a variety of options for accessing the switch to perform configuration,
and to view switch information and statistics.
This chapter discusses the various methods that can be used to administer the
switch.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
29
Administration Interfaces
Lenovo N/OS provides a variety of user-interfaces for administration. These
interfaces vary in character and in the methods used to access them: some are
text-based, and some are graphical; some are available by default, and some
require configuration; some can be accessed by local connection to the switch, and
others are accessed remotely using various client applications. For example,
administration can be performed using any of the following:

A built-in, text-based command-line interface and menu system for access via
serial-port connection or an optional Telnet or SSH session

The built-in Browser-Based Interface (BBI) available using a standard
web-browser

SNMP support for access through network management software such as IBM
Director or HP OpenView
The specific interface chosen for an administrative session depends on user
preferences, as well as the switch configuration and the available client tools.
In all cases, administration requires that the switch hardware is properly installed
and turned on. (see the RackSwitch G8272 Installation Guide).
Browser-Based Interface
The Browser-based Interface (BBI) provides access to the common configuration,
management and operation features of the G8272 through your Web browser.
For more information, refer to the BBI Quick Guide.
30
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Establishing a Connection
The factory default settings permit initial switch administration through only the
built-in serial port. All other forms of access require additional switch
configuration before they can be used.
Remote access using the network requires the accessing terminal to have a valid,
routable connection to the switch interface. The client IP address may be
configured manually, or an IPv4 address can be provided automatically through
the switch using a service such as DHCP or BOOTP relay (see “BOOTP/DHCP
Client IP Address Services” on page 39), or an IPv6 address can be obtained using
IPv6 stateless address configuration.
Note: Throughout this manual, IP address is used in places where either an IPv4 or
IPv6 address is allowed. IPv4 addresses are entered in dotted-decimal notation (for
example, 10.10.10.1), while IPv6 addresses are entered in hexadecimal notation (for
example, 2001:db8:85a3::8a2e:370:7334). In places where only one type of address is
allowed, IPv4 address or IPv6 address is specified.
Using the Switch Management Ports
To manage the switch through the management ports, you must configure an IP
interface for each management interface. Configure the following IPv4 parameters:

IP address/mask

Default gateway address
1. Log on to the switch.
2. Enter Global Configuration mode.
RS 8272> enable
RS 8272# configure terminal
3. Configure a management IP address and mask:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 128
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address <management interface IPv4 address>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask <IPv4 subnet mask>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
4. Configure the appropriate default gateway.
IP gateway 4 is required for IF 128.
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 4 address <default gateway IPv4 address>
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 4 enable
Once you configure a management IP address for your switch, you can connect to
a management port and use the Telnet program from an external management
station to access and control the switch. The management port provides out-of-band
management.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
31
Using the Switch Data Ports
You also can configure in-band management through any of the switch data ports.
To allow in-band management, use the following procedure:
1. Log on to the switch.
2. Enter IP interface mode.
RS 8272> enable
RS 8272# configure terminal
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <IP interface number>
Note: Interface 128 is reserved for out-of-band management (see “Using the
Switch Management Ports” on page 31).
3. Configure the management IP interface/mask.

Using IPv4:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address <management interface IPv4 address>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask <IPv4 subnet mask>

Using IPv6:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 address <management interface IPv6 address>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 prefixlen <IPv6 prefix length>
4. Configure the VLAN, and enable the interface.
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
5. Configure the default gateway.

If using IPv4:
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway <gateway number> address <IPv4 address>
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway <gateway number> enable

If using IPv6:
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 <gateway number> address <IPv6 address>
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 <gateway number> enable
Note: Gateway 1, 2, and 3 are used for in-band data networks. Gateway 4 is
reserved for the out-of-band management port (see “Using the Switch
Management Ports” on page 31).
Once you configure the IP address and have a network connection, you can use the
Telnet program from an external management station to access and control the
switch. Once the default gateway is enabled, the management station and your
switch do not need to be on the same IP subnet.
32
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The G8272 supports an industry standard command-line interface (ISCLI) that you
can use to configure and control the switch over the network using the Telnet
program. You can use the ISCLI to perform many basic network management
functions. In addition, you can configure the switch for management using an
SNMP-based network management system or a Web browser.
For more information, see the documents listed in “Additional References” on
page 25.
Using Telnet
A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from a
workstation connected to the network. Telnet access provides the same options for
user and administrator access as those available through the console port.
By default, Telnet access is enabled. Use the following commands to disable or
re-enable Telnet access:
RS 8272(config)# [no] access telnet enable
Once the switch is configured with an IP address and gateway, you can use Telnet
to access switch administration from any workstation connected to the
management network.
To establish a Telnet connection with the switch, run the Telnet program on your
workstation and issue the following Telnet command:
telnet <switch IPv4 or IPv6 address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained “Switch Login Levels”
on page 42.
Two attempts are allowed to log in to the switch. After the second unsuccessful
attempt, the Telnet client is disconnected via TCP session closure.
Using Secure Shell
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a
G8272 via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The Secure
Shell (SSH) protocol enables you to securely log into another device over a network
to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage
switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted
and secure.
The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a
SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that
time. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is
logging in at that time.
The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch when starting
each connection
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
33

Key Exchange: ecdh-sha2-nistp521, ecdh-sha2-nistp384, ecdh-sha2-nistp256,
ecdh-sha2-nistp224, ecdh-sha2-nistp192, rsa2048-sha256, rsa1024-sha1,
diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256, diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,
diffie-hellman-group14-sha1, diffie-hellman-group1-sha1

Encryption: aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, rijndael128-cbc, blowfish-cbc,3des-cbc,
arcfour256, arcfour128, arcfour

MAC: hmac-sha1, hmac-sha1-96, hmac-md5, hmac-md5-96

User Authentication: Local password authentication, public key authentication,
RADIUS, TACACS+
Lenovo Networking OS implements the SSH version 2.0 standard and is confirmed
to work with SSH version 2.0-compliant clients such as the following:

OpenSSH_5.4p1 for Linux

Secure CRT Version 5.0.2 (build 1021)

Putty SSH release 0.60
Using SSH with Password Authentication
By default, the SSH feature is disabled. Once the IP parameters are configured and
the SSH service is enabled, you can access the command line interface using an
SSH connection.
To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your
workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IPv4 or IPv6
address:
# ssh <switch IP address>
You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained “Switch Login Levels”
on page 42.
Using SSH with Public Key Authentication
SSH can also be used for switch authentication based on asymmetric cryptography.
Public encryption keys can be uploaded on the switch and used to authenticate
incoming login attempts based on the clients’ private encryption key pairs. After a
predefined number of failed public key login attempts, the switch reverts to
password-based authentication.
To set up public key authentication:
1. Enable SSH:
RS 8272(config)# ssh enable
2. Import the public key file using SFTP or TFTP for the admin user account::
RS 8272(config)# copy {sftp|tftp} public­key
Port type ["DATA"/"MGT"]: mgt
Address or name of remote host: 9.43.101.151
Source file name: 11.key
Username of the public key: admin
Confirm download operation (y/n) ? y
34
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Notes:

When prompted to input a username, a valid user account name must be
entered. If no username is entered, the key is stored on the switch, and can be
assigned to a user account later.

A user account can have up to 100 public keys set up on the switch.
3. Configure a maximum number of 3 failed public key authentication attempts
before the system reverts to password-based authentication:
RS 8272(config)# ssh maxauthattempts 3
Once the public key is configured on the switch, the client can use SSH to login
from a system where the private key pair is set up:
# ssh <switch IP address>
Using a Web Browser
The switch provides a Browser-Based Interface (BBI) for accessing the common
configuration, management and operation features of the G8272 through your Web
browser.
By default, BBI access via HTTP is enabled on the switch.
You can also access the BBI directly from an open Web browser window. Enter the
URL using the IP address of the switch interface (for example, http://<IPv4 or
IPv6 address>).
Configuring HTTP Access to the BBI
By default, BBI access via HTTP is enabled on the switch.
To disable or re-enable HTTP access to the switch BBI, use the following
commands:
RS 8272(config)# access http enable
(Enable HTTP access)
-orRS 8272(config)# no access http enable
(Disable HTTP access)
The default HTTP web server port to access the BBI is port 80. However, you can
change the default Web server port with the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access http port <TCP port number>
To access the BBI from a workstation, open a Web browser window and type in the
URL using the IP address of the switch interface (for example, http://<IPv4 or
IPv6 address>).
Configuring HTTPS Access to the BBI
The BBI can also be accessed via a secure HTTPS connection over management and
data ports.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
35
1. Enable HTTPS.
By default, BBI access via HTTPS is disabled on the switch. To enable BBI Access
via HTTPS, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access https enable
2. Set the HTTPS server port number (optional).
To change the HTTPS Web server port number from the default port 443, use the
following command:
RS 8272(config)# access https port <x>
3. Generate the HTTPS certificate.
Accessing the BBI via HTTPS requires that you generate a certificate to be used
during the key exchange. A default certificate is created the first time HTTPS is
enabled, but you can create a new certificate defining the information you want to
be used in the various fields.
RS 8272(config)# access https generate­certificate
Country Name (2 letter code) []: <country code>
State or Province Name (full name) []: <state>
Locality Name (eg, city) []: <city>
Organization Name (eg, company) []: <company>
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []: <org. unit>
Common Name (eg, YOUR name) []: <name>
Email (eg, email address) []: <email address>
Confirm generating certificate? [y/n]: y
Generating certificate. Please wait (approx 30 seconds)
restarting SSL agent
4. Save the HTTPS certificate.
The certificate is valid only until the switch is rebooted. To save the certificate so it
is retained beyond reboot or power cycles, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access https save­certificate
When a client (such as a web browser) connects to the switch, the client is asked to
accept the certificate and verify that the fields match what is expected. Once BBI
access is granted to the client, the BBI can be used as described in the Lenovo
Networking OS 8.2 BBI Quick Guide.
36
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Browser-Based Interface Summary
The BBI is organized at a high level as follows:
Context buttons—These buttons allow you to select the type of action you wish to
perform. The Configuration button provides access to the configuration elements
for the entire switch. The Statistics button provides access to the switch statistics
and state information. The Dashboard button allows you to display the settings and
operating status of a variety of switch features.
Navigation Window—This window provides a menu list of switch features and
functions:

System—this folder provides access to the configuration elements for the entire
switch.

Switch Ports—Configure each of the physical ports on the switch.

Port-Based Port Mirroring—Configure port mirroring behavior.

Layer 2—Configure Layer 2 features for the switch.

RMON Menu—Configure Remote Monitoring features for the switch.

Layer 3—Configure Layer 3 features for the switch.

QoS—Configure Quality of Service features for the switch.

Access Control—Configure Access Control Lists to filter IP packets.
CEE – Configure Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE).
 FCoE – Configure FibreChannel over Ethernet (FCoE).
 Virtualization – Configure vNICs and VMready for virtual machine (VM) support.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
37
Using Simple Network Management Protocol
N/OS provides Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 1, version
2, and version 3 support for access through any network management software,
such as IBM Director or HP-OpenView.
Note: SNMP read and write functions are enabled by default. For best security
practices, if SNMP is not needed for your network, it is recommended that you
disable these functions prior to connecting the switch to the network.
To access the SNMP agent on the G8272, the read and write community strings on
the SNMP manager must be configured to match those on the switch. The default
read community string on the switch is public and the default write community
string is private.
The read and write community strings on the switch can be configured using the
following commands:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server read­community <1-32 characters>
-andRS 8272(config)# snmp­server write­community <1-32 characters>
The SNMP manager must be able to reach any one of the IP interfaces on the
switch.
For the SNMP manager to receive the SNMPv1 traps sent out by the SNMP agent
on the switch, configure the trap host on the switch with the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server trap­source <trap source IP interface>
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server host <IPv4 address> <trap host community string>
To restrict SNMP access to specific IPv4 subnets, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# access management­network <IPv4 address> <subnet mask> snmp­ro
-andRS 8272(config)# access management­network <IPv4 address> <subnet mask> snmp­rw
For IPv6 networks, use:
RS 8272(config)# access management­network6 <IPv6 address> <IPv6 prefix length>
snmp­ro
-andRS 8272(config)# access management­network6 <IPv6 address> <IPv6 prefix length>
snmp­rw
Note: Subnets allowed for SNMP read-only access must not overlap with subnets
allowed for SNMP read-write access.
For more information on SNMP usage and configuration, see “Simple Network
Management Protocol” on page 529.
38
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
BOOTP/DHCP Client IP Address Services
For remote switch administration, the client terminal device must have a valid IP
address on the same network as a switch interface. The IP address on the client
device may be configured manually, or obtained automatically using IPv6 stateless
address configuration, or an IPv4 address may obtained automatically via BOOTP
or DHCP relay as discussed in the next section.
The G8272 can function as a relay agent for Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) or DHCP.
This allows clients to be assigned an IPv4 address for a finite lease period,
reassigning freed addresses later to other clients.
Acting as a relay agent, the switch can forward a client’s IPv4 address request to up
to five BOOTP/DHCP servers. In addition to the five global BOOTP/DHCP servers,
up to five domain-specific BOOTP/DHCP servers can be configured for each of up
to 10 VLANs.
When a switch receives a BOOTP/DHCP request from a client seeking an IPv4
address, the switch acts as a proxy for the client. The request is forwarded as a UDP
Unicast MAC layer message to the BOOTP/DHCP servers configured for the
client’s VLAN, or to the global BOOTP/DHCP servers if no domain-specific
BOOTP/DHCP servers are configured for the client’s VLAN. The servers respond
to the switch with a Unicast reply that contains the IPv4 default gateway and the
IPv4 address for the client. The switch then forwards this reply back to the client.
DHCP is described in RFC 2131, and the DHCP relay agent supported on the
G8272 is described in RFC 1542. DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol. The
client sends messages to the server on port 67 and the server sends messages to the
client on port 68.
BOOTP and DHCP relay are collectively configured using the BOOTP commands
and menus on the G8272.
DHCP Host Name Configuration
The G8272 supports DHCP host name configuration as described in RFC 2132,
option 12. DHCP host name configuration is enabled by default.
Host name can be manually configured using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# hostname <name>
If the host name is manually configured, the switch does not replace it with the
host name received from the DHCP server.
After the host name is configured on the switch, if DHCP or DHCP host name
configuration is disabled, the switch retains the host name.
The switch prompt displays the host name.
Host name configuration can be enabled/disabled using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] system dhcp hostname
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
39
DHCP SYSLOG Server
During switch startup, if the switch fails to get the configuration file, a message can
be recorded in the SYSLOG server.
The G8272 supports requesting of a SYSLOG server IP address from the DHCP
server as described in RFC 2132, option 7. DHCP SYSLOG server request option is
enabled by default.
Manually configured SYSLOG server takes priority over DHCP SYSLOG server.
Up to two SYSLOG server addresses received from the DHCP server can be used.
The SYSLOG server can be learnt over a management port or a data port.
Use the RS 8272# show logging command to view the SYSLOG server
address.
DHCP SYSLOG server address option can be enabled/disabled using the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] system dhcp syslog
Global BOOTP Relay Agent Configuration
To enable the G8272 to be a BOOTP (or DHCP) forwarder, enable the BOOTP relay
feature, configure up to four global BOOTP server IPv4 addresses on the switch,
and enable BOOTP relay on the interface(s) on which the client requests are
expected.
Generally, it is best to configure BOOTP for the switch IP interface that is closest to
the client, so that the BOOTP server knows from which IPv4 subnet the newly
allocated IPv4 address will come.
In the G8272 implementation, there are no primary or secondary BOOTP servers.
The client request is forwarded to all the global BOOTP servers configured on the
switch (if no domain-specific servers are configured). The use of multiple servers
provides failover redundancy. However, no health checking is supported.
1. Use the following commands to configure global BOOTP relay servers:
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay enable
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server <1-5> address <IPv4 address>
2. Enable BOOTP relay on the appropriate IP interfaces.
BOOTP/DHCP Relay functionality may be assigned on a per-interface basis
using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# relay
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
40
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Domain-Specific BOOTP Relay Agent Configuration
Use the following commands to configure up to five domain-specific BOOTP relay
agents for each of up to 10 VLANs:
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1-10> vlan <VLAN number>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1-10> server <1-5> address <IPv4 address>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1-10> enable
As with global relay agent servers, domain-specific BOOTP/DHCP functionality
may be assigned on a per-interface basis (see Step 2 in page 40).
DHCP Option 82
DHCP Option 82 provides a mechanism for generating IP addresses based on the
client device’s location in the network. When you enable the DHCP relay agent
option on the switch, it inserts the relay agent information option 82 in the packet,
and sends a unicast BOOTP request packet to the DHCP server. The DHCP server
uses the option 82 field to assign an IP address, and sends the packet, with the
original option 82 field included, back to the relay agent. DHCP relay agent strips
off the option 82 field in the packet and sends the packet to the DHCP client.
Configuration of this feature is optional. The feature helps resolve several issues
where untrusted hosts access the network. See RFC 3046 for details.
Use the following commands to configure DHCP Option 82:
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay information enable (Enable Option 82)
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay enable (Enable DHCP relay)
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server <1-5> address <IP address>
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
41
Switch Login Levels
To enable better switch management and user accountability, three levels or classes
of user access have been implemented on the G8272. Levels of access to CLI, Web
management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch
management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows:

User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed
on the G8272. Users may display information that has no security or privacy
implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information.

Operators can only effect temporary changes on the G8272. These changes will
be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch
management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an
operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely
impact switch operation.

Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the
switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the
switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and
troubleshoot problems on the G8272. Because administrators can also make
temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the
interactions between temporary and permanent changes.
Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique user names and
passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via console, remote Telnet, or
SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for
each access level are listed in the following table.
Note: It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial
configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.
Table 2. User Access Levels - Default Settings
42
User
Account
Password Description and Tasks Performed
Status
user
user
The User has no direct responsibility for
switch management. He or she can view all
switch status information and statistics, but
cannot make any configuration changes to
the switch.
Disabled
oper
oper
The Operator manages all functions of the
switch. The Operator can reset ports, except
the management ports.
Disabled
admin
admin
The superuser Administrator has complete
access to all menus, information, and
configuration commands on the G8272,
including the ability to change both the user
and administrator passwords.
Enabled
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Note: Access to each user level (except admin account) can be disabled by setting
the password to an empty value. To disable admin account, use the command: RS 8272(config)# no access user administrator­enable. Admin
account can be disabled only if there is at least one user account enabled and
configured with administrator privilege.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
43
Setup vs. the Command Line
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the
switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will
ask whether you wish to run Setup (see “Initial Setup” on page 51”), a utility
designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. If the switch has
already been configured, the command line is displayed instead.
Idle Disconnect
By default, the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after 10 minutes of
inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be
set from 0 to 60 minutes, where 0 means the session will never timeout.
Use the following command to set the idle timeout value:
RS 8272(config)# system idle <0-60>
44
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Boot Strict Mode
The implementations specified in this section are compliant with National Institute
of Standards and Technology (NIST) Special Publication (SP) 800-131A.
The RackSwitch G8272 can operate in two boot modes:

Compatibility mode (default): This is the default switch boot mode. This mode
may use algorithms and key lengths that may not be allowed/acceptable by
NIST SP 800-131A specification. This mode is useful in maintaining
compatibility with previous releases and in environments that have lesser data
security requirements.

Strict mode: Encryption algorithms, protocols, and key lengths in strict mode
are compliant with NIST SP 800-131A specification.
When in boot strict mode, the switch uses Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)/Transport
Layer Security (TLS) 1.2 protocols to ensure confidentiality of the data to and from
the switch.
Before enabling strict mode, ensure the following:

The software version on all connected switches is Lenovo N/OS 8.2.

The supported protocol versions and cryptographic cipher suites between clients
and servers are compatible. For example: if using SSH to connect to the switch,
ensure that the SSH client supports SSHv2 and a strong cipher suite that is
compliant with the NIST standard.

Compliant Web server certificate is installed on the switch, if using BBI.

A new self-signed certificate is generated for the switch (RS 8272(config)# access https generate­certificate). The new
certificate is generated using 2048-bit RSA key and SHA-256 digest.

Protocols that are not NIST SP 800-131A compliant must be disabled or not
used.

Only SSHv2 or higher is used.

The current configuration, if any, is saved in a location external to the switch.
When the switch reboots, both the startup and running configuration are lost.
Only protocols/algorithms compliant with NIST SP 800-131A specification are
used/enabled on the switch. Please see the NIST SP 800-131A publication for
details. The following table lists the acceptable protocols and algorithms:
Table 3. Acceptable Protocols and Algorithms

Protocol/Function Strict Mode Algorithm
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Compatibility Mode Algorithm
BGP
BGP does not comply with NIST SP Acceptable
800-131A specification. When in
strict mode, BGP is disabled. However, it can be enabled, if required.
Certificate
Generation
RSA-2048
SHA-256
RSA 2048
SHA 256
Certificate
Acceptance
RSA 2048 or higher
SHA 224 or higher
RSA
SHA, SHA2
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
45
Table 3. Acceptable Protocols and Algorithms
Protocol/Function Strict Mode Algorithm
Compatibility Mode Algorithm
HTTPS
TLS 1.0, 1.1, 1.2
See “Acceptable Cipher Suites”
on page 47;
TLS 1.2 only
See “Acceptable Cipher Suites” on
page 47;
IKE
Key Exchange
DH Group 24
DH group 1, 2, 5, 14, 24
Encryption
3DES, AES-128-CBC
3DES, AES-128-CBC
Integrity
HMAC-SHA1
HMAC-SHA1, HMAC-MD5
AH
HMAC-SHA1
HMAC-SHA1, HMAC-MD5
ESP
3DES, AES-128-CBC, HMAC-SHA1 3DES, AES-128-CBC,
HMAC-SHA1, HMAC-MD5
LDAP
LDAP does not comply with NIST Acceptable
SP 800-131A specification. When in
strict mode, LDAP is disabled.
However, it can be enabled, if
required.
OSPF
OSPF does not comply with NIST Acceptable
SP 800-131A specification. When in
strict mode, OSPF is disabled. However, it can be enabled, if required.
RADIUS
RADIUS does not comply with
NIST SP 800-131A specification.
When in strict mode, RADIUS is
disabled. However, it can be
enabled, if required.
Acceptable
Random Number
Generator
NIST SP 800-90A AES CTR DRBG
NIST SP 800-90A AES CTR
DRBG
Secure NTP
Secure NTP does not comply with Acceptable
NIST SP 800-131A specification.
When in strict mode, secure NTP is
disabled. However, it can be
enabled, if required.
SLP
SHA-256 or higher
RSA/DSA 2048 or higher
SNMP
SNMPv3 only
AES-128-CFB-128/SHA1
IPSec
Note: Following algorithms are
acceptable if you choose to support
old SNMPv3 factory default users:
AES-128-CFB/SHA1
DES/MD5
AES-128-CFB-128/SHA1
46
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
SNMPv1, SNMPv2, SNMPv3
DES/MD5,
AES-128-CFB-128/SHA1
Table 3. Acceptable Protocols and Algorithms
Protocol/Function Strict Mode Algorithm
Compatibility Mode Algorithm
SSH/SFTP
Host Key
SSH-RSA
SSH-RSA
Key Exchange
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP521
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP384
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP256
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP224
RSA2048-SHA256
DIFFIE-HELLMAN-GROUP-EXCHANGE-SHA2
56
DIFFIE-HELLMAN-GROUP-EXCHANGE-SHA1
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP521
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP384
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP256
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP224
ECDH-SHA2-NISTP192
RSA2048-SHA256
RSA1024-SHA1
DIFFIE-HELLMAN-GROUP-EXCHANGE-SH
A256
DIFFIE-HELLMAN-GROUP-EXCHANGE-SH
A1
DIFFIE-HELLMAN-GROUP14-SHA1
DIFFIE-HELLMAN-GROUP1-SHA1
Encryption
AES128-CTR
AES128-CBC
3DES-CBC
AES128-CTR
AES128-CBC
RIJNDAEL128-CBC
BLOWFISH-CBC
3DES-CBC
MAC
HMAC-SHA1
HMAC-SHA1-96
HMAC-SHA1
HMAC-SHA1-96
HMAC-MD5
HMAC-MD5-96
TACACS+
TACACS+ does not comply with
NIST SP 800-131A specification.
When in strict mode, TACACS+ is
disabled. However, it can be
enabled, if required.
Acceptable
Acceptable Cipher Suites
The following cipher suites are acceptable (listed in the order of preference) when
the RackSwitch G8272 is in compatibility mode:
Table 4. List of Acceptable Cipher Suites in Compatibility Mode
Cipher Name
ID
Authenticat Encryptio MAC
Key n
Exchan ion
ge
0xC027
ECDHE
RSA
0xC013
ECDHE
RSA
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA2
56
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
0xC012
ECDHE
RSA
0xC011
ECDHE
RSA
0x002F
RSA
RSA
0x003C
RSA
RSA
0x0005
RSA
RSA
Cipher
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
AES_128_CB SHA256
C
AES_128_CB SHA1
C
3DES
SHA1
SHA1
AES_128_CB SHA1
C
AES_128_CB SHA256
C
SHA1
SSL_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
SSL_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
47
Table 4. List of Acceptable Cipher Suites in Compatibility Mode (continued)
Cipher Name
ID
Authenticat Encryptio MAC
Key n
Exchan ion
ge
0x000A
RSA
RSA
3DES
SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
0x0033
DHE
RSA
0x0067
DHE
RSA
0x0016
DHE
RSA
AES­128_CB SHA1
C
AES_128_CB SHA256
C
3DES
SHA1
Cipher
SHA1
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
The following cipher suites are acceptable (listed in the order of preference) when
the RackSwitch G8272 is in strict mode:
Table 5. List of Acceptable Cipher Suites in Strict Mode
Cipher ID Key Exchan
ge
0xC027
ECDHE
Authenticati Encryption MAC
on
Cipher Name
RSA
0xC013
ECDHE
RSA
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA2
56
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
0xC012
ECDHE
RSA
0x0033
DHE
RSA
0x0067
DHE
RSA
0x0016
DHE
RSA
0x002F
RSA
RSA
0x003C
RSA
RSA
0x000A
RSA
RSA
AES_128_CB SHA256
C
AES_128_CB SHA1
C
3DES
SHA1
AES­128_CB SHA1
C
AES_128_CB SHA256
C
3DES
SHA1
AES_128_CB SHA1
C
AES_128_CB SHA256
C
3DES
SHA1
SSL_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
SSL_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
Configuring Strict Mode
To change the switch mode to boot strict mode, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] boot strict enable
When strict mode is enabled, you will see the following message:
Warning, security strict mode limits the cryptographic algorithms used by secure protocols on this switch. Please see the documentation for full details, and verify that peer devices support acceptable algorithms before enabling this mode. The mode change will take effect after reloading the switch and the configuration will be wiped during the reload. System will enter security strict mode with default factory configuration at next boot up. Do you want SNMPV3 support old default users in strict mode (y/n)?
For SNMPv3 default users, see “SNMP Version 3” on page 531.
When strict mode is disabled, the following message is displayed:
Warning, disabling security strict mode. The mode change will take effect after reloading the switch.
48
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
You must reboot the switch for the boot strict mode enable/disable to take effect.
SSL/TLS Version Limitation
Each of the following successive encryption protocol versions provide more
security and less compatibility: SSLv3, TLS1.0, TLS1.1, TLS1.2. When negotiating
the encryption protocol during the SSL handshake, the switch will accept, by
default, the latest (and most secure) protocol version supported by the client
equipment. To enforce a minimal level of security acceptable for the connections,
use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# ssl minimum­version {tls10|tls11|tls12}
Limitations
In Lenovo N/OS 8.2, consider the following limitation/restrictions if you need to
operate the switch in boot strict mode:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Power ITEs and High-Availability features do not comply with NIST SP
800-131A specification.

The G8272 will not discover Platform agents/Common agents that are not in
strict mode.

Web browsers that do not use TLS 1.2 cannot be used.

Limited functions of the switch managing Windows will be available.
Chapter 1: Switch Administration
49
50
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 2. Initial Setup
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Lenovo Networking
OS software includes a Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to
enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch.
Setup can be activated manually from the command line interface any time after
login.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
51
Information Needed for Setup
Setup requests the following information:




Basic system information

Date & time

Whether to use Spanning Tree Group or not
Optional configuration for each port

Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate)

Whether to use VLAN trunk mode/tagging or not (as appropriate)
Optional configuration for each VLAN

Name of VLAN

Which ports are included in the VLAN
Optional configuration of IP parameters

IP address/mask and VLAN for each IP interface

IP addresses for default gateway

Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not
Default Setup Options
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system
administrator under the factory default settings.
1. Connect to the switch.
After connecting, the login prompt appears.
Enter Password:
2. Enter admin as the default administrator password.
Note: If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main
Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from
the factory default settings. If desired, return the switch to its factory default
configuration.
3. Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup
facility.
52
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you
abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]
Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.
Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following
command at the configuration prompt:
RS 8272(config)# setup
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 2: Initial Setup
53
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of
System Date and Time, Spanning Tree, Port Speed/Mode,
VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl­C to abort "Set Up"]
1. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n.
If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure
them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For
more information on configuring VLANs, see the Lenovo Networking OS
Application Guide.
Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.
2. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
System Date:
Enter year [2009]:
Enter the four-digits that represent the year. To keep the current year, press
<Enter>.
3. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date:
Enter month [1]:
Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press
<Enter>.
4. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [3]:
Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>.
The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 28, 2009.
5. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time:
Enter hour in 24­hour format [18]:
Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>.
6. Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:
Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press
<Enter>.
54
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
7. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:
Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press
<Enter>. The system then displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 8:55:36 Wed Jan 28, 2009.
8. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt:
Spanning Tree:
Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting: ON
Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF? [y/n]
Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree, or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 2: Initial Setup
55
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration
Note: When configuring port options for your switch, some prompts and options
may be different.
1. Select whether you will configure VLANs and VLAN trunk mode/tagging for
ports:
Port Config:
Will you configure VLANs and VLAN Tagging/Trunk­Mode for ports? [y/n]
If you wish to change settings for VLANs, enter y, or enter n to skip VLAN
configuration.
Note: The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from
the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the firmware
versions and options that are installed.
2. Select the port to configure, or skip port configuration at the prompt:
If you wish to change settings for individual ports, enter the number of the port
you wish to configure. To skip port configuration, press <Enter> without specifying
any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 58.
3. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters.
The system prompts:
Gig Link Configuration:
Port Flow Control:
Current Port EXT1 flow control setting: both
Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]:
Enter rx to enable receive flow control, tx for transmit flow control, both to
enable both, or none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current
setting, press <Enter>.
4. Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode.
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Auto Negotiation:
Current Port EXT1 autonegotiation: on
Enter new value ["on"/"off"]:
Enter on to enable port autonegotiation, off to disable it, or press <Enter> to keep
the current setting.
5. If configuring VLANs, enable or disable VLAN trunk mode/tagging for the port.
If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1, the system prompts:
Port VLAN tagging/trunk mode config (tagged/trunk mode port can be a member of multiple VLANs)
Current VLAN tagging/trunk mode support: disabled
Enter new VLAN tagging/trunk mode support [d/e]:
56
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Enter d to disable VLAN trunk mode/tagging for the port or enter e to enable
VLAN tagging for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
6. The system prompts you to configure the next port:
Enter port (1­64):
When you are through configuring ports, press <Enter> without specifying any
port. Otherwise, repeat the steps in this section.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 2: Initial Setup
57
Setup Part 3: VLANs
If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 2, skip to “Setup Part 4: IP
Configuration” on page 59.
1. Select the VLAN to configure, or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt:
VLAN Config:
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094, NULL at end:
If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs, enter the number of the
VLAN you wish to configure. To skip VLAN configuration, press <Enter> without
typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 59.
2. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt:
Current VLAN name: VLAN 2
Enter new VLAN name:
Entering a new VLAN name is optional. To use the pending new VLAN name,
press <Enter>.
3. Enter the VLAN port numbers:
Define Ports in VLAN:
Current VLAN 2: empty
Enter ports one per line, NULL at end:
Enter each port, by port number or port alias, and confirm placement of the port
into this VLAN. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN, press <Enter>
without specifying any port.
4. Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN:
Spanning Tree Group membership:
Enter new Spanning Tree Group index [1­127]:
5. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN:
VLAN Config:
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094, NULL at end:
Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. When all
VLANs have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.
58
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration
The system prompts for IPv4 parameters.
Although the switch supports both IPv4 and IPv6 networks, the Setup utility
permits only IPv4 configuration. For IPv6 configuration, see “Internet Protocol
Version 6” on page 357|.
IP Interfaces
IP interfaces are used for defining the networks to which the switch belongs.
Up to 126 IP interfaces can be configured on the RackSwitch G8272 (G8272). The IP
address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on
your network. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP network. The interfaces
can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration, and for routing
between subnets and VLANs (if used).
1. Select the IP interface to configure, or skip interface configuration at the prompt:
IP Config:
IP interfaces:
Enter interface number: (1­126) If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces, enter the number of the IP
interface you wish to configure. To skip IP interface configuration, press <Enter>
without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 61.
2. For the specified IP interface, enter the IP address in IPv4 dotted decimal notation:
Current IP address: 0.0.0.0
Enter new IP address:
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
3. At the prompt, enter the IPv4 subnet mask in dotted decimal notation:
Current subnet mask: 0.0.0.0
Enter new subnet mask:
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.If configuring VLANs, specify a VLAN
for the interface.
This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1:
Current VLAN: 1
Enter new VLAN [1­4094]:
Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs, or press <Enter>
without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 2: Initial Setup
59
4. At the prompt, enter y to enable the IP interface, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable IP interface? [y/n]
5. The system prompts you to configure another interface:
Enter interface number: (1­126) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. When
all interfaces have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any interface
number.
Loopback Interfaces
A loopback interface provides an IP address, but is not otherwise associated with a
physical port or network entity. Essentially, it is a virtual interface that is perceived
as being “always available” for higher-layer protocols to use and advertise to the
network, regardless of other connectivity.
Loopback interfaces improve switch access, increase reliability, security, and
provide greater flexibility in Layer 3 network designs. They can be used for many
different purposes, but are most commonly for management IP addresses, router
IDs for various protocols, and persistent peer IDs for neighbor relationships.
In Lenovo N/OS 8.2, loopback interfaces have been expanded for use with routing
protocols such as OSPF and BGP. Loopback interfaces can also be specified as the
source IP address for syslog, SNMP, RADIUS, TACACS+, NTP, and router IDs.
Loopback interfaces must be configured before they can be used in other features.
Up to five loopback interfaces are currently supported. They can be configured
using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface loopback <1-5>
RS 8272(config­ip­loopback)# [no] ip address <IPv4 address> <mask> enable
RS 8272(config­ip­loopback)# exit
Using Loopback Interfaces for Source IP Addresses
The switch can use loopback interfaces to set the source IP addresses for a variety
of protocols. This assists in server security, as the server for each protocol can be
configured to accept protocol packets only from the expected loopback address
block. It may also make is easier to locate or process protocol information, since
packets have the source IP address of the loopback interface, rather than numerous
egress interfaces.
Configured loopback interfaces can be applied to the following protocols:

Syslogs
RS 8272(config)# logging source­interface loopback <1-5>

SNMP traps
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server trap­source loopback <1-5>
60
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

RADIUS
RS 8272(config)# ip radius source­interface loopback <1-5>

TACACS+
RS 8272(config)# ip tacacs source­interface loopback <1-5>

NTP
RS 8272(config)# ntp source loopback <1-5>
Loopback Interface Limitation


ARP is not supported. Loopback interfaces will ignore ARP requests.
Loopback interfaces cannot be assigned to a VLAN.
Default Gateways
To set up a default gateway:
1. At the prompt, select an IP default gateway for configuration, or skip default
gateway configuration:
IP default gateways:
Enter default gateway number: (1­4) Enter the number for the IP default gateway to be configured. To skip default
gateway configuration, press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to
“IP Routing” on page 61.
2. At the prompt, enter the IPv4 address for the selected default gateway:
Current IP address: 0.0.0.0
Enter new IP address:
Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal notation, or press <Enter> without
specifying an address to accept the current setting.
3. At the prompt, enter y to enable the default gateway, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable default gateway? [y/n]
4. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway:
Enter default gateway number: (1­4) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured.
When all default gateways have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying
any number.
IP Routing
When IP interfaces are configured for the various IP subnets attached to your
switch, IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This
eliminates the need to send inter-subnet communication to an external router
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 2: Initial Setup
61
device. Routing on more complex networks, where subnets may not have a direct
presence on the G8272, can be accomplished through configuring static routes or
by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.
This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing
parameters.
At the prompt, enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing:
Enable IP forwarding? [y/n]
Enter y to enable IP forwarding. To disable IP forwarding, enter n. To keep the
current setting, press <Enter>.
62
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Setup Part 5: Final Steps
1. When prompted, decide whether to restart Setup or continue:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]
Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning, or n to continue.
2. When prompted, decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes:
Review the changes made? [y/n]
Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Enter n
to continue without reviewing the changes. We recommend that you review the
changes.
3. Next, decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt:
Apply the changes? [y/n]
Enter y to apply the changes, or n to continue without applying. Changes are
normally applied.
4. At the prompt, decide whether to make the changes permanent:
Save changes to flash? [y/n]
Enter y to save the changes to flash. Enter n to continue without saving the
changes. Changes are normally saved at this point.
5. If you do not apply or save the changes, the system prompts whether to abort them:
Abort all changes? [y/n]
Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to return to the “Apply the changes?”
prompt.
Note: After initial configuration is complete, it is recommended that you change
the default passwords.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 2: Initial Setup
63
Optional Setup for Telnet Support
Note: This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on
connecting to the G8272 through a remote Telnet connection.
Telnet is enabled by default. To change the setting, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# no access telnet 64
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 3. Switch Software Management
The switch software image is the executable code running on the G8272. A version
of the image comes pre-installed on the device. As new versions of the image are
released, you can upgrade the software running on your switch. To get the latest
version of software supported for your G8272, go to the following website:
http://www.lenovo.com/support/
To determine the software version currently used on the switch, use the following
switch command:
RS 8272# show boot
The typical upgrade process for the software image consists of the following steps:

Load a new software image and boot image onto an FTP or TFTP server on your
network.

Transfer the new images to your switch.

Specify the new software image as the one which will be loaded into switch
memory the next time a switch reset occurs.

Reset the switch.
For instructions on the typical upgrade process, see “Loading New Software to
Your Switch” on page 66.
CAUTION:
Although the typical upgrade process is all that is necessary in most cases,
upgrading from (or reverting to) some versions of Lenovo Networking OS
requires special steps prior to or after the software installation process. Please be
sure to follow all applicable instructions in the release notes document for the
specific software release to ensure that your switch continues to operate as
expected after installing new software.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
65
Loading New Software to Your Switch
The G8272 can store up to two different switch software images (called image1
and image2) as well as special boot software (called boot). When you load new
software, you must specify where it is placed: either into image1, image2, or
boot.
For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would
probably load the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new
software and reload the original active image (stored in image1), if needed.
CAUTION:
When you upgrade the switch software image, always load the new boot image
and the new software image before you reset the switch. If you do not load a new
boot image, your switch might not boot properly (To recover, see “Recovering
from a Failed Upgrade” on page 70).
To load a new software image to your switch, you will need the following:

The image and boot software loaded on an FTP or TFTP server on your network.
Note: Be sure to download both the new boot file and the new image file.

The hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server
Note: The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.

The name of the new software image or boot file
When the software requirements are met, use one of the following procedures to
download the new software to your switch. You can use the ISCLI, USB, or the BBI
to download and activate new software.
Loading Software via the ISCLI
1. In Privileged EXEC mode, enter the following command:
Router# copy {tftp|ftp} {image1|image2|boot­image}
2. Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server.
Address or name of remote host: <name
or IP address>
3. Enter the name of the new software file on the server.
Source file name: <filename>
The exact form of the name will vary by server. However, the file location is
normally relative to the FTP or TFTP directory (for example, tftpboot).
4. If required by the FTP or TFTP server, enter the appropriate username and
password.
66
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
5. The switch will prompt you to confirm your request.
Once confirmed, the software will begin loading into the switch.
6. When loading is complete, use the following commands to enter Global
Configuration mode to select which software image (image1 or image2) you want
to run in switch memory for the next reboot:
Router# configure terminal
Router(config)# boot image {image1|image2} The system will then verify which image is set to be loaded at the next reset:
Next boot will use switch software image1 instead of image2.
7. Reboot the switch to run the new software:
Router(config)# reload
The system prompts you to confirm your request. Once confirmed, the switch will
reboot to use the new software.
Loading Software via BBI
You can use the Browser-Based Interface to load software onto the G8272. The
software image to load can reside in one of the following locations:

FTP server

TFTP server

Local computer
After you log onto the BBI, perform the following steps to load a software image:
1. Click the Configure context tab in the toolbar.
2. In the Navigation Window, select System > Config/Image Control.
The Switch Image and Configuration Management page appears.
3. If you are loading software from your computer (HTTP client), skip this step and
go to the next. Otherwise, if you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server,
enter the server’s information in the FTP/TFTP Settings section.
4. In the Image Settings section, select the image version you want to replace (Image
for Transfer).

If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server, enter the file name and click
Get Image.

If you are loading software from your computer, click Browse.
In the File Upload Dialog, select the file and click OK. Then click Download via
Browser.
Once the image has loaded, the page refreshes to show the new software.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 3: Switch Software Management
67
USB Options
You can insert a USB drive into the USB port on the G8272 and use it to work with
switch image and configuration files. You can boot the switch using files located on
the USB drive, or copy files to and from the USB drive.
To safely remove the USB drive, first use the following command to un-mount the
USB file system:
system usb­eject
Command mode: Global configuration
USB Boot
USB Boot allows you to boot the switch with a software image file, boot file, or
configuration file that resides on a USB drive inserted into the USB port. Use the
following command to enable or disable USB Boot:
[no] boot usbboot enable
Command mode: Global configuration
When enabled, when the switch is reset/reloaded, it checks the USB port. If a USB
drive is inserted into the port, the switch checks the root directory on the USB drive
for software and image files. If a valid file is present, the switch loads the file and
boots using the file.
Note: The following file types are supported: FAT32, NTFS (read-only), EXT2, and
EXT3.
The following list describes the valid file names, and describes the switch behavior
when it recognizes them. The file names must be exactly as shown, or the switch
will not recognize them.
68

RS8272_Boot.img
The switch replaces the current boot image with the new image, and boots with
the new image.

RS8272_OS.img
The switch boots with the new software image. The existing images are not
affected.

RS8272_replace1_OS.img
The switch replaces the current software image1 with the new image, and boots
with the new image. RS8272_replace1_OS.img takes precedence over
RS8272_OS.img

RS8272_replace2_OS.img takes precedence over RS8272_OS.img

RSG8272.cfg
The switch boots with the new configuration file. The existing configuration files
(active and backup) are not affected.

RSG8272_replace.cfg
The switch replaces the active configuration file with the new file, and boots
with the new file. This file takes precedence over any other configuration files
that may be present on the USB drive.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
If more than one valid file is present, the switch loads all valid files and boots with
them. For example, you may simultaneously load a new boot file, image file, and
configuration file from the USB drive.
The switch ignores any files that do not match the valid file names or that have the
wrong format.
USB Copy
If a USB drive is inserted into the USB port, you can copy files from the switch to
the USB drive, or from the USB drive to the switch. USB Copy is available only for
software image 1 and the active configuration.
Copy to USB
Use the following command to copy a file from the switch to the USB drive
(Privileged EXEC mode):
usbcopy tousb <filename> {boot|image1|active|syslog|crashdump}
In this example, the active configuration file is copied to a directory on the USB
drive:
G8272(config)# usbcopy tousb a_folder/myconfig.cfg active
Copy from USB
Use the following command to copy a file from the USB drive to the switch:
usbcopy fromusb <filename> {boot|image1|active}
In this example, the active configuration file is copied from a directory on the USB
drive:
G8272(config)# usbcopy fromusb a_folder/myconfig.cfg active
The new file replaces the current file.
Note: Do not use two consecutive dot characters ( .. ). Do not use a slash character
( / ) to begin a filename.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 3: Switch Software Management
69
The Boot Management Menu
The Boot Management menu allows you to switch the software image, reset the
switch to factory defaults, or to recover from a failed software download.
You can interrupt the boot process and enter the Boot Management menu from the
serial console port. When the system displays Memory Test, press <Shift B>. The
Boot Management menu appears.
Resetting the System ...
Memory Test ................................
Boot Menu mode
FLASH: 16 MB
L2: 512 KB enabled
PCIe1: Root Complex of PCIe, x2, regs @ 0xffe0a000
PCIe1: Bus 00 ­ 01
MMC: FSL_ESDHC: 0
Net: eTSEC1, eTSEC2 [PRIME]
Boot Management Menu
I ­ Change booting image
C ­ Change configuration block
R ­ Boot in recovery mode (tftp and xmodem download of images to recover switch)
Q ­ Reboot
E ­ Exit
Please choose your menu option: I
Current boot image is 1. Enter image to boot: 1 or 2: 2
Booting from image 2
The Boot Management menu allows you to perform the following actions:

To change the booting image, press I and follow the screen prompts.

To change the configuration block, press C and follow the screen prompts.

To reboot the switch, press Q. The booting process restarts.

To boot in recovery mode, press R and follow the screen prompts.

To exit the Boot Management menu, press E. The booting process continues.
Recovering from a Failed Upgrade
Use the following procedure to recover from a failed software upgrade.
1. Connect a PC to the serial port of the switch.
2. Open a terminal emulator program that supports XModem Download (such as
HyperTerminal or PuTTY) and select the following serial port characteristics:
70

Speed:
9600 bps

Data Bits:
8

Stop Bits:
1

Parity:
None

Flow Control:
None
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
3. Boot the switch and access the Boot Management menu by pressing <Shift B>
while the Memory Test is in progress and the dots are being displayed.
4. Select R for Recovery mode, then select one of the following options:

T – Configure networking and tftp download an image

X – Use xmodem 1K to serial download an image

P – Physical presence (low security mode)

F – Filesystem check

R – Reboot

E – Exit
5. Select X for Xmodem download. When you see the following message, change the
Serial Port characteristics to 115200 bps:
## Switch baudrate to 115200 bps and press ENTER ...
6. Press <Enter> to set the system into download accept mode. When the readiness
meter displays (a series of “C” characters), start XModem on your terminal
emulator.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 3: Switch Software Management
71
72
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 2: Securing the Switch
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
73
74
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 4. Securing Administration
Secure switch management is needed for environments that perform significant
management functions across the Internet. Common functions for secured
management are described in the following sections:

“Secure Shell and Secure Copy” on page 76

“End User Access Control” on page 80
Note: SNMP read and write functions are enabled by default. For best security
practices, if SNMP is not needed for your network, it is recommended that you
disable these functions prior to connecting the switch to the network (see “Using
Simple Network Management Protocol” on page 38).
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
75
Secure Shell and Secure Copy
Because using Telnet does not provide a secure connection for managing a G8272,
Secure Shell (SSH) and Secure Copy (SCP) features have been included for G8272
management. SSH and SCP use secure tunnels to encrypt and secure messages
between a remote administrator and the switch.
SSH is a protocol that enables remote administrators to log securely into the G8272
over a network to execute management commands.
SCP is typically used to copy files securely from one machine to another. SCP uses
SSH for encryption of data on the network. On a G8272, SCP is used to download
and upload the switch configuration via secure channels.
Although SSH and SCP are disabled by default, enabling and using these features
provides the following benefits:







Identifying the administrator using Name/Password
Authentication of remote administrators
Authorization of remote administrators
Determining the permitted actions and customizing service for individual
administrators
Encryption of management messages
Encrypting messages between the remote administrator and switch
Secure copy support
Lenovo Networking OS implements the SSH version 2.0 standard and is confirmed
to work with SSH version 2.0-compliant clients such as the following:

OpenSSH_5.4p1 for Linux

Secure CRT Version 5.0.2 (build 1021)

Putty SSH release 0.60
Configuring SSH/SCP Features on the Switch
SSH and SCP features are disabled by default. To change the SSH/SCP settings,
using the following procedures.
Note: To use SCP, you must first enable SSH.
To Enable or Disable the SSH Feature
Connect to the console port and enter the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] ssh enable
To Enable or Disable SCP Apply and Save
Enter the following command from the switch CLI to enable the SCP
putcfg_apply and putcfg_apply_save commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] ssh scp­enable
76
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuring the SCP Administrator Password
To configure the SCP-only administrator password, enter the following command
(the default password is admin):
RS 8272(config)# [no] ssh scp­password
Changing SCP­only Administrator password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password: <password>
Enter new SCP­only administrator password: <new password>
Re­enter new SCP­only administrator password: <new password>
New SCP­only administrator password accepted.
Using SSH and SCP Client Commands
This section shows the format for using some client commands. The following
examples use 205.178.15.157 as the IP address of a sample switch.
To Log In to the Switch
Syntax:
>> ssh [­4|­6] <switch IP address>
-or>> ssh [­4|­6] <login name>@<switch IP address>
Note: The ­4 option (the default) specifies that an IPv4 switch address will be
used. The ­6 option specifies IPv6.
Example:
>> ssh [email protected]
To Copy the Switch Configuration File to the SCP Host
Syntax:
>> scp [­4|­6] <username>@<switch IP address>:getcfg <local filename>
Example:
>> scp [email protected]:getcfg ad4.cfg
To Load a Switch Configuration File from the SCP Host
Syntax:
>> scp [­4|­6] <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putcfg
Example:
>> scp ad4.cfg [email protected]:putcfg
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 4: Securing Administration
77
To Apply and Save the Configuration
When loading a configuration file to the switch, the apply and save commands
are still required for the configuration commands to take effect. The apply and
save commands may be entered manually on the switch, or by using SCP
commands.
Syntax:
>> scp [­4|­6] <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putcfg_apply
>> scp [­4|­6] <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putcfg_apply_save
Example:
>> scp ad4.cfg [email protected]:putcfg_apply
>> scp ad4.cfg [email protected]:putcfg_apply_save

The CLI diff command is automatically executed at the end of putcfg to
notify the remote client of the difference between the new and the current
configurations.

putcfg_apply runs the apply command after the putcfg is done.

putcfg_apply_save saves the new configuration to the flash after
putcfg_apply is done.

The putcfg_apply and putcfg_apply_save commands are provided
because extra apply and save commands are usually required after a putcfg;
however, an SCP session is not in an interactive mode.
To Copy the Switch Image and Boot Files to the SCP Host
Syntax:
>> scp [­4|­6] <username>@<switch IP address>:getimg1 <local filename>
>> scp [­4|­6] <username>@<switch IP address>:getimg2 <local filename>
>> scp [­4|­6] <username>@<switch IP address>:getboot <local filename>
Example:
>> scp [email protected]:getimg1 6.1.0_os.img
To Load Switch Configuration Files from the SCP Host
Syntax:
>> scp [­4|­6] <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putimg1
>> scp [­4|­6] <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putimg2
>> scp [­4|­6] <local filename> <username>@<switch IP address>:putboot
Example:
>> scp 6.1.0_os.img [email protected]:putimg1
78
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
SSH and SCP Encryption of Management Messages
The following encryption and authentication methods are supported for SSH and
SCP:

Server Host Authentication: Client RSA authenticates the switch at the
beginning of every connection

Key Exchange:
RSA

Encryption:
3DES-CBC

User Authentication:
Local password authentication, RADIUS
Generating RSA Host Key for SSH Access
To support the SSH host feature, an RSA host key is required. The host key is 2048
bits and is used to identify the G8272.
To configure RSA host key, first connect to the G8272 through the console port
(commands are not available via external Telnet connection), and enter the
following command to generate it manually.
RS 8272(config)# ssh generate­host­key
When the switch reboots, it will retrieve the host key from the FLASH memory.
Note: The switch will perform only one session of key/cipher generation at a time.
Thus, an SSH/SCP client will not be able to log in if the switch is performing key
generation at that time. Also, key generation will fail if an SSH/SCP client is
logging in at that time.
SSH/SCP Integration with Radius Authentication
SSH/SCP is integrated with RADIUS authentication. After the RADIUS server is
enabled on the switch, all subsequent SSH authentication requests will be
redirected to the specified RADIUS servers for authentication. The redirection is
transparent to the SSH clients.
SSH/SCP Integration with TACACS+ Authentication
SSH/SCP is integrated with TACACS+ authentication. After the TACACS+ server is
enabled on the switch, all subsequent SSH authentication requests will be
redirected to the specified TACACS+ servers for authentication. The redirection is
transparent to the SSH clients.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 4: Securing Administration
79
End User Access Control
Lenovo N/OS allows an administrator to define end user accounts that permit end
users to perform operation tasks via the switch CLI commands. Once end user
accounts are configured and enabled, the switch requires username/password
authentication.
For example, an administrator can assign a user, who can then log into the switch
and perform operational commands (effective only until the next switch reboot).
Considerations for Configuring End User Accounts
Note the following considerations when you configure end user accounts:

A maximum of 20 user IDs are supported on the switch.

N/OS supports end user support for console, Telnet, BBI, and SSHv2 access to
the switch.

If RADIUS authentication is used, the user password on the Radius server will
override the user password on the G8272. Also note that the password change
command only modifies only the user password on the switch and has no effect
on the user password on the Radius server. Radius authentication and user
password cannot be used concurrently to access the switch.

Passwords for end users can be up to 128 characters in length for TACACS,
RADIUS, Telnet, SSH, Console, and Web access.
Strong Passwords
The administrator can require use of Strong Passwords for users to access the
G8272. Strong Passwords enhance security because they make password guessing
more difficult.
The following rules apply when Strong Passwords are enabled:

Minimum length: 8 characters; maximum length: 64 characters.

Must contain at least one uppercase alphabet.

Must contain at least one lowercase alphabet.

Must contain at least one number.

Must contain at least one special character.
Supported special characters: ! “ # % & ‘ ( ) ; < = >> ? [\] * + , - . / : ^ _ { | } ~

Cannot be same as the username.

No consecutive four characters can be the same as in the old password.
When strong password is enabled, users can still access the switch using the old
password but will be advised to change to a strong password while attempting to
log in.
Strong password requirement can be enabled using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access user strong­password enable
80
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The administrator can choose the number of days allowed before each password
expires. When a strong password expires, the user is allowed to log in one last time
to change the password. A warning provides advance notice for users to change
the password.
User Access Control
The end-user access control commands allow you to configure end-user accounts.
Setting up User IDs
Up to 20 user IDs can be configured. Use the following commands to define any
user name and set the user password at the resulting prompts:
RS 8272(config)# access user 1 name <1-8 characters>
RS 8272(config)# access user 1 password
Changing user1 password; validation required:
Enter current admin password: <current administrator password>
Enter new user1 password: <new user password>
Re­enter new user1 password: <new user password>
New user1 password accepted. Defining a User’s Access Level
The end user is by default assigned to the user access level (also known as class of
service, or COS). COS for all user accounts have global access to all resources
except for User COS, which has access to view only resources that the user owns.
For more information, see Table 6 on page 86.
To change the user’s level, select one of the following options:
RS 8272(config)# access user 1 level {user|operator|administrator} Validating a User’s Configuration
RS 8272# show access user uid 1
Enabling or Disabling a User
An end user account must be enabled before the switch recognizes and permits
login under the account. Once enabled, the switch requires any user to enter both
username and password.
RS 8272(config)# [no] access user 1 enable Locking Accounts
To protect the switch from unauthorized access, the account lockout feature can be
enabled. By default, account lockout is disabled. To enable this feature, ensure the
strong password feature is enabled (See “Strong Passwords” on page 80). Then use
the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access user strong­password lockout
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 4: Securing Administration
81
After multiple failed login attempts, the switch locks the user account if lockout
has been enabled on the switch.
Re-enabling Locked Accounts
The administrator can re-enable a locked account by reloading the switch or by
using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access user strong­password clear local user lockout username <user name>
However, the above command cannot be used to re-enable an account disabled by
the administrator.
To re-enable all locked accounts, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# access user strong­password clear local user lockout all
Listing Current Users
The following command displays defined user accounts and whether or not each
user is currently logged into the switch.
RS 8272# show access user
Usernames:
user ­ Enabled ­ offline
oper ­ Disabled ­ offline
admin ­ Always Enabled ­ online 1 session
Current User ID table:
1: name jane , ena, cos user , password valid, online 1 session
2: name john , ena, cos user , password valid, online 2 sessions
Logging into an End User Account
Once an end user account is configured and enabled, the user can login to the
switch using the username/password combination. The level of switch access is
determined by the COS established for the end user account.
Password Fix-Up Mode
Password Fix-Up Mode enables admin user account recovery if administrator
access is lost. You must connect to the switch over the serial console and log in
using the password “forgetME!”. This enables the admin account if disabled and a
new administrator password can be entered.
To disable the Password Fix-Up functionality, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# no access user password­recovery
82
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 5. Authentication & Authorization Protocols
Secure switch management is needed for environments that perform significant
management functions across the Internet. The following are some of the functions
for secured IPv4 management and device access:

“RADIUS Authentication and Authorization” on page 84

“TACACS+ Authentication” on page 88

“LDAP Authentication and Authorization” on page 92
Note: Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 does not support IPv6 for RADIUS, TACACS+,
or LDAP.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
83
RADIUS Authentication and Authorization
Lenovo N/OS supports the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service)
method to authenticate and authorize remote administrators for managing the
switch. This method is based on a client/server model. The Remote Access Server
(RAS)—the switch—is a client to the back-end database server. A remote user (the
remote administrator) interacts only with the RAS, not the back-end server and
database.
RADIUS authentication consists of the following components:
A protocol with a frame format that utilizes UDP over IP (based on RFC 2138 and
2866)
 A centralized server that stores all the user authorization information
 A client: in this case, the switch

The G8272—acting as the RADIUS client—communicates to the RADIUS server to
authenticate and authorize a remote administrator using the protocol definitions
specified in RFC 2138 and 2866. Transactions between the client and the RADIUS
server are authenticated using a shared key that is not sent over the network. In
addition, the remote administrator passwords are sent encrypted between the
RADIUS client (the switch) and the back-end RADIUS server.
How RADIUS Authentication Works
The RADIUS authentication process follows these steps:
1. A remote administrator connects to the switch and provides a user name and
password.
2. Using Authentication/Authorization protocol, the switch sends request to
authentication server.
3. The authentication server checks the request against the user ID database.
4. Using RADIUS protocol, the authentication server instructs the switch to grant or
deny administrative access.
Configuring RADIUS on the Switch
Use the following procedure to configure Radius authentication on your switch.
1. Configure the IPv4 addresses of the Primary and Secondary RADIUS servers, and
enable RADIUS authentication.
RS 8272(config)# radius­server primary­host 10.10.1.1
RS 8272(config)# radius­server secondary­host 10.10.1.2
RS 8272(config)# radius­server enable
Note: You can use a configured loopback address as the source address so the
RADIUS server accepts requests only from the expected loopback address block.
Use the following command to specify the loopback interface:
RS 8272(config)# ip radius source­interface loopback <1-5>
84
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
2. Configure the RADIUS secret.
RS 8272(config)# radius­server primary­host 10.10.1.1 key <1-32 character secret>
RS 8272(config)# radius­server secondary­host 10.10.1.2 key <1-32 character secret>
3. If desired, you may change the default UDP port number used to listen to RADIUS.
The well-known port for RADIUS is 1812.
RS 8272(config)# radius­server port <UDP port number>
4. Configure the number retry attempts for contacting the RADIUS server, and the
timeout period.
RS 8272(config)# radius­server retransmit 3
RS 8272(config)# radius­server timeout 5
RADIUS Authentication Features in Lenovo N/OS
N/OS supports the following RADIUS authentication features:

Supports RADIUS client on the switch, based on the protocol definitions in RFC
2138 and RFC 2866.

Allows RADIUS secret password up to 32 bytes and less than 16 octets.

Supports secondary authentication server so that when the primary authentication
server is unreachable, the switch can send client authentication requests to the
secondary authentication server. Use the following command to show the
currently active RADIUS authentication server:
RS 8272# show radius­server

Supports user-configurable RADIUS server retry and time-out values:

Time-out value = 1-10 seconds

Retries = 1-3
The switch will time out if it does not receive a response from the RADIUS
server in 1-3 retries. The switch will also automatically retry connecting to the
RADIUS server before it declares the server down.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Supports user-configurable RADIUS application port. The default is
1645/UDP-based on RFC 2138. Port 1812 is also supported.

Allows network administrator to define privileges for one or more specific users
to access the switch at the RADIUS user database.
Chapter 5: Authentication & Authorization Protocols
85
Switch User Accounts
The user accounts listed in Table 6 can be defined in the RADIUS server dictionary
file.
Table 6. User Access Levels
User Account
Description and Tasks Performed
Password
User
The User has no direct responsibility for switch
management. They can view all switch status
information and statistics but cannot make any
configuration changes to the switch.
user
Operator
The Operator manages all functions of the switch.
The Operator can reset ports, except the
management port.
oper
Administrator
The super-user Administrator has complete access admin
to all commands, information, and configuration
commands on the switch, including the ability to
change both the user and administrator passwords.
RADIUS Attributes for Lenovo N/OS User Privileges
When the user logs in, the switch authenticates his/her level of access by sending
the RADIUS access request, that is, the client authentication request, to the
RADIUS authentication server.
If the remote user is successfully authenticated by the authentication server, the
switch will verify the privileges of the remote user and authorize the appropriate
access. The administrator has two options: to allow backdoor access via Telnet, SSH,
HTTP, or HTTPS; to allow secure backdoor access via Telnet, SSH, or BBI. Backdoor
and secure backdoor provides access to the switch when the RADIUS servers
cannot be reached.
The default G8272 setting for backdoor and secure backdoor access is disabled.
Backdoor and secure backdoor access is always enabled on the console port.
Irrespective of backdoor/secure backdoor being enabled or not, you can always
access the switch via the console port by using noradius as radius username. You
can then enter the username and password configured on the switch. If you are
trying to connect via SSH/Telnet/HTTP/HTTPS (not console port), there are two
possibilities:
86

Backdoor is enabled: The switch acts like it is connecting via console.

Secure backdoor is enabled: You must enter the username: noradius. The switch
checks if RADIUS server is reachable. If it is reachable, then you must
authenticate via remote authentication server. Only if RADIUS server is not
reachable, you will be prompted for local user/password to be authenticated
against these local credentials.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
All user privileges, other than those assigned to the Administrator, have to be
defined in the RADIUS dictionary. RADIUS attribute 6 which is built into all
RADIUS servers defines the administrator. The file name of the dictionary is
RADIUS vendor-dependent. The following RADIUS attributes are defined for
G8272 user privileges levels:
Table 7. Lenovo N/OS-proprietary Attributes for RADIUS
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
User Name/Access
User-Service-Type
Value
User
Vendor-supplied
255
Operator
Vendor-supplied
252
Admin
Vendor-supplied
6
Chapter 5: Authentication & Authorization Protocols
87
TACACS+ Authentication
N/OS supports authentication and authorization with networks using the Cisco
Systems TACACS+ protocol. The G8272 functions as the Network Access Server
(NAS) by interacting with the remote client and initiating authentication and
authorization sessions with the TACACS+ access server. The remote user is defined
as someone requiring management access to the G8272 through a data port.
TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS:

TACACS+ uses TCP-based connection-oriented transport; whereas RADIUS is
UDP-based. TCP offers a connection-oriented transport, while UDP offers
best-effort delivery. RADIUS requires additional programmable variables such
as re-transmit attempts and time-outs to compensate for best-effort transport,
but it lacks the level of built-in support that a TCP transport offers.

TACACS+ offers full packet encryption whereas RADIUS offers password-only
encryption in authentication requests.

TACACS+ separates authentication, authorization and accounting.
How TACACS+ Authentication Works
TACACS+ works much in the same way as RADIUS authentication as described on
page 84.
1. Remote administrator connects to the switch and provides user name and
password.
2. Using Authentication/Authorization protocol, the switch sends request to
authentication server.
3. Authentication server checks the request against the user ID database.
4. Using TACACS+ protocol, the authentication server instructs the switch to grant or
deny administrative access.
During a session, if additional authorization checking is needed, the switch checks
with a TACACS+ server to determine if the user is granted permission to use a
particular command.
TACACS+ Authentication Features in Lenovo N/OS
Authentication is the action of determining the identity of a user, and is generally
done when the user first attempts to log in to a device or gain access to its services.
N/OS supports ASCII inbound login to the device. PAP, CHAP and ARAP login
methods, TACACS+ change password requests, and one-time password
authentication are not supported.
Authorization
Authorization is the action of determining a user’s privileges on the device, and
usually takes place after authentication.
88
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The default mapping between TACACS+ authorization levels and N/OS
management access levels is shown in Table 8. The authorization levels must be
defined on the TACACS+ server.
Table 8. Default TACACS+ Authorization Levels
N/OS User Access Level
TACACS+ level
user
0
oper
3
admin
6
Alternate mapping between TACACS+ authorization levels and N/OS
management access levels is shown in Table 9. Use the following command to set
the alternate TACACS+ authorization levels. RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server privilege­mapping
Table 9. Alternate TACACS+ Authorization Levels
N/OS User Access Level
TACACS+ level
user
0-1
oper
6-8
admin
14 - 15
If the remote user is successfully authenticated by the authentication server, the
switch verifies the privileges of the remote user and authorizes the appropriate
access. The administrator has an option to allow secure backdoor access via
Telnet/SSH. Secure backdoor provides switch access when the TACACS+ servers
cannot be reached. You always can access the switch via the console port, by using
notacacs and the administrator password, whether secure backdoor is enabled
or not.
Note: To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your G8272, contact
Technical Support.
Accounting
Accounting is the action of recording a user's activities on the device for the
purposes of billing and/or security. It follows the authentication and authorization
actions. If the authentication and authorization is not performed via TACACS+,
there are no TACACS+ accounting messages sent out.
You can use TACACS+ to record and track software login access, configuration
changes, and interactive commands.
The G8272 supports the following TACACS+ accounting attributes:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

protocol (console/Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS)

start_time

stop_time

elapsed_time
Chapter 5: Authentication & Authorization Protocols
89

disc_cause
Note: When using the Browser-Based Interface, the TACACS+ Accounting Stop
records are sent only if the Logout button on the browser is clicked.
Command Authorization and Logging
When TACACS+ Command Authorization is enabled, N/OS configuration
commands are sent to the TACACS+ server for authorization. Use the following
command to enable TACACS+ Command Authorization:
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server command­authorization
When TACACS+ Command Logging is enabled, N/OS configuration commands
are logged on the TACACS+ server. Use the following command to enable
TACACS+ Command Logging:
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server command­logging
The following examples illustrate the format of N/OS commands sent to the
TACACS+ server:
authorization request, cmd=shell, cmd­arg=interface ip
accounting request, cmd=shell, cmd­arg=interface ip
authorization request, cmd=shell, cmd­arg=enable
accounting request, cmd=shell, cmd­arg=enable
Configuring TACACS+ Authentication on the Switch
1. Configure the IPv4 addresses of the Primary and Secondary TACACS+ servers, and
enable TACACS authentication.
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server primary­host 10.10.1.1
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server primary­host mgt­port
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server secondary­host 10.10.1.2
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server secondary­host data­port
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server enable
Note: You can use a configured loopback address as the source address so the
TACACS+ server accepts requests only from the expected loopback address block.
Use the following command to specify the loopback interface:
RS 8272(config)# ip tacacs source­interface loopback <1-5>
2. Configure the TACACS+ secret and second secret.
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server primary­host 10.10.1.1 key <1-32 character secret>
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server secondary­host 10.10.1.2 key <1-32 character secret>
3. If desired, you may change the default TCP port number used to listen to
TACACS+.
The well-known port for TACACS+ is 49.
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server port <TCP port number>
90
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. Configure the number of retry attempts, and the timeout period.
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server retransmit 3
RS 8272(config)# tacacs­server timeout 5 © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 5: Authentication & Authorization Protocols
91
LDAP Authentication and Authorization
N/OS supports the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) method to
authenticate and authorize remote administrators to manage the switch. LDAP is
based on a client/server model. The switch acts as a client to the LDAP server. A
remote user (the remote administrator) interacts only with the switch, not the
back-end server and database.
LDAP authentication consists of the following components:
A protocol with a frame format that utilizes TCP over IP
A centralized server that stores all the user authorization information
 A client: in this case, the switch


Each entry in the LDAP server is referenced by its Distinguished Name (DN). The
DN consists of the user-account name concatenated with the LDAP domain name.
If the user-account name is John, the following is an example DN:
uid=John,ou=people,dc=domain,dc=com
Configuring the LDAP Server
G8272 user groups and user accounts must reside within the same domain. On the
LDAP server, configure the domain to include G8272 user groups and user
accounts, as follows:

User Accounts:
Use the uid attribute to define each individual user account.

User Groups:
Use the members attribute in the groupOfNames object class to create the user
groups. The first word of the common name for each user group must be equal
to the user group names defined in the G8272, as follows:

admin

oper

user
Configuring LDAP Authentication on the Switch
1. Turn LDAP authentication on, then configure the IPv4 addresses of the Primary
and Secondary LDAP servers.
>> # ldap­server enable
>> # ldap­server primary­host 10.10.1.1 mgt­port
>> # ldap­server secondary­host 10.10.1.2 data­port
2. Configure the domain name.
>> # ldap­server domain <ou=people,dc=my-domain,dc=com> 3. You may change the default TCP port number used to listen to LDAP (optional).
92
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The well-known port for LDAP is 389.
>> # ldap­server port <1-65000>
4. Configure the number of retry attempts for contacting the LDAP server, and the
timeout period.
>> # ldap­server retransmit 3
>> # ldap­server timeout 10 © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 5: Authentication & Authorization Protocols
93
94
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 6. 802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control
Port-Based Network Access control provides a means of authenticating and
authorizing devices attached to a LAN port that has point-to-point connection
characteristics. It prevents access to ports that fail authentication and
authorization. This feature provides security to ports of the RackSwitch G8272
(G8272) that connect to blade servers.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN” on page 96

“EAPoL Authentication Process” on page 97

“EAPoL Port States” on page 99

“Guest VLAN” on page 99

“Supported RADIUS Attributes” on page 100

“EAPoL Configuration Guidelines” on page 102
95
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN
Lenovo Networking OS can provide user-level security for its ports using the IEEE
802.1X protocol, which is a more secure alternative to other methods of port-based
network access control. Any device attached to an 802.1X-enabled port that fails
authentication is prevented access to the network and denied services offered
through that port.
The 802.1X standard describes port-based network access control using Extensible
Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPoL). EAPoL provides a means of
authenticating and authorizing devices attached to a LAN port that has
point-to-point connection characteristics and of preventing access to that port in
cases of authentication and authorization failures.
EAPoL is a client-server protocol that has the following components:

Supplicant or Client
The Supplicant is a device that requests network access and provides the
required credentials (user name and password) to the Authenticator and the
Authenticator Server.

Authenticator
The Authenticator enforces authentication and controls access to the network.
The Authenticator grants network access based on the information provided by
the Supplicant and the response from the Authentication Server. The
Authenticator acts as an intermediary between the Supplicant and the
Authentication Server: requesting identity information from the client,
forwarding that information to the Authentication Server for validation,
relaying the server’s responses to the client, and authorizing network access
based on the results of the authentication exchange. The G8272 acts as an
Authenticator.

Authentication Server
The Authentication Server validates the credentials provided by the Supplicant
to determine if the Authenticator ought to grant access to the network. The
Authentication Server may be co-located with the Authenticator. The G8272
relies on external RADIUS servers for authentication.
Upon a successful authentication of the client by the server, the 802.1X-controlled
port transitions from unauthorized to authorized state, and the client is allowed
full access to services through the port. When the client sends an EAP-Logoff
message to the authenticator, the port will transition from authorized to
unauthorized state.
96
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
EAPoL Authentication Process
The clients and authenticators communicate using Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP), which was originally designed to run over PPP, and for which the
IEEE 802.1X Standard has defined an encapsulation method over Ethernet frames,
called EAP over LAN (EAPOL). Figure 1 shows a typical message exchange
initiated by the client.
Figure 1. Authenticating a Port Using EAPoL
RADIUS
Server
802.1x Client
EAPOL
Ethernet
Lenovo Switch
Authenticator
(RADIUS Client)
RADIUS-EAP
UDP/IP
Port Unauthorized
EAPOL-Start
EAP-Request (Credentials)
EAP-Response (Credentials)
Radius-Access-Request
Radius-Access-Challenge
EAP-Request (Credentials)
EAP-Response (Credentials)
Radius-Access-Request
Radius-Access-Accept
EAP-Success
Port Authorized
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 6: 802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control
97
EAPoL Message Exchange
During authentication, EAPOL messages are exchanged between the client and the
G8272 authenticator, while RADIUS-EAP messages are exchanged between the
G8272 authenticator and the RADIUS server.
Authentication is initiated by one of the following methods:

The G8272 authenticator sends an EAP-Request/Identity packet to the client

The client sends an EAPOL-Start frame to the G8272 authenticator, which
responds with an EAP-Request/Identity frame.
The client confirms its identity by sending an EAP-Response/Identity frame to the
G8272 authenticator, which forwards the frame encapsulated in a RADIUS packet
to the server.
The RADIUS authentication server chooses an EAP-supported authentication
algorithm to verify the client’s identity, and sends an EAP-Request packet to the
client via the G8272 authenticator. The client then replies to the RADIUS server
with an EAP-Response containing its credentials.
Upon a successful authentication of the client by the server, the 802.1X-controlled
port transitions from unauthorized to authorized state, and the client is allowed
full access to services through the controlled port. When the client later sends an
EAPOL-Logoff message to the G8272 authenticator, the port transitions from
authorized to unauthorized state.
If a client that does not support 802.1X connects to an 802.1X-controlled port, the
G8272 authenticator requests the client's identity when it detects a change in the
operational state of the port. The client does not respond to the request, and the
port remains in the unauthorized state.
Note: When an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not
802.1X-controlled, the client initiates the authentication process by sending an
EAPOL-Start frame. When no response is received, the client retransmits the
request for a fixed number of times. If no response is received, the client assumes
the port is in authorized state, and begins sending frames, even if the port is
unauthorized.
98
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
EAPoL Port States
The state of the port determines whether the client is granted access to the network,
as follows:

Unauthorized
While in this state the port discards all ingress and egress traffic except EAP
packets.

Authorized
When the client is successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the
authorized state allowing all traffic to and from the client to flow normally.

Force Unauthorized
You can configure this state that denies all access to the port.

Force Authorized
You can configure this state that allows full access to the port.
Use the 802.1X global configuration commands (dot1x) to configure 802.1X
authentication for all ports in the switch. Use the 802.1X port commands to
configure a single port.
Guest VLAN
The guest VLAN provides limited access to unauthenticated ports. The guest
VLAN can be configured using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# dot1x guest­vlan ?
Client ports that have not received an EAPOL response are placed into the Guest
VLAN, if one is configured on the switch. Once the port is authenticated, it is
moved from the Guest VLAN to its configured VLAN.
When Guest VLAN enabled, the following considerations apply while a port is in
the unauthenticated state:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

The port is placed in the guest VLAN.

The Port VLAN ID (PVID) is changed to the Guest VLAN ID.

Port tagging is disabled on the port.
Chapter 6: 802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control
99
Supported RADIUS Attributes
The 802.1X Authenticator relies on external RADIUS servers for authentication
with EAP. Table 10 lists the RADIUS attributes that are supported as part of
RADIUS-EAP authentication based on the guidelines specified in Annex D of the
802.1X standard and RFC 3580.
Table 10. Support for RADIUS Attributes
100
# Attribute
Attribute Value
A-R
A-A
A-C
A-R
1 User-Name
The value of the Type-Data field
from the supplicant’s
EAP-Response/ Identity message.
If the Identity is unknown (for
example, Type-Data field is zero
bytes in length), this attribute will
have the same value as the
Calling-Station-Id.
1
0-1
0
0
4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the authenticator
used for Radius communication.
1
0
0
0
5 NAS-Port
Port number of the authenticator
port to which the supplicant is
attached.
1
0
0
0
24 State
Server-specific value. This is sent
unmodified back to the server in
an Access-Request that is in
response to an Access-Challenge.
0-1
0-1
0-1
0
30 Called-Station-I
D
The MAC address of the
authenticator encoded as an
ASCII string in canonical format,
such as 000D5622E3 9F.
1
0
0
0
31 Calling-Station-I
D
The MAC address of the
supplicant encoded as an ASCII
string in canonical format, such as
00034B436206.
1
0
0
0
64 Tunnel-Type
Only VLAN (type 13) is currently
supported (for 802.1X RADIUS
VLAN assignment). The attribute
must be untagged (the Tag field
must be 0).
0
0-1
0
0
65 Tunnel-Medium- Only 802 (type 6) is currently
Type
supported (for 802.1X RADIUS
VLAN assignment). The attribute
must be untagged (the Tag field
must be 0).
0
0-1
0
0
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Table 10. Support for RADIUS Attributes (continued)
# Attribute
Attribute Value
A-R
A-A
A-C
A-R
81 Tunnel-PrivateGroup-ID
VLAN ID (1-4094). When 802.1X
RADIUS VLAN assignment is
enabled on a port, if the RADIUS
server includes the tunnel
attributes defined in RFC 2868 in
the Access-Accept packet, the
switch will automatically place
the authenticated port in the
specified VLAN. Reserved
VLANs (such as for management)
may not be specified. The
attribute must be untagged (the
Tag field must be 0).
0
0-1
0
0
79 EAP-Message
Encapsulated EAP packets from
the supplicant to the
authentication server (Radius)
and vice-versa. The authenticator
relays the decoded packet to both
devices.
1+
1+
1+
1+
80 MessageAuthenticator
Always present whenever an
EAP-Message attribute is also
included. Used to
integrity-protect a packet.
1
1
1
1
87 NAS-Port-ID
Name assigned to the
authenticator port, e.g.
Server1_Port3
1
0
0
0
Legend: RADIUS Packet Types: A-R (Access-Request), A-A (Access-Accept),
A-C (Access-Challenge), A-R (Access-Reject)
RADIUS Attribute Support:





© Copyright Lenovo 2015
0
0+
0-1
1
1+
This attribute MUST NOT be present in a packet.
Zero or more instances of this attribute MAY be present in a packet.
Zero or one instance of this attribute MAY be present in a packet.
Exactly one instance of this attribute MUST be present in a packet.
One or more of these attributes MUST be present.
Chapter 6: 802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control
101
EAPoL Configuration Guidelines
When configuring EAPoL, consider the following guidelines:
102

The 802.1X port-based authentication is currently supported only in
point-to-point configurations, that is, with a single supplicant connected to an
802.1X-enabled switch port.

When 802.1X is enabled, a port has to be in the authorized state before any other
Layer 2 feature can be operationally enabled. For example, the STG state of a
port is operationally disabled while the port is in the unauthorized state.

The 802.1X supplicant capability is not supported. Therefore, none of its ports
can successfully connect to an 802.1X-enabled port of another device, such as
another switch, that acts as an authenticator, unless access control on the remote
port is disabled or is configured in forced-authorized mode. For example, if a
G8272 is connected to another G8272, and if 802.1X is enabled on both switches,
the two connected ports must be configured in force-authorized mode.

Unsupported 802.1X attributes include Service-Type, Session-Timeout, and
Termination-Action.

RADIUS accounting service for 802.1X-authenticated devices or users is not
currently supported.

Configuration changes performed using SNMP and the standard 802.1X MIB
will take effect immediately.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 7. Access Control Lists
Access Control Lists (ACLs) are filters that permit or deny traffic for security
purposes. They can also be used with QoS to classify and segment traffic to
provide different levels of service to different traffic types. Each filter defines the
conditions that must match for inclusion in the filter, and also the actions that are
performed when a match is made.
Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 supports the following ACLs:

IPv4 ACLs
Up to 256 ACLs are supported for networks that use IPv4 addressing. IPv4
ACLs are configured using the following ISCLI command path:
RS 8272(config)# access­control list <IPv4 ACL number> ?

IPv6 ACLs
Up to 128 ACLs are supported for networks that use IPv6 addressing. IPv6
ACLs are configured using the following ISCLI command path:
RS 8272(config)# access­control list6 <IPv6 ACL number> ?

VLAN Maps (VMaps)
Up to 128 VLAN Maps are supported for attaching filters to VLANs rather than
ports. See “VLAN Maps” on page 112 for details.

Management ACLs (MACLs)
Up to {256} MACLs are supported for filtering traffic toward CPU. MACLs are
configured using the following ISCLI command path:
RS 8272(config)# access­control macl <MACL number> ?
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
103
Summary of Packet Classifiers
ACLs allow you to classify packets according to a variety of content in the packet
header (such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
destination port number, and others). Once classified, packet flows can be
identified for more processing.
IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and VMaps allow you to classify packets based on the
following packet attributes:


Ethernet header options (for IPv4 ACLs and VMaps only)

Source MAC address

Destination MAC address

VLAN number and mask

Ethernet type (ARP, IP, IPv6, MPLS, RARP, etc.)

Ethernet Priority (the IEEE 802.1p Priority)
IPv4 header options (for IPv4 ACLs and VMaps only)

Source IPv4 address and subnet mask

Destination IPv4 address and subnet mask

Type of Service value

IP protocol number or name as shown in Table 11:
Table 11. Well-Known Protocol Types

104
Number
Protocol Name
1
2
6
17
89
112
icmp
igmp
tcp
udp
ospf
vrrp
IPv6 header options (for IPv6 ACLs only)

Source IPv6 address and prefix length

Destination IPv6 address and prefix length

Next Header value

Flow Label value

Traffic Class value
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

TCP/UDP header options (for all ACLs)

TCP/UDP application source port and mask as shown in Table 12

TCP/UDP application destination port as shown in Table 12
Table 12. Well-Known Application Ports
TCP/UDP
Port Application
20
21
22
23
25
37
42
43
53
69
70

ftp-data
ftp
ssh
telnet
smtp
time
name
whois
domain
tftp
gopher
TCP/UDP
Port Application
79
80
109
110
111
119
123
143
144
161
162
finger
http
pop2
pop3
sunrpc
nntp
ntp
imap
news
snmp
snmptrap
TCP/UDP
Port Application
179
194
220
389
443
520
554
1645/1812
1813
1985
bgp
irc
imap3
ldap
https
rip
rtsp
Radius
Radius
Accounting
hsrp
TCP/UDP flag value as shown in Table 13
Table 13. Well-Known TCP flag values

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Flag
Value
URG
ACK
PSH
RST
SYN
FIN
0x0020
0x0010
0x0008
0x0004
0x0002
0x0001
Packet format (for IPv4 ACLs and VMaps only)

Ethernet format (eth2, SNAP, LLC)

Ethernet tagging format

IP format (IPv4, IPv6)
Chapter 7: Access Control Lists
105
Summary of ACL Actions
Once classified using ACLs, the identified packet flows can be processed
differently. For each ACL, an action can be assigned. The action determines how the
switch treats packets that match the classifiers assigned to the ACL. G8272 ACL
actions include the following:
Pass or Drop the packet
Re-mark the packet with a new DiffServ Code Point (DSCP)
 Re-mark the 802.1p field
 Set the COS queue


Assigning Individual ACLs to a Port
Once you configure an ACL, you must assign the ACL to the appropriate ports.
Each port can accept multiple ACLs, and each ACL can be applied for multiple
ports. ACLs can be assigned individually.
To assign an individual ACLs to a port, use the following IP Interface Mode
commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port>
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list <IPv4 ACL number>
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list6 <IPv6 ACL number>
When multiple ACLs are assigned to a port, higher-priority ACLs are considered
first, and their action takes precedence over lower-priority ACLs. ACL order of
precedence is discussed in the next section.
106
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
ACL Order of Precedence
If no assigned ACL matches the port traffic, no ACL action is applied.
ACL Metering and Re-Marking
You can define a profile for the aggregate traffic flowing through the G8272 by
configuring a QoS meter (if desired) and assigning ACLs to ports.
Note: When you add ACLs to a port, make sure they are ordered correctly in terms
of precedence (see “ACL Order of Precedence” on page 107).
Actions taken by an ACL are called In-Profile actions. You can configure additional
In-Profile and Out-of-Profile actions on a port. Data traffic can be metered, and
re-marked to ensure that the traffic flow provides certain levels of service in terms
of bandwidth for different types of network traffic.
Metering
QoS metering provides different levels of service to data streams through
user-configurable parameters. A meter is used to measure the traffic stream against
a traffic profile which you create. Thus, creating meters yields In-Profile and
Out-of-Profile traffic for each ACL, as follows:

In-ProfileIf there is no meter configured or if the packet conforms to the meter,
the packet is classified as In-Profile.

Out-of-ProfileIf a meter is configured and the packet does not conform to the
meter (exceeds the committed rate or maximum burst rate of the meter), the
packet is classified as Out-of-Profile.
Using meters, you set a Committed Rate in Kbps . All traffic within this Committed
Rate is In-Profile. Additionally, you can set a Maximum Burst Size that specifies an
allowed data burst larger than the Committed Rate for a brief period. These
parameters define the In-Profile traffic.
Meters keep the sorted packets within certain parameters. You can configure a
meter on an ACL, and perform actions on metered traffic, such as packet
re-marking.
Re-Marking
Re-marking allows for the treatment of packets to be reset based on new network
specifications or desired levels of service. You can configure the ACL to re-mark a
packet as follows:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Change the DSCP value of a packet, used to specify the service level that traffic
receives.

Change the 802.1p priority of a packet.
Chapter 7: Access Control Lists
107
ACL Port Mirroring
For IPv4 ACLs and VMaps, packets that match the filter can be mirrored to another
switch port for network diagnosis and monitoring.
The source port for the mirrored packets cannot be a portchannel, but may be a
member of a portchannel.
The destination port to which packets are mirrored must be a physical port.
The action (permit, drop, etc.) of the ACL or VMap must be configured before
assigning it to a port.
Use the following commands to add mirroring to an ACL:

For IPv4 ACLs:
RS 8272(config)# access­control list <ACL number> mirror port <destination
port>
The ACL must be also assigned to it target ports as usual (see “Assigning
Individual ACLs to a Port” on page 106).

For VMaps (see “VLAN Maps” on page 112):
RS 8272(config)# access­control vmap <VMap number> mirror port <monitor
destination port>
See the configuration example on page 113.
108
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Viewing ACL Statistics
ACL statistics display how many packets have “hit” (matched) each ACL. Use
ACL statistics to check filter performance or to debug the ACL filter configuration.
You must enable statistics for each ACL that you wish to monitor:
RS 8272(config)# access­control list <ACL number> statistics
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 7: Access Control Lists
109
ACL Configuration Examples
ACL Example 1
Use this configuration to block traffic to a specific host. All traffic that ingresses on
port 1 is denied if it is destined for the host at IP address 100.10.1.1
1. Configure an Access Control List.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 1 ipv4 destination­ip­address 100.10.1.1
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 1 action deny
2. Add ACL 1 to port 1.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 1
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
ACL Example 2
Use this configuration to block traffic from a network destined for a specific host
address. All traffic that ingresses in port 2 with source IP from class 100.10.1.0/24
and destination IP 200.20.2.2 is denied.
1. Configure an Access Control List.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 ipv4 source­ip­address 100.10.1.0 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 ipv4 destination­ip­address 200.20.2.2 255.255.255.255
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 action deny
2. Add ACL 2 to port 2.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
110
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
ACL Example 3
Use this configuration to block traffic from a specific IPv6 source address. All
traffic that ingresses in port 2 with source IP from class 2001:0:0:5:0:0:0:2/128 is
denied.
1. Configure an Access Control List.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list6 3 ipv6 source­address 2001:0:0:5:0:0:0:2 128
RS 8272(config)# access­control list6 3 action deny
2. Add ACL 2 to port 2.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list6 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
ACL Example 4
Use this configuration to deny all ARP packets that ingress a port.
1. Configure an Access Control List.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 ethernet ethernet­type arp
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 action deny
2. Add ACL 2 to port EXT2.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
ACL Example 5
Use the following configuration to permit access to hosts with destination MAC
address that matches 11:05:00:10:00:00 FF:F5:FF:FF:FF:FF and deny access to all
other hosts.
1. Configure Access Control Lists.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 30 ethernet destination­mac­address 11:05:00:10:00:00 FF:F5:FF:FF:FF:FF
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 30 action permit
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 100 ethernet destination­mac­address 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 100 action deny
2. Add ACLs to a port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 30
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 7: Access Control Lists
111
VLAN Maps
A VLAN map (VMap) is an ACL that can be assigned to a VLAN or VM group
rather than to a switch port as with IPv4 ACLs. This is particularly useful in a
virtualized environment where traffic filtering and metering policies must follow
virtual machines (VMs) as they migrate between hypervisors.
The G8272 supports up to 128 VMaps.
Individual VMap filters are configured in the same fashion as IPv4 ACLs, except
that VLANs cannot be specified as a filtering criteria (unnecessary, since the VMap
are assigned to a specific VLAN or associated with a VM group VLAN).
VMaps are configured using the following ISCLI configuration command path:
RS 8272(config)# access­control vmap <VMap ID> ?
action Set filter action
egress­port Set to filter for packets egressing this port
ethernet Ethernet header options
ipv4 IP version 4 header options
meter ACL metering configuration
mirror Mirror options
packet­format Set to filter specific packet format types
re­mark ACL re­mark configuration
statistics Enable access control list statistics
tcp­udp TCP and UDP filtering options
Once a VMap filter is created, it can be assigned or removed using the following
configuration commands:

For regular VLAN, use config-vlan mode:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <VLAN ID>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# [no] vmap <VMap ID> [serverports| non­serverports]

For a VM group (see “VM Group Types” on page 240), use the global
configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# [no] virt vmgroup <ID> vmap <VMap ID> [serverports|non­serverports]
Note: Each VMap can be assigned to only one VLAN or VM group. However, each
VLAN or VM group may have multiple VMaps assigned to it.
When the optional serverports or non­serverports parameter is specified,
the action to add or remove the VMap is applied for either the switch server ports
(serverports) or uplink ports (non­serverports). If omitted, the operation
will be applied to all ports in the associated VLAN or VM group.
112
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VMap Example
In this example, EtherType 2 traffic from VLAN 3 server ports is mirrored to a
network monitor on port 4.
RS 8272(config)# access­control vmap 21 packet­format ethernet ethernet­type2
RS 8272(config)# access­control vmap 21 mirror port 4
RS 8272(config)# access­control vmap 21 action permit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# vmap 21 serverports
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 7: Access Control Lists
113
Using Storm Control Filters
Excessive transmission of broadcast or multicast traffic can result in a network
storm. A network storm can overwhelm your network with constant broadcast or
multicast traffic, and degrade network performance. Common symptoms of a
network storm are denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, slow network response times,
and network operations timing out.
The G8272 provides filters that can limit the number of the following packet types
transmitted by switch ports:
Broadcast packets
Multicast packets
 Unknown unicast packets (destination lookup failure)


Unicast packets whose destination MAC address is not in the Forwarding
Database are unknown unicasts. When an unknown unicast is encountered, the
switch handles it like a broadcast packet and floods it to all other ports in the
VLAN (broadcast domain). A high rate of unknown unicast traffic can have the
same negative effects as a broadcast storm.
Configuring Storm Control
Configure broadcast filters on each port that requires broadcast storm control. Set a
threshold that defines the total number of broadcast packets transmitted
(0-2097151), in packets per second. When the threshold is reached, no more packets
of the specified type are transmitted.
To filter broadcast packets on a port, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# storm­control broadcast level rate <packets per second>
To filter multicast packets on a port, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config­if)# storm­control multicast level rate <packets per second>
To filter unknown unicast packets on a port, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config­if)# storm­control unicast level rate <packets per second>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
114
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 3: Switch Basics
This section discusses basic switching functions:
 VLANs
 Port Trunking
 Spanning Tree Protocols (Spanning Tree Groups, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol,
and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol)
 Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
 Quality of Service
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
115
116
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 8. VLANs
This chapter describes network design and topology considerations for using
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs). VLANs commonly are used to split up
groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains, to create logical
segmentation of workgroups, and to enforce security policies among logical
segments. The following topics are discussed in this chapter:

“VLANs and Port VLAN ID Numbers” on page 118

“VLAN Tagging/Trunk Mode” on page 120

“VLAN Topologies and Design Considerations” on page 124
This section discusses how you can connect users and segments to a host that
supports many logical segments or subnets by using the flexibility of the
multiple VLAN system.

“Private VLANs” on page 127
Note: VLANs can be configured from the Command Line Interface (see “VLAN
Configuration” as well as “Port Configuration” in the Command Reference).
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
117
VLANs Overview
Setting up virtual LANs (VLANs) is a way to segment networks to increase
network flexibility without changing the physical network topology. With network
segmentation, each switch port connects to a segment that is a single broadcast
domain. When a switch port is configured to be a member of a VLAN, it is added
to a group of ports (workgroup) that belong to one broadcast domain.
Ports are grouped into broadcast domains by assigning them to the same VLAN.
Frames received in one VLAN can only be forwarded within that VLAN, and
multicast, broadcast, and unknown unicast frames are flooded only to ports in the
same VLAN.
The RackSwitch G8272 (G8272) supports jumbo frames with a Maximum
Transmission Unit (MTU) of bytes. Within each frame, 18 bytes are reserved for
the Ethernet header and CRC trailer. The remaining space in the frame comprise
the packet, which includes the payload and any additional overhead, such as
802.1q or VLAN tags. Jumbo frame support is automatic: it is enabled by default,
requires no manual configuration, and cannot be manually disabled.
VLANs and Port VLAN ID Numbers
VLAN Numbers
The G8272 supports up to 4095 VLANs per switch. Each can be identified with any
number between 1 and 4094. VLAN 1 is the default VLAN for the data ports.
VLAN 4095 is used by the management network, which includes the management
ports.
Use the following command to view VLAN information:
118
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
PVID/Native VLAN Numbers
Each port in the switch has a configurable default VLAN number, known as its
PVID. By default, the PVID for all non-management ports is set to 1, which
correlates to the default VLAN ID. The PVID for each port can be configured to any
VLAN number between 1 and 4094.
Use the following command to view PVIDs:
Use the following command to set the port PVID/Native VLAN:
Access Mode Port
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan <VLAN ID>
For Trunk Mode Port
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk native vlan <VLAN ID>
Each port on the switch can belong to one or more VLANs, and each VLAN can
have any number of switch ports in its membership. Any port that belongs to
multiple VLANs, however, must have VLAN tagging/trunk mode enabled (see
“VLAN Tagging/Trunk Mode” on page 120).
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 8: VLANs
119
VLAN Tagging/Trunk Mode
Lenovo Networking OS software supports 802.1Q VLAN tagging, providing
standards-based VLAN support for Ethernet systems.
Tagging places the VLAN identifier in the frame header of a packet, allowing each
port to belong to multiple VLANs. When you add a port to multiple VLANs, you
also must enable tagging on that port.
Since tagging fundamentally changes the format of frames transmitted on a tagged
port, you must carefully plan network designs to prevent tagged frames from
being transmitted to devices that do not support 802.1Q VLAN tags, or devices
where tagging is not enabled.
Important terms used with the 802.1Q tagging feature are:

VLAN identifier (VID)—the 12-bit portion of the VLAN tag in the frame header
that identifies an explicit VLAN.

Port VLAN identifier (PVID)—a classification mechanism that associates a port
with a specific VLAN. For example, a port with a PVID of 3 (PVID =3) assigns all
untagged frames received on this port to VLAN 3. Any untagged frames
received by the switch are classified with the PVID of the receiving port.

Tagged frame—a frame that carries VLAN tagging information in the header.
This VLAN tagging information is a 32-bit field (VLAN tag) in the frame header
that identifies the frame as belonging to a specific VLAN. Untagged frames are
marked (tagged) with this classification as they leave the switch through a port
that is configured as a tagged port.

Untagged frame— a frame that does not carry any VLAN tagging information
in the frame header.

Untagged member—a port that has been configured as an untagged member of
a specific VLAN. When an untagged frame exits the switch through an
untagged member port, the frame header remains unchanged. When a tagged
frame exits the switch through an untagged member port, the tag is stripped
and the tagged frame is changed to an untagged frame.

Tagged member—a port that has been configured as a tagged member of a
specific VLAN. When an untagged frame exits the switch through a tagged
member port, the frame header is modified to include the 32-bit tag associated
with the PVID. When a tagged frame exits the switch through a tagged member
port, the frame header remains unchanged (original VID remains).
Note: If a 802.1Q tagged frame is received by a port that has VLAN-tagging
disabled and the port VLAN ID (PVID) is different than the VLAN ID of the
packet, then the frame is dropped at the ingress port.
120
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Figure 2. Default VLAN settings
802.1Q Switch
VLAN 1
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
...
PVID = 1
DA
CRC
SA
Incoming
untagged
packet
Outgoing
untagged packet
(unchanged)
Data
CRC
Data
SA
DA
Key
By default:
All ports are assigned PVID = 1
All ports are untagged members of VLAN 1
BS45010A
Note: The port numbers specified in these illustrations may not directly
correspond to the physical port configuration of your switch model.
When a VLAN is configured, ports are added as members of the VLAN, and the
ports are defined as either tagged or untagged (see Figure 3 through Figure 6).
The default configuration settings for the G8272 has all ports set as untagged
members of VLAN 1 with all ports configured as PVID = 1. In the default
configuration example shown in Figure 2, all incoming packets are assigned to
VLAN 1 by the default port VLAN identifier (PVID =1).
Figure 3 through Figure 6 illustrate generic examples of VLAN tagging. In
Figure 3, untagged incoming packets are assigned directly to VLAN 2 (PVID = 2).
Port 5 is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2, and port 7 is configured as an
untagged member of VLAN 2.
Note: The port assignments in the following figures are not meant to match the
G8272.
Figure 3. Port-based VLAN assignment
Data
SA
Before
DA
Port 2
Port 3
802.1Q Switch
Port 6
Port 7
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
Port 5
CRC
Port 1
Port 4
PVID = 2
Untagged packet
Port 8
Untagged member
of VLAN 2
BS45011A
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 8: VLANs
121
As shown in Figure 4, the untagged packet is marked (tagged) as it leaves the
switch through port 5, which is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2. The
untagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through port 7, which
is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2.
Figure 4. 802.1Q tagging (after port-based VLAN assignment)
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
802.1Q Switch
Port 6
Untagged memeber
of VLAN 2
Port 7
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
Port 3
Port 5
PVID = 2
CRC*
Data
Tag
SA
DA
(*Recalculated)
Port 8
CRC
8100
Priority
CFI
VID = 2
16 bits
3 bits
1 bits
12 bits
Data
After
Outgoing
untagged packet
(unchanged)
SA
Key
DA
Priority
CFI
VID
- User_priority
- Canonical format indicator
- VLAN identifier
BS45012A
In Figure 5, tagged incoming packets are assigned directly to VLAN 2 because of
the tag assignment in the packet. Port 5 is configured as a tagged member of VLAN
2, and port 7 is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2.
Figure 5. 802.1Q tag assignment
Port 1
PVID = 2
Port 2
Port 3
Data
Tag
Before
SA
DA
802.1Q Switch
Port 6
Port 7
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
Port 5
CRC
Port 4
Tagged packet
Port 8
Untagged member
of VLAN 2
BS45013A
As shown in Figure 6, the tagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch
through port 5, which is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2. However, the
tagged packet is stripped (untagged) as it leaves the switch through port 7, which
is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2.
122
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Figure 6. 802.1Q tagging (after 802.1Q tag assignment)
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
802.1Q Switch
Port 6
Untagged member
of VLAN 2
Port 7
CRC*
Tagged member
of VLAN 2
Port 3
Port 5
PVID = 2
CRC
Data
Tag
SA
DA
Port 8
(*Recalculated)
8100
Priority
CFI
VID = 2
16 bits
3 bits
1 bit
12 bits
Data
SA
DA
Outgoing
untagged packet
changed
(tag removed)
After
Key
Priority
CFI
VID
- User_priority
- Canonical format indicator
- VLAN identifier
BS45014A
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 8: VLANs
123
VLAN Topologies and Design Considerations
Note the following when working with VLAN topologies:

By default, the G8272 software is configured so that tagging/trunk mode is
disabled on all ports.

By default, the G8272 software is configured so that all data ports are members
of VLAN 1.

When using Spanning Tree, STG 2-128 may contain only one VLAN unless
Multiple Spanning-Tree Protocol (MSTP) mode is used. With MSTP mode, STG
1 to 32 can include multiple VLANs.

All ports involved in both trunking and port mirroring must have the same
VLAN configuration. If a port is on a trunk with a mirroring port, the VLAN
configuration cannot be changed. For more information trunk groups, see “Ports
and Trunking” on page 129 and “Port Mirroring” on page 579.
Multiple VLANs with Tagging/Trunk Mode Adapters
Figure 7 illustrates a network topology described in Note: on page 125 and the
configuration example on page 126.
Figure 7. Multiple VLANs with VLAN-Tagged Gigabit Adapters
Enterprise
Routing Switch
Server 1
VLAN 1
124
Server 2
VLAN 1
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Enterprise
Routing Switch
Server 3
VLAN 2
Server 4
VLAN 3
Server 5
VLAN 1, 2
The features of this VLAN are described in the following table.
Table 14. Multiple VLANs Example
Component
Description
G8272 switch
This switch is configured with three VLANs that represent
three different IP subnets. Five ports are connected
downstream to servers. Two ports are connected upstream to
routing switches. Uplink ports are members of all three
VLANs, with VLAN tagging/trunk mode enabled.
Server 1
This server is a member of VLAN 1 and has presence in only
one IP subnet. The associated switch port is only a member of
VLAN 1, so tagging/trunk mode is disabled.
Server 2
This server is a member of VLAN 1 and has presence in only
one IP subnet. The associated switch port is only a member of
VLAN 1, so tagging/trunk mode is disabled.
Server 3
This server belongs to VLAN 2, and it is logically in the same
IP subnet as Server 5. The associated switch port has
tagging/trunk mode disabled.
Server 4
A member of VLAN 3, this server can communicate only with
other servers via a router. The associated switch port has
tagging/trunk mode disabled.
Server 5
A member of VLAN 1 and VLAN 2, this server can
communicate only with Server 1, Server 2, and Server 3. The
associated switch port has tagging/trunk mode enabled.
Enterprise
Routing
switches
These switches must have all three VLANs (VLAN 1, 2, 3)
configured. They can communicate with Server 1, Server 2,
and Server 5 via VLAN 1. They can communicate with
Server 3 and Server 5 via VLAN 2. They can communicate
with Server 4 via VLAN 3. Tagging/trunk mode on switch
ports is enabled.
Note: VLAN tagging/trunk mode is required only on ports that are connected to
other switches or on ports that connect to tag-capable end-stations, such as servers
with VLAN-tagging/trunk mode adapters.
To configure a specific VLAN on a trunk port, the following conditions must be
met:

The port must be in trunk mode.

The VLAN must be in the trunk’s allowed VLAN range. By default, the range
includes all VLANs.

The VLAN must be un-reserved.

The VLAN must be created.
The order in which the conditions above are met is not relevant. However, all
conditions must be met collectively. When the final condition is met, the VLAN is
enabled on the port. When the first condition is broken, the VLAN is disabled.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 8: VLANs
125
VLAN Configuration Example
Use the following procedure to configure the example network shown in Figure 7
on page 124.
1. Enable VLAN tagging/trunk mode on server ports that support multiple VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Enable tagging/trunk mode on uplink ports that support multiple VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 19
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2,3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 20
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2,3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
3. Configure server ports that belong to a single VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 4
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode access
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
By default, all ports are members of VLAN 1, so configure only those ports that
belong to other VLANs.
126
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide Layer 2 isolation between the ports within the same
broadcast domain. Private VLANs can control traffic within a VLAN domain, and
provide port-based security for host servers.
Lenovo N/OS supports Private VLAN configuration as described in RFC 5517.
Use Private VLANs to partition a VLAN domain into sub-domains. Each
sub-domain is comprised of one primary VLAN and one or more secondary
VLANs, as follows:
Primary VLAN—carries unidirectional traffic downstream from promiscuous
ports. Each Private VLAN configuration has only one primary VLAN. All ports
in the Private VLAN are members of the primary VLAN.
 Secondary VLAN—Secondary VLANs are internal to a private VLAN domain,
and are defined as follows:


Isolated VLAN—carries unidirectional traffic upstream from the host servers
toward ports in the primary VLAN and the gateway. Each Private VLAN
configuration can contain only one isolated VLAN.

Community VLAN—carries upstream traffic from ports in the community
VLAN to other ports in the same community, and to ports in the primary
VLAN and the gateway. Each Private VLAN configuration can contain
multiple community VLANs.
After you define the primary VLAN and one or more secondary VLANs, you map
the secondary VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.
Private VLAN Ports
Private VLAN ports are defined as follows:
Promiscuous—A promiscuous port is a port that belongs to the primary VLAN.
The promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces, including ports
in the secondary VLANs (Isolated VLAN and Community VLANs).
 Isolated—An isolated port is a host port that belongs to an isolated VLAN. Each
isolated port has complete layer 2 separation from other ports within the same
private VLAN (including other isolated ports), except for the promiscuous ports.



Traffic sent to an isolated port is blocked by the Private VLAN, except the
traffic from promiscuous ports.

Traffic received from an isolated port is forwarded only to promiscuous ports.
Community—A community port is a host port that belongs to a community
VLAN. Community ports can communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN, and with promiscuous ports. These interfaces are isolated at layer
2 from all other interfaces in other communities and from isolated ports within
the Private VLAN.
Configuration Guidelines
The following guidelines apply when configuring Private VLANs:
The default VLAN 1 cannot be a Private VLAN.
IGMP Snooping must be disabled on Private VLANs.
 All VLANs that comprise the Private VLAN must belong to the same Spanning
Tree Group.


© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 8: VLANs
127
Configuration Example
Follow this procedure to configure a Private VLAN.
1. Select a VLAN and define the Private VLAN type as primary.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 700
RS 8272(config­vlan)# private­vlan primary
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
2. Configure a promiscuous port for VLAN 700.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode private­vlan
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport private­vlan mapping 700
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
3. Configure two secondary VLANs: isolated VLAN and community VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 701
RS 8272(config­vlan)# private­vlan isolated
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 702
RS 8272(config­vlan)# private­vlan community
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
4. Map secondary VLANs to primary VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 700­702
RS 8272(config­vlan)# stg 1
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 700
RS 8272(config­vlan)# private­vlan association 701,702
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
5. Configure host ports for secondary VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode private­vlan
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport private­vlan host­association 700 701
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 3
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode private­vlan
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport private­vlan host­association 700 702
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
6. Verify the configuration.
RS 8272(config)# show vlan private­vlan
Primary Secondary Type Ports vPorts
­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­
­­­­­­­­
700 701 isolated 1 2 empty
700 702 community 1 3 empty
128
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 9. Ports and Trunking
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth, multi-link connections between the
RackSwitch G8272 (G8272) and other trunk-capable devices. A trunk group is a
group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth to create a single,
larger virtual link. This chapter provides configuration background and examples
for trunking multiple ports together:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“Configuring QSFP+ Ports” on page 130

“Trunking Overview” on page 132”

“Configuring a Static Port Trunk” on page 134

“Configurable Trunk Hash Algorithm” on page 140

“Link Aggregation Control Protocol” on page 136
129
Configuring QSFP+ Ports
QSFP+ ports support both 10GbE and 40GbE, as shown in Table 15.
Table 15. QSFP+ Port Numbering
Physical Port Number
40GbE mode
10GbE mode
Port 49
Port 49
Ports 49/1-49/4
Port 50
Port 50
Ports 50/1-50/4
Port 51
Port 51
Port 51/1-51/4
Port 52
Port 52
Port 52/1-52/4
Port 53
Port 53
Port 53/1-53/4
Use the following procedure to change the QSFP+ port mode.
1. Display the current port mode for the QSFP+ ports.
#show boot qsfp­port­modes
QSFP ports booted configuration:
Port 49/1, 49/2, 49/3, 49/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 50/1, 50/2, 50/3, 50/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 51/1, 51/2, 51/3, 51/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 52/1, 52/2, 52/3, 52/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 53/1, 53/2, 53/3, 53/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 54/1, 54/2, 54/3, 54/4 ­ 10G Mode
QSFP ports saved configuration:
Port 49/1, 49/2, 49/3, 49/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 50/1, 50/2, 50/3, 50/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 51/1, 51/2, 51/3, 51/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 52/1, 52/2, 52/3, 52/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 53/1, 53/2, 53/3, 53/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 54/1, 54/2, 54/3, 54/4 ­ 10G Mode
2. Change the port mode to 40GbE. Select the physical port number.
RS 8272(config)#boot qsfp­40Gports 50/1
130
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
3. Verify the change.
# show boot qsfp­port­modes
QSFP ports booted configuration:
Port 49/1, 49/2, 49/3, 49/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 50/1, 50/2, 50/3, 50/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 51/1, 51/2, 51/3, 51/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 52/1, 52/2, 52/3, 52/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 53/1, 53/2, 53/3, 53/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 54/1, 54/2, 54/3, 54/4 ­ 10G Mode
QSFP ports saved configuration:
Port 49/1, 49/2, 49/3, 49/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 50 ­ 40G Mode
Port 51/1, 51/2, 51/3, 51/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 52/1, 52/2, 52/3, 52/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 53/1, 53/2, 53/3, 53/4 ­ 10G Mode
Port 54/1, 54/2, 54/3, 54/4 ­ 10G Mode
4. Reset the switch.
RS 8272(config)# reload
Use the ‘no’ form of the command to reset a port to 10GbE mode.
RS 8272(config)# no boot qsfp­40Gports <port number or a range of ports> © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 9: Ports and Trunking
131
Trunking Overview
When using port trunk groups between two switches, as shown in Figure 8, you
can create a virtual link between the switches, operating with combined
throughput levels that depends on how many physical ports are included.
Each G8272 supports up to 72 trunk groups. Two trunk types are available: static
trunk groups (portchannel), and dynamic LACP trunk groups. Each type can
contain up to 32 member ports, depending on the port type and availability.
Figure 8. Port Trunk Group
Switch 1
Switch 2
Aggregate
Port Trunk
Trunk groups are also useful for connecting a G8272 to third-party devices that
support link aggregation, such as Cisco routers and switches with EtherChannel
technology (not ISL trunking technology) and Sun's Quad Fast Ethernet Adapter.
Trunk Group technology is compatible with these devices when they are
configured manually.
Trunk traffic is statistically distributed among the ports in a trunk group, based on
a variety of configurable options.
Also, since each trunk group is comprised of multiple physical links, the trunk
group is inherently fault tolerant. As long as one connection between the switches
is available, the trunk remains active and statistical load balancing is maintained
whenever a port in a trunk group is lost or returned to service.
132
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Static Trunks
Static Trunk Requirements
When you create and enable a static trunk, the trunk members (switch ports) take
on certain settings necessary for correct operation of the trunking feature.
Before you configure your trunk, you must consider these settings, along with
specific configuration rules, as follows:
1. Read the configuration rules provided in the section, “Static Trunk Group
Configuration Rules” on page 133.
2. Determine which switch ports (up to 32) are to become trunk members (the specific
ports making up the trunk).
3. Ensure that the chosen switch ports are set to enabled. Trunk member ports must
have the same VLAN and Spanning Tree configuration.
4. Consider how the existing Spanning Tree will react to the new trunk configuration.
See Chapter 10, “Spanning Tree Protocols,” for Spanning Tree Group configuration
guidelines.
5. Consider how existing VLANs will be affected by the addition of a trunk.
Static Trunk Group Configuration Rules
The trunking feature operates according to specific configuration rules. When
creating trunks, consider the following rules that determine how a trunk group
reacts in any network topology:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

All trunks must originate from one logical device, and lead to one logical
destination device. Usually, a trunk connects two physical devices together with
multiple links. However, in some networks, a single logical device may include
multiple physical devices or when using VLAGs (see “Virtual Link Aggregation
Groups” on page 165). In such cases, links in a trunk are allowed to connect to
multiple physical devices because they act as one logical device.

Any physical switch port can belong to only one trunk group.

Trunking from third-party devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel®
technology.

All ports in a trunk must have the same link configuration (speed, duplex, flow
control), the same VLAN properties, and the same Spanning Tree, storm control,
and ACL configuration. It is recommended that the ports in a trunk be members
of the same VLAN.

Each trunk inherits its port configuration (speed, flow control, tagging) from the
first member port. As additional ports are added to the trunk, their settings
must be changed to match the trunk configuration.

When a port leaves a trunk, its configuration parameters are retained.

You cannot configure a trunk member as a monitor port in a port-mirroring
configuration.
Chapter 9: Ports and Trunking
133

Trunks cannot be monitored by a monitor port; however, trunk members can be
monitored.
Configuring a Static Port Trunk
In the following example, three ports are trunked between two switches.
Figure 9. Port Trunk Group Configuration Example
2
1
Trunk 3
9 16
Trunk Group 3 combines
Ports 2, 9, and 16
11 18
Trunk 1
Trunk Group 1 combines
Ports 1, 11, and 18
Prior to configuring each switch in this example, you must connect to the
appropriate switches as the administrator.
Note: For details about accessing and using any of the commands described in this
example, see the RackSwitch G8272 ISCLI Reference.
1. Follow these steps on the G8272:
a. Define a trunk group.
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 3 port 2,9,16
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 3 enable
b. Verify the configuration.
# show portchannel information
Examine the resulting information. If any settings are incorrect, make
appropriate changes.
2. Repeat the process on the other switch.
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 1 port 1,11,18
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 1 enable
3. Connect the switch ports that will be members in the trunk group.
Trunk group 3 (on the G8272) is now connected to trunk group 1 (on the other
switch).
Note: In this example, two G8272 switches are used. If a third-party device supporting link aggregation is used (such as Cisco routers and switches with EtherChannel
technology or Sun's Quad Fast Ethernet Adapter), trunk groups on the third-party
device must be configured manually. Connection problems could arise when using
automatic trunk group negotiation on the third-party device.
134
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. Examine the trunking information on each switch.
# show portchannel information
PortChannel 3: Enabled
Protocol—Static
port state:
2: STG 1 forwarding
9: STG 1 forwarding
16: STG 1 forwarding
Information about each port in each configured trunk group is displayed. Make
sure that trunk groups consist of the expected ports and that each port is in the
expected state.
The following restrictions apply:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Any physical switch port can belong to only one trunk group.

Up to 32 ports can belong to the same trunk group.

All ports in static trunks must be have the same link configuration (speed, duplex,
flow control).

Trunking from third-party devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel®
technology.
Chapter 9: Ports and Trunking
135
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LACP Overview
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is an IEEE 802.3ad standard for
grouping several physical ports into one logical port (known as a dynamic trunk
group or Link Aggregation group) with any device that supports the standard.
Please refer to IEEE 802.3ad-2002 for a full description of the standard.
The 802.3ad standard allows standard Ethernet links to form a single Layer 2 link
using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). Link aggregation is a
method of grouping physical link segments of the same media type and speed in
full duplex, and treating them as if they were part of a single, logical link segment.
If a link in a LACP trunk group fails, traffic is reassigned dynamically to the
remaining link(s) of the dynamic trunk group.
Note: LACP implementation in the Lenovo Networking OS does not support the
Churn machine, an option used to detect if the port is operable within a bounded
time period between the actor and the partner. Only the Marker Responder is
implemented, and there is no marker protocol generator.
A port’s Link Aggregation Identifier (LAG ID) determines how the port can be
aggregated. The Link Aggregation ID (LAG ID) is constructed mainly from the
partner switch’s system ID and the port’s admin key, as follows:

System ID: an integer value based on the partner switch’s MAC address and the
system priority assigned in the CLI.

Admin key: a port’s Admin key is an integer value (1-65535) that you can
configure in the CLI. Each switch port that participates in the same LACP trunk
group must have the same admin key value. The Admin key is local significant,
which means the partner switch does not need to use the same Admin key
value.
For example, consider two switches, an Actor (the G8272) and a Partner (another
switch), as shown in Table 16.
Table 16. Actor vs. Partner LACP configuration
Actor Switch
Partner Switch
Port 7 (admin key = 100)
Port 1 (admin key = 50)
Primary trunk group
Port 8 (admin key = 100)
Port 2 (admin key = 50)
Primary trunk group
Port 9 (admin key = 100)
Port 3 (admin key = 70)
Secondary trunk group
Port 10 (admin key = 100) Port 4 (admin key = 70)
Secondary trunk group
In the configuration shown in Table 16, Actor switch ports 7 and 8 aggregate to
form an LACP trunk group with Partner switch ports 1 and 2. Only ports with the
same LAG ID are aggregated in the trunk group. Actor switch ports 9 and 10 are
not aggregated in the same trunk group, because although they have the same
admin key on the Actor switch, their LAG IDs are different (due to a different
Partner switch admin key configuration). Instead, they form a secondary trunk
group with Partner switch ports 3 and 4.
136
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
LACP automatically determines which member links can be aggregated and then
aggregates them. It provides for the controlled addition and removal of physical
links for the link aggregation.
Static LACP Trunks
To prevent switch ports with the same admin key from forming multiple trunk
groups, you can configure the LACP trunk as static. In a static LACP trunk, ports
with the same admin key, but with different LAG IDs, compete to get aggregated
in a trunk group. The LAG ID for the trunk group is decided based on the first port
that is aggregated in the group. Ports with this LAG ID get aggregated and the
other ports are placed in suspended mode. As per the configuration shown in
Table 16, if port 7 gets aggregated first, then the LAG ID of port 7 would be the
LAG ID of the trunk. Port 8 will join the trunk while ports 9 and 10 would be
placed in suspended mode. When in suspended mode, a port transmits only LACP
data units (LACPDUs) and discards all other traffic.
A port may also be placed in suspended mode for the following reasons:

When LACP is configured on the port but it stops receiving LACPDUs from the
partner switch.

When the port has a different LAG ID because of the partner switch MAC or
port LACP key being different. For example: when a switch is connected to two
partners.
Static LACP trunks are configured by associating the LACP admin key to a
portchannel ID within a dedicated LACP portchannel group range:
RS 8272(config)# portchannel <73-144> lacp key <adminkey of the LAG>
LACP Port Modes
Up to 64 ports can be assigned to a single LAG, but only 32 ports can actively
participate in the LAG at a given time.
Each port on the switch can have one of the following LACP modes.

off (default)
The user can configure this port in to a regular static trunk group.

active
The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port sends LACPDU packets
to partner system ports.

passive
The port is capable of forming an LACP trunk. This port only responds to the
LACPDU packets sent from an LACP active port.
Each active LACP port transmits LACP data units (LACPDUs), while each passive
LACP port listens for LACPDUs. During LACP negotiation, the admin key is
exchanged. The LACP trunk group is enabled as long as the information matches
at both ends of the link. If the admin key value changes for a port at either end of
the link, that port’s association with the LACP trunk group is lost.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 9: Ports and Trunking
137
When the system is initialized, all ports by default are in LACP off mode and are
assigned unique admin keys. To make a group of ports aggregatable, you assign
them all the same admin key. You must set the port’s LACP mode to active to activate
LACP negotiation. You can set other port’s LACP mode to passive, to reduce the
amount of LACPDU traffic at the initial trunk-forming stage.
Use the following command to check whether the ports are trunked:
RS 8272 # show lacp information Note: If you configure LACP on ports with 802.1X network access control, make
sure the ports on both sides of the connection are properly configured for both
LACP and 802.1X.
LACP Individual
Ports assigned with an LACP admin key are prevented by default from forming
individual links if they cannot join an LACP trunk group. To override this
behavior, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config) # interface port <port no.>
RS 8272(config­if) # no lacp suspend­individual
This allows the selected ports to be treated as normal link-up ports, which may
forward data traffic according to STP, Hot Links or other applications, if they do
not receive any LACPDUs.
To configure the LACP individual setting for all the ports in a static LACP trunk,
use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface portchannel lacp <adminkey of the LAG>
RS 8272(config­PortChannel)# [no] lacp suspend­individual
or:
RS 8272(config)# interface portchannel <static trunk ID of the LAG>
RS 8272(config­PortChannel)# [no] lacp suspend­individual
138
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
LACP Minimum Links Option
For dynamic trunks that require a guaranteed amount of bandwidth to be
considered useful, you can specify the minimum number of links for the trunk. If
the specified minimum number of ports are not available, the trunk link will not be
established. If an active LACP trunk loses one or more component links, the trunk
will be placed in the down state if the number of links falls to less than the specified
minimum. By default, the minimum number of links is 1, meaning that LACP
trunks will remain operational as long as at least one link is available.
The LACP minimum links setting can be configured as follows:

Via interface configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number or range>
RS 8272(config­if)# port­channel min­links <minimum links>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit

Or via portchannel configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# interface portchannel lacp <LACP key>
RS 8272(config­PortChannel)# port­channel min­links <minimum links>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Configuring LACP
Use the following procedure to configure LACP for ports 7, 8, 9 and 10 to
participate in link aggregation.
1. Configure port parameters. All ports that participate in the LACP trunk group
must have the same settings, including VLAN membership.
2. Select the port range and define the admin key. Only ports with the same admin
key can form an LACP trunk group.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 7­10
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 100
3. Set the LACP mode.
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
4. Allow member ports to individually participate in normal data traffic if no
LACPDUs are received.
RS 8272(config­if)# no lacp suspend­individual
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
5. Set the link aggregation as static, by associating it with trunk ID 65:
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 65 lacp key 100
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 9: Ports and Trunking
139
Configurable Trunk Hash Algorithm
Traffic in a trunk group is statistically distributed among member ports using a
hash process where various address and attribute bits from each transmitted frame
are recombined to specify the particular trunk port the frame will use.
The switch can be configured to use a variety of hashing options. To achieve the
most even traffic distribution, select options that exhibit a wide range of values for
your particular network. Avoid hashing on information that is not usually present
in the expected traffic, or which does not vary.
The G8272 supports the following hashing options:

Layer 2 source MAC address
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l2thash l2­source­mac­address

Layer 2 destination MAC address
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l2thash l2­destination­mac­address

Layer 2 source and destination MAC address
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l2thash l2­source­destination­mac

Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 source IP address
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l3thash l3­source­ip­address

Layer 3 IPv4/IPv6 destination IP address
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l3thash l3­destination­ip­address

Layer 3 source and destination IPv4/IPv6 address (the default)
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l3thash l3­source­destination­ip

Layer 2 hash configuration
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l3thash l3­use­l2­hash

Layer 4 port hash
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash l4port

Ingress port hash
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash ingress
140
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The G8272 supports the following FCoE hashing options:
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash fcoe cntag­id
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash fcoe destination­id
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash fcoe fabric­id
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash fcoe originator­id
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash fcoe responder­id
RS 8272(config)# portchannel thash fcoe source­id
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 9: Ports and Trunking
141
142
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 10. Spanning Tree Protocols
When multiple paths exist between two points on a network, Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP), or one of its enhanced variants, can prevent broadcast loops and
ensure that the RackSwitch G8272 (G8272) uses only the most efficient network
path.
This chapter covers the following topics:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“Spanning Tree Protocol Modes” on page 144

“Global STP Control” on page 145

“PVRST Mode” on page 145

“Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol” on page 158

“Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol” on page 160

“Port Type and Link Type” on page 163
143
Spanning Tree Protocol Modes
Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 supports the following STP modes:

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
IEEE 802.1D (2004) RSTP allows devices to detect and eliminate logical loops in
a bridged or switched network. When multiple paths exist, STP configures the
network so that only the most efficient path is used. If that path fails, STP
automatically configures the best alternative active path on the network to
sustain network operations. RSTP is an enhanced version of IEEE 802.1D (1998)
STP, providing more rapid convergence of the Spanning Tree network path
states on STG 1.
See “Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol” on page 158 for details.

Per-VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST)
PVRST mode is based on RSTP to provide rapid Spanning Tree convergence, but
supports instances of Spanning Tree, allowing one STG per VLAN. PVRST
mode is compatible with Cisco R-PVST/R-PVST+ mode.
PVRST is the default Spanning Tree mode on the G8272. See “PVRST Mode” on
page 145 for details.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
IEEE 802.1Q (2003) MSTP provides both rapid convergence and load balancing
in a VLAN environment. MSTP allows multiple STGs, with multiple VLANs in
each.
See “Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol” on page 160 for details.
144
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Global STP Control
By default, the Spanning Tree feature is globally enabled on the switch, and is set
for PVRST mode. Spanning Tree (and thus any currently configured STP mode)
can be globally disabled using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode disable
Spanning Tree can be re-enabled by specifying the STP mode:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode {pvrst|rstp|mst}
where the command options represent the following modes:
rstp:
pvrst:
 mst:


RSTP mode
PVRST mode
MSTP mode
PVRST Mode
Note: Per-VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST) is enabled by default on the
G8272.
Using STP, network devices detect and eliminate logical loops in a bridged or
switched network. When multiple paths exist, Spanning Tree configures the
network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. If that path fails,
Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain
network operations.
N/OS PVRST mode is based on IEEE 802.1w RSTP. Like RSTP, PVRST mode
provides rapid Spanning Tree convergence. However, PVRST mode is enhanced
for multiple instances of Spanning Tree. In PVRST mode, each VLAN may be
automatically or manually assigned to one of 127 available STGs. Each STG acts as
an independent, simultaneous instance of STP. PVRST uses IEEE 802.1Q tagging to
differentiate STP BPDUs and is compatible with Cisco R-PVST/R-PVST+ modes.
The relationship between ports, trunk groups, VLANs, and Spanning Trees is
shown in Table 17.
Table 17. Ports, Trunk Groups, and VLANs
Switch Element
Belongs To
Port
Trunk group or one or more VLANs
Trunk group
One or more VLANs
VLAN (non-default)

PVRST: One VLAN per STG
RSTP: All VLANs are in STG 1
 MSTP: Multiple VLANs per STG

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
145
Port States
The port state controls the forwarding and learning processes of Spanning Tree. In
PVRST, the port state has been consolidated to the following: discarding,
learning, and forwarding.
Due to the sequence involved in these STP states, considerable delays may occur
while paths are being resolved. To mitigate delays, ports defined as edge ports
(“Port Type and Link Type” on page 163) may bypass the discarding and
learning states, and enter directly into the forwarding state.
Bridge Protocol Data Units
Bridge Protocol Data Units Overview
To create a Spanning Tree, the switch generates a configuration Bridge Protocol
Data Unit (BPDU), which it then forwards out of its ports. All switches in the Layer
2 network participating in the Spanning Tree gather information about other
switches in the network through an exchange of BPDUs.
A bridge sends BPDU packets at a configurable regular interval (2 seconds by
default). The BPDU is used to establish a path, much like a hello packet in IP
routing. BPDUs contain information about the transmitting bridge and its ports,
including bridge MAC addresses, bridge priority, port priority, and path cost. If the
ports are in trunk mode/tagged, each port sends out a special BPDU containing the
tagged information.
The generic action of a switch on receiving a BPDU is to compare the received
BPDU to its own BPDU that it will transmit. If the priority of the received BPDU is
better than its own priority, it will replace its BPDU with the received BPDU. Then,
the switch adds its own bridge ID number and increments the path cost of the
BPDU. The switch uses this information to block any necessary ports.
Note: If STP is globally disabled, BPDUs from external devices will transit the
switch transparently. If STP is globally enabled, for ports where STP is turned off,
inbound BPDUs will instead be discarded.
Determining the Path for Forwarding BPDUs
When determining which port to use for forwarding and which port to block, the
G8272 uses information in the BPDU, including each bridge ID. A technique based
on the “lowest root cost” is then computed to determine the most efficient path for
forwarding.
Bridge Priority
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG
root bridge. To make one switch become the root bridge, configure the bridge
priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the
value, the higher the bridge priority. Use the following command to configure the
bridge priority:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp <STG> bridge priority <0-65535>
146
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Port Priority
The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the root port or the
designated port. The case for the root port is when two switches are connected
using a minimum of two links with the same path-cost. The case for the designated
port is in a network topology that has multiple bridge ports with the same
path-cost connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority
becomes the designated port for the segment. Use the following command to
configure the port priority:
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree stp <STG> priority <port priority>
where priority value is a number from 0 to 240, in increments of 16 (such as 0, 16, 32,
and so on). If the specified priority value is not evenly divisible by 16, the value will
be automatically rounded down to the nearest valid increment whenever manually
changed in the configuration, or whenever a configuration file from a release prior
to N/OS 6.5 is loaded.
Root Guard
The root guard feature provides a way to enforce the root bridge placement in the
network. It keeps a new device from becoming root and thereby forcing STP
re-convergence. If a root-guard enabled port detects a root device, that port will be
placed in a blocked state.
You can configure the root guard at the port level using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree guard root
The default state is “none”, i.e. disabled.
Loop Guard
In general, STP resolves redundant network topologies into loop-free topologies.
The loop guard feature performs additional checking to detect loops that might not
be found using Spanning Tree. STP loop guard ensures that a non-designated port
does not become a designated port.
To globally enable loop guard, enter the following command:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree loopguard
Note: The global loop guard command will be effective on a port only if the
port-level loop guard command is set to default as shown below:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# no spanning­tree guard
To enable loop guard at the port level, enter the following command:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree guard loop
The default state is “none”, meaning disabled.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
147
Port Path Cost
The port path cost assigns lower values to high-bandwidth ports, such as 10
Gigabit Ethernet, to encourage their use. The objective is to use the fastest links so
that the route with the lowest cost is chosen. A value of 0 (the default) indicates
that the default cost will be computed for an auto-negotiated link or trunk speed.
Use the following command to modify the port path cost:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree stp <STG> path­cost <path cost value>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
The port path cost can be a value from 1 to 200000000. Specify 0 for automatic path
cost.
148
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Simple STP Configuration
Figure 10 depicts a simple topology using a switch-to-switch link between two
G8272 1 and 2.
Figure 10. Spanning Tree Blocking a Switch-to-Switch Link
Enterprise
Routing
Switches
Switch 1
Switch 2
x
STP
Blocks Link
Server
Server
Server
Server
To prevent a network loop among the switches, STP must block one of the links
between them. In this case, it is desired that STP block the link between the Lenovo
switches, and not one of the G8272 uplinks or the Enterprise switch trunk.
During operation, if one G8272 experiences an uplink failure, STP will activate the
Lenovo switch-to-switch link so that server traffic on the affected G8272 may pass
through to the active uplink on the other G8272, as shown in Figure 11.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
149
Figure 11. Spanning Tree Restoring the Switch-to-Switch Link
Enterprise
Routing
Switches
Switch 1
Server
Uplink
Failure
STP
Restores Link
Server
Server
Switch 2
Server
In this example, port 10 on each G8272 is used for the switch-to-switch link. To
ensure that the G8272 switch-to-switch link is blocked during normal operation,
the port path cost is set to a higher value than other paths in the network. To
configure the port path cost on the switch-to-switch links in this example, use the
following commands on each G8272.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 10
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree stp 1 path­cost 60000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
150
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Groups
PVRST mode supports a maximum of 128 STGs, with each STG acting as an
independent, simultaneous instance of STP.
Multiple STGs provide multiple data paths which can be used for load-balancing
and redundancy. To enable load balancing between two G8272s using multiple
STGs, configure each path with a different VLAN and then assign each VLAN to a
separate STG. Since each STG is independent, they each send their own IEEE
802.1Q tagged Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).
Each STG behaves as a bridge group and forms a loop-free topology. The default
STG 1 may contain multiple VLANs (typically until they can be assigned to
another STG). STGs 2-127 may contain only one VLAN each.
Using Multiple STGs to Eliminate False Loops
Figure 12 shows a simple example of why multiple STGs are needed. In the figure,
two ports on a G8272 are connected to two ports on an application switch. Each of
the links is configured for a different VLAN, preventing a network loop. However,
in the first network, since a single instance of Spanning Tree is running on all the
ports of the G8272, a physical loop is assumed to exist, and one of the VLANs is
blocked, impacting connectivity even though no actual loop exists.
Figure 12. Using Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree Group
False x
Loop
Switch 2
VLAN 30
VLAN 1
Switch 1
STG 1
VLAN 1
is active
STG 2
VLAN 30
is active
Application Switch
Application Switch
With a single Spanning Tree,
one link becomes blocked.
Using multiple STGs,
both links may be active.
In the second network, the problem of improper link blocking is resolved when the
VLANs are placed into different Spanning Tree Groups (STGs). Since each STG has
its own independent instance of Spanning Tree, each STG is responsible only for
the loops within its own VLAN. This eliminates the false loop, and allows both
VLANs to forward packets between the switches at the same time.
VLANs and STG Assignment
In PVRST mode, up to 128 STGs are supported. Ports cannot be added directly to
an STG. Instead, ports must be added as members of a VLAN, and the VLAN must
then be assigned to the STG.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
151
STG 1 is the default STG. Although VLANs can be added to or deleted from
default STG 1, the STG itself cannot be deleted from the system. By default, STG 1
is enabled and includes VLAN 1, which by default includes all switch ports (except
for management VLANs and management ports).
STG 128 is reserved for switch management. By default, STG 128 is disabled, but
includes management VLAN 4095 and the management ports (MGMT-A and
MGMT-B).
By default, all other STGs (STG 2 through 127) are enabled, though they initially
include no member VLANs. VLANs must be assigned to STGs. By default, this is
done automatically using VLAN Automatic STG Assignment (VASA), though it
can also be done manually (see “Manually Assigning STGs” on page 152.
When VASA is enabled (as by default), each time a new VLAN is configured, the
switch will automatically assign that new VLAN to its own STG. Conversely, when
a VLAN is deleted, if its STG is not associated with any other VLAN, the STG is
returned to the available pool.
The specific STG number to which the VLAN is assigned is based on the VLAN
number itself. For low VLAN numbers (1 through 127), the switch will attempt to
assign the VLAN to its matching STG number. For higher numbered VLANs, the
STG assignment is based on a simple modulus calculation; the attempted STG
number will “wrap around,” starting back at the top of STG list each time the end
of the list is reached. However, if the attempted STG is already in use, the switch
will select the next available STG. If an empty STG is not available when creating a
new VLAN, the VLAN is automatically assigned to default STG 1.
If ports are tagged, each tagged port sends out a special BPDU containing the
tagged information. Also, when a tagged port belongs to more than one STG, the
egress BPDUs are tagged to distinguish the BPDUs of one STG from those of
another STG.
VASA is enabled by default, but can be disabled or re-enabled using the following
commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] spanning­tree stg­auto
If VASA is disabled, when you create a new VLAN, that VLAN automatically
belongs to default STG 1. To place the VLAN in a different STG, assign it manually.
VASA applies only to PVRST mode and is ignored in RSTP and MSTP modes.
Manually Assigning STGs
The administrator may manually assign VLANs to specific STGs, whether or not
VASA is enabled.
1. If no VLANs exist (other than default VLAN 1), see “Guidelines for Creating
VLANs” on page 153 for information about creating VLANs and assigning ports to
them.
152
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
2. Assign the VLAN to an STG using one of the following methods:

From the global configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp <STG number> vlan <VLAN>

Or from within the VLAN configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <VLAN numbers>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# stg <STG number>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
When a VLAN is assigned to a new STG, the VLAN is automatically removed from
its prior STG.
Note: For proper operation with switches that use Cisco PVST+, it is
recommended that you create a separate STG for each VLAN.
Guidelines for Creating VLANs
Follow these guidelines when creating VLANs:

When you create a new VLAN, if VASA is enabled (the default), that VLAN is
automatically assigned its own STG. If VASA is disabled, the VLAN
automatically belongs to STG 1, the default STG. To place the VLAN in a
different STG, see “Manually Assigning STGs” on page 152. The VLAN is
automatically removed from its old STG before being placed into the new STG.

Each VLANs must be contained within a single STG; a VLAN cannot span
multiple STGs. By confining VLANs within a single STG, you avoid problems
with Spanning Tree blocking ports and causing a loss of connectivity within the
VLAN. When a VLAN spans multiple switches, it is recommended that the
VLAN remain within the same STG (be assigned the same STG ID) across all the
switches.

If ports are tagged, all trunked ports can belong to multiple STGs.

A port cannot be directly added to an STG. The port must first be added to a
VLAN, and that VLAN added to the desired STG.
Rules for VLAN Tagged/Trunk Mode Ports
The following rules apply to VLAN tagged ports:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Tagged/trunk mode ports can belong to more than one STG, but
untagged/access mode ports can belong to only one STG.

When a tagged/trunk mode port belongs to more than one STG, the egress
BPDUs are tagged to distinguish the BPDUs of one STG from those of another
STG.
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
153
Adding and Removing Ports from STGs
The following rules apply when you add ports to or remove ports from STGs:

When you add a port to a VLAN that belongs to an STG, the port is also added
to that STG. However, if the port you are adding is an untagged port and is
already a member of another STG, that port will be removed from its current
STG and added to the new STG. An untagged port cannot belong to more than
one STG.
For example: Assume that VLAN 1 belongs to STG 1, and that port 1 is untagged
and does not belong to any STG. When you add port 1 to VLAN 1, port 1 will
automatically become part of STG 1.
However, if port 5 is untagged and is a member of VLAN 3 in STG 2, then
adding port 5 to VLAN 1 in STG 1 will change the port PVID from 3 to 1:
"Port 5 is an UNTAGGED/Access Mode port and its PVID/Native­VLAN changed from 3 to 1.

When you remove a port from VLAN that belongs to an STG, that port will also
be removed from the STG. However, if that port belongs to another VLAN in the
same STG, the port remains in the STG.
As an example, assume that port 2 belongs to only VLAN 2, and that VLAN 2
belongs to STG 2. When you remove port 2 from VLAN 2, the port is moved to
default VLAN 1 and is removed from STG 2.
However, if port 2 belongs to both VLAN 1 and VLAN 2, and both VLANs
belong to STG 2, removing port 2 from VLAN 2 does not remove port 2 from
STG 2, because the port is still a member of VLAN 1, which is still a member of
STG 1.

An STG cannot be deleted, only disabled. If you disable the STG while it still
contains VLAN members, Spanning Tree will be off on all ports belonging to
that VLAN.
The relationship between port, trunk groups, VLANs, and Spanning Trees is
shown in Table 17 on page 145.
154
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The Switch-Centric Model
PVRST is switch-centric: STGs are enforced only on the switch where they are
configured. PVRST allows only one VLAN per STG, except for the default STG 1 to
which multiple VLANs can be assigned. The STG ID is not transmitted in the
Spanning Tree BPDU. Each Spanning Tree decision is based entirely on the
configuration of the particular switch.
For example, in Figure 13, each switch is responsible for the proper configuration
of its own ports, VLANs, and STGs. Switch A identifies its own port 17 as part of
VLAN 2 on STG 2, and the Switch B identifies its own port 8 as part of VLAN 2 on
STG 2.
Figure 13. Implementing Multiple Spanning Tree Groups
Chassis
Switch A
Application
Switch B
17
STG 2
8
VLAN 2
18
2
STG 3
VLAN 3
8
1
STG 1
VLAN 1
2
1
1
Application
Switch C
8
Application
Switch D
The VLAN participation for each Spanning Tree Group in Figure 13 on page 155 is
as follows:

VLAN 1 Participation
Assuming Switch B to be the root bridge, Switch B transmits the BPDU for STG
1 on ports 1 and 2. Switch C receives the BPDU on port 2, and Switch D receives
the BPDU on port 1. Because there is a network loop between the switches in
VLAN 1, either Switch D will block port 8 or Switch C will block port 1,
depending on the information provided in the BPDU.

VLAN 2 Participation
Switch B, the root bridge, generates a BPDU for STG 2 from port 8. Switch A
receives this BPDU on port 17, which is assigned to VLAN 2, STG 2. Because
switch B has no additional ports participating in STG 2, this BPDU is not
forwarded to any additional ports and Switch B remains the designated root.

VLAN 3 Participation
For VLAN 3, Switch A or Switch C may be the root bridge. If Switch A is the root
bridge for VLAN 3, STG 3, then Switch A transmits the BPDU from port 18.
Switch C receives this BPDU on port 8 and is identified as participating in
VLAN 3, STG 3. Since Switch C has no additional ports participating in STG 3,
this BPDU is not forwarded to any additional ports and Switch A remains the
designated root.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
155
Configuring Multiple STGs
This configuration shows how to configure the three instances of STGs on the
switches A, B, C, and D illustrated in Figure 13 on page 155.
Because VASA is enabled by default, each new VLAN is automatically assigned its
own STG.
1. Set the Spanning Tree mode on each switch to PVRST.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode pvrst
Note: PVRST is the default mode on the G8272. This step is not required unless the
STP mode has been previously changed, and is shown here merely as an example
of manual configuration.
2. Configure the following on Switch A:
Enable VLAN 2 and VLAN 3.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
If VASA is disabled, enter the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 2 vlan 2
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 3 vlan 3
Add port 17 to VLAN 2, port 18 to VLAN 3.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 17
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 18
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 are removed from STG 1.
Note: In PVRST mode, each instance of STG is enabled by default.
3. Configure the following on Switch B:
Add port 8 to VLAN 2. Ports 1 and 2 are by default in VLAN 1 assigned to STG 1.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# stg 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 8
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
If VASA is disabled, enter the following command:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 2 vlan 2
156
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VLAN 2 is automatically removed from STG 1. By default VLAN 1 remains in STG
1.
4. Configure the following on application switch C:
Add port 8 to VLAN 3. Ports 1 and 2 are by default in VLAN 1 assigned to STG 1.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# stg 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 8
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
If VASA is disabled, enter the following command:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 3 vlan 3
VLAN 3 is automatically removed from STG 1. By default VLAN 1 remains in STG
1.
5. Switch D does not require any special configuration for multiple Spanning Trees.
Switch D uses default STG 1 only.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
157
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP provides rapid convergence of the Spanning Tree and provides the fast
re-configuration critical for networks carrying delay-sensitive traffic such as voice
and video. RSTP significantly reduces the time to reconfigure the active topology
of the network when changes occur to the physical topology or its configuration
parameters. RSTP reduces the bridged-LAN topology to a single Spanning Tree.
RSTP was originally defined in IEEE 802.1w (2001) and was later incorporated into
IEEE 802.1D (2004), superseding the original STP standard.
RSTP parameters apply only to Spanning Tree Group (STG) 1. The PVRST mode
STGs 2-128 are not used when the switch is placed in RSTP mode.
RSTP is compatible with devices that run IEEE 802.1D (1998) Spanning Tree
Protocol. If the switch detects IEEE 802.1D (1998) BPDUs, it responds with IEEE
802.1D (1998)-compatible data units. RSTP is not compatible with Per-VLAN
Rapid Spanning Tree (PVRST) protocol.
Port States
RSTP port state controls are the same as for PVRST: discarding, learning, and
forwarding.
Due to the sequence involved in these STP states, considerable delays may occur
while paths are being resolved. To mitigate delays, ports defined as edge/portfast
ports (“Port Type and Link Type” on page 163) may bypass the discarding and
learning states, and enter directly into the forwarding state.
RSTP Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring RSTP. When RSTP
is turned on, the following occurs:

STP parameters apply only to STG 1.

Only STG 1 is available. All other STGs are turned off.

All VLANs, including management VLANs, are moved to STG 1.
RSTP Configuration Example
This section provides steps to configure RSTP.
1. Configure port and VLAN membership on the switch.
2. Set the Spanning Tree mode to Rapid Spanning Tree.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode rstp
3. Configure RSTP parameters.
RS
RS
RS
RS
RS
158
8272(config)#
8272(config)#
8272(config)#
8272(config)#
8272(config)#
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
spanning-tree stp 1 bridge priority 8192
spanning-tree stp 1 bridge hello-time 5
spanning-tree stp 1 bridge forward-delay 20
spanning-tree stp 1 bridge maximum-age 30
no spanning-tree stp 1 enable
4. Configure port parameters:
RS
RS
RS
RS
RS
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
8272(config)# interface port 3
8272(config-if)# spanning-tree stp 1 priority 240
8272(config-if)# spanning-tree stp 1 path-cost 500
8272(config-if)# no spanning-tree stp 1 enable
8272(config-if)# exit
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
159
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) extends Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP), allowing multiple Spanning Tree Groups (STGs) which may each include
multiple VLANs. MSTP was originally defined in IEEE 802.1s (2002) and was later
included in IEEE 802.1Q (2003).
In MSTP mode, the G8272 supports up to 32 instances of Spanning Tree,
corresponding to STGs 1-32, with each STG acting as an independent,
simultaneous instance of RSTP.
MSTP allows frames assigned to different VLANs to follow separate paths, with
each path based on an independent Spanning Tree instance. This approach
provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic, thereby enabling
load-balancing, and reducing the number of Spanning Tree instances required to
support a large number of VLANs.
Due to Spanning Tree’s sequence of discarding, learning, and forwarding, lengthy
delays may occur while paths are being resolved. Ports defined as edge/portfast
ports (“Port Type and Link Type” on page 163) bypass the Discarding and
Learning states, and enter directly into the Forwarding state.
Note: In MSTP mode, Spanning Tree for the management ports is turned off by
default.
MSTP Region
A group of interconnected bridges that share the same attributes is called an MST
region. Each bridge within the region must share the following attributes:

Alphanumeric name

Revision number

VLAN-to STG mapping scheme
MSTP provides rapid re-configuration, scalability and control due to the support
of regions, and multiple Spanning-Tree instances support within each region.
Common Internal Spanning Tree
The Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) or MST0 provides a common form of
Spanning Tree Protocol, with one Spanning-Tree instance that can be used
throughout the MSTP region. CIST allows the switch to interoperate with legacy
equipment, including devices that run IEEE 802.1D (1998) STP.
CIST allows the MSTP region to act as a virtual bridge to other bridges outside of
the region, and provides a single Spanning-Tree instance to interact with them.
CIST port configuration includes Hello time, path-cost, and interface priority.
These parameters do not affect Spanning Tree Groups 1-32. They apply only when
the CIST is used.
MSTP Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring Multiple Spanning
Tree Groups:
160
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

When MSTP is turned on, the switch moves VLAN 1 and VLANs 33-128 to the
CIST. When MSTP is turned off, the switch moves VLAN 1 and VLANs 33-128
from the CIST to STG 1.

When you enable MSTP, you must configure the Region Name. A default
version number of 1 is configured automatically.

Each bridge in the region must have the same name, revision number, and
VLAN mapping.
MSTP Configuration Examples
Example 1
This section provides steps to configure MSTP on the G8272.
1. Configure port and VLAN membership on the switch.
2. Configure Multiple Spanning Tree region parameters, and set the mode to MSTP.
3. Map VLANs to MSTP instances:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mst configuration( Enter MST configuration mode)
RS 8272(config­mst)# instance <instance ID> vlan <vlan number or range>
Example 2
This configuration shows how to configure MSTP Groups on the switch, as shown
in Figure 13.
Figure 14. Implementing Multiple Spanning Tree Groups
Enterprise
Routing Switch
Enterprise
Routing Switch
MSTP Group 1
Root
MSTP Group 2
Root
Passing VLAN 1
Blocking VLAN 2
Server 1
VLAN 1
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Server 2
VLAN 1
Blocking VLAN 1
Passing VLAN 2
Server 3
VLAN 2
Server 4
VLAN 2
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
161
This example shows how multiple Spanning Trees can provide redundancy
without wasting any uplink ports. In this example, the server ports are split
between two separate VLANs. Both VLANs belong to two different MSTP groups.
The Spanning Tree priority values are configured so that each routing switch is the
root for a different MSTP instance. All of the uplinks are active, with each uplink
port backing up the other.
1. Configure port membership and define the STGs for VLAN 1. Enable tagging on
uplink ports that share VLANs. Port 19 and port 20 connect to the Enterprise
Routing switches.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 19, 20
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure MSTP: Spanning Tree mode, region name, and version.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mst configuration
RS 8272(config­mst)# name MyRegion
(Define the Region name)
RS 8272(config­mst)# revision 100 (Define the Revision level)
RS 8272(config­mst)# exit
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode mst(Set mode to Multiple Spanning Trees)
3. Map VLANs to MSTP instances:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mst configuration
RS 8272(config­mst)# instance 1 vlan 1
RS 8272(config­mst)# instance 2 vlan 2
4. Add server ports 1 and 2 to VLAN 1. Add uplink ports 19 and port 20 to VLAN 1.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2,19,20
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
5. Configure port membership and define the STGs for VLAN 2. Add server
ports 3, 4, and 5 to VLAN 2. Add uplink ports 19 and 20 to VLAN 2. Assign VLAN
2 to STG 2.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 3,4,5,19,20
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Note: Each STG is enabled by default.
162
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Port Type and Link Type
Edge/Portfast Port
A port that does not connect to a bridge is called an edge port. Since edge ports are
assumed to be connected to non-STP devices (such as directly to hosts or servers),
they are placed in the forwarding state as soon as the link is up.
Edge ports send BPDUs to upstream STP devices like normal STP ports, but do not
receive BPDUs. If a port with edge enabled does receive a BPDU, it immediately
begins working as a normal (non-edge) port, and participates fully in Spanning
Tree.
Use the following commands to define or clear a port as an edge port:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port>
RS 8272(config­if)# [no] spanning­tree portfast
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Link Type
The link type determines how the port behaves in regard to Rapid Spanning Tree.
Use the following commands to define the link type for the port:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port>
RS 8272(config­if)# [no] spanning­tree link­type <type>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
where type corresponds to the duplex mode of the port, as follows:

p2p
A full-duplex link to another device (point-to-point)

shared
A half-duplex link is a shared segment and can contain more than
one device.

auto
The switch dynamically configures the link type.
Note: Any STP port in full-duplex mode can be manually configured as a shared
port when connected to a non-STP-aware shared device (such as a typical Layer 2
switch) used to interconnect multiple STP-aware devices.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 10: Spanning Tree Protocols
163
164
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 11. Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
In many data center environments, downstream servers or switches connect to
upstream devices which consolidate traffic. For example, see Figure 15.
Figure 15. Typical Data Center Switching Layers with STP vs. VLAG
ISL
Aggregation
Layer
STP blocks
implicit loops
VLAGs
VLAG
Peers
Links remain
active
Access
Layer
Servers
As shown in the example, a switch in the access layer may be connected to more
than one switch in the aggregation layer to provide for network redundancy.
Typically, Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, PVRST, or MSTP—see “Spanning Tree
Protocols” on page 143) is used to prevent broadcast loops, blocking redundant
uplink paths. This has the unwanted consequence of reducing the available
bandwidth between the layers by as much as 50%. In addition, STP may be slow to
resolve topology changes that occur during a link failure, and can result in
considerable MAC address flooding.
Using Virtual Link Aggregation Groups (VLAGs), the redundant uplinks remain
active, utilizing all available bandwidth.
Two switches are paired into VLAG peers, and act as a single virtual entity for the
purpose of establishing a multi-port trunk. Ports from both peers can be grouped
into a VLAG and connected to the same LAG-capable target device. From the
perspective of the target device, the ports connected to the VLAG peers appear to
be a single trunk connecting to a single logical device. The target device uses the
configured Tier ID to identify the VLAG peers as this single logical device. It is
important that you use a unique Tier ID for each VLAG pair you configure. The
VLAG-capable switches synchronize their logical view of the access layer port
structure and internally prevent implicit loops. The VLAG topology also responds
more quickly to link failure and does not result in unnecessary MAC flooding.
VLAGs are also useful in multi-layer environments for both uplink and downlink
redundancy to any regular LAG-capable device. For example:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
165
Figure 16. VLAG Application with Multiple Layers
Layer 2/3 Border
LACP-capable
Routers
Trunk
Trunk
VLAG 5
VLAG 6
ISL
Layer 2 Region
with multiple levels
VLAG
Peers C
Trunk
VLAG 3
VLAG 3
VLAG 4
ISL
VLAG
Peers A
ISL
VLAG
Peers B
VLAG 1
Trunk
Servers
VLAG 2
LACP-capable
Switch
Trunk
LACP-capable
Server
Wherever ports from both peered switches are trunked to another device, the
trunked ports must be configured as a VLAG. For example, VLAGs 1 and 3 must
be configured for both VLAG Peer A switches. VLAGs 2 and 4 must be configured
for both VLAG Peer B switches.VLAGs 3, 5, and 6 must be configured on both
VLAG Peer C switches. Other devices connecting to the VLAG peers are
configured using regular static or dynamic trunks.
Note: Do not configure a VLAG for connecting only one switch in the peer set to
another device or peer set. For instance, in VLAG Peer C, a regular trunk is
employed for the downlink connection to VLAG Peer B because only one of the
VLAG Peer C switches is involved.
166
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
In addition, when used with VRRP, VLAGs can provide seamless active-active
failover for network links. For example
Figure 17. VLAG Application with VRRP:
VLAG
Peers
ISL
VRRP
Master
Server
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
VLAG
VRRP
Backup
Active
Traffic Flows
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
167
VLAG Capacities
Servers or switches that connect to the VLAG peers using a multi-port VLAG are
considered VLAG clients. VLAG clients are not required to be VLAG-capable. The
ports participating in the VLAG are configured as regular port trunks on the
VLAG client end.
On the VLAG peers, the VLAGs are configured similarly to regular port trunks,
using many of the same features and rules. See “Ports and Trunking” on page 129
for general information concerning all port trunks.
Each VLAG begins as a regular port trunk on each VLAG-peer switch. The VLAG
may be either a static trunk group (portchannel) or dynamic LACP trunk group,
and consumes one slot from the overall port trunk capacity pool. The trunk type
must match that used on VLAG client devices. Additional configuration is then
required to implement the VLAG on both VLAG peer switches.
You may configure up to 64 trunk groups on the switch, with all types (regular or
VLAG, static or LACP) sharing the same pool.
The maximum number of configurable VLAG instances is as follows:

With STP off: Maximum of 52 VLAG instances

With STP on:

PVRST/MSTP with one VLAG instance per VLAN/STG: Maximum of 52
VLAG instances

PVRST/MSTP with one VLAG instance belonging to multiple
VLANs/STGs: Maximum of 20 VLAG instances
Each trunk type can contain up to 32 member ports, depending on the port type
and availability.
VLAGs versus Port Trunks
Though similar to regular port trunks in many regards, VLAGs differ from regular
port trunks in a number of important ways:

A VLAG can consist of multiple ports on two VLAG peers, which are connected
to one logical client device such as a server, switch, or another VLAG device.

The participating ports on the client device are configured as a regular port
trunk.

The VLAG peers must be the same model, and run the same software version.

VLAG peers require a dedicated inter-switch link (ISL) for synchronization. The
ports used to create the ISL must have the following properties:

168

ISL ports must have VLAN tagging turned on.

ISL ports must be configured for all VLAG VLANs.

ISL ports must be placed into a regular port trunk group (dynamic or static).

A minimum of two ports on each switch are recommended for ISL use.
Dynamic routing protocols, such as OSPF, cannot terminate on VLAGs.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Routing over VLAGs is not supported. However, IP forwarding between
subnets served by VLAGs can be accomplished using VRRP.

VLAGs are configured using additional commands.

It is recommended that end-devices connected to VLAG switches use NICs with
dual-homing. This increases traffic efficiency, reduces ISL load, and provides
faster link failover.
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
169
Configuring VLAGs
When configuring VLAG or making changes to your VLAG configuration,
consider the following VLAG behavior:

When adding a static Mrouter on VLAG links, ensure that you also add it on the
ISL link to avoid VLAG link failure. If the VLAG link fails, traffic cannot be
recovered through the ISL.

When you enable VLAG on the switch, if a MSTP region mismatch is detected
with the VLAG peer, the ISL will shut down. In such a scenario, correct the
region on the VLAG peer and manually enable the ISL.

If you have enabled VLAG on the switch, and you need to change the STP mode,
ensure that you first disable VLAG and then change the STP mode.

When VLAG is enabled, you may see two root ports on the secondary VLAG
switch. One of these will be the actual root port for the secondary VLAG switch
and the other will be a root port synced with the primary VLAG switch.

The LACP key used must be unique for each VLAG in the entire topology.

The STG to VLAN mapping on both VLAG peers must be identical.
The following parameters must be identically configured on the VLAG ports of
both the VLAG peers:
170

VLANs

Native VLAN tagging

STP mode

BPDU Guard setting

STP port setting

MAC aging timers

Static MAC entries

ACL configuration parameters

QoS configuration parameters
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Basic VLAG Configuration
Figure 18 shows an example configuration where two VLAG peers are used for
aggregating traffic from downstream devices.
Figure 18. Basic VLAGs
ISL
VLAG Peer 1
1
2
Mgmt IP: 10.10.10.1/24
8
9
VLAG Peer 2
2
3
LACP 200
VLAG 1
Mgmt IP: 10.10.10.2/24
7
8
VLAG 2
LACP 1000
VLAN 100
LACP 2000
VLAN 100
Client Switch
Client Switch
In this example, each client switch is connected to both VLAG peers. On each client
switch, the ports connecting to the VLAG peers are configured as a dynamic LACP
port trunk. The VLAG peer switches share a dedicated ISL for synchronizing
VLAG information. On the individual VLAG peers, each port leading to a specific
client switch (and part of the client switch’s port trunk) is configured as a VLAG.
In the following example configuration, only the configuration for VLAG 1 on
VLAG Peer 1 is shown. VLAG Peer 2 and all other VLAGs are configured in a
similar fashion.
Configure the ISL
The ISL connecting the VLAG peers is shared by all their VLAGs. The ISL needs to
be configured only once on each VLAG peer.
1. Configure STP if required. Use PVRST or MSTP mode only:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode pvrst
2. Configure the ISL ports and place them into a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 200
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlag isl adminkey 200
Note: In this case, a dynamic trunk group is shown. A static trunk (portchannel)
could be configured instead.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
171
3. Configure VLAG Tier ID and enable VLAG globally. This is used to identify the
VLAG switch in a multi-tier environment.
RS 8272(config)# vlag tier­id 10
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
4. Configure the ISL for the VLAG peer.
Make sure you configure the VLAG peer (VLAG Peer 2) using the same ISL trunk
type (dynamic or static), the same VLAN, and the same STP mode and tier ID used
on VLAG Peer 1.
Configure the VLAG
1. Configure the VLAN for VLAG 1. Make sure members include the ISL and VLAG
1 ports.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2,8
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Note: In MSTP mode, VLANs are automatically mapped to CIST.
2. Place the VLAG 1 port(s) in a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 8
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
3. Assign the trunk to the VLAG:
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1000 enable
4. Continue by configuring all required VLAGs on VLAG Peer 1, and then repeat the
configuration for VLAG Peer 2.
For each corresponding VLAG on the peer, the port trunk type (dynamic or static),
VLAN, and STP mode and ID must be the same as on VLAG Peer 1.
5. Verify the completed configuration:
# show vlag
172
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VLAG Configuration - VLANs Mapped to MSTI
Follow the steps below to configure VLAG in environments where the VLANs are
mapped to Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI).
Configure the ISL
The ISL connecting the VLAG peers is shared by all their VLAGs. The ISL needs to
be configured only once on each VLAG peer.
1. Configure STP:
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mode mst
2. Configure the ISL ports and place them into a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 200
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlag isl adminkey 200
Note: In this case, a dynamic trunk group is shown. A static trunk (portchannel)
could be configured instead.
3. Configure VLAG Tier ID and enable VLAG globally. This is used to identify the
VLAG switch in a multi-tier environment.
RS 8272(config)# vlag tier­id 10
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
4. Configure the ISL for the VLAG peer.
Make sure you configure the VLAG peer (VLAG Peer 2) using the same ISL trunk
type (dynamic or static), the same VLAN, and the same STP mode and tier ID used
on VLAG Peer 1.
Configure the VLAG
1. Configure the VLAN for VLAG 1.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
Note: The VLAN is automatically mapped to CIST.
2. Shut down ISL ports and VLAG ports. This ensures that traffic passes through to
other switches.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2,8
RS 8272(config­if)# shutdown
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
173
3. Map the VLAN to an MSTI.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mst 1 vlan 100
4. Disable VLAG.
RS 8272(config)# no vlag enable
5. Add VLAG ports to the VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2,8
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
6. Enable VLAG.
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
7. Place the VLAG 1 port(s) in a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 8
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
8. Assign the trunk to the VLAG:
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1000 enable
9. Continue by configuring all required VLAGs on VLAG Peer 1, then follow the
steps for configuring VLAG Peer 2.
10. Configure the VLAN for VLAG 2.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
Note: The VLAN is automatically mapped to CIST.
11. Map the VLAN to an MSTI.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree mst 1 vlan 100
Note: At this point, traffic may be momentarily disrupted due to STP
recalculation.
12. Disable VLAG.
RS 8272(config)# no vlag enable
Note: At this point, traffic may be momentarily disrupted due to STP
recalculation.
174
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
13. Add VLAG ports to the VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2,8
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
14. Enable VLAG.
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
Note: At this point, traffic may be momentarily disrupted due to STP
recalculation.
On VLAG Peer 1:
15. Enable ISL ports and VLAG ports:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­2,8
RS 8272(config­if)# no shutdown
On VLAG Peer2:
16. Place the VLAG 2 port(s) in a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 8
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
17. Assign the trunk to the VLAG:
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1000 enable
18. Verify the completed configuration:
RS 8272# show vlag
Configuring Health Check
We strongly recommend that you configure the G8272 to check the health status of
its VLAG peer. Although the operational status of the VLAG peer is generally
determined via the ISL connection, configuring a network health check provides
an alternate means to check peer status in case the ISL links fail. Use an
independent link between the VLAG switches to configure health check.
Note: Configuring health check on an ISL VLAN interface or on a VLAG data port
may impact the accuracy of the health check status.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
175
1. Configure a management interface for the switch.
Note: If the switch does not have a dedicated management interface, configure a
VLAN for the health check interface. The health check interface can be configured
with an IPv4 or IPv6 address:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 128
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
Note: Configure a similar interface on VLAG Peer 2. For example, use IP address
10.10.10.2.
2. Specify the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the VLAG Peer:
RS 8272(config)# vlag hlthchk peer­ip 10.10.10.2
Note: For VLAG Peer 2, the management interface would be configured as
10.10.10.2, and the health check would be configured for 10.10.10.1, pointing back
to VLAG Peer 1.
VLAGs with VRRP
Note: In a multi-layer environment, configure VRRP separately for each layer. We
recommend that you configure VRRP only on the tier with uplinks. See
“Configuring VLAGs in Multiple Layers” on page 182.
VRRP (see “Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol” on page 501) can be used in
conjunction with VLAGs and LACP-capable devices to provide seamless
redundancy.
Figure 19. Active-Active Configuration using VRRP and VLAGs
VRRP Master
Server 1
VLAG Peer 1
Layer 3
Router
VLAG 1
VIR: 10.0.1.100
1
10
10.0.1.1
11
2
Internet
4
5
4
5
VLAG 2
12
ISL
10.0.1.2
10
1
Server 2
11
12
VLAG 3
Server 3
2
Layer 3
Router
VRRP Backup
10.0.1.3
VLAG Peer 2
VIR: 10.0.1.100
Network 10.0.1.0/24
Task 1: Configure VLAG Peer 1
Note: Before enabling VLAG, you must configure the VLAG tier ID and ISL
portchannel.
176
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
1. Configure VLAG tier ID and enable VLAG globally.
RS 8272(config)# vlag tier­id 10
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
2. Configure appropriate routing.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
Although OSPF is used in this example, static routing could also be deployed. For
more information, see “OSPF” on page 443 or “Basic IP Routing” on page 325.
3. Configure a server-facing interface.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.0.1.10 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
4. Turn on VRRP and configure the Virtual Interface Router.
RS 8272(config)# router vrrp
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# enable
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 virtual­router­id 1
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 interface 3
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 address 10.0.1.100
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 enable
5. Set the priority of Virtual Router 1 to 101, so that it becomes the Master.
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 priority 101
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# exit
6. Configure the ISL ports and place them into a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 4­5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 2000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Note: In this case, a dynamic trunk group is shown. A static trunk (portchannel)
could be configured instead.
7. Configure the upstream ports.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 10
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 20
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
177
8. Configure the server ports.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 10
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 11
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 12
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
9. Configure all VLANs including VLANs for the VLAGs.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 10
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 20
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 4­5, 10­12
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
10. Configure Internet-facing interfaces.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.1.1.10 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.1.3.10 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
178
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
11. Place the VLAG port(s) in their port trunk groups.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 10
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 11
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 12
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1200
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
12. Assign the trunks to the VLAGs:
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1000 enable
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1100 enable
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1200 enable
13. Verify the completed configuration:
# show vlag
Task 2: Configure VLAG Peer 2
The VLAG peer (VLAG Peer 2) must be configured using the same ISL trunk type
(dynamic or static), the same VLAN, and the same STP mode and Tier ID used on
VLAG Switch 1.
For each corresponding VLAG on the peer, the port trunk type (dynamic or static),
VLAN, and STP mode and ID must be the same as on VLAG Switch 1.
1. Configure VLAG tier ID and enable VLAG globally.
RS 8272(config)# vlag tier­id 10
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
2. Configure appropriate routing.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
Although OSPF is used in this example, static routing could also be deployed.
3. Configure a server-facing interface.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.0.1.11 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
179
4. Turn on VRRP and configure the Virtual Interface Router.
RS 8272(config)# router vrrp
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# enable
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 virtual­router­id 1
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 interface 3
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 address 10.0.1.100
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 enable
5. Configure the ISL ports and place them into a port trunk group:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 4­5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 2000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
6. Configure the upstream ports.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 30
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 40
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
7. Configure the server ports.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 10
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 11
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 12
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
180
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
8. Configure all VLANs including VLANs for the VLAGs.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 30
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 30
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 40
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 40
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 100
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 4­5,10­12
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
9. Configure Internet-facing interfaces.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.1.2.11 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 30
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.1.4.12 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 40
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
10. Place the VLAG port(s) in their port trunk groups.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 10
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 11
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1100
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 12
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 1200
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
181
11. Assign the trunks to the VLAGs:
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1000 enable
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1100 enable
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 1200 enable
12. Verify the completed configuration:
# show vlag
Configuring VLAGs in Multiple Layers
Figure 20. VLAG in Multiple Layers
Layer 2/3 Border
LACP-capable
Routers
Trunk
Trunk
VLAG 5
VLAG 6
ISL
Layer 2 Region
with multiple levels
Switch A
VLAG
Peers A
Switch B
VLAG
Peers C
VLAG 3
Trunk
VLAG 3
VLAG 4
ISL
ISL
Switch C
Switch D
VLAG 1
Switch E
Switch F
VLAG
Peers B
VLAG 2
Trunk
Switch G
LACP-capable
Switch
Trunk
Servers
LACP-capable
Server
Figure 20 shows an example of VLAG being used in a multi-layer environment.
Following are the configuration steps for the topology.
Task 1: Configure Layer 2/3 border switches.
Configure ports on border switch as follows:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 100
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Repeat these commands for the second border switch.
182
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Task 2: Configure switches in the Layer 2 region.
Consider the following:

ISL ports on switches A and B - ports 1, 2

Ports connecting to Layer 2/3 - ports 5, 6

Ports on switches A and B connecting to switches C and D: ports 10, 11

Ports on switch B connecting to switch E: ports 15, 16

Ports on switch B connecting to switch F: ports 17, 18
1. Configure VLAG tier ID and enable VLAG globally.
RS 8272(config)# vlag tier­id 10
RS 8272(config)# vlag enable
2. Configure ISL ports on Switch A.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 200
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlag isl adminkey 200
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
3. Configure port on Switch A connecting to Layer 2/3 router 1.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 10
VLAN number 10 with name “VLAN 10” created
VLAN 10 was assigned to STG 10
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2,5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 10
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 400
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 400 enable
Repeat these steps on Switch B for ports connecting to Layer 2/3 router 1.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
183
4. Configure port on Switch A connecting to Layer 2/3 router 2.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 20
VLAN number 20 with name “VLAN 20” created
VLAN 20 was assigned to STG 20
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2,6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 20
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 6
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 500
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 500 enable
Repeat these commands on Switch B for ports connecting to Layer 2/3 router 2.
5. Configure ports on Switch A connecting to downstream VLAG switches C and D.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 10,11
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 20
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 600
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlag adminkey 600 enable
Repeat these commands on Switch B for ports connecting to downstream VLAG
switch C and D.
6. Configure ports on Switch B connecting to downstream switches E and F.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 30
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 15­18
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 30
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 700
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
7. Configure ISL between switches C and D, and between E and F as shown in Step 1.
8. Configure the Switch G as shown in Step 2.
184
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VLAG with PIM
Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) is designed for efficiently routing multicast
traffic across one or more IPv4 domains. PIM is used by multicast source stations,
client receivers, and intermediary routers and switches, to build and maintain
efficient multicast routing trees. PIM is protocol independent; It collects routing
information using the existing unicast routing functions underlying the IPv4
network, but does not rely on any particular unicast protocol. For PIM to function,
a Layer 3 routing protocol (such as BGP, OSPF, RIP, or static routes) must first be
configured on the switch.
Lenovo Networking OS supports PIM in Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) and Dense Mode
(PIM-DM). For more details on PIM, see Chapter 33, “Protocol Independent
Multicast” on page 475.
PIM, when configured in a VLAG topology, provides efficient multicast routing
along with redundancy and failover. Only the primary VLAG switch forwards
multicast data packets to avoid duplicate packets reaching the access layer switch.
The secondary VLAG switch is available as backup and forwards packets only
when the primary VLAG switch is not available and during failover.
See Figure 18 on page 171 for a basic VLAG topology. For PIM to function in a
VLAG topology, the following are required:

IGMP (v1 or v2) must be configured on the VLAG switches.

A Layer 3 routing protocol (such as BGP, OSPF, RIP, or static routes) must be
globally enabled and on VLAG-associated IP interfaces for multicast routing.

The VLAG switches must be connected to upstream multicast routers.

The Rendezvous Point (RP) and/or the Bootstrap router (BSR) must be
configured on the upstream router.

Flooding must be disabled on the VLAG switches or in the VLAN associated
with the VLAG ports.

ISL ports must be members of VLANs that have VLAG ports as members.
For PIM configuration steps and commands, see “PIM Configuration Examples”
on page 485.
Traffic Forwarding
In a VLAG with PIM topology, traffic forwarded by the upstream router is
managed as follows:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

If the primary and secondary VLAG ports are up, the primary switch forwards
traffic to the receiver. The secondary switch blocks the traffic. Multicast entries
are created on both the VLAG switches: primary VLAG switch with forward
state; secondary VLAG switch with pruned state.

If the primary VLAG port fails, the secondary VLAG switch forwards traffic to
the receiver. Multicast entries are created on both the VLAG switches: primary
VLAG switch with forward state; secondary VLAG switch with VLAG pruned
state.
Chapter 11: Virtual Link Aggregation Groups
185

If the secondary VLAG port fails, the primary VLAG switch forwards traffic to
the receiver. Multicast entries are created on both the VLAG switches: primary
VLAG switch with forward state; secondary VLAG switch with pruned state.

If the primary VLAG switch is down, the secondary VLAG switch forwards
traffic to the receiver. When the primary VLAG switch boots up again, it
becomes the secondary VLAG switch and blocks traffic to the receiver. The
VLAG switch that was secondary initially becomes the primary and continues
forwarding traffic to the receiver.

If the secondary VLAG switch is down, the primary VLAG switch forwards
traffic to the receiver. When the secondary VLAG switch is up, it blocks traffic.
The primary switch forwards traffic to the receiver.

If the uplink to the primary VLAG switch is down, the secondary VLAG switch
forwards traffic to the receiver and to the primary VLAG switch over the ISL.
The primary VLAG switch blocks traffic to the receiver so the receiver does not
get double traffic. Both the VLAG switches will have multicast entries in
forward state.

If the uplink to the secondary VLAG switch is down, the primary VLAG switch
forwards traffic to the receiver and to the secondary VLAG switch over the ISL.
The secondary VLAG switch blocks traffic to the receiver so the receiver does
not get double traffic. Both the VLAG switches will have multicast entries in the
forward state.
Health Check
In a VLAG with PIM topology, you must configure health check. See “Configuring
Health Check” on page 175.
When health check is configured, and the ISL is down, the primary VLAG switch
forwards traffic to the receiver. The secondary VLAG switch ports will be
errdisable state and will block traffic to the receiver.
186
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 12. Quality of Service
Quality of Service features allow you to allocate network resources to
mission-critical applications at the expense of applications that are less sensitive to
such factors as time delays or network congestion. You can configure your network
to prioritize specific types of traffic, ensuring that each type receives the
appropriate Quality of Service (QoS) level.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“QoS Overview” on page 188

“Using ACL Filters” on page 189

“Using DSCP Values to Provide QoS” on page 191

“Using 802.1p Priority to Provide QoS” on page 197

“Queuing and Scheduling” on page 198

“Control Plane Protection” on page 198

“WRED with ECN” on page 199
187
QoS Overview
QoS helps you allocate guaranteed bandwidth to the critical applications, and limit
bandwidth for less critical applications. Applications such as video and voice must
have a certain amount of bandwidth to work correctly; using QoS, you can provide
that bandwidth when necessary. Also, you can put a high priority on applications
that are sensitive to timing out or that cannot tolerate delay, by assigning their
traffic to a high-priority queue.
By assigning QoS levels to traffic flows on your network, you can ensure that
network resources are allocated where they are needed most. QoS features allow
you to prioritize network traffic, thereby providing better service for selected
applications.
Figure 21 shows the basic QoS model used by the switch.
Figure 21. QoS Model
Ingress
Ports
Classify
Packets
Perform
Actions
ACL
Filter
Permit/Deny
Queue and
Schedule
COS
Queue
The basic QoS model works as follows:



188
Classify traffic:

Read DSCP value.

Read 802.1p priority value.

Match ACL filter parameters.
Perform actions:

Define bandwidth and burst parameters

Select actions to perform on in-profile and out-of-profile traffic

Deny packets

Permit packets

Mark DSCP or 802.1p Priority

Set COS queue (with or without re-marking)
Queue and schedule traffic:

Place packets in one of the COS queues.

Schedule transmission based on the COS queue.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Egress
Using ACL Filters
Access Control Lists (ACLs) are filters that allow you to classify and segment
traffic, so you can provide different levels of service to different traffic types. Each
filter defines the conditions that must match for inclusion in the filter, and also the
actions that are performed when a match is made.
Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 supports up to 256 ACLs.
The G8272 allows you to classify packets based on various parameters. For
example:
Ethernet: source MAC, destination MAC, VLAN number/mask, Ethernet type,
priority.
 IPv4: Source IP address/mask, destination address/mask, type of service, IP protocol number.
 TCP/UPD: Source port, destination port, TCP flag.
 Packet format

For ACL details, see “Access Control Lists” on page 103.
Summary of ACL Actions
Actions determine how the traffic is treated. The G8272 QoS actions include the
following:
Pass or Drop
Re-mark a new DiffServ Code Point (DSCP)
 Re-mark the 802.1p field
 Set the COS queue


© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
189
ACL Metering and Re-Marking
You can define a profile for the aggregate traffic flowing through the G8272 by
configuring a QoS meter (if desired) and assigning ACLs to ports. When you add
ACLs to a port, make sure they are ordered correctly in terms of precedence.
Actions taken by an ACL are called In-Profile actions. You can configure additional
In-Profile and Out-of-Profile actions on a port. Data traffic can be metered, and
re-marked to ensure that the traffic flow provides certain levels of service in terms
of bandwidth for different types of network traffic.
Metering
QoS metering provides different levels of service to data streams through
user-configurable parameters. A meter is used to measure the traffic stream against
a traffic profile, which you create. Thus, creating meters yields In-Profile and
Out-of-Profile traffic for each ACL, as follows:

In-Profile–If there is no meter configured or if the packet conforms to the meter,
the packet is classified as In-Profile.

Out-of-Profile–If a meter is configured and the packet does not conform to the
meter (exceeds the committed rate or maximum burst rate of the meter), the
packet is classified as Out-of-Profile.
Using meters, you set a Committed Rate in Kbps (multiples of 64 Mbps). All traffic
within this Committed Rate is In-Profile. Additionally, you set a Maximum Burst
Size that specifies an allowed data burst larger than the Committed Rate for a brief
period. These parameters define the In-Profile traffic.
Meters keep the sorted packets within certain parameters. You can configure a
meter on an ACL, and perform actions on metered traffic, such as packet
re-marking.
Re-Marking
Re-marking allows for the treatment of packets to be reset based on new network
specifications or desired levels of service. You can configure the ACL to re-mark a
packet as follows:
190

Change the DSCP value of a packet, used to specify the service level traffic
receives.

Change the 802.1p priority of a packet.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using DSCP Values to Provide QoS
The switch uses the Differentiated Services (DiffServ) architecture to provide QoS
functions. DiffServ is described in IETF RFCs 2474 and 2475.
The six most significant bits in the TOS byte of the IP header are defined as
DiffServ Code Points (DSCP). Packets are marked with a certain value depending
on the type of treatment the packet must receive in the network device. DSCP is a
measure of the Quality of Service (QoS) level of the packet.
The switch can classify traffic by reading the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) or IEEE
802.1p priority value, or by using filters to match specific criteria. When network
traffic attributes match those specified in a traffic pattern, the policy instructs the
switch to perform specified actions on each packet that passes through it. The
packets are assigned to different Class of Service (COS) queues and scheduled for
transmission.
Differentiated Services Concepts
To differentiate between traffic flows, packets can be classified by their DSCP
value. The Differentiated Services (DS) field in the IP header is an octet, and the
first six bits, called the DS Code Point (DSCP), can provide QoS functions. Each
packet carries its own QoS state in the DSCP. There are 64 possible DSCP values
(0-63).
Figure 22. Layer 3 IPv4 packet
Version
Length
ID
Length
ToS
Offset
TTL
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
unused
7
1
6
5
4
3
2
FCS
Proto
SIP
DIP
Data
0
The switch can perform the following actions to the DSCP:
Read the DSCP value of ingress packets.
Re-mark the DSCP value to a new value
 Map the DSCP value to a Class of Service queue (COSq).


The switch can use the DSCP value to direct traffic prioritization.
With DiffServ, you can establish policies to direct traffic. A policy is a
traffic-controlling mechanism that monitors the characteristics of the traffic, (for
example, its source, destination, and protocol) and performs a controlling action on
the traffic when certain characteristics are matched.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
191
Trusted/Untrusted Ports
By default, all ports on the G8272 are trusted. To configure untrusted ports,
re-mark the DSCP value of the incoming packet to a lower DSCP value using the
following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# dscp­marking
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp dscp­mapping <DSCP value (0-63)> <new value>
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp re­marking
Per Hop Behavior
The DSCP value determines the Per Hop Behavior (PHB) of each packet. The PHB
is the forwarding treatment given to packets at each hop. QoS policies are built by
applying a set of rules to packets, based on the DSCP value, as they hop through
the network.
The default settings are based on the following standard PHBs, as defined in the
IEEE standards:

Expedited Forwarding (EF)—This PHB has the highest egress priority and
lowest drop precedence level. EF traffic is forwarded ahead of all other traffic.
EF PHB is described in RFC 2598.

Assured Forwarding (AF)—This PHB contains four service levels, each with a
different drop precedence, as shown in the following table. Routers use drop
precedence to determine which packets to discard last when the network
becomes congested. AF PHB is described in RFC 2597.
Drop
Precedence
192
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
Low
AF11 (DSCP 10)
AF21 (DSCP 18)
AF31 (DSCP 26)
AF41 (DSCP 34)
Medium
AF12 (DSCP 12)
AF22 (DSCP 20)
AF32 (DSCP 28)
AF42 (DSCP 36)
High
AF13 (DSCP 14)
AF23 (DSCP 22)
AF33 (DSCP 30)
AF43 (DSCP 38)
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Class Selector (CS)—This PHB has eight priority classes, with CS7 representing
the highest priority, and CS0 representing the lowest priority, as shown in the
following table. CS PHB is described in RFC 2474.
Priority
Class Selector
DSCP
Highest
CS7
56
CS6
48
CS5
40
CS4
32
CS3
24
CS2
16
CS1
8
CS0
0
Lowest
QoS Levels
Table 18 shows the default service levels provided by the switch, listed from
highest to lowest importance:
Table 18. Default QoS Service Levels
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Service Level
Default PHB
802.1p Priority
Critical
CS7
7
Network Control
CS6
6
Premium
EF, CS5
5
Platinum
AF41, AF42, AF43, CS4
4
Gold
AF31, AF32, AF33, CS3
3
Silver
AF21, AF22, AF23, CS2
2
Bronze
AF11, AF12, AF13, CS1
1
Standard
DF, CS0
0
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
193
DSCP Re-Marking and Mapping
The switch can use the DSCP value of ingress packets to re-mark the DSCP to a
new value, and to set an 802.1p priority value. Use the following command to view
the default settings.
RS 8272# show qos dscp
Current DSCP Remarking Configuration: OFF
DSCP New DSCP New 802.1p Prio
­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
0 0 0
1 1 0
2 2 0
3 3 0
4 4 0
5 5 0
6 6 0
7 7 0
8 8 1
9 9 0
10 10 1
...
54 54 0
55 55 0
56 56 7
57 57 0
58 58 0
59 59 0
60 60 0
61 61 0
62 62 0
63 63 0
Use the following command to turn on DSCP re-marking globally:
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp re­marking
Then you must enable DSCP re-marking on any port that you wish to perform this
function (Interface Port mode).
Note: If an ACL meter is configured for DSCP re-marking, the meter function
takes precedence over QoS re-marking.
DSCP Re-Marking Configuration Examples
Example 1
The following example includes the basic steps for re-marking DSCP value and
mapping DSCP value to 802.1p.
194
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
1. Turn DSCP re-marking on globally, and define the DSCP-DSCP-802.1p mapping.
You can use the default mapping.
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp re­marking
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp dscp­mapping <DSCP value (0-63)> <new value>
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp dot1p­mapping <DSCP value (0-63)> <802.1p value>
2. Enable DSCP re-marking on a port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# qos dscp re­marking
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Example 2
The following example assigns strict priority to VoIP traffic and a lower priority to
all other traffic.
1. Create an ACL to re-mark DSCP value and COS queue for all VoIP packets.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 tcp­udp source­port 5060 0xffff
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 meter committed­rate 10000000
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 meter enable
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 re­mark in­profile dscp 56
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 re­mark dot1p 7
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 2 action permit
2. Create an ACL to set a low priority to all other traffic.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 3 action set­priority 1
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 3 action permit
3. Apply the ACLs to a port and enable DSCP marking.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 2
RS 8272(config­if)# access­control list 3 ethernet source­mac­address 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00
RS 8272(config­if)# dscp­marking
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
4. Enable DSCP re-marking globally.
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp re­marking
5. Assign the DSCP re-mark value.
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp dscp­mapping 40 9
RS 8272(config)# qos dscp dscp­mapping 46 9
6. Assign strict priority to VoIP COS queue.
RS 8272(config)# qos transmit­queue weight­cos 7 0
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
195
7. Map priority value to COS queue for non-VoIP traffic.
RS 8272(config)# qos transmit­queue mapping 1 1
8. Assign weight to the non-VoIP COS queue.
RS 8272(config)# qos transmit­queue weight­cos 1 2
196
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using 802.1p Priority to Provide QoS
The G8272 provides Quality of Service functions based on the priority bits in a
packet’s VLAN header. (The priority bits are defined by the 802.1p standard within
the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN header.) The 802.1p bits, if present in the packet, specify the
priority to be given to packets during forwarding. Packets with a numerically
higher (non-zero) priority are given forwarding preference over packets with
lower priority value.
The IEEE 802.1p standard uses eight levels of priority (0-7). Priority 7 is assigned to
highest priority network traffic, such as OSPF or RIP routing table updates,
priorities 5-6 are assigned to delay-sensitive applications such as voice and video,
and lower priorities are assigned to standard applications. A value of 0 (zero)
indicates a “best effort” traffic prioritization, and this is the default when traffic
priority has not been configured on your network. The switch can filter packets
based on the 802.1p values.
Figure 23. Layer 2 802.1q/802.1p VLAN tagged packet
DMAC SMAC
SFD
Preamble
Priority
7
6
Tag
FCS
E Type Data
VLAN Identifier (VID)
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Ingress packets receive a priority value, as follows:

Tagged packets—switch reads the 802.1p priority in the VLAN tag.

Untagged packets—switch tags the packet and assigns an 802.1p priority value,
based on the port’s default 802.1p priority.
Egress packets are placed in a COS queue based on the priority value, and
scheduled for transmission based on the COS queue number. Higher COS queue
numbers provide forwarding precedence.
To configure a port’s default 802.1p priority value, use the following commands.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# dot1p <802.1p value (0-7)>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
197
Queuing and Scheduling
The G8272 can be configured to have 8 output Class of Service (COS) queues per
port, into which each packet is placed. Each packet’s 802.1p priority determines its
COS queue, except when an ACL action sets the COS queue of the packet.
You can configure the following attributes for COS queues:

Map 802.1p priority value to a COS queue

Define the scheduling weight of each COS queue
You can map 802.1p priority value to a COS queue, as follows:
RS 8272(config)# qos transmit­queue mapping <802.1p priority value (0-7)> <COS queue
(0-7)>
To set the COS queue scheduling weight, use the following command.
RS 8272(config)# qos transmit­queue weight­cos <COSq number>
<COSq weight (0-15)>
Control Plane Protection
Control plane receives packets that are required for the internal protocol state
machines. This type of traffic is usually received at low rate. However, in some
situations such as DOS attacks, the switch may receive this traffic at a high rate. If
the control plane protocols are unable to process the high rate of traffic, the switch
may become unstable.
The control plane receives packets that are channeled through protocol-specific
packet queues. Multiple protocols can be channeled through a common packet
queue. However, one protocol cannot be channeled through multiple packet
queues. These packet queues are applicable only to the packets received by the
software and does not impact the regular switching or routing traffic. Packet queue
with a higher number has higher priority.
You can configure the bandwidth for each packet queue. Protocols that share a
packet queue will also share the bandwidth.
The following commands configure the control plane protection (CoPP) feature:
RS 8272(config)# qos protocol­packet­control packet­queue­map <0-43>
<protocol>
(Configure a queue for a protocol)
RS 8272(config)# qos protocol­packet­control rate­limit­packet­queue
<0-43> <1-10000> (Set the bandwidth for the queue,
in packets per second)
198
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
WRED with ECN
Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) is a congestion avoidance algorithm
that helps prevent a TCP collapse, where a congested port indiscriminately drops
packets from all sessions. The transmitting hosts wait to retransmit resulting in a
dramatic drop in throughput. Often times, this TCP collapse repeats in a cycle,
which results in a saw-tooth pattern of throughput. WRED selectively drops
packets before the queue gets full, allowing majority of the traffic to flow smoothly.
WRED discards packets based on the CoS queues. Packets marked with lower
priorities are discarded first.
Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is an extension to WRED. For packets that
are ECN-aware, the ECN bit is marked to signal impending congestion instead of
dropping packets. The transmitting hosts then slow down sending packets.
How WRED/ECN work together
For implementing WRED, you must define a profile with minimum threshold,
maximum threshold, and a maximum drop probability. The profiles can be defined
on a port or a CoS.
For implementing ECN, you require ECN-specific field that has two bits—the
ECN-capable Transport (ECT) bit and the CE (Congestion Experienced) bit—in the
IP header. ECN is identified and defined by the values in these bits in the
Differentiated Services field of IP Header. Table 19 shows the combination values
of the ECN bits.
Table 19. ECN Bit Setting
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
ECT Bit
CE Bit
Description
0
0
Not ECN-capable
0
1
Endpoints of the transport protocol are ECN-capable
1
0
Endpoints of the transport protocol are ECN-capable
1
1
Congestion experienced
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
199
WRED and ECN work together as follows:

If the number of packets in the queue is less than the minimum threshold,
packets are transmitted. This happens irrespective of the ECN bit setting, and on
networks where only WRED (without ECN) is enabled.

If the number of packets in the queue is between the minimum threshold and
the maximum threshold, one of the following occurs:


If the ECN field on the packet indicates that the endpoints are ECN-capable
and the WRED algorithm determines that the packet has likely been dropped
based on the drop probability, the ECT and CE bits for the packet are changed
to 1, and the packet is transmitted.

If the ECN field on the packet indicates that neither endpoint is ECN-capable,
the packet may be dropped based on the WRED drop probability. This is true
even in cases where only WRED (without ECN) is enabled.

If the ECN field on the packet indicates that the network is experiencing
congestion, the packet is transmitted. No further marking is required.
If the number of packets in the queue is greater than the maximum threshold,
packets are dropped based on the drop probability. This is the identical
treatment a packet receives when only WRED (without ECN) is enabled.
Configuring WRED/ECN
For configuring WRED, you must define a TCP profile and a non-TCP profile.
WRED prioritizes TCP traffic over non-TCP traffic.
For configuring ECN, you must define a TCP profile. You don’t need a non-TCP
profile as ECN can be enabled only for TCP traffic.
If you do not configure the profiles, the profile thresholds are set to maximum
value of 0xFFFF to avoid drops.
Note: WRED/ECN can be configured only on physical ports and not on trunks.
WRED and ECN are applicable only to unicast traffic.
Consider the following guidelines for configuring WRED/ECN:

Profiles can be configured globally or per port. Global profiles are applicable to
all ports.

Always enable the global profile before applying the port-level profile.
Note: You can enable the global profile and disable the port-level profile.
However, you must not enable the port-level profile if the global profile is disabled.
200

WRED settings are dependent on Memory Management Unit (MMU) Settings. If
you change the MMU setting, it could impact WRED functionality.

You cannot enable WRED if you have QoS buffer settings such as Converged
Enhanced Ethernet (CEE), Priority-based Flow Control (PFC), or Enhanced
Transmission Selection (ETS).

The number of WRED profiles per-port must match the total number of COS
Queues configured in the system.

If you have configured a TCP profile and enabled ECN, ECN remarking
happens only if all traffic experiencing congestion is TCP traffic.

Configure a TCP profile only after enabling ECN on the interface.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

You can apply TCP and non-TCP profile configurations irrespective of ECN
status (enabled/disabled).
WRED/ECN Configuration Example
Follow these steps to enable WRED/ECN and configure a global and/or port-level
profile. If you configure global and port-level profile, WRED/ECN uses the
port-level profile to make transmit/drop decisions when experiencing traffic
congestion.
Configure Global Profile for WRED
1. Enable WRED globally.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect enable
2. Enable a transmit queue.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect transmit­queue 0 enable
3. Configure WRED thresholds (minimum, maximum, and drop rate) for TCP traffic.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect transmit­queue 0 tcp min­threshold 1 max­threshold 2 drop­rate 3
Note: Percentages are of Average Queue available in hardware and not
percentages of traffic.
4. Configure WRED thresholds (minimum, maximum, and drop rate) for non-TCP
traffic.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect transmit­queue 0 non­tcp min­threshold 4 max­threshold 5 drop­rate 6
5. Select the port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
6. Enable WRED for the port.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect enable
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Configure Port-level Profile for WRED
1. Enable WRED globally.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect enable
2. Select the port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
201
3. Enable WRED for the port .
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect enable
4. Enable a transmit queue.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect transmit­queue 0 enable
5. Configure WRED thresholds (minimum, maximum, and drop rate) for TCP traffic.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect transmit­queue 0 tcp min­threshold 11 max­threshold 22 drop­rate 33
Note: Percentages are of Average Queue available in hardware and not
percentages of traffic.
6. Configure WRED thresholds (minimum, maximum, and drop rate) for non-TCP
traffic.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect transmit­queue 0 non­tcp min­threshold 44 max­threshold 55 drop­rate 66
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Configure Global Profile for ECN
1. Enable ECN globally.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect ecn enable
2. Enable a transmit queue.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect transmit­queue 0 enable
3. Configure ECN thresholds (minimum, maximum, and drop rate) for TCP traffic.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect transmit­queue 0 tcp min­threshold 1 max­threshold 2 drop­rate 3
Note: Percentages are of Average Queue available in hardware and not
percentages of traffic.
4. Select the port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
5. Enable ECN for the port.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect ecn enable
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
202
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configure Port-level Profile for ECN
1. Enable ECN globally.
RS 8272(config)# qos random­detect ecn enable
2. Select the port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
3. Enable ECN for the port.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect ecn enable
4. Enable a transmit queue.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect transmit­queue 0 enable
5. Configure ECN thresholds (minimum, maximum, and drop rate) for TCP traffic.
RS 8272(config­if)# random­detect transmit­queue 0 tcp min­threshold 11 max­threshold 22 drop­rate 33
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Note: Percentages are of Average Queue available in hardware and not
percentages of traffic.
Verifying WRED/ECN
Use the following command to view global WRED/ECN information.
RS 8272(config)# show qos random­detect
Current wred and ecn configuration:
Global ECN: Enable
Global WRED: Enable
TQ0:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Ena 10 20 30 10 20 30
TQ1:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ2:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ3:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ4:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ5:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ6:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ7:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 12: Quality of Service
203
Use the following command to view port-level WRED/ECN information.
RS 8272(config)# show interface port 1 random­detect
Port: 1
ECN: Enable
WRED: Enable
TQ0:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ1:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Ena 4 5 6 1 2 3
TQ2:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ3:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ4:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ5:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ6:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
TQ7:­WRED­TcpMinThr­TcpMaxThr­TcpDrate­NonTcpMinThr­NonTcpMaxThr­NonTcpDrate­
Dis 0 0 0 0 0 0
204
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 13. Precision Time Protocol
As defined in the IEEE 1588-2008 standard, Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a
precision clock synchronization protocol for networked measurement and control
systems. PTP provides system-wide synchronization accuracy and precision in the
sub-microsecond range with minimal network and local clock computing
resources. The synchronization is achieved through the exchange of messages:
General messages that carry data but need not be time stamped; Event messages
that are time stamped and are critical for clock synchronization accuracy.
A PTP network consists of PTP-enabled devices such as switches or routers. These
devices consist of the following types of clocks:

Master clock: In a PTP domain, the clock with the most precise time is
considered the master clock. A best master clock algorithm determines the
highest quality clock in a network.

Ordinary clock: An ordinary clock synchronizes its time with the Master clock.
The ordinary clock has a bidirectional communication with the master clock. By
receiving synchronization/delay response and sending delay request packets,
the ordinary clock adjusts its time with the master clock.

Boundary clock: A boundary clock connects to multiple networks. It
synchronizes with the attached master clock and in turn acts as a master clock to
all attached ordinary clocks. Boundary clocks help to reduce the effect of jitter in
Ethernet-based networks.

Transparent clock: A transparent clock listens for PTP packets and adjusts the
correction field in the PTP event packets as they pass the PTP device.
RackSwitch G8272 supports the configuration of ordinary clock and transparent
clock. It cannot be a master clock as the switch does not participate in the master
clock selection process.
Note: Lenovo Networking OS does not support IPv6 for PTP.
By default, PTP version 2 is installed on the switch but is globally disabled. Use the
following command to globally enable PTP:
RS 8272(config)# ptp {ordinary|transparent} enable
PTP is configured on switch ports. In case of trunk ports, the PTP configuration
must be the same on all ports participating in the same trunk. The switch uses only
one port from a trunk (typically the one used by a multicast protocol) to forward
PTP packets.
By default, PTP is enabled on all the switch ports. To disable PTP on a port, use the
following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
RS 8272(config­if)# no ptp
Note: PTP cannot be enabled on management ports.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 13: Precision Time Protocol
205
PTP packets have a Control Plane Protection (CoPP) queue of 36. You can change
this CoPP priority using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# qos protocol­packet­control packet­queue­map <0-47> <protocol>
You can modify the PTP queue rate using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# qos protocol­packet­control rate­limit­packet­queue <0-47> <1-10000>
Ordinary Clock Mode
When the RackSwitch G8272 is configured as an ordinary clock, it synchronizes its
clock with the master clock. If the G8272 does not detect a master clock, it will not
synchronize its clock with any other device. In this mode, the G8272’s clock cannot
be modified manually or using another time protocol such as Network Time
Protocol (NTP).
As an ordinary clock, the G8272 synchronizes with a single PTP domain. The
switch uses a delay-request mechanism to synchronize with the master clock. The
switch uses a source IP address for the packets it generates. You can create a
loopback interface for this purpose. By default, the switch uses the lowest interface
in the VLAN from which the sync messages are received. To assign a loopback
interface, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# ip ptp source­interface loopback <interface number>
Note: If there are no interfaces on the switch that belong to the VLAN from which
the sync messages are received, then the ordinary clock will not function. An error
message will be generated. You can view this message using the RS 8272# show ptp command.
Transparent Clock Mode
When the G8272 is configured as a transparent clock, its time can be set manually
or using any time protocol. You must configure PTPv2 for the transparent clock to
function. The switch does not modify PTPv1 packets as they pass through the
switch.
As a transparent clock, the G8272 supports syntonization (synchronization of clock
frequency but not time) and synchronization with multiple domains.
Event packets received on all ports on the switch that have PTP enabled will be
adjusted with the residence time. The switch sends all PTP packets to the multicast
group address: 224.0.1.129. You can use Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM),
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), or any other multicast protocol to
route the PTP packets.
206
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Tracing PTP Packets
PTP packets can be traced on the PTP ports. These packets can be identified by
their destination IP address and UDP ports. The following table includes the IEEE
standard specification:
Table 20. IEEE Standard PTP Messages
Message
IP Address/UDP Port
PTP-primary: All PTP messages except
peer delay mechanism messages
224.0.1.129
PTP-pdelay: Peer delay mechanism
messages
224.0.0.107
Event Messages: Sync, delay request,
peer delay request, peer delay
response
319
General Messages: Announce,
follow-up, delay response, peer delay
response follow-up, management
320
Viewing PTP Information
The following table includes commands for viewing PTP information:
Table 21. PTP Information Commands
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Command
Description
RS 8272(config)# show ptp
Displays global PTP information
RS 8272(config)# show interface port <port number>
Displays port information including
port-specific PTP information
RS 8272(config)# show ptp counters
Displays ingress and egress PTP
counters
Chapter 13: Precision Time Protocol
207
208
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 4: Advanced Switching Features
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
209
210
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 14. OpenFlow
This document describes how you can create an OpenFlow Switch instance on the
RackSwitch G8272.
The following topics are discussed in this document:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“OpenFlow Overview” on page 212

“Configuring OpenFlow” on page 226
211
OpenFlow Overview
OpenFlow architecture consists of a control plane residing outside of the switch
(typically on a server) and a data plane residing in the switch. The control plane is
called OpenFlow controller. The data plane which resides in the switch consists of
a set of flows which determine the forwarding of data packets.
The OpenFlow protocol is described in the OpenFlow Switch Specification 1.0.0
and OpenFlow Switch Specification 1.3.1.
An OpenFlow network consists of simple flow-based switches in the data path,
with a remote controller to manage all switches in the OpenFlow network.
OpenFlow maintains a TCP channel for communication of flow management
between the controller and the switch. All controller-switch communication takes
place over the switch's management network.
Switch Profiles
The RackSwitch G8272 can be used for configuring OpenFlow and legacy
switching features simultaneously. However, Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching
features can be configured only on the ports that are not OpenFlow ports. Legacy
switching ports and OpenFlow ports do not communicate with each other.
Alternately, the switch can be configured as an OpenFlow-only switch if you do
not need to configure legacy switching features.
Based on your requirement, select the switch boot profile using the following
commands:

OpenFlow-only:
RS 8272(config)# boot profile openflow
The switch will operate only in OpenFlow environment. None of the legacy
switching features will be supported.

OpenFlow and Legacy Switching:
RS 8272(config)# boot profile default
Legacy switching features can be configured on the non-OpenFlow ports. By
default, the switch boots in this profile.
Reload the switch to apply boot profile changes.
OpenFlow Versions
The RackSwitch G8272 can be configured to run either version 1.0 or version 1.3 of
the OpenFlow standard. By default, the switch uses OpenFlow 1.0. To shift
between versions, use the following commands:

RS 8272(config)# boot openflow v1
The switch will run OpenFlow 1.0 after reboot. This version does not support
MPLS-based flows (See “Flow Tables” on page 213), groups, and static
portchannels.
212
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

RS 8272(config)# boot openflow v13
The switch will run OpenFlow 1.3 after reboot. This version does not support
emergency flow tables (See “Emergency Mode” on page 221).
OpenFlow 1.3 includes (but not limited to) the following key features:

Layer 3 MPLS

Static LAG

MAC address/IP address masking

Flexible Table Miss and Fail Secure

40Gb support

Static CLI for Flow Programming

OpenFlow 1.0 backward compatibility

OpenFlow Groups
OpenFlow Instance
The G8272 supports up to two instances of the OpenFlow protocol. Each instance
appears as a switch to the controller. Instances on the same switch can be
connected to different virtual networks. Each instance maintains a separate TCP
channel for communication of flow management between controller and switch.
Each instance supports up to four controllers. However, only one controller per
instance is active at any point in time.
Global OpenFlow configuration applies to all instances. OpenFlow parameters for
an instance can be configured using the command:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>.
OpenFlow ports cannot be shared between instances.
Flow Tables
A set of a flow identification condition and an action towards a flow is called flow
entry, and the database that stores the entries is called the flow table. A flow is
defined as all the packets matching a flow entry in an OpenFlow flow table. Each
flow entry includes:

Qualifiers - These are header fields that are matched with a packet.

Actions to be performed when a packet matches the qualifiers.
The controller decides which flows to admit and the path their packets will follow.
The switch classifies the flows as ACL-based, FDB-based, or MPLS-based.
MPLS-based flows are supported only in version 1.3 of the OpenFlow standard.
When the switch operates in OpenFlow boot profile (See “Switch Profiles” on
page 212), a maximum of 2000 ACL-based flows, 4096 FDB multicast flows, 123904
FDB unicast flows, 1000 MPLS label pop flows, and 2000 MPLS label push flows
are available. When the switch operates in default boot profile, a maximum of 1500
ACL-based flows, 4096 FDB multicast flows, 123904 FDB unicast flows, 1000 MPLS
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
213
label pop flows, and 2000 MPLS label push flows are available. The instances share
these flows dynamically. To guarantee a specific number of flows to an instance,
use the following commands:
OpenFlow boot profile:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# max­flow­acl <0-2000>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# max­flow­mcast­fdb <0-4096>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# max­flow­ucast­fdb <0-123904>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# max­flow­mpls­pop <0-1000>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# max­flow­mpls­push <0-2000>
Default boot profile:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# max­flow­acl <0-1500>
Note: When the switch operates in default boot profile, the number of FDB and
MPLS flows in an instance cannot be guaranteed.
In version 1.0 of the OpenFlow standard, the G8272 supports two flow tables per
switch instance; basic flow table and emergency flow table. Actions are applied to
packets that match the flow entry. This is done in the data path.
This system identifies packets as a flow by matching parameters in the following
fields:

Ingress port

Source MAC (SMAC)

Destination MAC (DMAC)

Ether Type

VLAN TAG – Single VLAN tag – VLAN ID and Priority

IP address (source IP and destination IP)

IP Protocol

MPLS label

DSCP bits

Layer 4 Port (TCP, UDP)

ICMP code and type

If EtherType is ARP, then the specified ARP type (request/reply) or SIP in the
ARP payload can be used a to match a packet.
Once a packet arrives, the switch searches the flow table. When a flow entry is hit
in the search, the packet is processed according to the action specified in the flow
entry.
214
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Static Flows
You can configure static flow entries for OpenFlow instances. The switch forwards
traffic based on these entries even if it is not connected to a controller. Up to 1000
static ACL entries across all instances can be configured. An OpenFlow controller
cannot modify or delete these entries. Static flow entries can replace entries
installed by a controller. Static flow entries are not lost when the switch is reloaded.
Static flow entries are based on the following qualifiers, actions, and options:
Table 22. Static Flow Entry Qualifiers in OpenFlow 1.0
Qualifier
Description
ingress-port
port of the instance
src-mac
source MAC address
dst-mac
destination MAC address
vlan-id
VLAN identifier (tagged, untagged, or 0-4094)
vlan-priority
802.1p (0-7)
src-ip
source IP address
dst-ip
destination IP address
src-port
Layer 4 source port (0-65535)
dst-port
Layer 4 destination port (0-65535)
ether-type
"arp"/"0806" or "ip"/"0800" or
(hex-value <= 65535)
protocol
"tcp" or "udp" or 0-255
tos
IP TOS (0-255)
type
"request" or "reply" (can be set only if ether type
is ARP)
all
all qualifiers or any qualifier
Table 23. Static Flow Entry Qualifiers in OpenFlow 1.3
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Qualifier
Description
in-port
switch input port
in-portchannel
switch input portchannel (only static trunk
supported)
in-phy-port
switch physical input port, valid only when
in-port is pecified
eth-src
source MAC address and mask
eth-dst
destination MAC address and mask
vlan-vid
VLAN identifier (0-4095 + 65535 (untagged))
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
215
Table 23. Static Flow Entry Qualifiers in OpenFlow 1.3 (continued)
Qualifier
Description
vlan-pcp
802.1p(0-7)
ipv4-src
source IPv4 address and mask
ipv4-dst
destination IPv4 address and mask
tcp-src
TCP source port (0-65535)
tcp-dst
TCP destination port (0-65535)
udp-src
UDP source port (0-65535)
udp-dst
UDP destination port (0-65535)
icmpv4-type
ICMPv4 type
icmpv4-code
ICMPv4 code
eth-type
"arp"/"0806" or "ip"/"0800" or (hex-value <
=65535)
ip-proto
"tcp" or "udp" or 0-255
ip-dscp
IP DSCP (6 bits in ToS field)
arp-op
"request" or "reply" (can be set only if eth-type is
ARP)
mpls-label
MPLS label
all
all qualifiers or any qualifier
Table 24. Static Flow Entry Actions in OpenFlow 1.0
216
Action
Description
out-put
"all","in-port","flood","controller" or a valid port
set-src-mac
change source MAC address
set-dst-mac
change destination MAC address
strip-vlan-id
strip VLAN
set-vlan-id
set VLAN ID
set-vlan-priority
set 802.1p priority (0-7)
set-nw-tos
set IP TOS (0-255)
drop
drop the packet
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Table 25. Static Flow Entry Actions in OpenFlow 1.3
Action
Description
output
physical ports
reserved ports: all, controller, in_port
output-portchannel
Logical ports (only support static LAG)
set-eth-src
change source MAC address
set-eth-dst
change destination MAC address
push-vlan
push a new VLAN tag, 0x8100
pop-vlan
pop the VLAN tag
push-mpls
push a new MPLS tag, 0x8847
pop-mpls
pop MPLS tag, 0x0800 or 0x800 (IP Ethertype)
set-vlan-vid
set VLAN ID, <0-4094>
set-vlan-pcp
set 802.1p priority (0-7)
set-ip-dscp
Set IP DSCP (0-63), 6 highest bits in TOS
set-mpls-ttl
set MPLS TTL
set-mpls-label
Set MPLS label, <1-0xFFFFF>
copy-ttl-out
copy TTL outward - from next-to-outermost to
outermost
copy-ttl-in
copy TTL inward - from outermost to
next-to-outermost
drop
drop the packet
Note: Actions for static flows must be specified in the following order:
set-mpls-ttl, copy-ttl-in, pop-mpls, pop-vlan, push-mpls, push-vlan,
copy-ttl-out, set-field, output. The actions output, output-portchannel,
set-eth-src, set-eth-dst, set-vlan-vid, set-vlan-pcp, set-ip-dscp, and
set-mpls-label may be used in any order.
Table 26. Static Flow Entry Options
Option
Description
max-len
maximum length of flow to send to controller
Port Membership
When static flow entries are configured, port membership changes are handled as
follows:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

If a port is the “in-port” or “out-port” in a static flow entry, the port membership
cannot be changed.

When a port membership changes, the ingress bitmap of static entries with
in-port ANY will be updated.
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
217

When a port membership changes, the egress bitmap of static entries with
redirect output FlOOD/ANY will be updated.
Static Flow Examples
Following are example static flow entries for Openflow 1.0:

Basic ACL flow:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table add index 1 match ingress­port=1 actions out­put=10 priority 12345

Flow with multiple qualifiers and actions:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table add index 2 match vlan­id=1,dst­mac=00:00:00:00:00:01 actions set­vlan­priority=3,out­put=20 priority 1000

Flow with action: output to controller:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table add index 3 match all actions out­put=controller options max­len=65534 priority 1000
Static ACL flow entries can be deleted using the command:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table remove index <index number>
Following are example static flow entries for OpenFlow 1.3:

Basic ACL flow:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table add index 1 match in­port=41 actions output=50 priority 12345

Flow with multiple qualifiers and actions:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table add index 2 match vlan­id=1,eth­dst=00:00:00:00:00:01 actions set­vlan­pcp=3,output=50 priority 1000
Static ACL flow entries for OpenFlow 1.3 can also be deleted using the command:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# static­table remove index <index number>
218
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
In OpenFlow version 1.0:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# show openflow table
Openflow instance 1 is currently disabled
Openflow Instance Id: 2
BASIC FLOW TABLE
CONTROLLER ADDED FLOWS
Flow:1 Filter Based, priority: 0, hard­time­out: 0, idle­time­out: 0
cookie: 0x0
QUALIFIERS: ACTION: drop
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0 Flow:2 Filter Based, priority:65535, hard­time­out: 0, idle­time­out: 0
cookie: 0x0
QUALIFIERS: ether­type:0x88cc
protocol: 0, tos: 0
src­ip:0.0.0.0/32, dst­ip:0.0.0.0/32
src­port: 0, dst­port: 0
ACTION: output:CONTROLLER [Max Len: 65535 / ­ bytes (C/S)]
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0 Flow:3 Filter Based, priority: 2, hard­time­out: 0, idle­time­out: 0
cookie: 0x0
QUALIFIERS: ACTION: output:CONTROLLER [Max Len: 65535 / ­ bytes (C/S)]
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0 © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
219
In OpenFlow version 1.3:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# show openflow table
Openflow instance 1 is currently disabled
Openflow Instance Id: 2
CONTROLLER added FLOWs
Flow 1, Filter Based, priority:1000, hard­time­out:0, idle­time­out:0
cookie:0x0
QUALIFIERS: in­port:PCH1
eth­dst:01:00:08:00:00:03
vlan­vid:1
Instruction: apply_action
ACTION: output:18, PCH1, PCH66
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0
Flow 2, Filter Based, priority:2, hard­time­out:0, idle­time­out:0
cookie:0x0
QUALIFIERS:
Instruction: write_action
ACTION: output:CONTROLLER [Max Len: 65535 / ­ bytes (C/S)]
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0
Flow 3, Filter Based, priority:65535, hard­time­out:0, idle­time­out:0
cookie:0x0
QUALIFIERS: eth­type:0x88cc
Instruction: write_action
ACTION: output:CONTROLLER [Max Len: 65535 / ­ bytes (C/S)]
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0
Flow 4, Filter Based, priority:0, hard­time­out:0, idle­time­out:0
cookie:0x0
QUALIFIERS:
Instruction: empty
ACTION: drop
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0
Table-Miss
In OpenFlow 1.3, if a match is not found for an arriving packet, the packet is either
dropped or sent to the controller. If sent to the controller, the controller decides
which action(s) to perform on all packets from the same flow. The decision is then
sent to the switch and cached as an entry in the switch instance’s flow table. If the
controller decides to add the flow, it sends a flow add message to the switch. The
switch then adds the flow in its flow table. The next arriving packet that belongs to
the same flow is then forwarded at line-rate through the switch without consulting
the controller.
By default, packets that don’t match any of the existing flow entries are dropped.
To set up an OpenFlow instance to send non-matching packets to the controller
instead of dropping them, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# table­miss controller
220
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Fail Secure Mode
In OpenFlow 1.3, if contact with all controllers is lost, the switch automatically
enters a fail secure mode. In this mode, the switch continues to operate based on the
existing flow entries until they expire (according to the configured flow timeout
value), while packets and messages destined to the controllers are dropped. When
a connection to a controller is reestablished, the controller has the option to either
delete or keep any remaining flow entries.
Emergency Mode
Note: Emergency Mode is supported only in version 1.0 of the OpenFlow
standard.
By default, Emergency mode is disabled. In this state, if the connection to the
controller fails, the switch enters Fail Secure mode.
To enable Emergency mode, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# emergency
In Emergency mode enabled state, if the connection to the controller fails, the
switch tries to establish connection with any of the other configured controllers. If
it is unable to connect with any controller, it enters Emergency mode. It replaces
the flow entries with the entries from the emergency flow table.
The switch stays in the Emergency mode for the time configured as the Emergency
timeout interval (default value is 30 seconds), after which the switch tries to
establish connection with any configured controller.

If connection with a controller is established, the switch exits Emergency mode.
Entries in the Emergency flow table are retained. If desired, the controller may
delete all the emergency flow entries.

If connection with a controller is not established, the switch stays in Emergency
mode and continues to forward packets based on the Emergency flows. It retries
to establish a connection with a controller every time the Emergency timeout
interval expires.
Emergency mode can be activated or deactivated per instance. To activate
Emergency mode on an instance, use the following command:
RS 8272# openflow instance <instance ID> enter­emergency
To deactivate Emergency mode on an instance, use the following command:
RS 8272# no openflow instance <instance ID> enter­emergency
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
221
Table 27 displays an example of emergency flows created:
Table 27. Emergency Flows
RS 8272(config)# show openflow table Openflow Instance Id: 1
BASIC FLOW TABLE
Flow:1 FDB Based, priority: 1000, hard­time­out: 0
QUALIFIERS: dst­mac:01­02­03­05­06­00, vlan­id: 100 ACTION: out­port:21
Flow:2 Filter Based, priority:32768, hard­time­out: 0, idle­time­out: 0
QUALIFIERS: vlan­id: 100
dst­mac:01­02­03­66­76­00
ACTION: output:22
STATS: packets=0, bytes=0 EMERGENCY FLOW TABLE
Flow:1 FDB Based, priority: 1000, hard­time­out: 0
QUALIFIERS: dst­mac:01­02­03­66­06­00, vlan­id: 100 ACTION: out­port:21
Flow:2 Filter Based, priority:32768, hard­time­out: 0, idle­time­out: 0
QUALIFIERS: vlan­id: 100
dst­mac:01­02­03­66­06­00
ACTION: output:22
Openflow Instance Id: 2
BASIC FLOW TABLE
Flow:1 FDB Based, priority: 1000, hard­time­out: 0
QUALIFIERS: dst­mac:01­55­03­11­96­00, vlan­id: 200 ACTION: out­port:31
EMERGENCY FLOW TABLE
Flow:1 FDB Based, priority: 1000, hard­time­out: 0
QUALIFIERS: dst­mac:01­55­03­11­16­00, vlan­id: 200 ACTION: out­port:31
OpenFlow Ports
When OpenFlow is enabled, all OpenFlow instance member ports become
OpenFlow ports. OpenFlow ports have the following characteristics:
222

Learning is turned off.

Flood blocking is turned on.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is disabled.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The switch communicates with OpenFlow controllers through controller
management ports or through dedicated out-of-band management ports on the
switch. All OpenFlow ports, except controller management ports, must be
members of VLAN 1. Controller management ports can be members of any VLAN
except VLAN 1.
Note: When the switch operates in the default boot profile, we recommend that you
use a non-OpenFlow port to connect the switch with the controller. Use the
following command to view port information:
RS 8272(config)# show interface information
For each OpenFlow instance, when you configure the controller IP address and
port, the switch establishes a TCP connection with the controller for flow control
and management. See Step 3 on page 226. The switch supports up to four
controllers per instance. The default controller port is 6633 and is reachable via
out-of-band management port (port MGT) or in-band port. The controller
management ports must not be members of an OpenFlow instance. You can use a
controller to manage and control multiple instances.
Use the following command to configure a data port as a controller management
port:
RS 8272(config)# openflow mgmtport <port number>
Note: In default boot profile, when you disable OpenFlow, the OpenFlow ports
become legacy switch ports and are added to the default VLAN 1.
OpenFlow Edge Ports
You can configure a port as an OpenFlow edge port. Edge ports are connected to
either non-OpenFlow switches or servers. OpenFlow edge ports have the
following characteristics:

Flood blocking is turned on.

MAC learning is turned on.
Use the following commands to configure a port as an edge port:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# edgeport <port number>
Note: Edge ports are not OpenFlow standard ports. You must configure edge ports
only if the controller supports it.
Link Aggregation
In OpenFlow 1.3, logical ports can be used to aggregate links. You can add a logical
port to an OpenFlow instance using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member portchannel <Trunk ID>
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
223
Once added, the logical port inherits the OpenFlow data properties such as MAC
learning turned off, flood blocking turned on, and STP disabled. The switch
derives the logical port ID based on the configured trunk ID.
The trunk link stays active as long as at least one member port is up. The trunk link
speed is an aggregation of the speed of individual member ports. If a port goes
down, the trunk link speed lowers.
A portchannel can be added to the OpenFlow instance using the command:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member portchannel <Trunk ID>
To add a portchannel to the edge ports list, use the following command:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# edgeport portchannel <Trunk ID>
Data Path ID
The data path ID—automatically computed—is a combination of two bytes of the
instance ID and six bytes of the switch MAC address. Alternately, the data path ID
can be manually configured using the following command. Each instance on the
switch must have a unique data path ID:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <instance ID>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# dpid <Data path ID>
(Hex string starting with 0x)
Note: If the data path ID is changed, the switch instance closes the active
connection and reconnects with the modified data path ID.
sFlow Compatibility
OpenFlow ports that are set for sFlow sampling will send incoming sample
packets to both the sFlow server or analyzer and the OpenFlow controller as
“packet-in”. All sFlow servers must be configured as reachable over a management
port or a non-OpenFlow data port.
Unicast FDB flows support both ingress and egress sampling. ACL-based flows,
MPLS-based flows, multicast FDB-based flows, packet-in, send-to-controller, and
mirror-to-controller flows only support ingress sampling.
OpenFlow Groups
In OpenFlow 1.3, the RackSwitch G8272 supports OpenFlow groups based on the
OpenFlow 1.3.1 specification. The following OpenFlow group features are
supported:
224

Group types: ALL and INDIRECT

Up to 256 groups per instance

Group operations: ADD, MODIFY and DELETE

Support for group multipart messages: group counter statistics, group
description and group features
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Flows: ACL, FDB and MPLS

Port types: physical port, logical port (static portchannel)
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
225
Configuring OpenFlow
The RackSwitch G8272 is capable of operating both in normal switching
environment (default boot profile) and in OpenFlow switch environment
(OpenFlow boot profile).
Note: If you disable OpenFlow, you must reboot the switch in order to resume
normal switch environment operations.
Perform the following steps to configure an OpenFlow switch instance.
1. Enable OpenFlow:
RS 8272(config)# openflow enable
2. Create an OpenFlow switch instance and add data ports:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance <1-2>
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member <port number or range>
In version 1.3 of the OpenFlow standard, you can also add static portchannels to
the instance:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member portchannel <1-72>
3. Configure a controller for the OpenFlow switch instance:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller <1-4> address <IP address> [mgt­port|data­port]
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller <1-4> port <1-65535>
4. Enable the OpenFlow switch instance:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# enable
The switch is ready to perform switching functions in an OpenFlow environment.
5. Verify OpenFlow configuration:
RS 8272(config)# show openflow <instance ID> information
Configuration Example 1 - OpenFlow Boot Profile
The following example includes steps to configure an OpenFlow switch instance
when the switch operates in OpenFlow boot profile.
Configure OpenFlow instance 1, which connects with one controller via in-band
management port and another controller via out-of-band management port; and
OpenFlow instance 2, which connects with two controllers via in-band
management ports.
226
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
1. Configure IP interface 128 for out-of-band connection:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 128
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.20.100.1 255.255.0.0 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure IP interface 1 for in-band connection:
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3000
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.21.100.1 255.255.0.0 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 3000
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
3. Configure IP interface 2 for in-band connection:
RS 8272(config)# vlan 4000
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 4000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.22.100.1 255.255.0.0 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 4000
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
4. Enable OpenFlow globally:
RS 8272(config)# openflow enable
5. Configure OpenFlow in-band management ports:
RS 8272(config)# openflow mgmtport 5,6 (Switch can connect with the controllers via
dataport 5 and 6, which are connected to the
controller networks)
Note: Step 5 is not required when the switch operates in default boot profile.
6. Create OpenFlow switch instance 1 and add data ports:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance 1
(Create OpenFlow instance 1)
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member 17,18,19­25
(Add data ports 17,18, and data
port range 19 through 25 as
members of OpenFlow instance 1)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
227
7. Configure controller 1 IP address using out-of-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 1 address 172.20.100.73 mgt­port
(Switch connects with controller 1 via the
out-of-band management port; default controller port is used in this example)
8. Configure controller 2 IP address using in-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 2 address 172.21.100.73 data­port
(Switch connects with controller 2 via the in-band management port configured in Step 5 on page 227;
default controller port is used in this example)
9. Enable OpenFlow instance 1:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# enable
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# exit
10. Create OpenFlow switch instance 2 and add data ports:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance 2
(Create OpenFlow instance 2)
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member 26,27,28­34
(Add data ports 26,27, and data port
range 28 through 34 as members of
OpenFlow instance 2)
11. Configure controller 1 IP address using in-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 1 address 172.21.100.73 data­port
(Switch connects with controller 1 via the in-band management port configured in Step 5; default controller
port is used in this example)
12. Configure controller 2 IP address using in-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 2 address 172.22.100.73 data­port
Switch connects with controller 2 via in-band management port configured in Step 5 on page 227; default
controller port is used in this example)
13. Enable OpenFlow instance 2:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# enable
14. View OpenFlow Configuration:
RS 8272(config)# show running­config
228
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuration Example 2 - Default Boot Profile
The following example includes steps to configure an OpenFlow switch instance
when the switch operates in Default boot profile.
1. Configure IP interface 128 for out-of-band connection:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 128
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.20.100.1 255.255.0.0 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure IP interface 1 for in-band connection:
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3000
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.21.100.1 255.255.0.0 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 3000
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
3. Configure IP interface 2 for in-band connection:
RS 8272(config)# vlan 4000
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 4000
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 172.22.100.1 255.255.0.0 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 4000
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
4. Enable OpenFlow globally:
RS 8272(config)# openflow enable
5. Create OpenFlow switch instance 1 and add data ports:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance 1
(Create OpenFlow instance 1)
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member 17,18,19­25(Add data ports 17,18, and
data port range 19 through 25 as
members of OpenFlow instance 1)
6. Configure controller 1 IP addresses using out-of-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 1 address 172.20.100.73 mgt­port
(Switch connects with controller 1 via the
out-of-band management port; default controller port is used in this example)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
229
7. Configure controller 2 IP address using in-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 2 address 172.21.100.73 data­port
(Switch connects with controller 2 via the in-band management port; default controller port is used in this
example)
8. Enable OpenFlow instance 1:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# enable
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# exit
9. Create OpenFlow switch instance 2 and add data ports:
RS 8272(config)# openflow instance 2
(Create OpenFlow instance 2)
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# member 26,27,28­34(
Add data ports 26,27, and data port
range 28 through 34 as members of
OpenFlow instance 2)
10. Configure controller 1 IP address using in-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 1 address 172.21.100.73 data­port
(Switch connects with controller 1 via the in-band management port; default controller port is used in this
example)
11. Configure controller 2 IP address using in-band management port:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# controller 2 address 172.22.100.73 data­port
Switch connects with controller 2 via in-band management port; default controller port is used in this
example)
12. Enable OpenFlow instance 2:
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# enable
RS 8272(config­openflow­instance)# exit
13. View OpenFlow Configuration:
RS 8272(config)# show running­config
230
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Feature Limitations
When the switch is booted in the OpenFlow profile, it operates only in OpenFlow
switch environment. None of the normal switching environment features are
supported.
If the switch is booted in default profile, normal switching environment features
can be configured on the non-OpenFlow ports. However, the following features
are not supported:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

ACLs

ECN

FCoE

IPMC

IPv6

MACL

vNIC

VMready
Chapter 14: OpenFlow
231
232
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 15. Deployment Profiles
The Lenovo N/OS software for the RackSwitch G8272 can be configured to operate
in different modes for different deployment scenarios. Each deployment profile
sets different capacity levels for basic switch resources, such as the number of IP
Multicast (IPMC) entries and ACL entries, to optimize the switch for different
types of networks.
This chapter covers the following topics
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“Available Profiles” on page 234

“Selecting Profiles” on page 235

“Automatic Configuration Changes” on page 236
233
Available Profiles
The following deployment profiles are currently available on the G8272:

Default Profile: This profile is recommended for general network usage. Switch
resources are allocated to support a wide range of features such as IPv6, ACLs,
and FCoE/CEE.

ACL Profile: This profile enables you to configure the maximum number of
ACLs. The IPv6, FCoE/CEE, and VMready features will not be supported. This
profile also does not support the forwarding of IPMC packets with IP options.
The properties of each mode are compared in the following table.
Table 28. Deployment Mode Comparison
Capacity, by Mode
Switch Feature
Default
Openflow
ACL
ACLs
256
256
896
IPv6
Supported
Not Supported Not Supported
VMready
Supported
Not Supported Not Supported
VMap
Supported
Not Supported Not Supported
FCoE/CEE
Supported
Not Supported Not Supported
Note: Throughout this guide, where feature capacities are listed, values reflect
those of the Default profile only, unless otherwise noted.
234
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Selecting Profiles
To change the deployment profile, you must first select the new profile and then
reboot the switch.
Note: Before changing profiles, it is recommended that you save the active switch
configuration to a backup file so that it may be restored later if desired.
When you select a profile, you will see a warning message. For example, if you
select the ACL profile, you will see the following message:
Warning: Setting boot profile to "ACL" will cause FIPS, IPv6 and VM ACL configuration to be lost in next boot and error messages will be displayed when above configurations are restored.
Next boot will use "ACL" profile.
To view the current deployment profile, use the following command:
RS 8272# show boot
Use the following commands to change the deployment profile:
RS 8272(config)# boot profile {default|openflow|acl||
{ipmc­opt acls­128|acls­256|acls­384|acls­none}}
(Select deployment profile)
RS 8272(config)# exit
(To privileged EXEC mode)
RS 8272# reload
(Reboot the switch)
When using a specialized profile, menus and commands are unavailable for
features that are not supported under the profile. Such menus and commands will
be available again only when a supporting profile is used.
Note: Only use deployment profiles other than those listed in this section when
under the direction of your support personnel.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 15: Deployment Profiles
235
Automatic Configuration Changes
When a new profile is loaded, configuration settings for any unsupported features
will be ignored. However, these settings are retained in memory until you change
or save the current configuration under the new profile. Until then, you can return
to the old profile with all prior configuration settings intact.
Once you change or save the configuration under a new profile, any configuration
settings related to unsupported features will be reset to their default values. At that
point, you will have to reconfigure these settings or use a backup configuration if
you reapply the old profile.
For example, when using the ACL profile, because IPv6 is not supported in that
mode, IPv6 settings will be excluded when the configuration is saved. Then, if
returning to the Default profile, it will be necessary to reconfigure the IPv6
settings, or to use the backup configuration.
236
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 16. Virtualization
Virtualization allows resources to be allocated in a fluid manner based on the
logical needs of the data center, rather than on the strict, physical nature of
components. The following virtualization features are included in Lenovo
Networking OS 8.2 on the RackSwitch G8272 (G8272):

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)
VLANs are commonly used to split groups of networks into manageable
broadcast domains, create logical segmentation of workgroups, and to enforce
security policies among logical network segments.
For details on this feature, see “VLANs” on page 117.

Port trunking
A port trunk pools multiple physical switch ports into a single, high-bandwidth
logical link to other devices. In addition to aggregating capacity, trunks provides
link redundancy.
For details on this feature, see “Ports and Trunking” on page 129.

Virtual Link Aggregation (VLAGs)
With VLAGs, two switches can act as a single logical device for the purpose of
establishing port trunking. Active trunk links from one device can lead to both
VLAG peer switches, providing enhanced redundancy, including active-active
VRRP configuration.
For details on this feature, see “Virtual Link Aggregation Groups” on page 165

VMready
The switch’s VMready software makes it virtualization aware. Servers that run
hypervisor software with multiple instances of one or more operating systems
can present each as an independent virtual machine (VM). With VMready, the
switch automatically discovers virtual machines (VMs) connected to switch.
For details on this feature, see “VMready” on page 239.

Unified Fabric Port (UFP)
An architecture that logically subdivides a high-speed physical link connecting
to a server NIC. UFP provides a switch fabric component to control the NIC.
For details on this feature, see “Unified Fabric Port” on page 307.
N/OS virtualization features provide a highly-flexible framework for allocating
and managing switch resources.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
237
238
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 17. VMready
Virtualization is used to allocate server resources based on logical needs, rather
than on strict physical structure. With appropriate hardware and software support,
servers can be virtualized to host multiple instances of operating systems, known
as virtual machines (VMs). Each VM has its own presence on the network and runs
its own service applications.
Software known as a hypervisor manages the various virtual entities (VEs) that
reside on the host server: VMs, virtual switches, and so on. Depending on the
virtualization solution, a virtualization management server may be used to
configure and manage multiple hypervisors across the network. With some
solutions, VMs can even migrate between host hypervisors, moving to different
physical hosts while maintaining their virtual identity and services.
The Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 VMready feature supports up to 4096 VEs in a
virtualized data center environment. The switch automatically discovers the VEs
attached to switch ports, and distinguishes between regular VMs, Service Console
Interfaces, and Kernel/Management Interfaces in a VMware® environment.
VEs may be placed into VM groups on the switch to define communication
boundaries: VEs in the same VM group may communicate with each other, while
VEs in different groups may not. VM groups also allow for configuring group-level
settings such as virtualization policies and ACLs.
The administrator can also pre-provision VEs by adding their MAC addresses (or
their IPv4 address or VM name in a VMware environment) to a VM group. When a
VE with a pre-provisioned MAC address becomes connected to the switch, the
switch will automatically apply the appropriate group membership configuration.
The G8272 with VMready also detects the migration of VEs across different
hypervisors. As VEs move, the G8272 NMotion™ feature automatically moves the
appropriate network configuration as well. NMotion gives the switch the ability to
maintain assigned group membership and associated policies, even when a VE
moves to a different port on the switch.
VMready also works with VMware Virtual Center (vCenter) management
software. Connecting with a vCenter allows the G8272 to collect information about
more distant VEs, synchronize switch and VE configuration, and extend migration
properties.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
239
VE Capacity
When VMready is enabled, the switch will automatically discover VEs that reside
in hypervisors directly connected on the switch ports. Networking OS 8.2 supports
up to 4096 VEs. Once this limit is reached, the switch will reject additional VEs.
Note: In rare situations, the switch may reject new VEs prior to reaching the
supported limit. This can occur when the internal hash corresponding to the new
VE is already in use. If this occurs, change the MAC address of the VE and retry the
operation. The MAC address can usually be changed from the virtualization
management server console (such as the VMware Virtual Center).
Defining Server Ports
Before you configure VMready features, you must first define whether ports are
connected to servers or are used as uplink ports. Use the following ISCLI
configuration command to define a port as a server port:
RS 8272(config)# system server­ports port <port alias or number>
Ports that are not defined as server ports are automatically considered uplink
ports.
VM Group Types
VEs, as well as switch server ports, switch uplink ports, static trunks, and LACP
trunks, can be placed into VM groups on the switch to define virtual
communication boundaries. Elements in a given VM group are permitted to
communicate with each other, while those in different groups are not. The
elements within a VM group automatically share certain group-level settings.
N/OS 8.2 supports up to 4093 VM groups. There are two different types:
Local VM groups are maintained locally on the switch. Their configuration is not
synchronized with hypervisors.
 Distributed VM groups are automatically synchronized with a virtualization
management server (see “Assigning a vCenter” on page 250).

Each VM group type is covered in detail in the following sections.
240
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Local VM Groups
The configuration for local VM groups is maintained on the switch (locally) and is
not directly synchronized with hypervisors. Local VM groups may include only
local elements: local switch ports and trunks, and only those VEs connected to one
of the switch ports or pre-provisioned on the switch.
Local VM groups support limited VE migration: as VMs and other VEs move to
different hypervisors connected to different ports on the switch, the configuration
of their group identity and features moves with them. However, VE migration to
and from more distant hypervisors (those not connected to the G8272, may require
manual configuration when using local VM groups.
Configuring a Local VM Group
Use the following ISCLI configuration commands to assign group properties and
membership:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup <VM group number> ?
cpu
(Enable sending unregistered IPMC to CPU)
flood
(Enable flooding unregistered IPMC)
key <LACP trunk key>
optflood
port <port alias or number>
(Add LACP trunk to group)
(Enable optimized flooding)
(Add port member to group)
portchannel <trunk group number>
(Add static trunk to group)
profile <profile name>
(Not used for local groups)
stg <Spanning Tree group>
(Add STG to group)
tag
(Set VLAN tagging on ports)
validate <advanced|basic>
(Validate mode for the group)
vlan <VLAN number>
(Specify the group VLAN)
vm <MAC>|<index>|<UUID>|<IPv4 address>|<name>(Add VM member to group)
vmap <VMAP number> [intports|extports](Specify VMAP number)
vport
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
(Add a virtual port to the group)
Chapter 17: VMready
241
The following rules apply to the local VM group configuration commands:

cpu: Enable sending unregistered IPMC to CPU.

flood: Enable flooding unregistered IPMC.

key: Add LACP trunks to the group.

optflood: Enable optimized flooding to allow sending unregistered IPMC to
the Mrouter ports without having any packet loss during the learning period;
This option is disabled by default; When optflood is enabled, the flood and cpu
settings are ignored.

port: Add switch server ports or switch uplink ports to the group.

portchannel: Add static port trunks to the group.

profile: The profile options are not applicable to local VM groups. Only
distributed VM groups may use VM profiles (see “VM Profiles” on page 243).

stg: The group may be assigned to a Spanning-Tree group for broadcast loop
control (see “Spanning Tree Protocols” on page 143).

tag: Enable VLAN tagging for the VM group. If the VM group contains ports
which also exist in other VM groups, enable tagging in both VM groups.

validate: Set validation mode for the group.

vlan: Each VM group must have a unique VLAN number. This is required for
local VM groups. If one is not explicitly configured, the switch will
automatically assign the next unconfigured VLAN when a VE or port is added
to the VM group.

vmap: Each VM group may optionally be assigned a VLAN-based ACL (see
“VLAN Maps” on page 254).

vm: Add VMs.
VMs and other VEs are primarily specified by MAC address. They can also be
specified by UUID, IP address, or by the index number as shown in various
VMready information output (see “VMready Information Displays” on
page 257).

vport: Add a virtual port to the group.
If VMware Tools software is installed in the guest operating system (see
VMware documentation for information on installing recommended tools), VEs
may also be specified by IPv4 address or VE name. However, if there is more
than one possible VE for the input, the switch will display a list of candidates
and prompt for a specific MAC address.
Only VEs currently connected to the switch port (local) or pending connection
(pre-provisioned) are permitted in local VM groups.
Use the no variant of the commands to remove or disable VM group configuration
settings:
RS 8272(config)# no virt vmgroup <VM group number> [?]
242
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Distributed VM Groups
Distributed VM groups allow configuration profiles to be synchronized between
the G8272 and associated hypervisors and VEs. This allows VE configuration to be
centralized, and provides for more reliable VE migration across hypervisors.
Using distributed VM groups requires a virtualization management server. The
management server acts as a central point of access to configure and maintain
multiple hypervisors and their VEs (VMs, virtual switches, and so on).
The G8272 must connect to a virtualization management server before distributed
VM groups can be used. The switch uses this connection to collect configuration
information about associated VEs, and can also automatically push configuration
profiles to the virtualization management server, which in turn configures the
hypervisors and VEs. See “Virtualization Management Servers” on page 250 for
more information.
VM Profiles
VM profiles are required for configuring distributed VM groups. They are not used
with local VM groups. A VM profile defines the VLAN and virtual switch
bandwidth shaping characteristics for the distributed VM group. The switch
distributes these settings to the virtualization management server, which in turn
distributes them to the appropriate hypervisors for VE members associated with
the group.
Creating VM profiles is a two part process. First, the VM profile is created as
shown in the following command on the switch:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmprofile <profile name>
Next, the profile must be edited and configured using the following configuration
commands:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmprofile edit <profile name> ?
eshaping <average bandwidth> <burst size> <peak>
shaping <average bandwidth> <burst size> <peak>
vlan <VLAN number>
For virtual switch bandwidth shaping parameters, average and peak bandwidth
are specified in kilobits per second (a value of 1000 represents 1 Mbps). Burst size is
specified in kilobytes (a value of 1000 represents 1 MB). Eshaping (egress shaping)
is used for distributed virtual switch.
Note: The bandwidth shaping parameters in the VM profile are used by the
hypervisor virtual switch software. To set bandwidth policies for individual VEs,
see “VM Policy Bandwidth Control” on page 255.
Once configured, the VM profile may be assigned to a distributed VM group as
shown in the following section.
Initializing a Distributed VM Group
Note: A VM profile is required before a distributed VM group may be configured.
See “VM Profiles” on page 243 for details.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
243
Once a VM profile is available, a distributed VM group may be initialized using the
following configuration command:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup <VM group number> profile <VM profile name>
Only one VM profile can be assigned to a given distributed VM group. To change
the VM profile, the old one must first be removed using the following ISCLI
configuration command:
RS 8272(config)# no virt vmgroup <VM group number> profile
Note: The VM profile can be added only to an empty VM group (one that has no
VLAN, VMs, or port members). Any VM group number currently configured for a
local VM group (see “Local VM Groups” on page 241) cannot be converted and
must be deleted before it can be used for a distributed VM group.
Assigning Members
VMs, ports, and trunks may be added to the distributed VM group only after the
VM profile is assigned. Group members are added, pre-provisioned, or removed
from distributed VM groups in the same manner as with local VM groups (“Local
VM Groups” on page 241), with the following exceptions:

VMs: VMs and other VEs are not required to be local. Any VE known by the
virtualization management server can be part of a distributed VM group.

The VM group vlan option (see page 242) cannot be used with distributed VM
groups. For distributed VM groups, the VLAN is assigned in the VM profile.
Synchronizing the Configuration
When the configuration for a distributed VM group is modified, the switch
updates the assigned virtualization management server. The management server
then distributes changes to the appropriate hypervisors.
For VM membership changes, hypervisors modify their internal virtual switch
port groups, adding or removing server port memberships to enforce the
boundaries defined by the distributed VM groups. Virtual switch port groups
created in this fashion can be identified in the virtual management server by the
name of the VM profile, formatted as follows:
Lenovo_<VM profile name>
(or)
Lenovo_<VM profile name> <index number>
(for vDS)
Adding a server host interface to a distributed VM group does not create a new
port group on the virtual switch or move the host. Instead, because the host
interface already has its own virtual switch port group on the hypervisor, the VM
profile settings are applied to its existing port group.
Note: When applying the distributed VM group configuration, the virtualization
management server and associated hypervisors must take appropriate actions. If a
hypervisor is unable to make requested changes, an error message will be
displayed on the switch. Be sure to evaluate all error message and take the
appropriate actions for the expected changes to apply.
244
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Removing Member VEs
Removing a VE from a distributed VM group on the switch will have the following
effects on the hypervisor:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

The VE will be moved to the Lenovo_Default port group in VLAN 0 (zero).

Traffic shaping will be disabled for the VE.

All other properties will be reset to default values inherited from the virtual
switch.
Chapter 17: VMready
245
VMcheck
The G8272 primarily identifies virtual machines by their MAC addresses. An
untrusted server or a VM could identify itself by a trusted MAC address leading to
MAC spoofing attacks. Sometimes, MAC addresses get transferred to another VM,
or they get duplicated.
The VMcheck solution addresses these security concerns by validating the MAC
addresses assigned to VMs. The switch periodically sends hello messages on server
ports. These messages include the switch identifier and port number. The hypervisor
listens to these messages on physical NICs and stores the information, which can be
retrieved using the VMware Infrastructure Application Programming Interface (VI
API). This information is used to validate VM MAC addresses. Two modes of
validation are available: Basic and Advanced.
Use the following command to select the validation mode or to disable validation:
RS 8272(config)# [no] virt vmgroup <VM group number> validate {basic|advanced}
Basic Validation
This mode provides port-based validation by identifying the port used by a
hypervisor. It is suitable for environments in which MAC reassignment or
duplication cannot occur.
The switch, using the hello message information, identifies a hypervisor port. If the
hypervisor port is found in the hello message information, it is deemed to be a
trusted port. Basic validation should be enabled when:

A VM is added to a VM group, and the MAC address of the VM interface is in
the Layer 2 table of the switch.

A VM interface that belongs to a VM group experiences a “source miss” i.e. is
not able to learn new MAC address.

A trusted port goes down. Port validation must be performed to ensure that the
port does not get connected to an untrusted source when it comes back up.
Use the following command to set the action to be performed if the switch is
unable to validate the VM MAC address:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmcheck action basic {log|link}
log ­ generates a log
link ­ disables the port
Advanced Validation
This mode provides VM-based validation by mapping a switch port to a VM MAC
address. It is suitable for environments in which spoofing, MAC reassignment, or
MAC duplication is possible.
246
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
When the switch receives frames from a VM, it first validates the VM interface
based on the VM MAC address, VM Universally Unique Identifier (UUID), Switch
port, and Switch ID available in the hello message information. Only if all the four
parameters are matched, the VM MAC address is considered valid.
In advanced validation mode, if the VM MAC address validation fails, an ACL can
be automatically created to drop the traffic received from the VM MAC address on
the switch port. Use the following command to specify the number of ACLs to be
automatically created for dropping traffic:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmcheck acls max <1-256>
Use the following command to set the action to be performed if the switch is
unable to validate the VM MAC address:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmcheck action advanced {log|link|acl}
Following are the other VMcheck commands:
Table 29. VMcheck Commands
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Command
Description
RS 8272(config)# virt vmware hello {ena|
hport <port number>|haddr|htimer}
Hello messages setting: enable/add port/advertise this IP address in the hello messages instead of the default management IP address/set the timer to send the hello messages
RS 8272(config)# no virt vmware hello {enable|hport <port number>}
Disable hello messages/remove port
RS 8272(config)# [no] virt vmcheck trust <port number or range>
Mark a port as trusted; Use the no form of the command to mark port as untrusted
RS 8272# no virt vmcheck acls
ACLs cannot be used for VMcheck
Chapter 17: VMready
247
Virtual Distributed Switch
A virtual Distributed Switch (vDS ) allows the hypervisor’s NIC to be attached to
the vDS instead of its own virtual switch. The vDS connects to the vCenter and
spans across multiple hypervisors in a datacenter. The administrator can manage
virtual machine networking for the entire data center from a single interface. The
vDS enables centralized provisioning and administration of virtual machine
networking in the data center using the VMware vCenter server.
When a member is added to a distributed VM group, a distributed port group is
created on the vDS. The member is then added to the distributed port group.
Distributed port groups on a vDS are available to all hypervisors that are
connected to the vDS. Members of a single distributed port group can
communicate with each other.
Note: vDS works with ESX 4.0 or higher versions.
To add a vDS, use the command:
RS 8272# virt vmware dvswitch add <datacenter name> <dvSwitch name>
[<dvSwitch-version>]
Prerequisites
Before adding a vDS on the G8272, ensure the following:
VMware vCenter is fully installed and configured and includes a “bladevm”
administration account and a valid SSL certificate.
 A virtual distributed switch instance has been created on the vCenter. The vDS
version must be higher or the same as the hypervisor version on the hosts.
 At least two hypervisors are configured.

Guidelines
Before migrating VMs to a vDS, consider the following:

At any one time, a VM NIC can be associated with only one virtual switch: to the
hypervisor’s virtual switch, or to the vDS.

Management connection to the server must be ensured during the migration.
The connection is via the Service Console or the Kernel/Management Interface.

The vDS configuration and migration can be viewed in vCenter at the following
locations:

vDS: Home> Inventory > Networking

vDS Hosts: Home > Inventory > Networking > vDS > Hosts
Note: These changes will not be displayed in the running configuration on the
G8272.
248
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Migrating to vDS
You can migrate VMs to the vDS using vCenter. The migration may also be
accomplished using the operational commands on the G8272 available in the
following CLI menus:
For VMware vDS operations:
RS 8272# virt vmware dvswitch ?
add
Add a dvSwitch to a DataCenter
addhost
Add a host to a dvSwitch
adduplnk
Add a physical NIC to dvSwitch uplink ports
del
Remove a dvSwitch from a DataCenter
remhost
Remove a host from a dvSwitch
remuplnk
Remove a physical NIC from dvSwitch uplink ports
For VMware distributed port group operations:
RS 8272# virt vmware dpg ?
add
Add a port group to a dvSwitch
del
Delete a port group from a dvSwitch
update
Update a port group on a dvSwitch
vmac
Change a VM NIC's port group
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
249
Virtualization Management Servers
The G8272 can connect with a virtualization management server to collect
configuration information about associated VEs. The switch can also automatically
push VM group configuration profiles to the virtualization management server,
which in turn configures the hypervisors and VEs, providing enhanced VE
mobility.
One virtual management server must be assigned on the switch before distributed
VM groups may be used. N/OS 8.2 currently supports only the VMware Virtual
Center (vCenter).
Assigning a vCenter
Assigning a vCenter to the switch requires the following:
The vCenter must have a valid IPv4 address which is accessible to the switch
(IPv6 addressing is not supported for the vCenter).
 A user account must be configured on the vCenter to provide access for the
switch. The account must have (at a minimum) the following vCenter user privileges:
 Network
 Host Network > Configuration
 Virtual Machine > Modify Device Settings

Once vCenter requirements are met, the following configuration command can be
used on the G8272 to associate the vCenter with the switch:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmware vcspec <vCenter IPv4 address> <username> [noauth]
This command specifies the IPv4 address and account username that the switch
will use for vCenter access. Once entered, the administrator will be prompted to
enter the password for the specified vCenter account.
The noauth option causes to the switch to ignores SSL certificate authentication.
This is required when no authoritative SSL certificate is installed on the vCenter.
Note: By default, the vCenter includes only a self-signed SSL certificate. If using
the default certificate, the noauth option is required.
Once the vCenter configuration has been applied on the switch, the G8272 will
connect to the vCenter to collect VE information.
vCenter Scans
Once the vCenter is assigned, the switch will periodically scan the vCenter to
collect basic information about all the VEs in the datacenter, and more detailed
information about the local VEs that the switch has discovered attached to its own
ports.
250
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The switch completes a vCenter scan approximately every two minutes. Any major
changes made through the vCenter may take up to two minutes to be reflected on
the switch. However, you can force an immediate scan of the vCenter by using one
of the following ISCLI privileged EXEC commands:
RS 8272# virt vmware scan
(Scan the vCenter)
-orRS 8272# show virt vm ­v ­r
(Scan vCenter and display result)
Deleting the vCenter
To detach the vCenter from the switch, use the following configuration command:
RS 8272(config)# no virt vmware vcspec
Note: Without a valid vCenter assigned on the switch, any VE configuration
changes must be manually synchronized.
Deleting the assigned vCenter prevents synchronizing the configuration between
the G8272 and VEs. VEs already operating in distributed VM groups will continue
to function as configured, but any changes made to any VM profile or distributed
VM group on the switch will affect only switch operation; changes on the switch
will not be reflected in the vCenter or on the VEs. Likewise, any changes made to
VE configuration on the vCenter will no longer be reflected on the switch.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
251
Exporting Profiles
VM profiles for discovered VEs in distributed VM groups are automatically
synchronized with the virtual management server and the appropriate
hypervisors. However, VM profiles can also be manually exported to specific hosts
before individual VEs are defined on them.
By exporting VM profiles to a specific host, virtual machine port groups will be
available to the host’s internal virtual switches so that new VMs may be configured
to use them.
VM migration requires that the target hypervisor includes all the virtual switch
port groups to which the VM connects on the source hypervisor. The VM profile
export feature can be used to distribute the associated port groups to all the
potential hosts for a given VM.
A VM profile can be exported to a host using the following ISCLI privileged EXEC
command:
RS 8272# virt vmware export <VM profile name> <host list> <virtual switch name>
The host list can include one or more target hosts, specified by host name, IPv4
address, or UUID, with each list item separated by a space.
Once executed, the requisite port group will be created on the specified virtual
switch. If the specified virtual switch does not exist on the target host, the port
group will not be created.
VMware Operational Commands
The G8272 may be used as a central point of configuration for VMware virtual
switches and port groups using the following ISCLI privileged EXEC commands:
RS 8272# virt vmware ?
dpg
Distributed port group operations
dvswitch VMWare dvSwitch operations export
Create or update a vm profile on one host
pg
Add a port group to a host
scan
Perform a VM Agent scan operation now
updpg
Update a port group on a host
vmacpg
Change a vnic's port group
vsw
Add a vswitch to a host
252
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Pre-Provisioning VEs
VEs may be manually added to VM groups in advance of being detected on the
switch ports. By pre-provisioning the MAC address of VEs that are not yet active,
the switch will be able to later recognize the VE when it becomes active on a switch
port, and immediately assign the proper VM group properties without further
configuration.
Undiscovered VEs are added to or removed from VM groups using the following
configuration commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] virt vmgroup <VM group number> vm <VE MAC address>
For the pre-provisioning of undiscovered VEs, a MAC address is required. Other
identifying properties, such as IPv4 address or VM name permitted for known
VEs, cannot be used for pre-provisioning.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
253
VLAN Maps
A VLAN map (VMAP) is a type of Access Control List (ACL) that is applied to a
VLAN or VM group rather than to a switch port as with regular ACLs (see “Access
Control Lists” on page 103). In a virtualized environment, VMAPs allow you to
create traffic filtering and metering policies that are associated with a VM group
VLAN, allowing filters to follow VMs as they migrate between hypervisors.
N/OS 8.2 supports up to 128 VMAPs.
Individual VMAP filters are configured in the same fashion as regular ACLs,
except that VLANs cannot be specified as a filtering criteria (unnecessary, since
VMAPs are assigned to a specific VLAN or associated with a VM group VLAN).
VMAPs are configured using the following ISCLI configuration command path:
RS 8272(config)# access­control vmap <VMAP ID> ?
action Set filter action
egress­port Set to filter for packets egressing this port
ethernet Ethernet header options
ipv4 IP version 4 header options
meter ACL metering configuration
mirror Mirror options
packet­format Set to filter specific packet format types
re­mark ACL re­mark configuration
statistics Enable access control list statistics
tcp­udp TCP and UDP filtering options
Once a VMAP filter is created, it can be assigned or removed using the following
commands:

For regular VLANs, use config-vlan mode:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <VLAN ID>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# [no] vmap <VMAP ID> [serverports| non­serverports]

For a VM group, use the global configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# [no] virt vmgroup <ID> vmap <VMAP ID> [serverports|non­serverports]
Note: Each VMAP can be assigned to only one VLAN or VM group. However,
each VLAN or VM group may have multiple VMAPs assigned to it.
The optional serverports or non­serverports parameter can be specified to
apply the action (to add or remove the VMAP) for either the switch server ports
(serverports) or switch uplink ports (non­serverports). If omitted, the
operation will be applied to all ports in the associated VLAN or VM group.
Note: VMAPs have a lower priority than port-based ACLs. If both an ACL and a
VMAP match a particular packet, both filter actions will be applied as long as there
is no conflict. In the event of a conflict, the port ACL will take priority, though
switch statistics will count matches for both the ACL and VMAP.
254
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VM Policy Bandwidth Control
In a virtualized environment where VEs can migrate between hypervisors and
thus move among different ports on the switch, traffic bandwidth policies must be
attached to VEs, rather than to a specific switch port.
VM Policy Bandwidth Control allows the administrator to specify the amount of
data the switch will permit to flow from a particular VE, without defining a
complicated matrix of ACLs or VMAPs for all port combinations where a VE may
appear.
VM Policy Bandwidth Control Commands
VM Policy Bandwidth Control can be configured using the following configuration
commands:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmpolicy vmbwidth <VM MAC>|<index>|<UUID>| <IPv4
address>|<name>?
txrate <committed rate> <burst> [<ACL number>]
(Set the VM transmit bandwidth –
ingress for switch)
rxrate <committed rate> <burst>
(Set the VM receive bandwidth – egress for switch)
bwctrl (Enable bandwidth control)
Bandwidth allocation can be defined for transmit (TX) traffic or receive (RX) traffic.
Because bandwidth allocation is specified from the perspective of the VE, the
switch command for TX Rate Control (txrate) sets the data rate to be sent from
the VM to the switch, and the RX rate sets the data rate to be received by the VM
from the switch.
The committed rate is specified in multiples of 64 kbps, from 64 to 10,000,000. The
maximum burst rate is specified as 32, 64, 128, 256, 1024, 2048, or 4096 kb. If both
the committed rate and burst are set to 0, bandwidth control will be disabled.
When txrate is specified, the switch automatically selects an available ACL for
internal use with bandwidth control. Optionally, if automatic ACL selection is not
desired, a specific ACL may be selected. If there are no unassigned ACLs available,
txrate cannot be configured.
Bandwidth Policies vs. Bandwidth Shaping
VM Profile Bandwidth Shaping differs from VM Policy Bandwidth Control.
VM Profile Bandwidth Shaping (see “VM Profiles” on page 243) is configured per
VM group and is enforced on the server by a virtual switch in the hypervisor.
Shaping is unidirectional and limits traffic transmitted from the virtual switch to
the G8272. Shaping is performed prior to transmit VM Policy Bandwidth Control.
If the egress traffic for a virtual switch port group exceeds shaping parameters, the
traffic is dropped by the virtual switch in the hypervisor. Shaping uses server CPU
resources, but prevents extra traffic from consuming bandwidth between the
server and the G8272.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
255
VM Policy Bandwidth Control is configured per VE, and can be set independently
for transmit traffic. Bandwidth policies are enforced by the G8272. VE traffic that
exceeds configured levels is dropped by the switch upon ingress. Setting txrate
uses ACL resources on the switch.
Bandwidth shaping and bandwidth policies can be used separately or in concert.
256
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VMready Information Displays
The G8272 can be used to display a variety of VMready information.
Note: Some displays depict information collected from scans of a VMware vCenter
and may not be available without a valid vCenter. If a vCenter is assigned (see
“Assigning a vCenter” on page 250), scan information might not be available for up
to two minutes after the switch boots or when VMready is first enabled. Also, any
major changes made through the vCenter may take up to two minutes to be
reflected on the switch unless you force an immediate vCenter scan (see “vCenter
Scans” on page 250.
Local VE Information
A concise list of local VEs and pre-provisioned VEs is available with the following
ISCLI privileged EXEC command:
RS 8272# show virt vm
IP Address VMAC Address Index Port VM Group (Profile)
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
*172.16.46.50 00:50:56:4e:62:00 4 3
*172.16.46.10 00:50:56:4f:f2:00 2 4
+172.16.46.51 00:50:56:72:ec:00 1 3
+172.16.46.11 00:50:56:7c:1c:00 3 4
172.16.46.25 00:50:56:9c:00:00 5 4
172.16.46.15 00:50:56:9c:21:00 0 4
172.16.46.35 00:50:56:9c:29:00 6 3
172.16.46.45 00:50:56:9c:47:00 7 3
Number of entries: 8
* indicates VMware ESX Service Console Interface
+ indicates VMware ESX/ESXi VMKernel or Management Interface
Note: The Index numbers shown in the VE information displays can be used to
specify a particular VE in configuration commands.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
257
If a vCenter is available, more verbose information can be obtained using the
following ISCLI privileged EXEC command option:
RS 8272# show virt vm ­v
Index MAC Address, Name (VM or Host), Port, Group Vswitch,
IP Address @Host (VMs only) VLAN Port Group
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
0 00:50:56:9c:21:2f atom 4 vSwitch0
172.16.46.15 @172.16.46.10 500 Eng_A
+1 00:50:56:72:ec:86 172.16.46.50 3 vSwitch0
172.16.46.51 0 VMkernel
*2 00:50:56:4f:f2:85 172.16.46.10 4 vSwitch0
172.16.46.10 0 Mgmt
+3 00:50:56:7c:1c:ca 172.16.46.10 4 vSwitch0
172.16.46.11 0 VMkernel
*4 00:50:56:4e:62:f5 172.16.46.50 3 vSwitch0
172.16.46.50 0 Mgmt
5 00:50:56:9c:00:c8 quark 4 vSwitch0
172.16.46.25 @172.16.46.10 0 Corp
6 00:50:56:9c:29:29 particle 3 vSwitch0
172.16.46.35 @172.16.46.50 0 VM Network
7 00:50:56:9c:47:fd nucleus 3 vSwitch0
172.16.46.45 @172.16.46.50 0 Finance
­­
12 of 12 entries printed
* indicates VMware ESX Service Console Interface
+ indicates VMware ESX/ESXi VMkernel or Management Interface
To view additional detail regarding any specific VE, see “vCenter VE Details” on
page 260).
vCenter Hypervisor Hosts
If a vCenter is available, the following ISCLI privileged EXEC command displays
the name and UUID of all VMware hosts, providing an essential overview of the
data center:
RS 8272# show virt vmware hosts
UUID Name(s), IP Address
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
00a42681­d0e5­5910­a0bf­bd23bd3f7800 172.16.41.30
002e063c­153c­dd11­8b32­a78dd1909a00 172.16.46.10
00f1fe30­143c­dd11­84f2­a8ba2cd7ae00 172.16.44.50
0018938e­143c­dd11­9f7a­d8defa4b8300 172.16.46.20
...
258
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using the following command, the administrator can view more detailed vCenter
host information, including a list of virtual switches and their port groups, as well
as details for all associated VEs:
RS 8272# show virt vmware showhost {<UUID>|<IPv4 address>|<host name>}
Vswitches available on the host:
vSwitch0
Port Groups and their Vswitches on the host:
BNT_Default vSwitch0
VM Network vSwitch0
Service Console vSwitch0
VMkernel vSwitch0
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
MAC Address 00:50:56:9c:21:2f
Port 4
Type Virtual Machine
VM vCenter Name halibut
VM OS hostname localhost.localdomain
VM IP Address 172.16.46.15
VM UUID 001c41f3­ccd8­94bb­1b94­6b94b03b9200
Current VM Host 172.16.46.10
Vswitch vSwitch0
Port Group BNT_Default
VLAN ID 0
...
vCenter VEs
If a vCenter is available, the following ISCLI privileged EXEC command displays a
list of all known VEs:
RS 8272# show virt vmware vms
UUID Name(s), IP Address
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
001cdf1d­863a­fa5e­58c0­d197ed3e3300 30vm1
001c1fba­5483­863f­de04­4953b5caa700 VM90
001c0441­c9ed­184c­7030­d6a6bc9b4d00 VM91
001cc06e­393b­a36b­2da9­c71098d9a700 vm_new
001c6384­f764­983c­83e3­e94fc78f2c00 sturgeon
001c7434­6bf9­52bd­c48c­a410da0c2300 VM70
001cad78­8a3c­9cbe­35f6­59ca5f392500 VM60
001cf762­a577­f42a­c6ea­090216c11800 30VM6
001c41f3­ccd8­94bb­1b94­6b94b03b9200 halibut, localhost.localdomain,
172.16.46.15
001cf17b­5581­ea80­c22c­3236b89ee900 30vm5
001c4312­a145­bf44­7edd­49b7a2fc3800 vm3
001caf40­a40a­de6f­7b44­9c496f123b00 30VM7
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
259
vCenter VE Details
If a vCenter is available, the following ISCLI privileged EXEC command displays
detailed information about a specific VE:
RS 8272# show virt vmware showvm {<VM UUID>|<VM IPv4 address>|<VM name>}
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
MAC Address 00:50:56:9c:21:2f
Port 4
Type Virtual Machine
VM vCenter Name halibut
VM OS hostname localhost.localdomain
VM IP Address 172.16.46.15
VM UUID 001c41f3­ccd8­94bb­1b94­6b94b03b9200
Current VM Host 172.16.46.10
Vswitch vSwitch0
Port Group BNT_Default
VLAN ID 0
260
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VMready Configuration Example
This example has the following characteristics:
A VMware vCenter is fully installed and configured prior to VMready configuration and includes a “bladevm” administration account and a valid SSL certificate.
 The distributed VM group model is used.
 The VM profile named “Finance” is configured for VLAN 30, and specifies
NIC-to-switch bandwidth shaping for 1Mbps average bandwidth, 2MB bursts,
and 3Mbps maximum bandwidth.
 The VM group includes four discovered VMs on switch server ports 1 and 2, and
one static trunk (previously configured) that includes switch uplink ports 3 and
4.

1. Define the server ports.
RS 8272(config)# system server­ports port 1­2
2. Enable the VMready feature.
RS 8272(config)# virt enable
3. Specify the VMware vCenter IPv4 address.
RS 8272(config)# virt vmware vmware vcspec 172.16.100.1 bladevm
When prompted, enter the user password that the switch must use for access to the
vCenter.
4. Create the VM profile.
RS 8272(config)# virt vmprofile Finance
RS 8272(config)# virt vmprofile edit Finance vlan 30
RS 8272(config)# virt vmprofile edit Finance shaping 1000 2000 3000
5. Define the VM group.
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 profile Finance
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 vm arctic
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 vm monster
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 vm sierra
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 vm 00:50:56:4f:f2:00
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 portchannel 1
When VMs are added, the server ports on which they appear are automatically
added to the VM group. In this example, there is no need to manually add ports 1
and 2.
6. If necessary, enable VLAN tagging for the VM group:
RS 8272(config)# virt vmgroup 1 tag
Note: If the VM group contains ports that also exist in other VM groups, make sure
tagging is enabled in both VM groups. In this example configuration, no ports exist
in more than one VM group.
7. Save the configuration.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 17: VMready
261
262
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 18. FCoE and CEE
This chapter provides conceptual background and configuration examples for
using Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) features of the RackSwitch G8272, with
an emphasis on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) solutions. The following
topics are addressed in this chapter:

“Fibre Channel over Ethernet” on page 265
Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) allows Fibre Channel traffic to be
transported over Ethernet links. This provides an evolutionary approach toward
network consolidation, allowing Fibre Channel equipment and tools to be
retained, while leveraging cheap, ubiquitous Ethernet networks for growth.

“Converged Enhanced Ethernet” on page 267
Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) refers to a set of IEEE standards developed
primarily to enable FCoE, requiring enhancing the existing Ethernet standards
to make them lossless on a per-priority traffic basis, and providing a mechanism
to carry converged (LAN/SAN/IPC) traffic on a single physical link. CEE
features can also be utilized in traditional LAN (non-FCoE) networks to provide
lossless guarantees on a per-priority basis, and to provide efficient bandwidth
allocation.

“FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping” on page 270
Using FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) snooping, the G8272 examines the FIP
frames exchanged between ENodes and FCoE Forwarders (FCFs). This
information is used to dynamically determine the ACLs required to block
certain types of undesired or unvalidated traffic on FCoE links.

“FCoE Forwarder” on page 275
An FCoE Forwarder (FCF) authenticates connecting neighbors, provides Fibre
Channel IDs, enforce port security among zones, and informs neighboring
devices of network changes.

“Priority-Based Flow Control” on page 281
Priority-Based Flow Control (PFC) extends 802.3x standard flow control to
allow the switch to pause traffic based on the 802.1p priority value in each
packet’s VLAN tag. PFC is vital for FCoE environments, where SAN traffic must
remain lossless and must be paused during congestion, while LAN traffic on the
same links is delivered with “best effort” characteristics.

“Enhanced Transmission Selection” on page 284
Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) provides a method for allocating link
bandwidth based on the 802.1p priority value in each packet’s VLAN tag. Using
ETS, different types of traffic (such as LAN, SAN, and management) that are
sensitive to different handling criteria can be configured either for specific
bandwidth characteristics, low-latency, or best-effort transmission, despite
sharing converged links as in an FCoE environment.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
263

“Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange” on page 290
Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange Protocol (DCBX) allows
neighboring network devices to exchange information about their
capabilities. This is used between CEE-capable devices for the purpose of
discovering their peers, negotiating peer configurations, and detecting
misconfigurations.
264
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Fibre Channel over Ethernet
Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) is an effort to converge two of the different
physical networks in today’s data centers. It allows Fibre Channel traffic (such as
that commonly used in Storage Area Networks, or SANs) to be transported
without loss over 10Gb Ethernet links (typically used for high-speed Local Area
Networks, or LANs). This provides an evolutionary approach toward network
consolidation, allowing Fibre Channel equipment and tools to be retained, while
leveraging cheap, ubiquitous Ethernet networks for growth.
With server virtualization, servers capable of hosting both Fibre Channel and
Ethernet applications will provide advantages in server efficiency, particularly as
FCoE-enabled network adapters provide consolidated SAN and LAN traffic
capabilities.
The RackSwitch G8272 with Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 software is compliant with
the INCITS T11.3, FC-BB-5 FCoE specification.
Note: The G8272 supports up to 2048 FCoE login sessions.
The FCoE Topology
Note: The FCoE topology discussed in this section applies to FCoE Initialization
Protocol (FIP) snooping only.
In an end-to-end Fibre Channel network, switches and end devices generally
establish trusted, point-to-point links. Fibre Channel switches validate end
devices, enforce zoning configurations and device addressing, and prevent certain
types of errors and attacks on the network.
In a converged multi-hop FCoE network where Fibre Channel devices are bridged
to Ethernet devices, the direct point-to-point QoS capabilities normally provided
by the Fibre Channel fabric may be lost in the transition between the different
network types. The G8272 FIP snooping bridge provides a solution to overcome
this.
Figure 24. A Mixed Fibre Channel and FCoE Network
Fibre
Channel
LAN
Port 1
FCF
Device
Port 2
Port 3
FCoE
802.1p Priority & Usage
3 FCoE Applications
Lenovo
Switch
Port 4
CNA
802.1p Priority & Usage
CNA
0-2 LAN
4 Business-Critical LAN
Servers
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
265
In Figure 24 on page 265, the Fibre Channel network is connected to the FCoE
network through an FCoE Forwarder (FCF). The FCF acts as a Fibre Channel
gateway to and from the FCoE network.
For the FCoE portion of the network, the FCF is connected to the FCoE-enabled
G8272, which is connected to a server (running Fibre Channel applications)
through an FCoE-enabled Converged Network Adapter (CNA) known in Fibre
Channel as Ethernet Nodes (ENodes).
Note: The figure also shows a non-FCoE LAN server connected to the G8272 using
a CNA. This allows the LAN server to take advantage of some CEE features that
are useful even outside of an FCoE environment.
To block undesired or unvalidated traffic on FCoE links that exists outside the
regular Fibre Channel topology, Ethernet ports used in FCoE are configured with
Access Control Lists (ACLs) that are narrowly tailored to permit expected FCoE
traffic to and from confirmed FCFs and ENodes, and deny all other FCoE or FIP
traffic. This ensures that all FCoE traffic to an from the ENode passes through the
FCF.
Because manual ACL configuration is an administratively complex task, the G8272
can automatically and dynamically configure the ACLs required for use with FCoE.
Using FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) snooping (see “FCoE Initialization
Protocol Snooping” on page 270), the G8272 examines the FIP frames normally
exchanged between the FCF and ENodes to determine information about
connected FCoE devices. This information is used to automatically determine the
appropriate ACLs required to block certain types of undesired or unvalidated
FCoE traffic.
Automatic FCoE-related ACLs are independent from ACLs used for typical
Ethernet purposes.
FIP Snooping Requirements
The following are required for implementing the FIP snooping bridge feature
using the RackSwitch G8272 (G8272) with N/OS 8.2 software:

The G8272, when configured as an FIP snooping bridge (see “FCoE Initialization
Protocol Snooping” on page 270), must be connected to the Fibre Channel network through an FCF such as a Lenovo RackSwitch G8272 or a Cisco Nexus 5000
Series Switch.

For each G8272 port participating in FCoE, the connected server must use a
FCoE-licensed CNA.
CEE must be turned on (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on page 267). When CEE is
on, the DCBX, PFC, and ETS features are enabled and configured with default
FCoE settings. These features may be reconfigured, but must remain enabled for
FCoE to function.
 FIP snooping must be turned on (see “FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping” on
page 270). When FIP snooping is turned on, the feature is enabled on all ports by
default. The administrator can disable FIP snooping on individual ports that do
not require FCoE, but FIP snooping must remain enabled on all FCoE ports for
FCoE to function.

266
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Converged Enhanced Ethernet
Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) refers to a set of IEEE standards designed to
allow different physical networks with different data handling requirements to be
converged together, simplifying management, increasing efficiency and
utilization, and leveraging legacy investments without sacrificing evolutionary
growth.
CEE standards were developed primarily to enable Fibre Channel traffic to be
carried over Ethernet networks. This required enhancing the existing Ethernet
standards to make them lossless on a per-priority traffic basis, and to provide a
mechanism to carry converged (LAN/SAN/IPC) traffic on a single physical link.
Although CEE standards were designed with FCoE in mind, they are not limited to
FCoE installations. CEE features can be utilized in traditional LAN (non-FCoE)
networks to provide lossless guarantees on a per-priority basis, and to provide
efficient bandwidth allocation based on application needs.
Turning CEE On or Off
By default on the G8272, CEE is turned off. To turn CEE on or off, use the following
CLI commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee enable
CAUTION:
Turning CEE on will automatically change some 802.1p QoS and 802.3x standard
flow control settings on the G8272. Read the following material carefully to
determine whether you will need to take action to reconfigure expected settings.
It is recommended that you backup your configuration prior to turning CEE on.
Viewing the file will allow you to manually re-create the equivalent configuration
once CEE is turned on, and will also allow you to recover your prior configuration
if you need to turn CEE off.
Effects on Link Layer Discovery Protocol
When CEE is turned on, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is automatically
turned on and enabled for receiving and transmitting DCBX information. LLDP
cannot be turned off while CEE is turned on.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
267
Effects on 802.1p Quality of Service
While CEE is off (the default), the G8272 allows 802.1p priority values to be used
for Quality of Service (QoS) configuration (see page 187). 802.1p QoS default
settings are shown in Table 30, but can be changed by the administrator.
When CEE is turned on, 802.1p QoS is replaced by ETS (see “Enhanced
Transmission Selection” on page 284). As a result, while CEE is turned on, the
802.1p QoS configuration commands are no longer available on the switch (the
menu is restored when CEE is turned off).
In addition, when CEE is turned on, prior 802.1p QoS settings are replaced with
new defaults designed for use with ETS priority groups (PGIDs) as shown in
Table 30:
Table 30. CEE Effects on 802.1p Defaults
802.1p QoS Configuration
With CEE Off (default)
PriorityCOSq
Weight
ETS Configuration
With CEE On
Priority
COSq
PGID
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
2
2
3
2
0
0
3
3
4
3
1
1
4
4
5
4
2
2
5
5
7
5
2
2
6
6
15
6
2
2
7
7
0
7
2
2
When CEE is on, the default ETS configuration also allocates a portion of link
bandwidth to each PGID as shown in Table 31:
Table 31. Default ETS Bandwidth Allocation
PGID
Typical Use
Bandwidth
0
LAN
10%
1
SAN
50%
2
Latency-sensitive
LAN
40%
If the prior, non-CEE configuration used 802.1p priority values for different
purposes, or does not expect bandwidth allocation as shown in Table 31 on
page 268, when CEE is turned on, have the administrator reconfigure ETS settings
as appropriate.
268
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
It is recommended that a configuration backup be made prior to turning CEE on or
off. Viewing the configuration file will allow the administrator to manually
re-create the equivalent configuration under the new CEE mode, and will also allow
for the recovery of the prior configuration if necessary.
Effects on Flow Control
When CEE is turned on, standard flow control is disabled on all ports, and in its
place, PFC (see “Priority-Based Flow Control” on page 281) is enabled on all ports
for 802.1p priority value 3. This default is chosen because priority value 3 is
commonly used to identify FCoE traffic in a CEE environment and must be
guaranteed lossless behavior. PFC is disabled for all other priority values.
Each time CEE is turned off, the prior 802.3x standard flow control settings will be
restored (including any previous changes from the defaults).
It is recommend that a configuration backup be made prior to turning CEE on or off.
Viewing the configuration file will allow the administrator to manually re-create the
equivalent configuration under the new CEE mode, and will also allow for the
recovery of the prior configuration if necessary.
When CEE is on, PFC can be enabled only on priority value 3 and one other
priority. If flow control is required on additional priorities on any given port,
consider using standard flow control on that port, so that regardless of which
priority traffic becomes congested, a flow control frame is generated.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
269
FCoE Initialization Protocol Snooping
FCoE Initialization Protocol (FIP) snooping is an FCoE feature. To enforce
point-to-point links for FCoE traffic outside the regular Fibre Channel topology,
Ethernet ports used in FCoE can be automatically and dynamically configured
with Access Control Lists (ACLs).
Using FIP snooping, the G8272 examines the FIP frames normally exchanged
between the FCF and ENodes to determine information about connected FCoE
devices. This information is used to create narrowly tailored ACLs that permit
expected FCoE traffic to and from confirmed Fibre Channel nodes, and deny all
other undesirable FCoE or FIP traffic.
Global FIP Snooping Settings
By default, the FIP snooping feature is turned off for the G8272. The following
commands are used to turn the feature on or off:
RS 8272(config)# [no] fcoe fips enable
Note: FIP snooping requires CEE to be turned on (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
When FIP snooping is on, port participation may be configured on a port-by-port
basis (see the next sections).
When FIP snooping is off, all FCoE-related ACLs generated by the feature are
removed from all switch ports.
FIP Snooping for Specific Ports
When FIP snooping is globally turned on (see the previous section), ports may be
individually configured for participation in FIP snooping and automatic ACL
generation. By default, FIP snooping is enabled for each port. To change the setting
for any specific port, use the following CLI commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] fcoe fips port <port alias, number, list, or range> enable
When FIP snooping is enabled on a port, FCoE-related ACLs will be automatically
configured.
When FIP snooping is disabled on a port, all FCoE-related ACLs on the port are
removed, and the switch will enforce no FCoE-related rules for traffic on the port.
270
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Port FCF and ENode Detection
When FIP snooping is enabled on a port, the port is placed in FCF auto-detect
mode by default. In this mode, the port assumes connection to an ENode unless
FIP packets show the port is connected to an FCF.
Ports can also be specifically configured as to whether automatic FCF detection
will be used, or whether the port is connected to an FCF or ENode:
RS 8272(config)# fcoe fips port <port alias, number, list, or range> fcf­mode {auto|on|off}
When FCF mode is on, the port is assumed to be connected to a trusted FCF, and
only ACLs appropriate to FCFs will be installed on the port. When off, the port is
assumed to be connected to an ENode, and only ACLs appropriate to ENodes will
be installed. When the mode is changed (either through manual configuration or as
a result of automatic detection), the appropriate ACLs are automatically added,
removed, or changed to reflect the new FCF or ENode connection.
FCoE Connection Timeout
FCoE-related ACLs are added, changed, and removed as FCoE device connection
and disconnection are discovered. In addition, the administrator can enable or
disable automatic removal of ACLs for FCFs and other FCoE connections that
timeout (fail or are disconnected) without FIP notification.
By default, automatic removal of ACLs upon timeout is enabled. To change this
function, use the following CLI command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] fcoe fips timeout­acl
FCoE ACL Rules
When FIP Snooping is enabled on a port, the switch automatically installs the
appropriate ACLs to enforce the following rules for FCoE traffic:









© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Ensure that FIP frames from ENodes may only be addressed to FCFs.
Flag important FIP packets for switch processing.
Ensure no end device uses an FCF MAC address as its source.
Each FCoE port is assumed to be connected to an ENode and include ENode-specific ACLs installed, until the port is either detected or configured to be connected to an FCF.
Ports that are configured to have FIP snooping disabled will not have any FIP or
FCoE related ACLs installed.
Prevent transmission of all FCoE frames from an ENode prior to its successful
completion of login (FLOGI) to the FCF.
After successful completion of FLOGI, ensure that the ENode uses only those
FCoE source addresses assigned to it by FCF.
After successful completion of FLOGI, ensure that all ENode FCoE source
addresses originate from or are destined to the appropriate ENode port.
After successful completion of each FLOGI, ensure that FCoE frames may only
be addressed to the FCFs that accept them.
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
271
Initially, a basic set of FCoE-related ACLs will be installed on all ports where FIP
snooping is enabled. As the switch encounters FIP frames and learns about FCFs
and ENodes that are attached or disconnect, ACLs are dynamically installed or
expanded to provide appropriate security.
When an FCoE connection logs out, or times out (if ACL timeout is enabled), the
related ACLs will be automatically removed.
FCoE-related ACLs are independent of manually configured ACLs used for
regular Ethernet purposes (see “Access Control Lists” on page 103). FCoE ACLs
generally have a higher priority over standard ACLs, and do not inhibit non-FCoE
and non-FIP traffic.
FCoE VLANs
FCoE packets to any FCF will be confined to the VLAN advertised by the FCF
(typically VLAN 1002). The appropriate VLAN must be configured on the switch
with member FCF ports and must be supported by the participating CNAs.
Viewing FIP Snooping Information
ACLs automatically generated under FIP snooping are independent of regular,
manually configure ACLs, and are not listed with regular ACLs in switch
information and statistics output. Instead, FCoE ACLs are shown using the
following CLI commands:
RS 8272# show fcoe fips information
(Show all FIP-related information)
RS 8272# show fcoe fips port <ports> information
(Show FIP info for a selected port)
For example:
RS 8272# show fcoe fips port 21 information FIP Snooping on port 21:
This port has been configured to automatically detect FCF.
It has currently detected to have 0 FCF connecting to it.
FIPS ACLs configured on this port:
SMAC 00:05:73:ce:96:67, action deny.
DMAC 00:05:73:ce:96:67, ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
SMAC 0e:fc:00:44:04:04, DMAC 00:05:73:ce:96:67, ethertype 0x8906, vlan 1002, action permit.
DMAC 01:10:18:01:00:01, Ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
DMAC 01:10:18:01:00:02, Ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
Ethertype 0x8914, action deny.
Ethertype 0x8906, action deny.
SMAC 0e:fc:00:00:00:00, SMAC mask ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, action deny.
For each ACL, the required traffic criteria are listed, along with the action taken
(permit or deny) for matching traffic. ACLs are listed in order of precedence and
evaluated in the order shown.
272
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The administrator can also view other FCoE information:
RS 8272# show fcoe fips fcf
(Show all detected FCFs)
RS 8272# show fcoe fips fcoe
(Show all FCoE connections)
Operational Commands
The administrator may use the operational commands to delete FIP-related entries
from the switch.
To delete a specific FCF entry and all associated ACLs from the switch, use the
following command:
RS 8272# no fcoe fips fcf <FCF MAC address> [<VLAN number>]
FIP Snooping Configuration
In this example, as shown in Figure 24 on page 265, FCoE devices are connected to
port 2 for the FCF device, and port 3 for an ENode. FIP snooping can be configured
on these ports using the following ISCLI commands:
1. Enable VLAN tagging on the FCoE ports:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2,3
(Select FCoE ports)
VLAN tagging)
(Exit port configuration mode)
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk(Enable
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Place FCoE ports into a VLAN supported by the FCF and CNAs (typically VLAN
1002):
RS 8272(config)# vlan 1002
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
(Select a VLAN)
(Exit VLAN configuration mode)
(Add FCoE ports to the VLAN)
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2,3
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1002
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
3. Turn CEE on.
RS 8272(config)# cee enable
Note: Turning CEE on will automatically change some 802.1p QoS and 802.3x
standard flow control settings and menus (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
4. Turn global FIP snooping on:
RS 8272(config)# fcoe fips enable
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
273
5. Enable FIP snooping on FCoE ports, and set the desired FCF mode:
RS 8272(config)# fcoe fips port 2 enable(Enable
FIPS on port 2)
as FCF connection)
RS 8272(config)# fcoe fips port 3 enable(Enable FIPS on port 3)
RS 8272(config)# fcoe fips port 3 fcf­mode off(Set as ENode connection)
RS 8272(config)# fcoe fips port 2 fcf­mode on(Set
Note: By default, FIP snooping is enabled on all ports and the FCF mode set for
automatic detection. The configuration in this step is unnecessary, if default
settings have not been changed, and is shown merely as a manual configuration
example.
6. Save the configuration.
274
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
FCoE Forwarder
The RackSwitch G8272 has an integrated FC-BB-5 compliant FCoE Forwarder
(FCF), allowing it to take the role of a full fabric FCoE switch. As a full fabric FCoE
switch, the G8272 authenticates connecting neighbors, provides Fibre Channel IDs,
enforces port security among zones, and informs neighboring devices of network
changes. In FCF mode, the G8272 cannot be connected directly to another FCF
switch in the same VLAN.
Configuring FCF
The switch’s role as a full fabric switch in the FCoE network can be defined on a
per-VLAN basis. The G8272 supports up to 12 FCF VLANs. To enable or disable
FCF for a specific VLAN:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <VLAN number>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# [no] fcf enable
To connect an FCoE device or enode to a port of a G8272, the following conditions
must be met:

The port must be in trunk mode.

The port must be configured as a Spanning Tree port.

The FCoE VLAN must be included in the trunk allowed VLANs list.

The FCoE VLAN must not be the native VLAN of the trunk port.
For example, to make port 2, which is connected to an FCoE device, part of
FCF-enabled vlan 1002, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# vlan 1002
RS 8272(config­vlan)# fcf enable
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree portfast
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1002
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Fibre Channel Services
The following Fibre Channel (FC) services are supported:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Name Server (Directory Server) – provides a means to discover information
about ENodes connected to the FCF. This Service is provided through Well
Known Address (WKA) FFFFFCh.

Zone Server – provides partitioning of a SAN fabric into smaller subsets to
restrict interference, add security, and simplify management.

Fabric Login – assigns a fabric address (FCID) to the ENode. This service is
provided through WKA FFFFFEh.

Fabric Controller – provides State Change Notifications (SCNs) to registered
ENodes whenever there is a change in the fabric topology.
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
275

Fabric Configuration Server (FCS) – provides a way for a management
application to discover fabric attributes. This Service is provided through WKA
FFFFFAh.

Fabric-Device Management Interface (FDMI) – enables management for devices
such as CNAs through the fabric.
FC services are provided as Class 3 (Unacknowledged connectionless services)
only.
FCF VLAN Configuration
For a FCF VLAN default FCoE parameters will be set once it is enabled. The
default values are:

FC-MAP
: 0x0efc00

FCF-Priority
: 128

FKA-Adv
: 8000
If you want to change these values, use the following commands to configure
VLAN settings for FCF:
1. Select the FCF vlan:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <VLAN number>
2. Configure the FCF global fabric priority:
RS 8272(config­vlan)# fcoe fcf­priority <0 – 255>
3. Define an FC map to uniquely identify the FCF:
RS 8272(config­vlan)# fcoe fcmap <0xefc00 – 0xefcff>
4. Configure the FIP keep-alive duration in ms:
RS 8272(config­vlan)# fcoe fka­adv­period <4000 – 90000>
5. Check FCF Vlan Configuration:
RS 8272(config)# show fcf vlan <VLAN number>
Full Fabric Zoning
The G8272 supports FCoE zones and zonesets for VLANs operating in full fabric
mode. Zoning allows logical grouping of ports and storage devices within a
storage area network. Zoning defines access control between groups of servers and
storage devices.
An SAN is typically divided into zones and zonesets, as described in the following
sections.
276
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Zones
A zone is a logical grouping of end nodes that are permitted to interact with each
other. Zones can be grouped into zonesets that can be activated or deactivated as a
single entity. A zone provides security by restricting access to only those devices
that reside within the zone. Zoning also confines change notification floods within
each zone.
Each zone contains one or more servers and one or more storage devices. Ports and
devices in a zone are called zone members. A zone contains one or more zone
members. A device can belong to one or more zones. End nodes that are members
of a zone can communicate with each other, but they are isolated from nodes in
other zones of which they are not a member.
If no zone is configured for the device, it resides in the default zone. You can
configure the default zone to permit or deny its member devices to communicate
with each other. By default, the default zone is set to deny.
You can specify zone members based on any of the following criteria:

pWWN: The port World Wide Number is a unique ID representing a particular
end node. The pWWN is a 64-bit hexadecimal value (for example,
20:34:00:80:e5:23:f4:55)

FC alias: The Fibre Channel alias specifies the device that connects to a node
port on the switch. The FC alias is a 1-64 character text value (for example,
“StorageOne”).
Notes:

When you create an FC alias using SNMP, a default pWWN of value
10:00:00:00:00:00:00:00 is automatically assigned to the FC alias. You must
change this default pWWN value. Not doing so will result in a conflict of
pWWN IDs the next time you try to create an FC alias.

The G8272 uses hard zoning, which is enforced in the switch hardware, based on
the pWWNs of the Fibre Channel initiators and targets.

The G8272 supports up the 512 zones per zoneset, each with up to 32 member
devices.
Zonesets
Zonesets provide a mechanism for conveniently grouping zones. Each zoneset can
contain one or more zones. A zone can belong to one or more zonesets. Only one
zoneset can be activated at a given time. If you deactivate the active zoneset, no
zonesets are active until you activate another zoneset. If you activate one zoneset
while another zoneset is active, the currently active zoneset is deactivated.
When you activate a zoneset, the new zoneset access policies are applied. Any
changes to the active zoneset will impact only the traffic between the affected
ports.
Affected ports are those ports for which there is a change in the peering
relationship due to active zoneset change. RSCNs are generated only for the
affected ports.
By default the default-zone status is deny all.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
277
Without zoning configuration, none of the Storage targets is visible to hosts. The
default-zone configuration can be made permit all using the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# zone default­zone permit vlan <VLAN number>
Note: We recommend that you activate well-defined zoning configuration for
increased security.
Defining and Activating Zoning
Define the following general properties for Fibre Channel zones and zonesets:
1. If desired, create (or remove) aliases for Fibre Channel devices:
RS 8272(config)# [no] fcalias name <device alias name> vlan <VLAN number>
Repeat for each alias as necessary.
2. If desired, add (or remove) members to the FC aliases:
RS 8272(config­fcalias)# [no] member pwwn <Port World Wide Name>
3. For each desired zone:
a. Name (or remove) the zone.
RS 8272(config)# [no] zone name <zone name> vlan <VLAN number>
b. Add (or remove) one or more members to the zone using either pWWNs or FC
Aliases:
RS 8272(config­zone)# [no] member pwwn <Port World Wide Name>
or:
RS 8272(config­zone)# [no] fcalias <device alias name>
Repeat as necessary for each member device.
c. Exit from zone configuration:
RS 8272(config­zone)# exit
d. Check the zone setup:
RS 8272(config)# show zone name <zone name> vlan <VLAN number>
278
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. For each desired zoneset:
a. Name (or remove) the zoneset.
RS 8272(config)# [no] zoneset name <zoneset name> vlan <VLAN number>
b. Add (or remove) one or more member zones to the zoneset:
RS 8272(config­zoneset)# [no] member name <zone name>
Repeat as necessary for each member zone.
c. Exit from zoneset configuration:
RS 8272(config­zoneset)# exit
d. Activate the zoneset:.
RS 8272(config)# zoneset activate name <zoneset name> vlan <VLAN number>
e. Check the zoneset setup:
RS 8272(config)# show zoneset name <zoneset name> vlan <VLAN number>
5. To check overview of zoning status for a vlan:
RS 8272(config)# show zone status vlan <VLAN number>
Changing the Active Zoneset
Fibre Channel is intended to operate with minimal disruption. To prevent the
various synchronization events that would result if each stage of a live zoning
configuration was applied, the cumulative configuration changes for zones and
zoneset are held in reserve until explicitly activated by an administrator.
When activated, the new zoneset is synchronized throughout the Fibre Channel
fabric for each modified zone. Fibre Channel traffic is temporarily disrupted in
modified zones as changes to the fabric are recognized by the connected devices.
Until activation, the previously established zoneset remains in effect.
The basic zoneset commands are as follows:

Activate or deactivate a zoneset:
RS 8272(config)# [no] zoneset activate name <zoneset name> vlan <VLAN
number>

View the settings for the active zoneset:
RS 8272(config)# show zoneset active vlan <VLAN number>
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
279

View the settings for the pending configuration changes:
RS 8272(config)# show zoneset vlan <VLAN number>
FCF Scalability
The following scaling limits apply for full fabric FCF:
280

Maximum number of VLANs on which FCF can be enabled: 12

Maximum number of logins per VLAN: 2048

Maximum number of logins across all 12 VLANs: 2048

Maximum number of zonesets per VLAN: 8

Maximum number of zones per VLAN: 512

Maximum number of members per zone: 32

Maximum number of members in all zones per VLAN: 1024

Maximum number of aliases in all zones per VLAN: 1024
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Priority-Based Flow Control
Priority-based Flow Control (PFC) is defined in IEEE 802.1Qbb. PFC extends the
IEEE 802.3x standard flow control mechanism. Under standard flow control, when
a port becomes busy, the switch manages congestion by pausing all the traffic on
the port, regardless of the traffic type. PFC provides more granular flow control,
allowing the switch to pause specified types of traffic on the port, while other
traffic on the port continues.
PFC pauses traffic based on 802.1p priority values in the VLAN tag. The
administrator can assign different priority values to different types of traffic and
then enable PFC for up to two specific priority values: priority value 3, and one
other. The configuration can be applied globally for all ports on the switch. Then,
when traffic congestion occurs on a port (caused when ingress traffic exceeds
internal buffer thresholds), only traffic with priority values where PFC is enabled is
paused. Traffic with priority values where PFC is disabled proceeds without
interruption but may be subject to loss if port ingress buffers become full.
Although PFC is useful for a variety of applications, it is required for FCoE
implementation where storage (SAN) and networking (LAN) traffic are converged
on the same Ethernet links. Typical LAN traffic tolerates Ethernet packet loss that
can occur from congestion or other factors, but SAN traffic must be lossless and
requires flow control.
For FCoE, standard flow control would pause both SAN and LAN traffic during
congestion. While this approach would limit SAN traffic loss, it could degrade the
performance of some LAN applications that expect to handle congestion by
dropping traffic. PFC resolves these FCoE flow control issues. Different types of
SAN and LAN traffic can be assigned different IEEE 802.1p priority values. PFC
can then be enabled for priority values that represent SAN and LAN traffic that
must be paused during congestion, and disabled for priority values that represent
LAN traffic that is more loss-tolerant.
PFC requires CEE to be turned on (“Turning CEE On or Off” on page 267). When
CEE is turned on, PFC is enabled on priority value 3 by default. Optionally, the
administrator can also enable PFC on one other priority value, providing lossless
handling for another traffic type, such as for a business-critical LAN application.
Note: For any given port, only one flow control method can be implemented at
any given time: either PFC or standard IEEE 802.3x flow control.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
281
Global Configuration
PFC requires CEE to be turned on (“Turning CEE On or Off” on page 267). When
CEE is turned on, standard flow control is disabled on all ports, and PFC is enabled
on all ports for 802.1p priority value 3. While CEE is turned on, PFC cannot be
disabled for priority value 3. This default is chosen because priority value 3 is
commonly used to identify FCoE traffic in a CEE environment and must be
guaranteed lossless behavior. PFC is disabled for all other priority values by
default, but can be enabled for one additional priority value.
Note: When using global PFC configuration in conjunction with the ETS feature
(see “Enhanced Transmission Selection” on page 284), ensure that only
pause-tolerant traffic (such as lossless FCoE traffic) is assigned priority values
where PFC is enabled. Pausing other types of traffic can have adverse effects on
LAN applications that expect uninterrupted traffic flow and tolerate dropping
packets during congestion.
PFC Configuration Example
Note: DCBX may be configured to permit sharing or learning PFC configuration
with or from external devices. This example assumes that PFC configuration is
being performed manually. See “Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange” on
page 290 for more information on DCBX. Even if the G8272 learns the PFC
configuration from a DCBX peer, the PFC configuration must be performed
manually.
This example is consistent with the network shown in Figure 24 on page 265. In
this example, the following topology is used.
Table 32. Port-Based PFC Configuration
Switch
Port
1
3
4
Usage
PFC
Setting
0-2
LAN
Disabled
3
(not used)
Enabled
4
Business-critical LAN
Enabled
others
(not used)
Disabled
3
FCoE
Enabled
others
(not used)
Disabled
0-2
LAN
Disabled
3
(not used)
Enabled
4
Business-critical LAN
Enabled
others
(not used)
Disabled
802.1p
Priority
In this example, PFC is to facilitate lossless traffic handling for FCoE (priority value
3) and a business-critical LAN application (priority value 4).
282
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Assuming that CEE is off (the G8272 default), the example topology shown in
Table 32 can be configured using the following commands:
1. Turn CEE on.
RS 8272(config)# cee enable
Note: Turning CEE on will automatically change some 802.1p QoS and 802.3x
standard flow control settings and menus (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
2. Enable PFC for the FCoE traffic.
Note: PFC is enabled on priority 3 by default. If using the defaults, the manual
configuration commands shown in this step are not necessary.
3. Enable PFC for the business-critical LAN application:
RS 8272(config)# cee port 1 pfc priority 4 enable(Enable on LAN priority)
RS 8272(config)# cee port 1 pfc priority 4 description "Critical LAN"
(Optional description)
RS 8272(config)# cee port 4 pfc priority 4 enable( Enable on LAN priority)
RS 8272(config)# cee port 4 pfc priority 4 description "Critical LAN"
(Optional description)
4. Save the configuration.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
283
Enhanced Transmission Selection
Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) is defined in IEEE 802.1Qaz. ETS provides
a method for allocating port bandwidth based on 802.1p priority values in the
VLAN tag. Using ETS, different amounts of link bandwidth can specified for
different traffic types (such as for LAN, SAN, and management).
ETS is an essential component in a CEE environment that carries different types of
traffic, each of which is sensitive to different handling criteria, such as Storage Area
Networks (SANs) that are sensitive to packet loss, and LAN applications that may
be latency-sensitive. In a single converged link, such as when implementing FCoE,
ETS allows SAN and LAN traffic to coexist without imposing contrary handling
requirements upon each other.
The ETS feature requires CEE to be turned on (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
802.1p Priority Values
Under the 802.1p standard, there are eight available priority values, with values
numbered 0 through 7, which can be placed in the priority field of the 802.1Q
VLAN tag:
16 bits
3 bits
Tag Protocol ID (0x8100)
1
12 bits
Priority CF
I
0
VLAN ID
15 16
32
Servers and other network devices may be configured to assign different priority
values to packets belonging to different traffic types (such as SAN and LAN).
ETS uses the assigned 802.1p priority values to identify different traffic types. The
various priority values are assigned to priority groups (PGID), and each priority
group is assigned a portion of available link bandwidth.
Priority values within in any specific ETS priority group are expected to have
similar traffic handling requirements with respect to latency and loss.
802.1p priority values may be assigned by the administrator for a variety of
purposes. However, when CEE is turned on, the G8272 sets the initial default
values for ETS configuration as follows:
Figure 25. Default ETS Priority Groups
Typical Traffic Type
LAN
LAN
LAN
SAN
Latency-Sensitive LAN
Latency-Sensitive LAN
Latency-Sensitive LAN
Latency-Sensitive LAN
284
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
802.1p
Bandwidth
PGID
Priority
Allocation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
10%
1
50%
2
40%
In the assignment model shown in Figure 25 on page 284, priority values 0 through
2 are assigned for regular Ethernet traffic, which has “best effort” transport
characteristics.
Because CEE and ETS features are generally associated with FCoE, Priority 3 is
typically used to identify FCoE (SAN) traffic.
Priorities 4-7 are typically used for latency sensitive traffic and other important
business applications. For example, priority 4 and 5 are often used for video and
voice applications such as IPTV, Video on Demand (VoD), and Voice over IP
(VoIP). Priority 6 and 7 are often used for traffic characterized with a “must get
there” requirement, with priority 7 used for network control which is requires
guaranteed delivery to support configuration and maintenance of the network
infrastructure.
Note: The default assignment of 802.1p priority values on the G8272 changes
depending on whether CEE is on or off. See “Turning CEE On or Off” on page 267
for details.
Priority Groups
For ETS use, each 801.2p priority value is assigned to a priority group which can
then be allocated a specific portion of available link bandwidth. To configure a
priority group, the following is required:

CEE must be turned on (“Turning CEE On or Off” on page 267) for the ETS
feature to function.

A priority group must be assigned a priority group ID (PGID), one or more
802.1p priority values, and allocated link bandwidth greater than 9%.
PGID
Each priority group is identified with number (0 through 7, and 15) known as the
PGID.
PGID 0 through 7 may each be assigned a portion of the switch’s available
bandwidth.
PGID 8 through 14 are reserved as per the 802.1Qaz ETS standard.
PGID 15 is a strict priority group. It is generally used for critical traffic, such as
network management. Any traffic with priority values assigned to PGID 15 is
permitted as much bandwidth as required, up to the maximum available on the
switch. After serving PGID 15, any remaining link bandwidth is shared among the
other groups, divided according to the configured bandwidth allocation settings.
Make sure all 802.1p priority values assigned to a particular PGID have similar
traffic handling requirements. For example, PFC-enabled traffic must not be
grouped with non-PFC traffic. Also, traffic of the same general type must be
assigned to the same PGID. Splitting one type of traffic into multiple 802.1p
priorities, and then assigning those priorities to different PGIDs may result in
unexpected network behavior.
Each 802.1p priority value may be assigned to only one PGID. However, each
PGID may include multiple priority values. Up to eight PGIDs may be configured
at any given time.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
285
Assigning Priority Values to a Priority Group
Each priority group may be configured from its corresponding ETS Priority Group,
available using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid <group number (0-7, or 15)> priority <priority list>
where priority list is one or more 802.1p priority values (with each separated by a
comma). For example, to assign priority values 0 through 2:
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid <group number (0-7, or 15)> priority 0,1,2
Note: Within any specific PGID, the PFC settings (see “Priority-Based Flow
Control” on page 281) must be the same (enabled or disabled) for all priority
values within the group. PFC can be enabled only on priority value 3 and one other
priority.
When assigning priority values to a PGID, the specified priority value will be
automatically removed from its old group and assigned to the new group when
the configuration is applied.
Each priority value must be assigned to a PGID. Priority values may not be deleted
or unassigned. To remove a priority value from a PGID, it must be moved to
another PGID.
For PGIDs 0 through 7, bandwidth allocation can also be configured through the
ETS Priority Group menu. See for “Allocating Bandwidth” on page 286 for details.
Deleting a Priority Group
A priority group is automatically deleted when it contains no associated priority
values, and its bandwidth allocation is set to 0%.
Note: The total bandwidth allocated to PGID 0 through 7 must equal exactly 100%.
Reducing the bandwidth allocation of any group will require increasing the
allocation to one or more of the other groups (see “Allocating Bandwidth” on
page 286).
Allocating Bandwidth
Allocated Bandwidth for PGID 0 Through 7
The administrator may allocate a portion of the switch’s available bandwidth to
PGIDs 0 through 7. Available bandwidth is defined as the amount of link
bandwidth that remains after priorities within PGID 15 are serviced (see
“Unlimited Bandwidth for PGID 15” on page 287), and assuming that all PGIDs
are fully subscribed. If any PGID does not fully consume its allocated bandwidth,
the unused portion is made available to the other priority groups.
Priority group bandwidth allocation can be configured using the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid <priority group number>
bandwidth <bandwidth allocation> pgid <priority group number> bandwidth <bandwidth allocation>
286
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
where bandwidth allocation represents the percentage of link bandwidth, specified
as a number between 10 and 100, in 1% increments, or 0.
The following bandwidth allocation rules apply:
Bandwidth allocation must be 0% for any PGID that has no assigned 802.1p priority values.
 Any PGID assigned one or more priority values must have a bandwidth allocation
greater than 9%.
 Total bandwidth allocation for groups 0 through 7 must equal exactly 100%.
Increasing or reducing the bandwidth allocation of any PGID also requires
adjusting the allocation of other PGIDs to compensate.

If these conditions are not met, the switch will report an error when applying the
configuration.
Note: Actual bandwidth used by any specific PGID may vary from configured
values by up to 10% of the available bandwidth in accordance with 802.1Qaz ETS
standard. For example, a setting of 10% may be served anywhere from 0% to 20%
of the available bandwidth at any given time.
Unlimited Bandwidth for PGID 15
PGID 15 is permitted unlimited bandwidth and is generally intended for critical
traffic (such as switch management). Traffic in this group is given highest priority
and is served before the traffic in any other priority group.
If PGID 15 has low traffic levels, most of the switch’s bandwidth will be available to
serve priority groups 0 through 7. However, if PGID 15 consumes a larger part of
the switch’s total bandwidth, the amount available to the other groups is reduced.
Note: Consider traffic load when assigning priority values to PGID 15. Heavy
traffic in this group may restrict the bandwidth available to other groups.
Configuring ETS
Consider an example consistent with that used for port-based PFC configuration
(on page 282):
Table 33. ETS Configuration
Priority
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Usage
PGID
Bandwidth
0
10%
20%
0
LAN (best effort delivery)
1
LAN (best effort delivery)
2
LAN (best effort delivery)
3
SAN (Fibre Channel over Ethernet, with PFC)
1
4
Business Critical LAN (lossless Ethernet, with
PFC)
2
5
Latency-sensitive LAN
6
Latency-sensitive LAN
7
Network Management (strict)
30%
3
40%
15
unlimited
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
287
The example shown in Table 33 is only slightly different than the default
configuration shown in Figure 25 on page 284. In this example, latency-sensitive
LAN traffic (802.1p priority 5 through 6) are moved from priority group 2 to
priority group 3. This leaves Business Critical LAN traffic (802.1p priority 4) in
priority group 2 by itself. Also, a new group for network management traffic has
been assigned. Finally, the bandwidth allocation for priority groups 1, 2, and 3 are
revised.
Note: DCBX may be configured to permit sharing or learning PFC configuration
with or from external devices. This example assumes that PFC configuration is
being performed manually. See “Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange” on
page 290 for more information on DCBX.
This example can be configured using the following commands:
1. Turn CEE on.
RS 8272(config)# cee enable
Note: Turning CEE on will automatically change some 802.1p QoS and 802.3x
standard flow control settings and menus (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
2. Configure each allocated priority group with a description (optional), list of 802.1p
priority values, and bandwidth allocation:
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 0 priority 0,1,2
(Select a group for regular LAN, and
set for 802.1p priorities 0, 1, and 2)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 0 description "Regular LAN"
(Set a group description—optional)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 1 priority 3
(Select a group for SAN traffic, and
set for 802.1p priority 3)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 1 description "SAN"
(Set a group description—optional)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 2 priority 4
(Select a group for latency traffic,
and set for 802.1p priority 4)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 2 description "Biz­Critical LAN"
(Set a group description—optional)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 3 description "Latency­Sensitive LAN"
(Set a group description—optional)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 3 priority 5,6 pgid 0 bandwidth 10 pgid 1 bandwidth 20 pgid 2 bandwidth 30 pgid 3 bandwidth 40
(Configure link bandwidth restriction))
3. Configure the strict priority group with a description (optional) and a list of 802.1p
priority values:
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 15 priority 7
(Select a group for strict traffic, and
Set 802.1p priority 7)
RS 8272(config)# cee global ets priority­group pgid 15 description "Network Management"
(Set a group description—optional)
288
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Note: Priority group 15 is permitted unlimited bandwidth. As such, the
commands for priority group 15 do not include bandwidth allocation.
4. Save the configuration.
To view the configuration, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# show cee global ets Current ETS Configuration:
Number of COSq: 8
Current Mapping of 802.1p Priority to Priority Groups:
Priority PGID COSq
­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­
0 0 0
1 0 0 2 0 0
3 1 1
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 3 3
7 15 7
Current Bandwidth Allocation to Priority Groups:
PGID PG% Description
­­­­ ­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­
0 10 Regular LAN
1 20 SAN
2 30 Biz­Critical LAN
3 40 Latency­sensitive LAN
15 ­ Network Management
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
289
Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange
Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange (DCBX) protocol is a vital element of
CEE. DCBX allows peer CEE devices to exchange information about their
advanced capabilities. Using DCBX, neighboring network devices discover their
peers, negotiate peer configurations, and detect misconfigurations.
DCBX provides two main functions on the G8272:

Peer information exchange
The switch uses DCBX to exchange information with connected CEE devices.
For normal operation of any FCoE implementation on the G8272, DCBX must
remain enabled on all ports participating in FCoE.

Peer configuration negotiation
DCBX also allows CEE devices to negotiate with each other for the purpose of
automatically configuring advanced CEE features such as PFC, ETS, and (for
some CNAs) FIP. The administrator can determine which CEE feature settings
on the switch are communicated to and matched by CEE neighbors, and also
which CEE feature settings on the switch may be configured by neighbor
requirements.
The DCBX feature requires CEE to be turned on (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
DCBX Settings
When CEE is turned on, DCBX is enabled for peer information exchange on all
ports. For configuration negotiation, the following default settings are configured:

Application Protocol: FCoE and FIP snooping is set for traffic with 802.1p
priority 3

PFC: Enabled on 802.1p priority 3

ETS

Priority group includes priority values 0 through 2, with bandwidth
allocation of 10%

Priority group includes priority value 3, with bandwidth allocation of 50%

Priority group includes priority values 4 through 7, with bandwidth
allocation of 40%
Enabling and Disabling DCBX
When CEE is turned on, DCBX can be enabled and disabled on a per-port basis,
using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx enable
When DCBX is enabled on a port, Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP) is used to
exchange DCBX parameters between CEE peers. Also, the interval for LLDP
transmission time is set to one second for the first five initial LLDP transmissions,
290
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
after which it is returned to the administratively configured value. The minimum
delay between consecutive LLDP frames is also set to one second as a DCBX
default.
Peer Configuration Negotiation
CEE peer configuration negotiation can be set on a per-port basis for a number of
CEE features. For each supported feature, the administrator can configure two
independent flags:

The advertise flag
When this flag is set for a particular feature, the switch settings will be transmit
to the remote CEE peer. If the peer is capable of the feature, and willing to accept
the G8272 settings, it will be automatically reconfigured to match the switch.

The willing flag
Set this flag when required by the remote CEE peer for a particular feature as
part of DCBX signaling and support. Although some devices may also expect
this flag to indicate that the switch will accept overrides on feature settings, the
G8272 retains its configured settings. As a result, the administrator must
configure the feature settings on the switch to match those expected by the
remote CEE peer.
These flags are available for the following CEE features:

Application Protocol
DCBX exchanges information regarding FCoE and FIP snooping, including the
802.1p priority value used for FCoE traffic. The advertise flag is set or reset
using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx app_proto advertise
The willing flag is set or reset using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx app_proto willing

PFC
DCBX exchanges information regarding whether PFC is enabled or disabled on
the port. The advertise flag is set or reset using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx pfc advertise
The willing flag is set or reset using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx pfc willing
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
291

ETS
DCBX exchanges information regarding ETS priority groups, including their
802.1p priority members and bandwidth allocation percentages. The
advertise flag is set or reset using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx ets advertise
The willing flag is set or reset using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] cee port <port alias or number> dcbx ets willing
Configuring DCBX
Consider an example consistent Figure 24 on page 265 and used with the previous
FCoE examples in this chapter:
FCoE is used on ports 2 and 3.
CEE features are also used with LANs on ports 1 and 4.
 All other ports are disabled or are connected to regular (non-CEE) LAN devices.


In this example, the G8272 acts as the central point for CEE configuration.
FCoE-related ports will be configured for advertising CEE capabilities, but not to
accept external configuration. Other LAN ports that use CEE features will also be
configured to advertise feature settings to remote peers, but not to accept external
configuration. DCBX will be disabled on all non-CEE ports.
This example can be configured using the following commands:
1. Turn CEE on.
RS 8272(config)# cee enable
Note: Turning CEE on will automatically change some 802.1p QoS and 802.3x
standard flow control settings and menus (see “Turning CEE On or Off” on
page 267).
2. Enable desired DCBX configuration negotiation on FCoE ports:
RS 8272(config)# cee port 2 dcbx enable
RS 8272(config)# cee port 2 dcbx app_proto advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 2 dcbx ets advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 2 dcbx pfc advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 3 dcbx enable
RS 8272(config)# cee port 3 dcbx app_proto advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 3 dcbx ets advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 3 dcbx pfc advertise
292
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
3. Enable desired DCBX advertisements on other CEE ports:
RS 8272(config)# cee port 1 dcbx enable
RS 8272(config)# cee port 1 dcbx app_proto advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 1 dcbx ets advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 1 dcbx pfc advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 4 dcbx enable
RS 8272(config)# cee port 4 dcbx app_proto advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 4 dcbx ets advertise
RS 8272(config)# cee port 4 dcbx pfc advertise
4. Disable DCBX for each non-CEE port as appropriate:
RS 8272(config)# no cee port 5­64 dcbx enable
5. Save the configuration.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 18: FCoE and CEE
293
294
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 19. Edge Virtual Bridging
The 802.1Qbg/Edge Virtual Bridging (EVB) is an emerging IEEE standard for
allowing networks to become virtual machine (VM)-aware. EVB bridges the gap
between physical and virtual network resources. The IEEE 802.1Qbg simplifies
network management by providing a standards-based protocol that defines how
virtual Ethernet bridges exchange configuration information. In EVB
environments, physical end stations, containing multiple virtual end stations, use a
bridge to form a LAN. The virtual NIC (vNIC) configuration information of a
virtual machine is available to these EVB devices. This information is generally not
available to an 802.1Q bridge.
Lenovo Networking OS EVB features are compliant with the IEEE 802.1Qbg
Authors Group Draft 0.2. For a list of documents on this feature, see:
http://www.ieee802.org/1/pages/802.1bg.html.
The RackSwitch G8272 performs the role of a 802.1Qbg bridge in an EVB
environment.
Lenovo N/OS implementation of EVB supports the following protocols:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Virtual Ethernet Bridging (VEB) and Virtual Ethernet Port Aggregator (VEPA):
VEB and VEPA are mechanisms for switching between VMs on the same
hypervisor. VEB enables switching with the server, either in the software
(vSwitch), or in the hardware (using single root I/O virtualization capable NICs).
VEPA requires the edge switch to support “Reflective Relay”— an operation
where the switch forwards a frame back to the port on which it arrived if the
destination MAC address is on the same port.

Edge Control Protocol (ECP): ECP is a transport protocol that operates between
two peers over an IEEE 802 LAN. ECP provides reliable, in-order delivery of
ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) PDUs (Protocol Data Units).

Virtual Station Interface (VSI) Discovery and Configuration Protocol (VDP):
VDP allows hypervisors to advertise VSIs to the physical network. This protocol
also allows centralized configuration of network policies that will persist with
the VM, independent of its location.

EVB Type-Length-Value (TLV): EVB TLV is a Link Layer Discovery protocol
(LLDP)-based TLV used to discover and configure VEPA, ECP, and VDP.
Chapter 19: Edge Virtual Bridging
295
EVB Operations Overview
The N/OS includes a pre-standards VSI Type Database (VSIDB) implemented
through the System Networking Switch Center (SNSC), the Flex System Manager
(FSM), or the IBM System Networking Distributed Switch 5000V. The VSIDB is the
central repository for defining sets of network policies that apply to VM network
ports. You can configure only one VSIDB.
Note: This document does not include the VSIDB configuration details. Please see
the SNSC, FSM, or IBM System Networking Distributed Switch 5000V guide for
details on how to configure VSIDB.
The VSIDB operates in the following sequence:
1. Define VSI types in the VSIDB. The VSIDB exports the database when the G8272
sends a request.
2. Create a VM. Specify VSI type for each VM interface. See the SNSC, FSM, or IBM
System Networking Distributed Switch 5000V guide for details on how to specify
the VSI type.
The hypervisor sends a VSI ASSOCIATE, which contains the VSI type ID, to the
switch port after the VM is started. The switch updates its configuration based on
the requested VSI type. The switch configures the per-VM bandwidth using the
VMpolicy.
The N/OS supports the following policies for VMs:

ACLs

Bandwidth metering
VSIDB Synchronization
The switch periodically checks for VSIDB changes based on the configured
interval. You can configure this interval using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# virt evb vsidb <number>
RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# update­interval <time in seconds>
To disable periodic updates, configure the interval value as 0.
If the switch finds that the VSIDB has changed, it updates the local VSIDB cache.
When the cache is successfully updated, it sends a syslog message.
After updating the local VSIDB cache, the switch disassociates any VM whose type
ID or VLAN no longer exists in the updated cache.
The switch updates the local VSIDB cache when any of the following takes place:
296

When, at the configured refresh interval, the switch finds that the VSIDB
configuration has changed since the last poll.

When a VM sends an ASSOCIATE message, but the VSI type does not exist in
the local VSIDB cache.

When a VM sends an ASSOCIATE message, and the VSI type exists but the VSI
type’s VLAN ID does not exist in the local VSIDB cache.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

When you update the VSIDB using the following command:
RS 8272# virt evb update vsidb <number>

When the management port link status changes from down to up
VLAN Behavior
When a VM gets associated, the corresponding VLAN is dynamically created on
the switch port if the VLAN does not already exist.
VLANs that are dynamically created will be automatically removed from the
switch port when there are no VMs using that VLAN on the port.
Dynamic VLAN information will not be displayed in the running configuration.
However, the VLAN, port, and STP commands display the dynamic VLAN
information with a “*”.
If you configure any Layer 2/Layer 3 features on dynamically created VLANs, the
VLAN information is displayed in the running configuration.
Deleting a VLAN
If you delete a VLAN that has a VM associated with it, you will see a warning
message similar to the following:
Warning: Vlan 10 is used by VM and can't be removed.
The VMs will not get disassociated.
If a VM is associated with a port, and you remove this port from a VLAN, you will
see a warning message similar to the following:
Warning: Port 23 in Vlan 10 is used by VM and can't be removed.
The VMs will not get disassociated.
Manual Reflective Relay
Reflective Relay (RR) is an operation where the switch forwards a frame back to the
port on which it arrived if the destination MAC address is on the same port. When
an EVB profile is configured on a port, RR is automatically enabled on the port
after capability exchange with the peer, using the IEEE802.1QBG protocol. This is
the usual mode of operation.
When the switch interoperates with devices that do not support IEEE 802.1QBG
protocols, RR can be manually configured using the following command:
RS 8272(config­if)# reflective­relay force enable
Manual RR and EVB profile cannot be configured on a port at the same time.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 19: Edge Virtual Bridging
297
VSIDB - IPv6 Support
The VSIDB manager can be configured with an IPv4 or IPv6 address. Use the
following command to configure the VSIDB manager IP address:
RS 8272(config)# virt evb vsidb 1
RS 8272(conf-vsidb)# host <IPv4 or IPv6 address>
298
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
(Set VSI database Manager IP)
EVB Configuration
This section includes the steps to configure EVB based on the following values:

Profile number: 1

Port number: 1

Retry interval: 8000 milliseconds

VSI Database:

Manager IP: 172.31.37.187

Port: 80
Note: VSI Database can be accessed via HTTP or HTTPS. The manager IP can be
configured with an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
1. Create an EVB profile.
RS 8272(config)# virt evb profile 1
(Enter number from 1-16)
2. Enable Reflective Relay.
RS 8272(conf­evbprof)# reflective­relay 3. Enable VSI discovery.
RS 8272(conf­evbprof)# vsi­discovery
RS 8272(conf-evbprof)# exit 4. Add EVB profile to port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config-if)# evb profile 1 (Enter EVB profile ID)
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Note: This port must be a server port (RS 8272(config)# system server­ports port <port number>)
5. Configure ECP retransmission interval.
RS 8272(config)# ecp retransmit­interval 8000 (Enter retransmission interval in milliseconds (100-9000)
6. Set VSI database information.
RS 8272(config)# virt evb vsidb 1
RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# host 172.31.37.187 (Set VSI database Manager IP)
RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# port 80 (Set VSI database Manager port)
RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# filepath “vsidb” (Set VSI database document path)
RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# filename “all.xml”(Set VSI database file name)
RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# update­interval 30(Set update interval in seconds) RS 8272(conf­vsidb)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 19: Edge Virtual Bridging
299
Note: When you connect to a SNSC VSIDB, the port/docpath configuration is as
follows:
HTTP:

Port: 40080

Docpath: snsc/rest/vsitypes
HTTPS:

Port: 40443

Docpath: snsc/rest/vsitypes
When you connect to a 5000v VSIDB, the port/docpath configuration is as follows:

Port: 80

Docpath: vsitypes
7. Enable LLDP.
RS 8272(config)# lldp enable
300
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
(Turn on LLDP)
Limitations

If both ACL and egress bandwidth metering are enabled, traffic will first be
matched with the ACL and will not be limited by bandwidth metering.

ACLs based on a source MAC or VLAN must match the source MAC and VLAN
of the VM. If not, the policy will be ignored and you will see the following
warning message:
"vm: VSI Type ID 100 Associated mac 00:50:56:b6:c0:ff on port 6, ignore 1 mismatched ACL"
Unsupported features
The following features are not supported with EVB:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

LAG/VLAG

vNIC
Chapter 19: Edge Virtual Bridging
301
302
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 20. Static Multicast ARP
The Microsoft Windows operating system includes the Network Load Balancing
(NLB) technology that helps to balance incoming IP traffic among multi-node
clusters. In multicast mode, NLB uses a shared multicast MAC address with a
unicast IP address. Since the address resolution protocol (ARP) can map an IP
address to only one MAC address, port, and VLAN, the packet reaches only one of
the servers (the one attached to the port on which the ARP was learnt).
To avoid the ARP resolution, you must create a static ARP entry with multicast
MAC address. You must also specify the list of ports through which the multicast
packet must be sent out from the gateway or Layer 2/Layer 3 node.
With these configurations, a packet with a unicast IPv4 destination address and
multicast MAC address can be sent out as per the multicast MAC address
configuration. NLB maps the unicast IP address and multicast MAC address as
follows:
Cluster multicast MAC address: 03-BF-W-X-Y-Z; where W.X.Y.Z is the cluster
unicast IP address.
You must configure the static multicast ARP entry only at the Layer 2/Layer 3 or
Router node, and not at the Layer 2-only node.
Lenovo Networking OS supports a maximum of 20 static multicast ARP entries.
Note: If you use the ACL profile, an ACL entry is consumed for each Static
Multicast ARP entry that you configure. Hence, you can configure a maximum of
896 ACLs and multicast MAC entries together when using the ACL profile.The
ACL entries have a higher priority. In the default profile, the number of static
multicast ARP entries that you configure does not affect the total number of ACL
entries.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 20: Static Multicast ARP
303
Configuring Static Multicast ARP
To configure multicast MAC ARP, you must perform the following steps:

Configure the static multicast forwarding database (FDB) entry: Since there is no
port list specified for static multicast ARP, and the associated MAC address is
multicast, you must specify a static multicast FDB entry for the cluster MAC
address to limit the multicast domain. If there is no static multicast FDB entry
defined for the cluster MAC address, traffic will not be forwarded. Use the
following command:
RS 8272(config)# mac­address­table multicast <cluster MAC address> <port(s)>

Configure the static multicast ARP entry: Multicast ARP static entries should be
configured without specifying the list of ports to be used. Use the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# ip arp <destination unicast IP address> <destination multicast MAC
address> vlan <cluster VLAN number>
Configuration Example
Consider the following example:

Cluster unicast IP address: 10.10.10.42

Cluster multicast MAC address: 03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A

Cluster VLAN: 42

List of individual or port trunks to which traffic should be forwarded: 54 and 56
Following are the steps to configure the static multicast ARP based on the given
example:
1. Configure the static multicast FDB entry.
RS 8272(config)# mac­address­table multicast 03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A 42 54,56
2. Configure the static multicast ARP entry:
RS 8272(config)# ip arp 10.10.10.42 03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A vlan 42
You can verify the configuration using the following commands:

Verify static multicast FDB entry:
RS 8272(config)# show mac­address­table multicast address 03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A
Multicast Address VLAN Port(s)
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­
03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A 42 54 56
304
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Verify static multicast ARP entry:
RS 8272(config)# show ip arp
Current ARP configuration:
rearp 5
Current static ARP:
ip mac port vlan
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­
10.10.10.42 03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A
42
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Total number of arp entries : 2
IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Age Port
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­ ­­­­
10.10.10.1 P fc:cf:62:9d:74:00 42 10.10.10.42 P 03:bf:0A:0A:0A:2A
42
0
Limitations
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

You must configure the ARP only in the Layer 2/Layer 3 node or the router node
but not in the Layer 2-only node. Lenovo N/OS cannot validate if the node is
Layer 2-only.

The packet is always forwarded to all the ports as specified in the Multicast
MAC address configuration. If VLAN membership changes for the ports, you
must update this static multicast MAC entry. If not, the ports, whose
membership has changed, will report discards.

ACLs take precedence over static multicast ARP. If an ACL is configured to
match and permit ingress of unicast traffic, the traffic will be forwarded based
on the ACL rule, and the static multicast ARP will be ignored.
Chapter 20: Static Multicast ARP
305
306
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 21. Unified Fabric Port
Unified Fabric Port (UFP) is a cost-effective way to allocate, share and dynamically
control network bandwidth between a server and a switch. UFP lets you create
multiple virtual connections. The UFP protocol is a link-level protocol that runs a
separate instance for each physical communication link established between a
server NIC and a switch port. Virtualizing the ports allows you to separate or
aggregate port traffic by applying the network policies defined on the switch.
Virtualization lessens bottlenecks and provides higher bandwidth while
consolidating equipment use.
UFP provides a switch fabric component to control NICs. The server operating
system (OS) or hypervisor recognizes each subdivided link (channel) as an
independent physical NIC. Each channel has a unique identity and profile that
defines its properties and functionality. The server communicates with the switch
over the channel as defined in the channel profile. The channels share the
high-speed physical link bandwidth.
For each channel, the vNIC on the server side communicates with virtual port on
the switch side.
Figure 26. UFP vPorts
Top of Rack Server
NIC
VNIC
Physical
NIC Port
Server
Switch Port
vPort
VNIC
OS or
Hypervisor VNIC
vPort
VNIC
vPort
Lenovo
Switch
vPort
The UFP protocol has the following operation categories:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Channel Initialization: The server NIC and the switch port negotiate the number
of channels and establish channel identifiers. Each UFP channel has a data
component and a control component. The two components have the same UFP
channel ID.

Channel Control: For an established channel, the switch can modify
configurable channel properties by sending a control message on the UFP
channel. While the channel ID is the same for the control and data components,
the destination MAC address of the control message frame is the well-known
address “01-80-C2-00-00-03”.

Discovery Capability: UFP can discover other ports that are UFP enabled. Once
you enable UFP, you can check the information statistics for established
channels.
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 307
UFP Limitations
The following limitations apply when configuring UFP:
308

FCoE must be configured only on vPort 2 of the physical NIC.

UFP port in FCoE mode cannot operate with FIP auto-VLAN feature.

VLANs that have member vPorts configured in trunk-, access-, or auto-modes
cannot have member vPorts configured in tunnel mode or FCoE.

vPorts on a physical port must be members of separate VLANs.

VLANs 4002-4005 are reserved for outer tagging.

A UFP-enabled port with no vPorts configured cannot belong to the same
VLAN as a UFP-enabled port that has vPorts configured in trunk, access, or auto
modes.

UFP bandwidth is guaranteed lossless only for unicast traffic.

VMready is supported only on a vPort which is configured in auto-VLAN
mode. When a vPort is in auto-VLAN mode, it can support up to 32 VMGroups.

EVB is supported only on a vPort which is configured in auto-VLAN mode.

VMready and EVB cannot be configured on the same physical port.

UFP vPorts can support up to 1024 VLANs.

When CEE is turned on, FCoE vPort must be used for lossless priority traffic. For
loss-tolerant priority traffic, a non-FCoE UFP vPort must be used. The lossless
property of FCoE vPort is not guaranteed, if lossless and loss-tolerant traffic are
combined.

When the vPort is enabled and the channel link state is up, the system does not
support changing vPort VLAN type from private/non-private to
non-private/private.

A maximum of four vPorts can be configured for each physical switch port.

VMReady Local Group configuration is not supported by UFP.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Virtual Ports Modes
A single physical switch port is configured with virtual ports (vPorts). Each UFP
channel connects the server vNIC with a switch vPort. Properties that are defined
for a vPort, such as native VLAN and bandwidth, are applied to the traffic that
belongs to the vPort.
Note: A maximum of four vPorts can be configured for each physical switch port.
vPort-S-Tag Mapping
A vPort can also be identified with an S-tag (service tag or outer tag). When a vPort
is initialized, the switch communicates the UFP channel ID of the vPort to the
server vNIC. When the server NIC or switch transmit frames, they add this S-tag to
indicate the vPort or vNIC to which the packet is being transmitted. No VLAN
mapping is required. Such packets can be single tagged or double tagged (with
S-tag).
vPort-VLAN Mapping
In local domain data path type, the switch and server identify the vPort and vNIC
by the port and VLAN tag in the incoming and outgoing packets. Because no two
vPorts carry traffic for the same VLAN, the port-and-VLAN combination must be
uniquely mapped to a vPort.
UFP vPort Mode
The UFP mode is configured based on the type of switching domain (single VLAN
or multiple VLANs) where the vPort is connected.

Use local domain data path types for trunk or access mode.

Use pass-through domain data path types for tunnel mode. In tunnel mode, a
vPort can belong to only one VLAN.
Use the following command to configure UFP vPort mode:
RS 8272(config)# ufp port <num> vport <num>
RS 8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode {access|trunk|auto|tunnel|fcoe}
Default mode is ‘tunnel’
Tunnel Mode
In tunnel mode, a vPort can belong to only one VLAN. An outer tag with the
vPort’s VLAN ID is inserted in packets that egress the vPort. The inner VLAN tag
remains unchanged. The switch processes packets based on the outer tag. When all
the ports or vPorts that belong to a particular VLAN are placed in tunnel mode,
they belong to one pass-through domain.
Use tunnel mode to send all VM data traffic to an upstream switch, for Layer 2 or
Layer 3 processing, in one domain. In such cases, the UFP port or vPort must be in
tunnel mode and the upstream switch port must be in 802.1Q trunk mode.
Note: Two vPorts on a physical port cannot be members of the same VLAN.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 309
Figure 27. Packet pass-through in Tunnel Mode
vNICs
Server
OS/Hypervisor
Regular
VLAN ID
vPorts
Ports without
vNICs
Lenovo Switch
NIC
NIC attaches UFP
Channel VLAN ID
Switching uses outer tag;
Ignores regular VLAN
Switch strips
outer tag
Outer tag sets vNIC;
NIC strips outer tag
Switching uses outer tag;
Ignores regular VLAN
Switch adds outer
Channel VLAN ID
Outbound
Packet
Inbound
Packet
802.1Q Trunk Mode
In trunk mode, a vPort can carry packets that have inner tags that belong to up to
1024 VLANs. A maximum of 4089 VLANs for all UFP vPorts can be configured on
the switch in stand-alone mode. Each VLAN in the inner tag requires a VLAN
translation entry.
Note: Two vPorts operating in trunk mode on the same physical port cannot carry
the same set of VLANs in the inner tag.
Figure 28. Packet passing through in Trunk Mode
vNIC
Server
OS/Hypervisor
Regular
VLAN IDs
vPort
Lenovo Switch
NIC
NIC attaches UFP
Channel VLAN ID
VLAN
Translation
VLAN
Classification
Ports without
vNICs
Switch strips
outer tag
Outbound
Packet
Access Mode
In access mode, a vPort carries packets with inner tags that belong to one VLAN.
The vPort is associated with the VLAN defined by the command:
RS 8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan <2-4094>
Note: VLANs 4002-4005 are reserved for outer tagging.
310
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
FCoE Mode
FCoE traffic is carried by a vPort. The server-side endpoint of this virtual port will
be represented through a FC vHBA. Setting a virtual port in FCoE mode will
enable Priority-based Flow Control (PFC) on the physical port.
A vPort configured in FCoE mode can only be attached to a Fibre Channel (FC)
VLAN. Only vPort 2 on a physical port can be configured in FCoE mode. A vPort
in FCoE mode operates as a local domain data path type with packets being single
tagged.
Auto-VLAN Mode
When a vPort is configured in auto-VLAN mode, the vPort participates in VM
discovery using VMready or 802.1Qbg. VLANs are dynamically provisioned based
on VMready discovery or 802.1Qbg VM association.
When a vPort operates in auto-VLAN mode, it supports 32 VM groups. In the case
of 802.1Qbg, when a vPort operates in auto-VLAN mode, the maximum number of
VLANs in the inner tag are 1024. The vPort cannot be configured in Virtual
Ethernet Port Aggregator (VEPA) mode.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 311
UFP Bandwidth Provisioning
UFP provides one mode of bandwidth provisioning for vPort: Strict Bandwidth
Provisioning Mode.
UFP Strict Bandwidth Provisioning Mode
Strict bandwidth provisioning mode configures the switch and NIC apply
bidirectional bandwidth control on the vPort as per the defined configuration. By
default, a bandwidth of 2.5 Gbps per vPort is guaranteed. If other vPorts are idle,
the bandwidth of a vPort can be up to 10 Gbps. A minimum bandwidth of 1 Gbps
is provisioned, which can be raised by 100 Mbps increments. The sum of the
minimum bandwidth guaranteed for all vPorts together cannot exceed the
capacity of the physical link. A vPort can also be configured with a maximum
bandwidth.
This mode works with the port scheduler to avoid unintended packet drops due to
policing through EFP metering block. If flow control is enabled, the switch
provides a no-drop packet forwarding behavior, which improves end-to-end
TCP-throughput performance.
Note: If a vPort is configured with low upper limit, it might lead to head-of-line
congestion on the egress port.
By default, uplink ports have a separate traffic class for storage traffic with
guaranteed bandwidth. The rest of the bandwidth is shared equally among other
traffic.
Use the following command to configure strict bandwidth provisioning:
RS 8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth {max|min} <10-100>
min ­ Set minimum guaranteed bandwidth
max ­ Set maximum allowed bandwidth
312
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using UFP with Other RackSwitch G8272 Features
UFP works with other G8272 features, as described with limitations and details.
Layer 2 Failover
UFP failover can be configured with manual monitoring.
Layer 2 failover is not supported on UFP ports in auto mode.
For more information on failover, see “Layer 2 Failover” on page 495.
For an example configuration, see “Example 6: Layer 2 Failover Configuration” on
page 320.
Increased VLAN Limits
Configured with UFP and VLANs, a vPort can support a maximum of 1024
VLANs. A UFP port supports 1024 VLANs.
For more information on VLAN configuration, see “VLANs” on page 117.
VMReady
Configuring with UFP and VMReady, the G8272 can support up to 32 VMGroups
with UFP vPorts in auto-mode.
VMReady is supported only on a vPort which is configured in auto-VLAN mode.
For more information on VMReady, see “VMready” on page 239.
802.1Qbg
Configured with Edge Virtual Bridging (EVB), UFP supports up to 1024 VLANs on
a vPort.
EVB is supported only on a vPort which is configured in auto-VLAN mode.
For more information on EVB, see “Edge Virtual Bridging” on page 295.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 313
UFP Configuration Examples
Following is an example configuration of UFP vPorts in access mode.
Example 1: Access Mode
1. Configure port 1 as a UFP server port.
G8272(config)# system server­ports port 1
2. Turn on UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp enable
3. Configure port 1 as UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 enable
Warning: "Tagging/Trunk­mode" is enabled on UFP port 1
4. Configure virtual port.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 vport 1
5. Configure vPort access mode.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode access
6. Configure vPort default VLAN.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan 100
7. Ensure tagging is disabled on vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# no network default­tag
8. Specify QoS parameters for the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth min 25 (in percentage)
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth max 100 (in percentage)
9. Enable the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# enable
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# exit
314
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
10. Configure PVID/Native VLAN for port 2.
Note: Port 2 must be an upstream port.
G8272(config)# interface port 2
G8272(config­if)# switchport mode access
G8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 100
Example 2: Trunk Mode
Following is an example configuration of UFP vPorts in trunk mode.
1. Configure ports 1 and 2 as UFP server ports.
G8272(config)# system server­ports port 1,2
2. Turn on UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp enable
3. Configure port 1 as UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 enable
Warning: "Tagging/Trunk­mode" is enabled on UFP port 1
4. Configure virtual port.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 vport 1
5. Configure vPort trunk mode.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode trunk
6. Configure vPort default VLAN.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan 100
7. Specify QoS parameters for the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth min 25 (in percentage)
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth max 100 (in percentage)
8. Enable the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# enable
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 315
9. Configure port 2 as UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp port 2 enable
Warning: "Tagging/Trunk­mode" is enabled on UFP port 2
10. Configure virtual port.
G8272(config)# ufp port 2 vport 3
11. Configure vPort trunk mode.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode trunk
12. Configure vPort default VLAN.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan 100
13. Ensure tagging is disabled on vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# no network default­tag
14. Specify QoS parameters for the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth min 25 (in percentage)
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth max 100 (in percentage)
15. Enable the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# enable
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# exit
16. Enable tagging/trunk mode on port 3.
G8272(config)# interface port 3
G8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
G8272(config­if)# switchport trunk native vlan 100
G8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 200,300
G8272(config­if)# exit
17. Configure VLAN 100 parameters.
G8272(config)# vlan 100
G8272(config­vlan)# vmember 1.1
G8272(config­vlan)# vmember 2.3
G8272(config­vlan)# exit
316
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
18. Configure VLAN 200 parameters.
G8272(config)# vlan 200
G8272(config­vlan)# vmember 1.1
G8272(config­vlan)# vmember 2.3
G8272(config­vlan)# exit
19. Configure VLAN 300 parameters.
G8272(config)# vlan 300
G8272(config­vlan)# vmember 1.3
G8272(config­vlan)# vmember 2.3
G8272(config­vlan)# exit
Example 3: Auto-VLAN Mode
1. Configure port 1 as a UFP server port.
G8272(config)# system server­ports port 1
2. Turn on UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp enable
3. Configure port 1 as UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 enable
Warning: "Tagging/Trunk­mode" is enabled on UFP port 1
4. Configure virtual port.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 vport 1
5. Configure vPort default VLAN.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan 100
6. Configure vPort auto mode.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode auto
Note: VLAN is dynamically added by 802.1Qbg.
7. Specify QoS parameters for the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth min 25 (in percentage)
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth max 100 (in percentage)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 317
8. Enable the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# enable
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# exit
Example 4: Tunnel Mode
Following is an example configuration of UFP vPorts in tunnel mode.
1. Configure port 1 as a UFP server port.
G8272(config)# system server­ports port 1
2. Turn on UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp enable
3. Configure port as UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 enable
Warning: "Tagging/Trunk­mode" is enabled on UFP port 1
4. Configure virtual port.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 vport 1
5. Configure vPort tunnel mode.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode tunnel
6. Configure vPort default VLAN.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan 4000
7. Ensure tagging is disabled on vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# no network default­tag
8. Specify QoS parameters for the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth min 25 (in percentage)
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth max 100 (in percentage)
9. Enable the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# enable
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# exit
10. Configure tagging on port 2.
318
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Note: Port 2 must be an upstream port.
G8272(config)# interface port 2
G8272(config­if)# tagpvid­ingress
G8272(config­if)# no vlan dot1q tag native G8272(config­if)# switchport access vlan 4000
G8272(config­if)# exit
Example 5: FCoE Mode
Following is an example configuration of UFP vPorts in FCoE mode.
1. Configure port 1 as a UFP server port.
G8272(config)# system server­ports port 1
2. Enable CEE.
G8272(config)# cee enable
3. Enable FIPs.
G8272(config)# fcoe fips enable
4. Turn on UFP.
RS 8272(config)# ufp enable
5. Configure port as UFP.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 enable
Warning: "Tagging/Trunk­mode" is enabled on UFP port 1
6. Configure virtual port.
G8272(config)# ufp port 1 vport 2
7. Configure vPort FCoE mode.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network mode fcoe
8. Configure vPort default VLAN.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# network default­vlan 1102
9. Ensure tagging is disabled on vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# no network default­tag
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 319
10. Specify QoS parameters for the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth min 25 (in percentage)
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# qos bandwidth max 100 (in percentage)
11. Configure port 1 as a UFP server port.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# system server­ports port 1
12. Enable the vPort.
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# enable
G8272(config_ufp_vport)# exit
13. Enable tagging/trunk mode on port.
Note: Port 2 is connected to the upstream FCF.
G8272(config)# interface port 2
G8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
G8272(config­if)# switchport trunk native vlan 1
G8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1102
G8272(config­if)# exit
Example 6: Layer 2 Failover Configuration
While configuring a failover trigger, you cannot use the member command for a
physical port that has vPorts configured. Instead, you must use the vmember
command to add the vPorts as members of a failover trigger. The following
example includes the commands to configure a failover trigger using a physical
port 8 (a non-UFP port) and port 9 (a UFP-enabled port with vPorts 9.1, 9.2, 9.3,
and 9.4).
See “Example 1: Access Mode” on page 314 for steps to configure a vPort in access
mode. Follow the steps below for configuring the failover trigger:
1. Enable failover globally:
G8272(config)# failover enable
2. Configure trigger 1 and add monitor and control ports:
G8272(config)# failover trigger 1 mmon monitor member 5
G8272(config)# failover trigger 1 mmon control member 8
G8272(config)# failover trigger 1 mmon control vmember 9.1,9.2,9.3,9.4
Note: If you try to add a physical port (that has vPorts configured) with the
“member” attribute as a member of a trigger (as opposed to the attribute
“vmember”), you may see the following error message when you enable the
trigger:
G8272(config)#failover trigger 1 ena
Failover Error: trigger 1 physical port 9 has virtual ports.
320
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
3. Enable failover trigger:
G8272(config)# failover trigger 1 enable
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 21: Unified Fabric Port 321
322
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 5: IP Routing
This section discusses Layer 3 switching functions. In addition to switching traffic at
near line rates, the application switch can perform multi-protocol routing. This
section discusses basic routing and advanced routing protocols:
 Basic Routing
 Policy-Based Routing
 Routed Ports
 IPv6 Host Management
 Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
 Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
 Service Location Protocol (SLP)
 Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
323
324
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 22. Basic IP Routing
This chapter provides configuration background and examples for using the G8272
to perform IP routing functions. The following topics are addressed in this chapter:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“IP Routing Benefits” on page 326

“Routing Between IP Subnets” on page 326

“Example of Subnet Routing” on page 327

“ARP - Local Proxy” on page 331

“Network Address Translation” on page 332

“ECMP Static Routes” on page 337

“Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol” on page 339
325
IP Routing Benefits
The switch uses a combination of configurable IP switch interfaces and IP routing
options. The switch IP routing capabilities provide the following benefits:

Connects the server IP subnets to the rest of the backbone network.

Provides the ability to route IP traffic between multiple Virtual Local Area
Networks (VLANs) configured on the switch.
Routing Between IP Subnets
The physical layout of most corporate networks has evolved over time. Classic
hub/router topologies have given way to faster switched topologies, particularly
now that switches are increasingly intelligent. The G8272 is intelligent and fast
enough to perform routing functions at wire speed.
The combination of faster routing and switching in a single device allows you to
build versatile topologies that account for legacy configurations.
For example, consider a corporate campus that has migrated from a router-centric
topology to a faster, more powerful, switch-based topology. As is often the case, the
legacy of network growth and redesign has left the system with a mix of illogically
distributed subnets.
This is a situation that switching alone cannot cure. Instead, the router is flooded
with cross-subnet communication. This compromises efficiency in two ways:

Routers can be slower than switches. The cross-subnet side trip from the switch
to the router and back again adds two hops for the data, slowing throughput
considerably.

Traffic to the router increases, increasing congestion.
Even if every end-station could be moved to better logical subnets (a daunting
task), competition for access to common server pools on different subnets still
burdens the routers.
This problem is solved by using switches with built-in IP routing capabilities.
Cross-subnet LAN traffic can now be routed within the switches with wire speed
switching performance. This eases the load on the router and saves the network
administrators from reconfiguring every end-station with new IP addresses.
326
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Example of Subnet Routing
Consider the role of the G8272 in the following configuration example:
Figure 29. Switch-Based Routing Topology
Default router:
205.21.17.1
IF 1
VLAN 1
IF 2
VLAN 2
IF 4
VLAN 4
IF 3
VLAN 3
Server subnet 3:
206.30.15.2-254
Server subnet 1:
100.20.10.2-254
Server subnet 2:
131.15.15.2-254
The switch connects the Gigabit Ethernet and Fast Ethernet trunks from various
switched subnets throughout one building. Common servers are placed on another
subnet attached to the switch. A primary and backup router are attached to the
switch on yet another subnet.
Without Layer 3 IP routing on the switch, cross-subnet communication is relayed
to the default gateway (in this case, the router) for the next level of routing
intelligence. The router fills in the necessary address information and sends the
data back to the switch, which then relays the packet to the proper destination
subnet using Layer 2 switching.
With Layer 3 IP routing in place on the switch, routing between different IP
subnets can be accomplished entirely within the switch. This leaves the routers free
to handle inbound and outbound traffic for this group of subnets.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
327
Using VLANs to Segregate Broadcast Domains
If you want to control the broadcasts on your network, use VLANs to create
distinct broadcast domains. Create one VLAN for each server subnet, and one for
the router.
Configuration Example
This section describes the steps used to configure the example topology shown in
Figure 29 on page 327.
1. Assign an IP address (or document the existing one) for each router and each
server.
The following IP addresses are used:
Table 34. Subnet Routing Example: IP Address Assignments
Subnet
Devices
IP Addresses
1
Default router
205.21.17.1
2
Web servers
100.20.10.2-254
3
Database servers
131.15.15.2-254
4
Terminal Servers
206.30.15.2-254
2. Assign an IP interface for each subnet attached to the switch.
Since there are four IP subnets connected to the switch, four IP interfaces are
needed:
Table 35. Subnet Routing Example: IP Interface Assignments
Interface
Devices
IP Interface Address
IF 1
Default router
205.21.17.3
IF 2
Web servers
100.20.10.1
IF 3
Database servers
131.15.15.1
IF 4
Terminal Servers
206.30.15.1
3. Determine which switch ports and IP interfaces belong to which VLANs.
The following table adds port and VLAN information:
Table 36. Subnet Routing Example: Optional VLAN Ports
Devices
328
IP Interface
Switch Ports
Default router
1
22
1
Web servers
2
1 and 2
2
Database servers
3
3 and 4
3
Terminal Servers
4
5 and 6
4
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VLAN #
Note: To perform this configuration, you must be connected to the switch
Command Line Interface (CLI) as the administrator.
4. Add the switch ports to their respective VLANs.
The VLANs shown in Table 36 are configured as follows:
RS 8272(config)# vlan 1
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 22
(Add ports to VLAN 1)
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
(Add ports to VLAN 2)
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 3,4
(Add ports to VLAN 3)
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 4
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5,6
(Add ports to VLAN 4)
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 4
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Each time you add a port to a VLAN, you may get the following prompt:
Port 4 is an untagged port and its PVID is changed from 1 to 3.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
329
5. Assign a VLAN to each IP interface.
Now that the ports are separated into VLANs, the VLANs are assigned to the
appropriate IP interface for each subnet. From Table 36 on page 328, the settings
are made as follows:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
(Select IP interface 1)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 205.21.17.3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 1
(Add VLAN 1)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
(Select IP interface 2)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 100.20.10.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
(Add VLAN 2)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
(Select IP interface 3)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 131.15.15.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 3
(Add VLAN 3)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 4
(Select IP interface 4)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 206.30.15.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 4
(Add VLAN 4)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
6. Configure the default gateway to the routers’ addresses.
The default gateway allows the switch to send outbound traffic to the router:
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 1 address 205.21.17.1
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 1 enable
7. Enable IP routing.
RS 8272(config)# ip routing
8. Verify the configuration.
RS 8272(config)# show vlan
RS 8272(config)# show interface information
RS 8272(config)# show interface ip
Examine the resulting information. If any settings are incorrect, make the
appropriate changes.
330
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
ARP - Local Proxy
An IP interface or a routed port that has local proxy ARP enabled allows the
RackSwitch G8272 to respond to all ARP requests for IP addresses within the
subnetwork, and to forward all traffic between hosts in the subnetwork. This
feature is useful when hosts in a subnetwork are separated at Layer 2 with features
such as Private VLAN. After responding to an ARP request, the G8272 sends an
ARP request to the destination host for creating an ARP entry, if such an entry does
not already exist in the ARP cache. If VRRP is enabled, the G8272 uses the virtual
router MAC address of the master in the ARP response. If VRRP is not enabled, the
G8272 uses the switch base MAC address.
When local proxy ARP is enabled on an interface, ICMP redirects must be disabled
globally.
This feature can be enabled using the following commands:
On an IP interface:
RS 8272(config-ip-if)# ip local-proxy-arp
On a routed port:
RS 8272(config-if)# ip local-proxy-arp
For more information on routed ports, see Chapter 24, “Routed Ports”.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
331
Network Address Translation
Another way to circumvent using an upstream router, this time for communication
between local subnets and the rest of the backbone network, is to use the G8272’s
integrated Network Address Translation (NAT) functionality. NAT changes the IP
addresses inside packets as they pass between different IP address spaces or
realms, based on predefined mappings.
Network addresses can be segregated into two realms: the inside realm and the
outside realm. This is a naming convention originating from the prevailing use
case, where NAT is used to connect an internal address realm with private
unregistered addresses to an external realm with globally unique registered
addresses. Technically, however, the two realms are symmetrical. It is possible, for
example, to define a LAN in the outside realm and the backbone network in the
inside realm.
Network addresses are classified as follows:


Inside Realm (local IPs)

inside local IP – the configured IP address of the inside host. All hosts from
the inside realm can access the inside local address if they have a route to it.

outside local IP – the IP address of an outside host as it appears in the inside
realm. Hosts in the inside realm use the outside local address when sending
packets to a host in the outside realm.
Outside Realm (global IPs)

inside global IP – the IP address of the inside host as it appears in the outside
realm. Hosts in the outside realm use the inside global address as destination
when sending packets to a host in the inside realm.

outside global IP – the configured IP address of the outside host.
Figure 30. NAT Address Mapping
Inside Realm
Inside
Local IP
Inside
Network
Outside
Local IP
Outside Realm
Inside
Global IP
NAT Router
Outside
Network
Outside
Global IP
When an IP packet passes from the inside realm to the outside realm, its original
source IP is the inside local IP and the destination IP is the outside local IP. NAT
can replace both the source (SNAT) and destination (DNAT) IP addresses as
follows:

SNAT – The inside local IP is replaced with the inside global IP

DNAT – The outside local IP is replaced with the outside global IP
When an IP packet arrives from the outside realm to the inside realm, the following
network address translations are applied:

332
SNAT – The outside global IP is replaced with the outside local IP
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

DNAT – The inside global IP is replaced with the inside local IP
By default, IP interfaces do not participate in NAT. To configure an interface as part
of the inside realm or outside realm, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip nat {inside|outside}
To exclude the interface from NAT, revert it to the default state:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip nat default
Notes:

All IP interfaces defined on the same VLAN or on VLANs participating in the
same realm (either inside, outside or default) must be configured as members of
the same realm. Setting an interface as part of a realm will automatically add all
the interfaces in the VLAN to the respective realm. Reverting an interface to the
default state, will automatically revert all interfaces in the VLAN to default.

Setting up NAT on the switch’s management IP or on IP addresses used for
routing protocols may compromise your setup.
Static NAT
Static NAT allows one-to-one translations of the local IP addresses to the global IP
addresses or of the global IP address to the local IP address.
To set up NAT for traffic passing from the inside realm to the outside realm, use the
following commands:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat inside source static <inside local IP> <inside global IP>
(SNAT)
RS 8272(config)# ip nat inside destination static <outside local IP> <outside
global IP>
(DNAT)
For traffic passing from the outside realm to the inside realm, use the following
commands:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat outside source static <outside global IP> <outside local IP>
(SNAT)
RS 8272(config)# ip nat outside destination static <inside global IP> <inside local
IP>
(DNAT)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
333
Unidirectional NAT Translation
By default, static NAT rules create mappings that permit translations for
bidirectional flows. A static inside SNAT rule for instance, in addition to the inside
local IP to inside global IP mapping for outgoing traffic, will also create a
corresponding inside global IP to inside local IP mapping for incoming traffic. In
other words:

An inside SNAT also creates an outside DNAT

An outside DNAT also creates an inside SNAT

An outside SNAT also creates an inside DNAT

An inside DNAT also creates an outside SNAT
Figure 31. SNAT – DNAT Equivalence
Inside Realm Outside Realm
SNAT
Inside
Local IP
Inside
Network
DNAT
SNAT
Outside
Local IP
Inside
Global IP
NAT Router
Outside
Network
Outside
Global IP
DNAT
To cancel these secondary mappings, use the one-way parameter at the end of the
static NAT commands:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat inside source static <inside local IP> <inside global IP>
one­way
Network Address Port Translation
Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) allows NAT to isolate specific traffic
streams by translating socket addresses (both the IP address and port number)
instead of only the IP addresses. NAPT also enables port forwarding.
To set up NAPT for a static inside SNAT for instance, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat inside source static {tcp|udp} <inside local IP> <local
TCP/UDP port> <inside global IP> <global TCP/UDP port>
Dynamic NAT
Dynamic NAT allows mapping pools of multiple IPs in one rule, instead of
individual IP network addresses. Dynamic NAT acts similarly to Static NAT,
except that the entries are only temporarily added to hardware when a packet
matches the translation rule and age out after a predefined time-out interval.
334
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Up to 1000 IP address pools can be defined. To create IP address pools, use the
following command:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat pool <pool-name> <start_IP_address> <end_IP_address> netmask <netmask> [port­range <start_port> <end_port>]
Once the IP address pools are defined, you can configure a dynamic NAT:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat {inside|outside} source pool <match-pool-name> pool <translation-pool> [overload] [one­way]
Notes:

The overload parameter is redundant, and used only for Cisco compatibility.

The translation-pool maps only the first IP address in the range. The
parameter is defined as a pool for compatibility reasons.
Because of how the dynamic rules are defined, inside dynamic rules only allow
inside nodes to initiate communication with outside nodes. Likewise, outside
dynamic rules allow only outside nodes to initiate communication with inside
nodes. Port forwarding can be used to circumvent this behavior and allow outside
nodes to initiate communication with inside nodes based on inside dynamic rules,
and inside nodes to initiate communication with outside nodes based on outside
dynamic rules.
Match pools cannot overlap between NAT rules. Translation pools can. It is
possible, for instance, to set up two different IP ranges to translate to the same IP
address.
If a static and a dynamic rule overlap, the NAT defined in the static rule will take
precedence.
NAT Proxy ARP
ARP requests from inside nodes to outside nodes will be addressed to the outside
nodes’ locally translated IPs (outside local IPs). Likewise, ARP requests from
outside nodes to inside nodes will be addressed to the inside global IPs. To
enable/disable the switch from replying to these ARP requests for outside local IPs
and inside global IPs, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] ip nat proxy­arp enable
Global NAT Settings
To globally turn NAT on and off without erasing the current NAT configuration,
use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] ip nat enable
To set up the time-out in seconds for dynamic NAT rules:
RS 8272(config)# ip nat translation timeout <0-4294967>
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
335
To delete all current dynamically created NAT translations before their time-out
expires:
RS 8272(config)# clear ip nat translations
To delete various NAT rules and IP pools:
RS 8272(config)# no ip nat {all|static|dynamic|pools}
To display current NAT settings and statistics:
RS 8272(config)# show ip nat [statistics|translations]
Scaling and Limitations
The following limitations apply for NAT:
336

Supported protocols for static NAPT and dynamic translations: TCP, UDP

Only ICMP Echo Request/Reply packets are supported for dynamic rules. All
other ICMP packets are supported only for static NAT rules

IPv6 is not supported

Multicast traffic is not supported

Maximum bidirectional (two-way) active translations (SNAT and DNAT): 1024

Maximum unidirectional (one-way) active translations: 2048 (1024 SNAT + 1024
DNAT)

Maximum DNAT translations (no SNAT): 1024

Maximum bidirectional static/dynamic entries: 1024
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
ECMP Static Routes
Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) is a forwarding mechanism that routes packets
along multiple paths of equal cost. ECMP provides equally-distributed link load
sharing across the paths. The hashing algorithm used is based on the destination IP
and source IP (DIPSIP) addresses or only on the source IP address (SIP). ECMP
routes allow the switch to choose between several next hops toward a given
destination. The switch performs periodic health checks (ping) on each ECMP
gateway. If a gateway fails, it is removed from the routing table, and an SNMP trap
is sent.
ECMP Route Hashing
You can configure the parameters used to perform ECMP route hashing, as
follows:


sip: Source IP address
dipsip: Source IP address and destination IP address (default)
The ECMP hash setting applies to all ECMP routes.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
337
Configuring ECMP Static Routes
To configure ECMP static routes, add the same route multiple times, each with the
same destination IP address, but with a different gateway IP address. These routes
become ECMP routes.
1. Add a static route (IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and interface number).
RS 8272(config)# ip route 10.10.1.1 255.255.255.255 100.10.1.1 1
2. Add another static route with the same IP address and mask, but a different
gateway address.
RS 8272(config)# ip route 10.10.1.1 255.255.255.255 200.20.2.2 1
3. Select an ECMP hashing method (optional).
RS 8272(config)# ip route ecmphash [sip|dipsip]
You may add up to 32 gateways for each static route.
Use the following commands to check the status of ECMP static routes:
RS 8272(config)# show ip route static
Current static routes:
Destination Mask Gateway If ECMP ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­
10.20.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.4.4.1 * 10.5.5.1 * 10.6.6.1 * ...
10.35.35.1 * ECMP health­check ping interval: 1
ECMP health­check retries number: 3
ECMP Hash Mechanism: dipsip
Gateway healthcheck: enabled
RS 8272(config)# show ip ecmp Current ecmp static routes:
Destination Mask Gateway If GW Status ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­ 10.20.2.2 255.255.255.255 10.4.4.1 up
10.5.5.1 up
10.6.6.1 up
...
10.34.34.1 up
10.35.35.1 up
338
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a transport protocol that
provides a framework for automatically assigning IP addresses and configuration
information to other IP hosts or clients in a large TCP/IP network. Without DHCP,
the IP address must be entered manually for each network device. DHCP allows a
network administrator to distribute IP addresses from a central point and
automatically send a new IP address when a device is connected to a different
place in the network.
The switch accepts gateway configuration parameters if they have not been
configured manually. The switch ignores DHCP gateway parameters if the
gateway is configured.
DHCP is an extension of another network IP management protocol, Bootstrap
Protocol (BOOTP), with an additional capability of being able to allocate reusable
network addresses and configuration parameters for client operation.
Built on the client/server model, DHCP allows hosts or clients on an IP network to
obtain their configurations from a DHCP server, thereby reducing network
administration. The most significant configuration the client receives from the
server is its required IP address; (other optional parameters include the “generic”
file name to be booted, the address of the default gateway, and so forth).
To enable DHCP on a switch interface, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# system dhcp
DHCP Relay Agent
DHCP is described in RFC 2131, and the DHCP relay agent supported on the
G8272 is described in RFC 1542. DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol. The
client sends messages to the server on port 67 and the server sends messages to the
client on port 68.
DHCP defines the methods through which clients can be assigned an IP address
for a finite lease period and allowing reassignment of the IP address to another
client later. Additionally, DHCP provides the mechanism for a client to gather
other IP configuration parameters it needs to operate in the TCP/IP network.
In the DHCP environment, the G8272 can act as a relay agent. The DHCP relay
feature enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to five
DHCP/ BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the switch.
When a switch receives a UDP broadcast on port 67 from a DHCP client requesting
an IP address, the switch acts as a proxy for the client, replacing the client source IP
(SIP) and destination IP (DIP) addresses. The request is then forwarded as a UDP
Unicast MAC layer message to five DHCP/ BOOTP servers whose IP addresses are
configured on the switch. The servers respond as a UDP Unicast message back to
the switch, with the default gateway and IP address for the client. The destination
IP address in the server response represents the interface address on the switch
that received the client request. This interface address tells the switch on which
VLAN to send the server response to the client.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 22: Basic IP Routing
339
To enable the DHCP relay feature on the G8272, you need to configure the
DHCP/BOOTP server IP addresses on the switch. Generally, it is best to configure
the switch IP interface on the client side to match the client’s subnet, and configure
VLANs to separate client and server subnets. The DHCP server knows from which
IP subnet the newly allocated IP address will come.
In G8272 implementation, there is no need for primary or secondary servers. The
client request is forwarded to the BOOTP servers configured on the switch. The use
of five servers provide failover redundancy. However, no health checking is
supported.
Use the following commands to configure the switch as a DHCP relay agent:
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server 1 <IP address>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server 2 <IP address>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server 3 <IP address>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server 4 <IP address>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay server 5 <IP address>
RS 8272(config)# ip bootp­relay enable
RS 8272(config)# show ip bootp­relay Additionally, DHCP Relay functionality can be assigned on a per interface basis.
Use the following commands to enable the Relay functionality:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# relay 340
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 23. Policy-Based Routing
Policy-based routing (PBR) allows the RackSwitch G8272 to forward traffic based
on defined policies rather than entries in the routing table. Such policies are
defined based on the protocol, source IP, or other information present in a packet
header. PBR provides a mechanism for applying the defined policies based on
access control lists (ACLs), and marking packets with a type of service (ToS) to
provide preferential treatment.
PBR can be applied only to the ingress traffic. You can configure a PBR policy using
route maps and apply the route map to an ingress interface. You need to specify the
match (using ACLs) and set (using route maps) criteria in the policy. Based on the
defined rules, an action is triggered. If no match is found, or the policy rule
specifies that the packet be denied, the packet is routed based on an entry in the
routing table.
PBR Policies and ACLs
Up to 256 ACLs can be configured for networks that use IPv4 addressing. Regular
ACLs and PBR ACLs together cannot exceed the maximum ACLs supported.
ACLs are prioritized based on the ACL number. Lower numbers have higher
priority. You must configure regular ACLs with lower numbers and PBR ACLs
with higher numbers.
Note: You cannot apply an ACL directly to an interface and using a PBR policy at
the same time.
Applying PBR ACLs
PBR ACLs must be applied to an IP interface that has a VLAN configured. In
addition to the defined ACL rules, the Lenovo Networking OS uses the VLAN ID
as a matching criterion. Traffic is filtered on a per-VLAN basis rather than a
per-interface basis. If multiple IP interfaces have the same VLAN ID, route maps
applied to each interface are used to filter traffic on the VLAN. For example: if
interface IP 10 and interface IP 11 are members of VLAN 100; interface IP 10 uses
PBR ACL 410 and interface IP 11 uses PBR ACL 411. Traffic on VLAN 100 will be
filtered using PBR ACLs 410 and 411.
Note: You cannot apply the PBR ACL to a Layer 2-only port.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
341
Configuring Route Maps
A route map is used to control and modify routing information. When PBR is
enabled on an interface, all incoming packets are filtered based on the criteria
defined in the route maps. For packets that match the filtering criteria, the
precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value can be changed, or
the packets can be routed/forwarded to the appropriate next hop.
PBR and dynamic routing protocols, such as Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), use route maps. You can define a maximum of
255 route maps. Route maps used by a PBR policy cannot be used by a dynamic
routing protocol. You can configure a maximum of 32 access list statements in a
route map. You can assign only one route map to a non-management IP interface.
You must define route map criteria using match and set commands. All
sequential match clauses must be met by the packets for the set clauses to be
applied.
Match Clauses
IPv4 ACLs can be used to specify the match criteria. The following match criteria
can be used in a PBR ACL:

Source IP

Destination IP

Protocol

ToS

TCP/UDP source port

TCP/UDP destination port
If criteria other than the above are used in a PBR ACL, the switch will display an
error message.
If ingress packets do not meet any of the match criteria, or if a deny statement is
configured in the ACL, then the packets are routed based on the entries in the
routing table.
Set Clauses
When the match clause(s) is satisfied, one of the following set clauses can be used
to specify the packet forwarding criteria:
342

Next hop IP address: This must be the IP address of an interface on the adjacent
router. A remote router interface cannot be used to specify the next hop. Packets
are forwarded to the next hop IP address. The PBR policy uses the next hops in
the order you specify. If the first next hop is down, then the second next hop is
used, and so on. If you specify the next hop addresses using separate statements,
then the next hops are used in the order you specify, starting from top to down.
A maximum of 64 unique next hops can be configured across all route maps.

IP Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value: A value used to set the
DSCP value of the matching packets.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

IP precedence value: A value or keyword used to set the precedence value of the
matching packets.
You can use a combination of set commands. However, you cannot use the set
commands for DSCP and precedence together in the same route map.
Following are the basic steps and commands for configuring route maps.
1. Configure a route map.
RS 8272(config)# route­map <route map number>
2. Define an access list statement and assign an ACL to the route map.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list <1-32> match­access­control <IP ACL number>
3. Enable the access list.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list <1-32> enable
4. Set next hop IP address (the IP address of an adjacent router).
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set ip next­hop <IP address> [<nh2 IP address>] [<nh3 IP address>] [<nh4 IP address>] [access­list {<access list ID>|<access list range>}]
OR
Set IP precedence value.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set ip precedence <value or keyword> [access­list {<access list ID>|<access list range>}]
OR
Set IP DSCP value.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set ip dscp <value> [access­list {<access list ID>|<access list range>}]
Configuring Health Check
You can configure tracking/health check parameters for each of the next hop IP
address you specify in the route map. By default, Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) resolves the next hop IP address. The ARP re-try interval is two minutes.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 23: Policy-Based Routing
343
Use the command below to configure health check:
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set ip next­hop verify­availability <next hop IP
address> <priority> [icmp|arp] [interval] [retry] [access­list {<access list
ID>|<access list range>}] Default values:
Protocol: ARP
Interval: 2 seconds
Retry: 3 times
You must configure a separate statement for verifying health check of each next
hop. A maximum of four health check statements can be included in a route map.
Note: When you configure next hops using set ip next­hop command and
health check using the set ip next­hop verify­availability command
in the same route map, only the health check statements will be considered.
Following is an example of a route map health check statement:
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set ip next­hop verify­availability 12.1.1.1 10 icmp access­list 4
Similarly, if there are inconsistent tracking parameters for a particular next hop IP
address among multiple route maps, the route map with the lowest route map
number is considered.
Note: We strongly recommend that you configure health check if all/multiple next
hops specified in the route map belong to the same Spanning Tree Group (STG).
This is required in case of an STP topology change where all forwarding database
(FDB) entries on all the ports in an STG are cleared. In such a scenario, the
associated ARP entries are purged and the next hop specified in the PBR policy
will not get resolved. When health check is configured, the PBR policy will route
the traffic based on the second next hop that you have specified.
344
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Example PBR Configuration
Following is an example of configuring PBR to match packets with a destination
network address of 3.0.0.0. The PBR is applied to ingress packets on the IP interface
11. The next hop IP address is configured as 5.5.5.5 or 10.10.10.10.
1. Configure an ACL and specify the match criteria.
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 100 action permit
RS 8272(config)# access­control list 100 ipv4 destination­ip­address 3.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
2. Configure a route map.
RS 8272(config)# route­map 126
3. Apply the ACL to the route map.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list 1 match­access­control 100
4. Set the next hop IP addresses.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set ip next­hop 5.5.5.5 10.10.10.10
RS 8272(config­route­map)# exit
5. Apply the route map to an IP interface that has a VLAN configured.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 11
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip policy route­map 126
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# exit
6. Verify PBR configuration.
RS 8272# show ip policy
IP Interface Route map
11 126
RS 8272# show route­map 126
126: PBR, enabled
Match clauses:
alist 1: access­control list 100, enabled
Set clauses:
ip next­hop 5.5.5.5 10.10.10.10, alist all
Policy routing matches: 0 packets
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 23: Policy-Based Routing
345
Configuring PBR with other Features
Consider the following PBR behavior when configured with the features given
below:

DSCP: PBR ACLs can be used to remark an IP packet with a new
precedence/DSCP value. PBR ACL remark statements have higher priority than
the DSCP remark commands configured on ports.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP): If PBR is enabled on a VRRP IP
interface, the PBR becomes effective on the interface when the switch becomes
the VRRP master on that IP interface.

Virtual Link Aggregation Group (VLAG): When configuring PBR on VLAG
ports, you must configure the same PBR policy on both the VLAG peers. You
cannot configure the next hop to be on a remote switch or on the VLAG ports.
Unsupported Features
PBR cannot be configured for:
346

Routed ports

Multicast traffic

IPv6 packets

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Virtual Network Interface Card (vNIC)

Loopback Interface
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Dynamic PBR
Dynamic Policy-Based Routing enables simplified configuration of multi-tenant
networks. An IP interface can be set up as either a:

downlink to a specific tenant’s endpoint

uplink for one or more tenants

link to a service network accessible to one or more tenants
Traffic between different tenants is routed through their uplinks (firewall). Only
intra-tenant and service network traffic is routed locally. When configuring
interface tenant settings, ACLs are dynamically generated to route data traffic
correspondingly.
Features and Limitations
The following features and limitations apply to Dynamic Policy-Based Routing:

Tenants must not use overlapping IP subnets.

If a tenant owns multiple subnets, data traffic between these subnets is not
forwarded upstream. Instead, it is routed locally.

Dynamic PBR is not supported in IPv6

Tenant configuration is not supported on management interfaces

Support for up to:

64 tenants

64 uplinks

2 uplinks per tenant

5 service networks

10 subnets per tenant
Example Configuration
Following is a configuration example for a three tenants setup, two of which are
supported by a local service network:
1. Set up Tenant 1 with endpoints on interfaces 5 and 6
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 5
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant tenant­id 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 6
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant tenant­id 1
2. Set up Tenant 2 with an endpoint on interface 7
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 7
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant tenant­id 2
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 23: Policy-Based Routing
347
3. Set interface 8 as a common uplink for Tenants 1 and 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 8
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant uplink tenant­id 1,2
4. Set up Tenant 3 with endpoints on interfaces 9 and 10 and uplinks on interfaces 11
and 12
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 9
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant tenant­id 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant tenant­id 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 11
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant uplink tenant­id 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 12
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant uplink tenant­id 3
5. Set interface 13 as a link to a service network available to Tenants 1 and 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# interface ip 13
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# tenant services tenant­id 1,3
348
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 24. Routed Ports
By default, all ports on the RackSwitch G8272 behave as switch ports, which are
capable of performing Layer 2 switch functions, such as VLANs, STP, or bridging.
Switch ports also provide a physical point of access for the switch IP interfaces,
which can perform global Layer 3 functions, such as routing for BGP or OSPF.
However, G8272 ports can also be configured as routed ports. Routed ports are
configured with their own IP address belonging to a unique Layer 3 network, and
behave similar to a port on a conventional router. Routed ports are typically used
for connecting to a server or to a router.
When a switch port is configured as a routed port, it forwards Layer 3 traffic and
no longer performs Layer 2 switching functions.
Overview
A routed port has the following characteristics:

Does not participate in bridging.

Does not belong to any user-configurable VLAN.

Does not implement any Layer 2 functionality, such as Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP).

Is always in a forwarding state.

Can participate in IPv4 routing.

Can be configured with basic IP protocols, such as Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP), and with Layer 3 protocols, such as Protocol-Independent
Multicast (PIM), Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF), and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).

Can be configured with Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) querier
and snooping functionality.

Layer 3 configuration is saved even when the interface is shutdown.

MAC address learning is always enabled.

Tagging and port VLAN ID (PVID) tagging is disabled.

Flooding is disabled.

Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU)-guard is disabled.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is disabled.

Multicast threshold is disabled.

Static Multicast MAC and static unicast MAC can be configured.
Note: Ports on which LACP or portchannel is enabled cannot be changed to
routed ports.
Note: Ports that have Static MAC addresses configured cannot be changed to
routed ports.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
349
When a switch port is configured as a routed port, the following configuration
changes are automatically implemented:

The port is removed from all the VLANs it belonged to.

The port is added to an internal VLAN on which flooding is disabled. The ID of
this internal VLAN could be 4094 or lower. The internal VLAN is assigned to
Spanning Tree Group (STG) 1, if RSTP/PVRST is configured; or to Common
Internal Spanning Tree (CIST), if MSTP is configured. You cannot change the
VLAN number assigned to the routed port.

STP is disabled and the port is set to a forwarding state.
Note: The maximum number of VLANs you can configure on the RackSwitch
G8272 is 4095. This maximum number will be reduced by the number of
routed ports you configure.

All the Layer 2 configuration is lost.
When a routed port is changed back to a switch port, the following changes take
place:

All the IP configuration is lost.

The ARP entry corresponding to the IP address is lost.

The switch port is added to the default VLAN and STG. In case of MSTP, it is
added to the CIST.

STP is turned on.

The switch port can participate in STG and VLAN flooding.

Can participate in bridging.

LACP port attributes are set to default.

Multicast threshold remains disabled.

BPDU guard remains disabled.

IGMP configuration is lost.
Note: When you configure a routed port to back to a switch port, it does not
restore the Layer 2 configuration it had before it was changed to a routed port.
350
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuring a Routed Port
Note: You cannot configure a management port to be a routed port.
Following are the basic steps for configuring a routed port:
1. Enter the interface configuration mode for the port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port number>
Note: You must enter only one port number. If you need to change multiple
ports to routed ports, repeat the configuration steps for each port.
2. Enable routing.
RS 8272(config­if)# no switchport
3. Assign an IP address.
RS 8272(config­if)# ip address <IP address> <Subnet Mask> enable
4. (Optional) Enable a Layer 3 routing protocol.
RS 8272(config­if)# ip {<ospf>|<pim>|<rip>}
Note: Configure the Layer 3 routing protocol-related parameters in the interface
configuration mode.
Configuring OSPF on Routed Ports
The following OSPF configuration commands are supported on routed ports:
RS 8272(config­if)# ip ospf ?
area Set area index
cost Set interface cost
dead­interval Set dead interval in seconds or milliseconds
enable Enable OSPF for this interface
hello­interval Set hello interval in seconds or milliseconds
key Set authentication key
message­digest­key Set MD5 key ID
passive­interface Enable passive interface
point­to­point Enable point­to­point interface
priority Set interface router priority
retransmit­interval Set retransmit interval in seconds
transit­delay Set transit delay in seconds
See Chapter 31, “OSPF for details on the OSPF protocol and its configuration.
OSPFv3 cannot be configured on routed ports.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 24: Routed Ports
351
OSPF Configuration Example
The following example includes the basic steps for configuring OSPF on a routed
port:
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
RS 8272(config-router-ospf)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# no switchport
wait...
RS 8272(config­if)# ip address 11.1.12.1 255.255.255.0 enable
wait...
RS 8272(config­if)# ip ospf area 0
RS 8272(config­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Configuring RIP on Routed Ports
The following RIP configuration commands are supported on routed ports:
RS 8272(config­if)# ip rip ?
authentication Set IP authentication
default­action Set default route action
enable Enable RIP interface
listen Enable listening to route updates
metric Set metric
multicast­updates Enable multicast updates
poison Enable poisoned reverse
split­horizon Enable split horizon
supply Enable supplying route updates
triggered Enable triggered updates
version RIP version
See Chapter 27, “Routing Information Protocol for details on the RIP protocol and
its configuration.
RIP Configuration Example
The following example includes steps for a basic RIP configuration on a routed
port:
RS 8272(config)# router rip
RS 8272(config­router­rip)# enable
RS 8272(config-router-rip)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# no switchport
wait...
RS 8272(config­if)# ip address 11.1.12.1 255.255.255.0 enable
wait...
RS 8272(config­if)# ip rip enable
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
352
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuring PIM on Routed Ports
The following PIM configuration commands are supported on routed ports:
RS 8272(config­if)# ip pim ?
border­bit Set interface as border interface
cbsr­preference Set preference for local interface as a candidate bootstrap router
component­id Add interface to the component
dr­priority Set designated router priority for the router interface
enable Enable PIM on this interface
hello­holdtime Set hello message holdtime for the interface
hello­interval Set the frequency of PIM hello messages on the interface
join­prune­interval Set frequency of PIM Join or Prune interval
lan­delay Set lan delay for the router interface
lan­prune­delay Enable lan delay advertisement on interface
neighbor­addr Neighbor address
neighbor­filter Enable neighbor filter
override­interval Set override interval for router interface
See Chapter 33, “Protocol Independent Multicast for details on the PIM protocol
and its configuration.
PIM Configuration Example
The following example includes the basic steps for configuring PIM on a routed
port:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim enable
RS 8272(config)# interface port 26
RS 8272(config­if)# no switchport
wait...
RS 8272(config­if)# ip address 26.26.26.1 255.255.255.0 enable
wait...
RS 8272(config­if)# ip pim enable
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component 1
RS 8272(config-ip-pim-component)# rp­candidate rp­address 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 33.33.33.1
RS 8272(config-ip-pim-component)# rp­candidate holdtime 200
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­component)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 26
RS 8272(config­if)# ip pim cbsr­preference 200
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
Verify the configuration using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# show ip pim interface port 26
Address IfName/IfId Ver/Mode Nbr Qry DR­Address DR­Prio
Count Interval
­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­
26.26.26.1 Rport 26 2/Sparse 0 30 26.26.26.1 1 © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 24: Routed Ports
353
Configuring BGP on Routed Ports
The routed port can be used to establish a TCP connection to form peer
relationship with another BGP router. See Chapter 30, “Border Gateway Protocol
for details on the BGP protocol and its configuration.
The following BGP configurations are not supported on routed ports:

Update source - configuring a local IP interface
Configuring IGMP on Routed Ports
IGMP querier and snooping can be configured on routed ports. For details, see
Chapter 28, “Internet Group Management Protocol.
To configure IGMP snooping on a routed port, enter the following command in the
Global Configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop port <routed port ID>
To configure fastleave on routed ports, enter the following command in the Global
Configuration mode:
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp fastleave port <routed port ID>
The following IGMP querier commands are supported on routed ports:
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp querier port <routed port ID> ?
election­type Set IGMP querier type
enable Turn IGMP Querier on
max­response Set Queriers max response time
query­interval Set general query interval for IGMP Querier only
robustness Set IGMP robustness
source­ip Set source IP to be used for IGMP
startup­count Set startupcount for IGMP
startup­interval Set startup query interval for IGMP
version Sets the operating version of the IGMP snooping switch
354
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Limitations
Following features/configurations are not supported on routed ports:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Subinterfaces

BPDU Guard

Broadcast Threshold

Multicast Threshold

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Static Trunking

Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)

Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE)

IPv6

IP Security (IPsec)

Internet Key Exchange version 2 (IKEv2)

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)

Policy-based Routing (PBR)

Hotlinks

Failover

802.1X

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

BOOTP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

IGMP Relay

Static Multicast Routes

Static Mrouter Port

Management Port
Chapter 24: Routed Ports
355
356
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 25. Internet Protocol Version 6
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) is a network layer protocol intended to expand
the network address space. IPv6 is a robust and expandable protocol that meets the
need for increased physical address space. The switch supports the following RFCs
for IPv6-related features:










RFC 1981
RFC 2404
RFC 2410
RFC 2451
RFC 2460
RFC 2474
RFC 2526
RFC 2711
RFC 2740
RFC 3289










RFC 3306
RFC 3307
RFC 3411
RFC 3412
RFC 3413
RFC 3414
RFC 3484
RFC 3602
RFC 3810
RFC 3879










RFC 4007
RFC 4213
RFC 4291
RFC 4292
RFC 4293
RFC 4301
RFC 4302
RFC 4303
RFC 4306
RFC 4307









RFC 4443
RFC 4552
RFC 4718
RFC 4835
RFC 4861
RFC 4862
RFC 5095
RFC 5114
RFC 5340
This chapter describes the basic configuration of IPv6 addresses and how to
manage the switch via IPv6 host management.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
357
IPv6 Limitations
The following IPv6 features are not supported in this release.
Dynamic Host Control Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6)
Border Gateway Protocol for IPv6 (BGP)
 Routing Information Protocol for IPv6 (RIPng)


Most other Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 features permit IP addresses to be
configured using either IPv4 or IPv6 address formats. However, the following
switch features support IPv4 only:








358
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) and DHCP
RADIUS, TACACS+ and LDAP
VMware Virtual Center (vCenter) for VMready
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
sFlow
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
IPv6 Address Format
The IPv6 address is 128 bits (16 bytes) long and is represented as a sequence of
eight 16-bit hex values, separated by colons.
Each IPv6 address has two parts:

Subnet prefix representing the network to which the interface is connected

Local identifier, either derived from the MAC address or user-configured
The preferred hexadecimal format is as follows:
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
Example IPv6 address:
FEDC:BA98:7654:BA98:FEDC:1234:ABCD:5412
Some addresses can contain long sequences of zeros. A single contiguous sequence
of zeros can be compressed to :: (two colons). For example, consider the following
IPv6 address:
FE80:0:0:0:2AA:FF:FA:4CA2 The address can be compressed as follows:
FE80::2AA:FF:FA:4CA2 Unlike IPv4, a subnet mask is not used for IPv6 addresses. IPv6 uses the subnet
prefix as the network identifier. The prefix is the part of the address that indicates
the bits that have fixed values or are the bits of the subnet prefix. An IPv6 prefix is
written in address/prefix-length notation. For example, in the following address,
64 is the network prefix:
21DA:D300:0000:2F3C::/64 IPv6 addresses can be either user-configured or automatically configured.
Automatically configured addresses always have a 64-bit subnet prefix and a 64-bit
interface identifier. In most implementations, the interface identifier is derived
from the switch's MAC address, using a method called EUI-64.
Most Lenovo N/OS 8.2 features permit IP addresses to be configured using either
IPv4 or IPv6 address formats. Throughout this manual, IP address is used in places
where either an IPv4 or IPv6 address is allowed. In places where only one type of
address is allowed, the type (IPv4 or IPv6) is specified.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 25: Internet Protocol Version 6
359
IPv6 Address Types
IPv6 supports three types of addresses: unicast (one-to-one), multicast
(one-to-many), and anycast (one-to-nearest). Multicast addresses replace the use of
broadcast addresses.
Unicast Address
Unicast is a communication between a single host and a single receiver. Packets
sent to a unicast address are delivered to the interface identified by that address.
IPv6 defines the following types of unicast address:

Global Unicast address: An address that can be reached and identified globally.
Global Unicast addresses use the high-order bit range up to FF00, therefore all
non-multicast and non-link-local addresses are considered to be global unicast.
A manually configured IPv6 address must be fully specified. Autoconfigured
IPv6 addresses are comprised of a prefix combined with the 64-bit EUI. RFC
4291 defines the IPv6 addressing architecture.
The interface ID must be unique within the same subnet.

Link-local unicast address: An address used to communicate with a neighbor on
the same link. Link-local addresses use the format FE80::EUI
Link-local addresses are designed to be used for addressing on a single link for
purposes such as automatic address configuration, neighbor discovery, or when
no routers are present.
Routers must not forward any packets with link-local source or destination
addresses to other links.
Multicast
Multicast is communication between a single host and multiple receivers. Packets
are sent to all interfaces identified by that address. An interface may belong to any
number of multicast groups.
A multicast address (FF00 - FFFF) is an identifier for a group interface. The
multicast address most often encountered is a solicited-node multicast address
using prefix FF02::1:FF00:0000/104 with the low-order 24 bits of the unicast
or anycast address.
The following well-known multicast addresses are pre-defined. The group IDs
defined in this section are defined for explicit scope values, as follows:
FF00:::::::0 through FF0F:::::::0 Anycast
Packets sent to an anycast address or list of addresses are delivered to the nearest
interface identified by that address. Anycast is a communication between a single
sender and a list of addresses.
Anycast addresses are allocated from the unicast address space, using any of the
defined unicast address formats. Thus, anycast addresses are syntactically
indistinguishable from unicast addresses. When a unicast address is assigned to
360
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
more than one interface, thus turning it into an anycast address, the nodes to which
the address is assigned must be explicitly configured to know that it is an anycast
address.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 25: Internet Protocol Version 6
361
IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration
IPv6 supports the following types of address autoconfiguration:

Stateful address configuration
Address configuration is based on the use of a stateful address configuration
protocol, such as DHCPv6, to obtain addresses and other configuration options.

Stateless address configuration
Address configuration is based on the receipt of Router Advertisement
messages that contain one or more Prefix Information options.
N/OS 8.2 supports stateless address configuration.
Stateless address configuration allows hosts on a link to configure themselves with
link-local addresses and with addresses derived from prefixes advertised by local
routers. Even if no router is present, hosts on the same link can configure
themselves with link-local addresses and communicate without manual
configuration.
362
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
IPv6 Interfaces
Each IPv6 interface supports multiple IPv6 addresses. You can manually configure
up to two IPv6 addresses for each interface, or you can allow the switch to use
stateless autoconfiguration.
You can manually configure two IPv6 addresses for each interface, as follows:

Initial IPv6 address is a global unicast or anycast address.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 address <IPv6 address>
Note that you cannot configure both addresses as anycast. If you configure an
anycast address on the interface you must also configure a global unicast
address on that interface.

Second IPv6 address can be a unicast or anycast address.
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 secaddr6 <IPv6 address>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
You cannot configure an IPv4 address on an IPv6 management interface. Each
interface can be configured with only one address type: either IPv4 or IPv6, but not
both. When changing between IPv4 and IPv6 address formats, the prior address
settings for the interface are discarded.
Each IPv6 interface can belong to only one VLAN. Each VLAN can support only
one IPv6 interface. Each VLAN can support multiple IPv4 interfaces.
Use the following commands to configure the IPv6 gateway:
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 1 address <IPv6 address>
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 1 enable
IPv6 gateway 1 is reserved for IPv6 data interfaces. IPv6 gateway 4 is the default
IPv6 management gateway.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 25: Internet Protocol Version 6
363
Neighbor Discovery
Neighbor Discovery Overview
The switch uses Neighbor Discovery protocol (ND) to gather information about
other router and host nodes, including the IPv6 addresses. Host nodes use ND to
configure their interfaces and perform health detection. ND allows each node to
determine the link-layer addresses of neighboring nodes, and to keep track of each
neighbor’s information. A neighboring node is a host or a router that is linked
directly to the switch. The switch supports Neighbor Discovery as described in
RFC 4861.
Neighbor Discover messages allow network nodes to exchange information, as
follows:

Neighbor Solicitations allow a node to discover information about other nodes.

Neighbor Advertisements are sent in response to Neighbor Solicitations. The
Neighbor Advertisement contains information required by nodes to determine
the link-layer address of the sender, and the sender’s role on the network.

IPv6 hosts use Router Solicitations to discover IPv6 routers. When a router
receives a Router Solicitation, it responds immediately to the host.

Routers uses Router Advertisements to announce its presence on the network, and
to provide its address prefix to neighbor devices. IPv6 hosts listen for Router
Advertisements, and uses the information to build a list of default routers. Each
host uses this information to perform autoconfiguration of IPv6 addresses.

Redirect messages are sent by IPv6 routers to inform hosts of a better first-hop
address for a specific destination. Redirect messages are only sent by routers for
unicast traffic, are only unicast to originating hosts, and are only processed by
hosts.
ND configuration for general advertisements, flags, and interval settings, as well as
for defining prefix profiles for router advertisements, is performed on a
per-interface basis using the following command path:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# [no] ipv6 nd ?
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
To add or remove entries in the static neighbor cache, use the following command
path:
RS 8272(config)# [no] ip neighbors ?
364
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Host vs. Router
Each IPv6 interface can be configured as a router node or a host node, as follows:

A router node’s IP address is configured manually. Router nodes can send
Router Advertisements.

A host node’s IP address is autoconfigured. Host nodes listen for Router
Advertisements that convey information about devices on the network.
Note: When IP forwarding is turned on, all IPv6 interfaces configured on the
switch can forward packets.
You can configure each IPv6 interface as either a host node or a router node. You
can manually assign an IPv6 address to an interface in host mode, or the interface
can be assigned an IPv6 address by an upstream router, using information from
router advertisements to perform stateless auto-configuration.
To set an interface to host mode, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip6host
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
The G8272 supports up to 1156 IPv6 routes.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 25: Internet Protocol Version 6
365
Supported Applications
The following applications have been enhanced to provide IPv6 support.

Ping
The ping command supports IPv6 addresses. Use the following format to ping
an IPv6 address:
ping <host name>|<IPv6 address> [<tries (0-4294967295)>] [data­port] [mgmt­port]

Traceroute
The traceroute command supports IPv6 addresses (but not link-local
addresses).
Use the following format to perform a traceroute to an IPv6 address:
traceroute <host name>| <IPv6 address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [<msec delay (1-4294967295)>]]

Telnet server
The telnet command supports IPv6 addresses (but not link-local addresses).
Use the following format to Telnet into an IPv6 interface on the switch:
telnet <host name>| <IPv6 address> [<port>]

Telnet client
The telnet command supports IPv6 addresses (but not link-local addresses).
Use the following format to Telnet to an IPv6 address:
telnet <host name>| <IPv6 address> [<port>]

HTTP/HTTPS
The HTTP/HTTPS servers support both IPv4 and IPv6 connections.

SSH
Secure Shell (SSH) connections over IPv6 are supported (but not link-local
addresses). The following syntax is required from the client:
ssh ­u <IPv6 address>
Example:
ssh ­u 2001:2:3:4:0:0:0:142

TFTP
The TFTP commands support both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Link-local
addresses are not supported.

FTP
The FTP commands support both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Link-local addresses
are not supported.
366
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

DNS client
DNS commands support both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Link-local addresses are
not supported. Use the following command to specify the type of DNS query to
be sent first:
RS 8272(config)# ip dns ipv6 request­version {ipv4|ipv6}
If you set the request version to ipv4, the DNS application sends an A query
first, to resolve the hostname with an IPv4 address. If no A record is found for
that hostname (no IPv4 address for that hostname) an AAAA query is sent to
resolve the hostname with a IPv6 address.
If you set the request version to ipv6, the DNS application sends an AAAA query
first, to resolve the hostname with an IPv6 address. If no AAAA record is found
for that hostname (no IPv6 address for that hostname) an A query is sent to
resolve the hostname with an IPv4 address.
Configuration Guidelines
When you configure an interface for IPv6, consider the following guidelines:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Support for subnet router anycast addresses is not available.

A single interface can accept either IPv4 or IPv6 addresses, but not both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses.

A single interface can accept multiple IPv6 addresses.

A single interface can accept only one IPv4 address.

If you change the IPv6 address of a configured interface to an IPv4 address, all
IPv6 settings are deleted.

A single VLAN can support only one IPv6 interface.

Health checks are not supported for IPv6 gateways.

IPv6 interfaces support Path MTU Discovery. The CPU’s MTU is fixed at 1500
bytes.

Support for jumbo frames (1,500 to 9,216 byte MTUs) is limited. Any jumbo
frames intended for the CPU must be fragmented by the remote node. The
switch can re-assemble fragmented packets up to 9k. It can also fragment and
transmit jumbo packets received from higher layers.
Chapter 25: Internet Protocol Version 6
367
IPv6 Configuration Examples
This section provides steps to configure IPv6 on the switch.
IPv6 Example 1
The following example uses IPv6 host mode to autoconfigure an IPv6 address for
the interface. By default, the interface is assigned to VLAN 1.
1. Enable IPv6 host mode on an interface.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip6host
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure the IPv6 default gateway.
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 1 address 2001:BA98:7654:BA98:FEDC:1234:ABCD:5412
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 1 enable
3. Verify the interface address.
RS 8272(config)# show interface ip 2
IPv6 Example 2
Use the following example to manually configure IPv6 on an interface.
1. Assign an IPv6 address and prefix length to the interface.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 address 2001:BA98:7654:BA98:FEDC:1234:ABCD:5214
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 prefixlen 64
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 seccaddr6 2003::1 32
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
The secondary IPv6 address is compressed, and the prefix length is 32.
2. Configure the IPv6 default gateway.
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 1 address 2001:BA98:7654:BA98:FEDC:1234:ABCD:5412
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway6 1 enable
3. Configure router advertisements for the interface (optional)
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# no ipv6 nd suppress­ra
368
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. Verify the configuration.
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# show layer3
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 25: Internet Protocol Version 6
369
370
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 26. IPsec with IPv6
Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) is a protocol suite for securing Internet Protocol
(IP) communications by authenticating and encrypting each IP packet of a
communication session. IPsec also includes protocols for establishing mutual
authentication between agents at the beginning of the session and negotiation of
cryptographic keys to be used during the session.
Since IPsec was implemented in conjunction with IPv6, all implementations of
IPv6 must contain IPsec. To support the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) recommendations for IPv6 implementations, Lenovo
Networking OS IPv6 feature compliance has been extended to include the
following IETF RFCs, with an emphasis on IP Security (IPsec) and Internet Key
Exchange version 2, and authentication/confidentiality for OSPFv3:

RFC 4301 for IPv6 security

RFC 4302 for the IPv6 Authentication Header

RFCs 2404, 2410, 2451, 3602, and 4303 for IPv6 Encapsulating Security Payload
(ESP), including NULL encryption, CBC-mode 3DES and AES ciphers, and
HMAC-SHA-1-96.

RFCs 4306, 4307, 4718, and 4835 for IKEv2 and cryptography

RFC 4552 for OSPFv3 IPv6 authentication/confidentiality

RFC 5114 for Diffie-Hellman groups
Note: This implementation of IPsec supports DH groups 1, 2, 5, 14, and 24.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“IPsec Protocols” on page 372

“Using IPsec with the RackSwitch G8272” on page 373
Chapter 26: IPsec with IPv6
371
IPsec Protocols
The Lenovo N/OS implementation of IPsec supports the following protocols:

Authentication Header (AH)
AHs provide connectionless integrity outand data origin authentication for IP
packets, and provide protection against replay attacks. In IPv6, the AH protects
the AH itself, the Destination Options extension header after the AH, and the IP
payload. It also protects the fixed IPv6 header and all extension headers before
the AH, except for the mutable fields DSCP, ECN, Flow Label, and Hop Limit.
AH is defined in RFC 4302.

Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP)
ESPs provide confidentiality, data origin authentication, integrity, an anti-replay
service (a form of partial sequence integrity), and some traffic flow
confidentiality. ESPs may be applied alone or in combination with an AH. ESP is
defined in RFC 4303.

Internet Key Exchange Version 2 (IKEv2)
IKEv2 is used for mutual authentication between two network elements. An IKE
establishes a security association (SA) that includes shared secret information to
efficiently establish SAs for ESPs and AHs, and a set of cryptographic
algorithms to be used by the SAs to protect the associated traffic. IKEv2 is
defined in RFC 4306.
Using IKEv2 as the foundation, IPsec supports ESP for encryption and/or
authentication, and/or AH for authentication of the remote partner.
Both ESP and AH rely on security associations. A security association (SA) is the
bundle of algorithms and parameters (such as keys) that encrypt and authenticate
a particular flow in one direction.
372
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using IPsec with the RackSwitch G8272
IPsec supports the fragmentation and reassembly of IP packets that occurs when
data goes to and comes from an external device. The RackSwitch G8272 acts as an
end node that processes any fragmentation and reassembly of packets but does not
forward the IPsec traffic. The IKEv2 key must be authenticated before you can use
IPsec.
The security protocol for the session key is either ESP or AH. Outgoing packets are
labeled with the SA SPI (Security Parameter Index), which the remote device will
use in its verification and decryption process.
Every outgoing IPv6 packet is checked against the IPsec policies in force. For each
outbound packet, after the packet is encrypted, the software compares the packet
size with the MTU size that it either obtains from the default minimum maximum
transmission unit (MTU) size (1500) or from path MTU discovery. If the packet size
is larger than the MTU size, the receiver drops the packet and sends a message
containing the MTU size to the sender. The sender then fragments the packet into
smaller pieces and retransmits them using the correct MTU size.
The maximum traffic load for each IPsec packet is limited to the following:

IKEv2 SAs: 5

IPsec SAs: 10 (5 SAs in each direction)

SPDs: 20 (10 policies in each direction)
IPsec is implemented as a software cryptography engine designed for handling
control traffic, such as network management. IPsec is not designed for handling
data traffic, such as a VPN.
Setting up Authentication
Before you can use IPsec, you need to have key policy authentication in place.
There are two types of key policy authentication:

Preshared key (default)
The parties agree on a shared, secret key that is used for authentication in an
IPsec policy. During security negotiation, information is encrypted before
transmission by using a session key created by using a Diffie-Hellman
calculation and the shared, secret key. Information is decrypted on the receiving
end using the same key. One IPsec peer authenticates the other peer's packet by
decryption and verification of the hash inside the packet (the hash inside the
packet is a hash of the preshared key). If authentication fails, the packet is
discarded.

Digital certificate (using RSA algorithms)
The peer being validated must hold a digital certificate signed by a trusted
Certificate Authority and the private key for that digital certificate. The side
performing the authentication only needs a copy of the trusted certificate
authorities digital certificate. During IKEv2 authentication, the side being
validated sends a copy of the digital certificate and a hash value signed using the
private key. The certificate can be either generated or imported.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 26: IPsec with IPv6
373
Note: During the IKEv2 negotiation phase, the digital certificate takes precedence
over the preshared key.
Creating an IKEv2 Proposal
With IKEv2, a single policy can have multiple encryption and authentication types,
as well as multiple integrity algorithms.
To create an IKEv2 proposal:
1. Enter IKEv2 proposal mode.
RS 8272(config)# ikev2 proposal
2. Set the DES encryption algorithm.
RS 8272(config-ikev2-prop)# encryption 3des|aes­cbc (default: 3des)
3. Set the authentication integrity algorithm type.
RS 8272(config­ikev2­prop)# integrity sha1 (default: sha1)
4. Set the Diffie-Hellman group.
RS 8272(config-ikev2-prop)# group 24 (default: 24)
Importing an IKEv2 Digital Certificate
To import an IKEv2 digital certificate for authentication:
1. Import the CA certificate file.
2. Import the host key file.
3. Import the host certificate file.
Note: When prompted for the port to use for download the file, if you used a
management port to connect the switch to the server, enter mgt, otherwise enter
data.
374
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Generating an IKEv2 Digital Certificate
To create an IKEv2 digital certificate for authentication:
1. Create an HTTPS certificate defining the information you want to be used in the
various fields.
Country Name (2 letter code) [US]: <country code>
State or Province Name (full name) [CA]: <state>
Locality Name (eg, city) [Santa Clara]: <city>
Organization Name (eg, company) [Lenovo]: <company>
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) [Engineering]: <org. unit>
Common Name (eg, YOUR name) []: <your current IP address>
Email (eg, email address) []: <email address>
Confirm generat‘eywing certificate? [y/n]: y
Generating certificate. Please wait (approx 30 seconds)
restarting SSL agent
2. Save the HTTPS certificate.
The certificate is valid only until the switch is rebooted. To save the certificate so
that it is retained beyond reboot or power cycles, use the following command:
3. Enable IKEv2 RSA-signature authentication:
Enabling IKEv2 Preshared Key Authentication
To set up IKEv2 preshared key authentication:
1. Enter the local preshared key.
RS 8272(config)# ikev2 preshare­key local <preshared key, a string of 1-256 chars>
2. If asymmetric authentication is supported, enter the remote key:
RS 8272(config)# ikev2 preshare­key remote <preshared key> <IPv6 host>
where the following parameters are used:

preshared key
A string of 1-256 characters

IPv6 host
An IPv6-format host, such as “3000::1”
3. Set up the IKEv2 identification type by entering one of the following commands:
To disable IKEv2 RSA-signature authentication method and enable preshared key
authentication, enter:
Setting Up a Key Policy
When configuring IPsec, you must define a key policy. This key policy can be either
manual or dynamic. Either way, configuring a policy involves the following steps:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Create a transform set—This defines which encryption and authentication algorithms are used.

Create a traffic selector—This describes the packets to which the policy applies.
Chapter 26: IPsec with IPv6
375

Establish an IPsec policy.

Apply the policy.
1. To define which encryption and authentication algorithms are used, create a
transform set:
where the following parameters are used:

transform ID
A number from 1-10

encryption method
One of the following: esp­3des | esp­aes­cbc
| esp­null

integrity algorithm
One of the following: esp­sha1

AH authentication algorithm
One of the following: ah­sha1
2. Decide whether to use tunnel or transport mode. The default mode is transport.
RS 8272(config)# ipsec transform­set tunnel|transport
3. To describe the packets to which this policy applies, create a traffic selector using
the following command:
RS 8272(config)# ipsec traffic­selector <traffic selector number> permit|deny any|icmp <type|any> |tcp > <source IP address|any> <destination IP address|any> [<prefix
length>]
where the following parameters are used:

traffic selector number
an integer from 1-10

permit|deny
whether or not to permit IPsec encryption of
traffic that meets the criteria specified in this
command

any
apply the selector to any type of traffic

icmp <type>|any
only apply the selector only to ICMP traffic of the
specified type (an integer from 1-255) or to any
ICMP traffic

tcp
only apply the selector to TCP traffic

source IP address|any
the source IP address in IPv6 format or “any”
source

destination IP address|any
the destination IP address in IPv6 format or “any”
destination

prefix length
(Optional) the length of the destination IPv6
prefix; an integer from 1-128
Permitted traffic that matches the policy in force is encrypted, while denied traffic
that matches the policy in force is dropped. Traffic that does not match the policy
bypasses IPsec and passes through clear (unencrypted).
4. Choose whether to use a manual or a dynamic policy.
376
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using a Manual Key Policy
A manual policy involves configuring policy and manual SA entries for local and
remote peers.
To configure a manual key policy, you need:
The IP address of the peer in IPv6 format (for example, “3000::1”).
 Inbound/Outbound session keys for the security protocols.

You can then assign the policy to an interface. The peer represents the other end of
the security association. The security protocol for the session key can be either ESP
or AH.
To create and configure a manual policy:
1. Enter a manual policy to configure.
2. Configure the policy.
where the following parameters are used:

peer’s IPv6 address
The IPv6 address of the peer (for example,
3000::1)

IPsec traffic-selector
A number from1-10

IPsec of transform-set
A number from1-10

inbound AH IPsec key
The inbound AH key code, in hexadecimal

inbound AH IPsec SPI
A number from 256-4294967295

inbound ESP cipher key
The inbound ESP key code, in hexadecimal

inbound ESP SPI
A number from 256-4294967295

inbound ESP authenticator key The inbound ESP authenticator key code, in
hexadecimal

outbound AH IPsec key
The outbound AH key code, in hexadecimal

outbound AH IPsec SPI
A number from 256-4294967295

outbound ESP cipher key
The outbound ESP key code, in hexadecimal

outbound ESP SPI
A number from 256-4294967295
 outbound ESP authenticator key
The outbound ESP authenticator key code, in
hexadecimal
Notes:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

When configuring a manual policy ESP, the ESP authenticator key is optional.

If using third-party switches, the IPsec manual policy session key must be of
fixed length as follows:

For AH key: SHA1 is 20 bytes; MD5 is 16 bytes

For ESP cipher key: 3DES is 24 bytes; AES-cbc is 24 bytes; DES is 8 bytes

For ESP auth key: SHA1 is 20 bytes; MD5 is 16 bytes
Chapter 26: IPsec with IPv6
377
3. After you configure the IPSec policy, you need to apply it to the interface to enforce
the security policies on that interface and save it to keep it in place after a reboot. To
accomplish this, enter:
378
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using a Dynamic Key Policy
When you use a dynamic key policy, the first packet triggers IKE and sets the IPsec
SA and IKEv2 SA. The initial packet negotiation also determines the lifetime of the
algorithm, or how long it stays in effect. When the key expires, a new key is
automatically created. This helps prevent break-ins.
To configure a dynamic key policy:
1. Choose a dynamic policy to configure.
2. Configure the policy.
where the following parameters are used:

peer’s IPv6 address
The IPv6 address of the peer (for example,
3000::1)

index of traffic-selector
A number from1-10

index of transform-set
A number from1-10

SA lifetime, in seconds
The length of time the SA is to remain in effect; an
integer from120-86400

pfs enable|disable
Whether to enable or disable the perfect forward
security feature. The default is disable.
Note: In a dynamic policy, the AH and ESP keys are created by IKEv2.
3. After you configure the IPSec policy, you need to apply it to the interface to enforce
the security policies on that interface and save it to keep it in place after a reboot. To
accomplish this, enter:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 26: IPsec with IPv6
379
380
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 27. Routing Information Protocol
In a routed environment, routers communicate with one another to keep track of
available routes. Routers can learn about available routes dynamically using the
Routing Information Protocol (RIP). Lenovo Networking OS software supports
RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2) for exchanging TCP/IPv4 route
information with other routers.
Note: Lenovo N/OS 8.2 does not support IPv6 for RIP.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
381
Distance Vector Protocol
RIP is known as a distance vector protocol. The vector is the network number
and next hop, and the distance is the metric associated with the network number.
RIP identifies network reachability based on metric, and metric is defined as hop
count. One hop is considered to be the distance from one switch to the next, which
typically is 1.
When a switch receives a routing update that contains a new or changed
destination network entry, the switch adds 1 to the metric value indicated in the
update and enters the network in the routing table. The IPv4 address of the sender
is used as the next hop.
Stability
RIP includes a number of other stability features that are common to many routing
protocols. For example, RIP implements the split horizon and hold-down
mechanisms to prevent incorrect routing information from being propagated.
RIP prevents routing loops from continuing indefinitely by implementing a limit
on the number of hops allowed in a path from the source to a destination. The
maximum number of hops in a path is 15. The network destination network is
considered unreachable if increasing the metric value by 1 causes the metric to be
16 (that is infinity). This limits the maximum diameter of a RIP network to less than
16 hops.
RIP is often used in stub networks and in small autonomous systems that do not
have many redundant paths.
Routing Updates
RIP sends routing-update messages at regular intervals and when the network
topology changes. Each router “advertises” routing information by sending a
routing information update every 30 seconds. If a router doesn’t receive an update
from another router for 180 seconds, those routes provided by that router are
declared invalid. The routes are removed from the routing table, but they remain in
the RIP routes table. After another 120 seconds without receiving an update for
those routes, the routes are removed from respective regular updates.
When a router receives a routing update that includes changes to an entry, it
updates its routing table to reflect the new route. The metric value for the path is
increased by 1, and the sender is indicated as the next hop. RIP routers maintain
only the best route (the route with the lowest metric value) to a destination.
For more information, see the Configuration section, Routing Information Protocol
Configuration in the Lenovo Networking OS Command Reference.
382
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
RIPv1
RIP version 1 use broadcast User Datagram Protocol (UDP) data packets for the
regular routing updates. The main disadvantage is that the routing updates do not
carry subnet mask information. Hence, the router cannot determine whether the
route is a subnet route or a host route. It is of limited usage after the introduction of
RIPv2. For more information about RIPv1 and RIPv2, refer to RFC 1058 and RFC
2453.
RIPv2
RIPv2 is the most popular and preferred configuration for most networks. RIPv2
expands the amount of useful information carried in RIP messages and provides a
measure of security. For a detailed explanation of RIPv2, refer to RFC 1723 and
RFC 2453.
RIPv2 improves efficiency by using multicast UDP (address 224.0.0.9) data packets
for regular routing updates. Subnet mask information is provided in the routing
updates. A security option is added for authenticating routing updates, by using a
shared password. N/OS supports using clear password for RIPv2.
RIPv2 in RIPv1 Compatibility Mode
N/OS allows you to configure RIPv2 in RIPv1compatibility mode, for using both
RIPv2 and RIPv1 routers within a network. In this mode, the regular routing
updates use broadcast UDP data packet to allow RIPv1 routers to receive those
packets. With RIPv1 routers as recipients, the routing updates have to carry natural
or host mask. Hence, it is not a recommended configuration for most network
topologies.
Note: When using both RIPv1 and RIPv2 within a network, use a single subnet
mask throughout the network.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 27: Routing Information Protocol
383
RIP Features
N/OS provides the following features to support RIPv1 and RIPv2:
Poison
Simple split horizon in RIP scheme omits routes learned from one neighbor in
updates sent to that neighbor. That is the most common configuration used in RIP,
that is setting this Poison to DISABLE. Split horizon with poisoned reverse
includes such routes in updates, but sets their metrics to 16. The disadvantage of
using this feature is the increase of size in the routing updates.
Triggered Updates
Triggered updates are an attempt to speed up convergence. When Triggered
Updates is enabled, whenever a router changes the metric for a route, it sends
update messages almost immediately, without waiting for the regular update
interval. It is recommended to enable Triggered Updates.
Multicast
RIPv2 messages use IPv4 multicast address (224.0.0.9) for periodic broadcasts.
Multicast RIPv2 announcements are not processed by RIPv1 routers. IGMP is not
needed since these are inter-router messages which are not forwarded.
To configure RIPv2 in RIPv1 compatibility mode, set multicast to disable, and set
version to both.
Default
The RIP router can listen and supply a default route, usually represented as IPv4
0.0.0.0 in the routing table. When a router does not have an explicit route to a
destination network in its routing table, it uses the default route to forward those
packets.
Metric
The metric field contains a configurable value between 1 and 15 (inclusive) which
specifies the current metric for the interface. The metric value typically indicates
the total number of hops to the destination. The metric value of 16 represents an
unreachable destination.
Authentication
RIPv2 authentication uses plaintext password for authentication. If configured
using Authentication password, then it is necessary to enter an authentication key
value.
The following method is used to authenticate an RIP message:
384

If the router is not configured to authenticate RIPv2 messages, then RIPv1 and
unauthenticated RIPv2 messages are accepted; authenticated RIPv2 messages
are discarded.

If the router is configured to authenticate RIPv2 messages, then RIPv1 messages
and RIPv2 messages which pass authentication testing are accepted;
unauthenticated and failed authentication RIPv2 messages are discarded.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
For maximum security, RIPv1 messages are ignored when authentication is
enabled; otherwise, the routing information from authenticated messages is
propagated by RIPv1 routers in an unauthenticated manner.
RIP Configuration Example
The following is an example of RIP configuration.
Note: An interface RIP disabled uses all the default values of the RIP, no matter
how the RIP parameters are configured for that interface. RIP sends out RIP
regular updates to include an UP interface, but not a DOWN interface.
1. Add VLANs for routing interfaces.
>> (config)# vlan 2
>> (config­vlan)# exit
>> (config)# interface port 2
>> (config­if)# switchport mode trunk
>> (config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
>> (config­if)# exit
Port 2 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 2 [y/n]: y
>> (config)# vlan 3
>> (config­vlan)# exit
>> (config)# interface port 3
>> (config­if)# switchport mode trunk
>> (config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
>> (config­if)# exit
Port 3 is an UNTAGGED port and its current PVID is 1.
Confirm changing PVID from 1 to 3 [y/n]: y
2. Add IP interfaces with IPv4 addresses to VLANs.
>> # interface ip 2
>> (config­ip­if)# enable
>> (config­ip­if)# ip address 102.1.1.1
>> (config­ip­if)# vlan 2
>> (config­ip­if)# exit
>> # interface ip 3
>> (config­ip­if)# enable
>> (config­ip­if)# ip address 103.1.1.1
>> (config­ip­if)# vlan 3
3. Turn on RIP globally and enable RIP for each interface.
>> # router rip
>> (config­router­rip)# enable
>> (config­router­rip)# exit
>> # interface ip 2
>> (config­ip­if)# ip rip enable
>> (config­ip­if)# exit
>> # interface ip 3
>> (config­ip­if)# ip rip enable
>> (config­ip­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 27: Routing Information Protocol
385
Use the following command to check the current valid routes in the routing table of
the switch:
>> # show ip route
For those RIP routes learned within the garbage collection period, that are routes
phasing out of the routing table with metric 16, use the following command:
>> # show ip rip routes
Locally configured static routes do not appear in the RIP Routes table.
386
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 28. Internet Group Management Protocol
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used by IPv4 Multicast routers
(Mrouters) to learn about the existence of host group members on their directly
attached subnet. The IPv4 Mrouters get this information by broadcasting IGMP
Membership Queries and listening for IPv4 hosts reporting their host group
memberships. This process is used to set up a client/server relationship between an
IPv4 multicast source that provides the data streams and the clients that want to
receive the data. The switch supports three versions of IGMP:

IGMPv1: Defines the method for hosts to join a multicast group. However, this
version does not define the method for hosts to leave a multicast group. See RFC
1112 for details.

IGMPv2: Adds the ability for a host to signal its desire to leave a multicast
group. See RFC 2236 for details.

IGMPv3: Adds support for source filtering by which a host can report interest in
receiving packets only from specific source addresses, or from all but specific
source addresses, sent to a particular multicast address. See RFC 3376 for details.
The G8272 can perform IGMP Snooping, and connect to static Mrouters.The G8272
can act as a Querier, and participate in the IGMP Querier election process.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“IGMP Terms” on page 388

“How IGMP Works” on page 389

“IGMP Capacity and Default Values” on page 390

“IGMP Snooping” on page 391

“IGMP Relay” on page 404

“Additional IGMP Features” on page 413
387
IGMP Terms
The following are commonly used IGMP terms:
388

Multicast traffic: Flow of data from one source to multiple destinations.

Group: A multicast stream to which a host can join. Multicast groups have IP
addresses in the range: 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.

IGMP Querier: A router or switch in the subnet that generates Membership
Queries.

IGMP Snooper: A Layer 3 device that forwards multicast traffic only to hosts
that are interested in receiving multicast data. This device can be a router or a
Layer 3 switch.

Multicast Router: A router configured to make routing decisions for multicast
traffic. The router identifies the type of packet received (unicast or multicast)
and forwards the packet to the intended destination.

IGMP Proxy: A device that filters Join messages and Leave messages sent
upstream to the Mrouter to reduce the load on the Mrouter.

Membership Report: A report sent by the host that indicates an interest in
receiving multicast traffic from a multicast group.

Leave: A message sent by the host when it wants to leave a multicast group.

FastLeave: A process by which the switch stops forwarding multicast traffic to a
port as soon as it receives a Leave message.

Membership Query: Message sent by the Querier to verify if hosts are listening
to a group.

General Query: A Membership Query sent to all hosts. The Group address field
for general queries is 0.0.0.0 and the destination address is 224.0.0.1.

Group-specific Query: A Membership Query sent to all hosts in a multicast group.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
How IGMP Works
When IGMP is not configured, switches forward multicast traffic through all ports,
increasing network load. When IGMPv2 is configured on a switch, multicast traffic
flows as follows:

A server sends multicast traffic to a multicast group.

The Mrouter sends Membership Queries to the switch, which forwards them to all
ports in a given VLAN.

Hosts respond with Membership Reports if they want to join a group. The switch
forwards these reports to the Mrouter.

The switch forwards multicast traffic only to hosts that have joined a group.

The Mrouter periodically sends Membership Queries to ensure that a host wants
to continue receiving multicast traffic. If a host does not respond, the IGMP
Snooper stops sending traffic to the host.

The host can initiate the Leave process by sending an IGMP Leave packet to the
IGMP Snooper.

When a host sends an IGMPv2 Leave packet, the IGMP Snooper queries to find
out if any other host connected to the port is interested in receiving the multicast
traffic. If it does not receive a Join message in response, the IGMP Snooper
removes the group entry and passes on the information to the Mrouter.
The G8272 supports the following:
IGMP version 1, 2, and 3
 128 static Mrouters and 128 dynamic Mrouters

Note: Unknown multicast traffic is sent to all ports if the flood option is enabled
and no Membership Report was learned for that specific IGMP group. If the flood
option is disabled, unknown multicast traffic is discarded if no hosts or Mrouters
are learned on a switch.
To enable or disable IGMP flood, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <vlan ID>
RS 8272(config-vlan)# [no] flood
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
389
IGMP Capacity and Default Values
The following table lists the maximum and minimum values of the G8272
variables.
Table 37. G8272 Capacity Table
Variable
Maximum
IGMP Entries - Snoop
3072
IGMP Entries - Relay
1000
VLANs - Snoop
1024
VLANs - Relay
8
Static Mrouters
128
Dynamic Mrouters
128
Number of IGMP Filters
16
IPMC Groups (IGMP Relay)
1000
The following table lists the default settings for IGMP features and variables.
Table 38. IGMP Default Configuration Settings
Field
Default Value
Global IGMP State
Disabled
IGMP Querier
Disabled
IGMP Snooping
Disabled
IGMP Filtering
Disabled
IP Multicast (IPMC) Flood
Enabled
IGMP FastLeave
Disabled for all VLANs
IGMP Mrouter Timeout
255 Seconds
IGMP Report Timeout Variable
10 Seconds
IGMP Query-Interval Variable
125 Seconds
IGMP Robustness Variable
2
IGMPv3
Disabled
IGMPv3 number of sources
8 (The switch processes only the first
eight sources listed in the IGMPv3
group record.)
Valid range: 1 - 64
IGMPv3 - allow v1v2 Snooping
390
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Enabled
IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping allows a switch to listen to the IGMP conversation between hosts
and Mrouters. By default, a switch floods multicast traffic to all ports in a
broadcast domain. With IGMP Snooping enabled, the switch learns the ports
interested in receiving multicast data and forwards it only to those ports. IGMP
Snooping conserves network resources.
The switch can sense IGMP Membership Reports from attached hosts and acts as a
proxy to set up a dedicated path between the requesting host and a local IPv4
Mrouter. After the path is established, the switch blocks the IPv4 multicast stream
from flowing through any port that does not connect to a host member, thus
conserving bandwidth.
IGMP Querier
For IGMP Snooping to function, you must have an Mrouter on the network that
generates IGMP Query packets. Enabling the IGMP Querier feature on the switch
allows it to participate in the Querier election process. If the switch is elected as the
Querier, it will send IGMP Query packets for the LAN segment.
Querier Election
If multiple Mrouters exist on the network, only one can be configured as a Querier.
The Mrouters elect the one with the lowest source IPv4 address or MAC address as
the Querier. The Querier performs all periodic membership queries. All other
Mrouters (non-Queriers) do not send IGMP Query packets.
Note: When IGMP Querier is enabled on a VLAN, the switch performs the role of
an IGMP Querier only if it meets the IGMP Querier election criteria.
Each time the Querier switch sends an IGMP Query packet, it initializes a general
query timer. If a Querier receives a General Query packet from an Mrouter with a
lower IP address or MAC address, it transitions to a non-Querier state and
initializes an other querier present timer. When this timer expires, the Mrouter
transitions back to the Querier state and sends a General Query packet.
Follow this procedure to configure IGMP Querier.
1. Enable IGMP and configure the source IPv4 address for IGMP Querier on a VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp querier vlan 2 source­ip 10.10.10.1
2. Enable IGMP Querier on the VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp querier vlan 2 enable
3. Configure the querier election type and define the address.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp querier vlan 2 election­type ipv4
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
391
4. Verify the configuration.
RS 8272# show ip igmp querier vlan 2
Current IGMP snooping Querier information:
IGMP Querier information for vlan 2:
Other IGMP querier ­ none
Switch­querier enabled, current state: Querier
Switch­querier type: Ipv4, address 10.10.10.1,
Switch­querier general query interval: 125 secs,
Switch­querier max­response interval: 100 'tenths of secs',
Switch­querier startup interval: 31 secs, count: 2
Switch­querier robustness: 2
IGMP configured version is v3
IGMP Operating version is v3
IGMP Groups
One IGMP entry is allocated for each unique join request, based on the VLAN and
IGMP group address. If multiple ports join the same IGMP group using the same
VLAN, only a single IGMP entry is used.
IGMPv3 Snooping
IGMPv3 includes new Membership Report messages that extend IGMP
functionality. The switch provides snooping capability for all types of IGMPv3
Membership Reports.
IGMPv3 supports Source-Specific Multicast (SSM). SSM identifies session traffic by
both source and group addresses.
The IGMPv3 implementation keeps records on the multicast hosts present in the
network. If a host is already registered, when it receives a new IS_INC, TO_INC,
IS_EXC, or TO_EXC report from same host, the switch makes the correct transition
to new (port-host-group) registration based on the IGMPv3 RFC. The registrations
of other hosts for the same group on the same port are not changed.
The G8272 supports the following IGMPv3 filter modes:

INCLUDE mode: The host requests membership to a multicast group and
provides a list of IPv4 addresses from which it wants to receive traffic.

EXCLUDE mode: The host requests membership to a multicast group and
provides a list of IPv4 addresses from which it does not want to receive traffic.
This indicates that the host wants to receive traffic only from sources that are not
part of the Exclude list. To disable snooping on EXCLUDE mode reports, use the
following command:
RS 8272(config)# no ip igmp snoop igmpv3 exclude
By default, the G8272 snoops the first eight sources listed in the IGMPv3 Group
Record. Use the following command to change the number of snooping sources:
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop igmpv3 sources <1-64>
392
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
IGMPv3 Snooping is compatible with IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 Snooping. To disable
snooping on version 1 and version 2 reports, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# no ip igmp snoop igmpv3 v1v2 © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
393
IGMP Snooping Configuration Guidelines
Consider the following guidelines when you configure IGMP Snooping:
394

IGMP operation is independent of the routing method. You can use RIP, OSPF,
or static routes for Layer 3 routing.

When multicast traffic flood is disabled, the multicast traffic sent by the
multicast server is discarded if no hosts or Mrouters are learned on the switch.

The Mrouter periodically sends IGMP Queries.

The switch learns the Mrouter on the port connected to the router when it sees
Query messages. The switch then floods the IGMP queries on all other ports
including a Trunk Group, if any.

Multicast hosts send IGMP Reports as a reply to the IGMP Queries sent by the
Mrouter.

The switch can also learn an Mrouter when it receives a PIM hello packet from
another device. However, an Mrouter learned from a PIM packet has a lower
priority than an Mrouter learned from an IGMP Query. A switch overwrites an
Mrouter learned from a PIM packet when it receives an IGMP Query on the
same port.

A host sends an IGMP Leave message to its multicast group. The expiration
timer for this group is updated to 10 seconds. The Layer 3 switch sends IGMP
Group-Specific Query to the host that had sent the Leave message. If the host
does not respond with an IGMP Report during these 10 seconds, all the groups
expire and the switch deletes the host from the IGMP groups table. The switch
then proxies the IGMP Leave messages to the Mrouter.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
IGMP Snooping Configuration Example
This section provides steps to configure IGMP Snooping on the G8272.
1. Configure port and VLAN membership on the switch.
2. Add VLANs to IGMP Snooping.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop vlan 1 3. Enable IGMP Snooping.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop enable
4. Enable IGMPv3 Snooping (optional).
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop igmpv3 enable
5. Enable the IGMP feature.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
6. View dynamic IGMP information.
RS 8272# show ip igmp groups
Total entries: 5 Total IGMP groups: 3
Note: The <Total IGMP groups> number is computed as
the number of unique (Group, Vlan) entries!
Note: Local groups (224.0.0.x) are not snooped/relayed and will not appear.
Source Group VLAN Port Version Mode Expires Fwd
­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­
10.1.1.1 232.1.1.1 2 4 V3 INC 4:16 Yes
10.1.1.5 232.1.1.1 2 4 V3 INC 4:16 Yes
* 232.1.1.1 2 4 V3 INC ­ No
10.10.10.43 235.0.0.1 9 1 V3 INC 2:26 Yes
* 236.0.0.1 9 1 V3 EXC ­ Yes
RS 8272# show ip igmp mrouter
Total entries: 3 Total number of dynamic mrouters: 2
Total number of installed static mrouters: 1
SrcIP VLAN Port Version Expires MRT QRV QQIC ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­ 10.1.1.1 2 21 V3 4:09 128 2 125
10.1.1.5 2 23 V2 4:09 125 ­ ­
* 9 24 V2 static ­ ­ ­
These commands display information about IGMP Groups and Mrouters learned
by the switch.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
395
Advanced Configuration Example: IGMP Snooping
Figure 32 shows an example topology. Switches B and C are configured with IGMP
Snooping.
Figure 32. Topology
Multicast
Host 1
Multicast
Host 2
VLAN 2
VLANs 2,3
Switch B
5
6
1
Multicast
Host 3
2
Multicast
Router
VLAN 3
Switch C
Trunk 3
VLANs 2, 3
3
4
VLANs 2,3
3
4
5
6
1
2
Switch A
Trunk 1
Trunk 2
VLANs 2, 3
VLANs 2, 3
2
1
5
4
3
VLANs 2,3
Multicast
Server
Devices in this topology are configured as follows:
396

STG2 includes VLAN2; STG3 includes VLAN3.

The multicast server sends IP multicast traffic for the following groups:

VLAN 2, 225.10.0.11 – 225.10.0.12, Source: 22.10.0.11

VLAN 2, 225.10.0.13 – 225.10.0.15, Source: 22.10.0.13

VLAN 3, 230.0.2.1 – 230.0.2.2, Source: 22.10.0.1

VLAN 3, 230.0.2.3 – 230.0.2.5, Source: 22.10.0.3

The Mrouter sends IGMP Query packets in VLAN 2 and VLAN 3. The Mrouter’s
IP address is 10.10.10.10.

The multicast hosts send the following IGMP Reports:

IGMPv2 Report, VLAN 2, Group: 225.10.0.11, Source: *

IGMPv2 Report, VLAN 3, Group: 230.0.2.1, Source: *

IGMPv3 IS_INCLUDE Report, VLAN 2, Group: 225.10.0.13, Source: 22.10.0.13

IGMPv3 IS_INCLUDE Report, VLAN 3, Group: 230.0.2.3, Source: 22.10.0.3
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The hosts receive multicast traffic as follows:


Host 1 receives multicast traffic for groups (*, 225.10.0.11), (22.10.0.13,
225.10.0.13)

Host 2 receives multicast traffic for groups (*, 225.10.0.11), (*, 230.0.2.1),
(22.10.0.13, 225.10.0.13), (22.10.0.3, 230.0.2.3)

Host 3 receives multicast traffic for groups (*, 230.0.2.1), (22.10.0.3, 230.0.2.3)
The Mrouter receives all the multicast traffic.

Prerequisites
Before you configure IGMP Snooping, ensure you have performed the following
actions:

Configured VLANs.

Enabled IGMP.

Added VLANs to IGMP Snooping.

Configured a switch or Mrouter as the Querier.

Identified the IGMP version(s) you want to enable.

Disabled IGMP flooding.
Configuration
This section provides the configuration details of the switches shown in Figure 32.
Switch A Configuration
1. Configure VLANs and tagging.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2,3
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 1
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure an IP interface with IPv4 address, and assign a VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.10.1 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
3. Assign a bridge priority lower than the default bridge priority to enable the switch
to become the STP root in STG 2 and 3.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 2 bridge priority 4096
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 3 bridge priority 4096
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
397
4. Configure LACP dynamic trunk groups (portchannels).
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 100
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 100
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 3
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 200
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 4
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 200
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
Switch B Configuration
1. Configure VLANs and tagging.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­4,6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­4,6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 1
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure an IP interface with IPv4 address, and assign a VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.10.2 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
3. Configure STP. Reset the ports to make the edge configuration operational.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5,6
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree portfast
RS 8272(config­if)# shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# no shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
398
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. Configure an LACP dynamic trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 300
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
5. Configure a static trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 1 port 3,4 enable
6. Configure IGMP Snooping.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop vlan 2,3
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop source­ip 10.10.10.2
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop igmpv3 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop igmpv3 sources 64
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop enable
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
Switch C Configuration
1. Configure VLANs and tagging.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­4,6
RS 8272(config­ip)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­ip)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­4,6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface 1­6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 1
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure an IP interface with IPv4 address, and assign a VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.10.3 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
399
3. Configure STP. Reset the ports to make the edge configuration operational.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5,6
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree portfast
RS 8272(config­if)# shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# no shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
4. Configure an LACP dynamic trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 400
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
5. Configure a static trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 1 port 3,4 enable
6. Configure IGMP Snooping.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop vlan 2,3
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop source­ip 10.10.10.3
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop igmpv3 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop igmpv3 sources 64
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp snoop enable
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
400
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Troubleshooting
This section provides the steps to resolve common IGMP Snooping configuration
issues. The topology described in Figure 32 is used as an example.
Multicast traffic from non-member groups reaches the host or Mrouter

Check if traffic is unregistered. For unregistered traffic, an IGMP entry is not
displayed in the IGMP groups table.
RS 8272# show ip igmp groups

Ensure IPMC flooding is disabled and CPU is enabled.
RS 8272(config)# vlan <vlan id>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# cpu

Check the egress port’s VLAN membership. The ports to which the hosts and
Mrouter are connected must be used only for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3.
RS 8272# show vlan
Note: To avoid such a scenario, disable IPMC flooding for all VLANs enabled
on the switches (if this is an acceptable configuration).

Check IGMP Reports on switches B and C for information about the IGMP
groups.
RS 8272# show ip igmp groups
If the non-member IGMP groups are displayed in the table, close the application
that may be sending the IGMP Reports for these groups.
Identify the traffic source by using a sniffer on the hosts and reading the source
IP/MAC address. If the source IP/MAC address is unknown, check the port
statistics to find the ingress port.
RS 8272# show interface port <port id> interface­counters

Ensure no static multicast MACs, static multicast groups, or static Mrouters are
configured.

Ensure IGMP Relay and PIM are not configured.
Not all multicast traffic reaches the appropriate receivers.

Ensure hosts are sending IGMP Reports for all the groups. Check the VLAN on
which the groups are learned.
RS 8272# show ip igmp groups
If some of the groups are not displayed, ensure the multicast application is
running on the host device and the generated IGMP Reports are correct.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
401

Ensure multicast traffic reaches the switch to which the host is connected.
Close the application sending the IGMP Reports. Clear the IGMP groups by
flapping (disabling, then re-enabling) the port.
Note: To clear all IGMP groups, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# clear ip igmp groups
However, this will clear all the IGMP groups and will influence other hosts.

Check if the multicast traffic reaches the switch.
RS 8272# show ip igmp ipmcgrp
If the multicast traffic group is not displayed in the table, check the link state,
VLAN membership, and STP convergence.

Ensure multicast server is sending all the multicast traffic.

Ensure no static multicast MACs, static multicast groups, or static multicast
routes are configured.
IGMP queries sent by the Mrouter do not reach the host.

Ensure the Mrouter is learned on switches B and C.
RS 8272# show ip igmp mrouter
If it is not learned on switch B but is learned on switch C, check the link state of
the trunk group, VLAN membership, and STP convergence.
If it is not learned on any switch, ensure the multicast application is running and
is sending correct IGMP Query packets.
If it is learned on both switches, check the link state, VLAN membership, and
STP port states for the ports connected to the hosts.
IGMP Reports/Leaves sent by the hosts do not reach the Mrouter

Ensure IGMP Queries sent by the Mrouter reach the hosts.

Ensure the Mrouter is learned on both switches. Note that the Mrouter may not
be learned on switch B immediately after a trunk group failover/failback.
RS 8272# show ip igmp mrouter

Ensure the host’s multicast application is started and is sending correct IGMP
Reports/Leaves.
RS 8272# show ip igmp groups
RS 8272# show ip igmp counters
A host receives multicast traffic from the incorrect VLAN
402

Check port VLAN membership.

Check IGMP Reports sent by the host.

Check multicast data sent by the server.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The Mrouter is learned on the incorrect trunk group

Check link state. Trunk group 1 might be down or in STP discarding state.

Check STP convergence.

Check port VLAN membership.
Hosts receive multicast traffic at a lower rate than normal
Note: This behavior is expected if IPMC flood is disabled and CPU is enabled. As
soon as the IGMP/IPMC entries are installed on ASIC, the IPMC traffic recovers
and is forwarded at line rate. This applies to unregistered IPMC traffic.

Ensure a storm control is not configured on the trunks.
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port id>
RS 8272(config­if)# no storm­control multicast

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Check link speeds and network congestion.
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
403
IGMP Relay
The G8272 can act as an IGMP Relay (or IGMP Proxy) device that relays IGMP
multicast messages and traffic between an Mrouter and end stations. IGMP Relay
allows the G8272 to participate in network multicasts with no configuration of the
various multicast routing protocols, so you can deploy it in the network with
minimal effort.
To an IGMP host connected to the G8272, IGMP Relay appears to be an IGMP
Mrouter. IGMP Relay sends Membership Queries to hosts, which respond by
sending an IGMP response message. A host can also send an unsolicited Join
message to the IGMP Relay.
To an Mrouter, IGMP Relay appears as a host. The Mrouter sends IGMP host
queries to IGMP Relay, and IGMP Relay responds by forwarding IGMP host
reports and unsolicited Join messages from its attached hosts.
IGMP Relay also forwards multicast traffic between the Mrouter and end stations,
similar to IGMP Snooping.
You can configure up to two Mrouters to use with IGMP Relay. One Mrouter acts
as the primary Mrouter, and one is the backup Mrouter. The G8272 uses health
checks to select the primary Mrouter.
Configuration Guidelines
Consider the following guidelines when you configure IGMP Relay:
IGMP Relay and IGMP Snooping are mutually exclusive—if you enable IGMP
Relay, you must turn off IGMP Snooping/Querier.
 Add the upstream Mrouter VLAN to the IGMP Relay list, using the following
command:

RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay vlan <VLAN

number>
If IGMP hosts reside on different VLANs, you must:

Disable IGMP flooding.
RS 8272(config)# vlan <vlan id>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood

Ensure CPU forwarding is enabled; Ensure that multicast data is forwarded
across the VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# vlan <vlan id>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# cpu
404
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configure IGMP Relay
Use the following procedure to configure IGMP Relay.
1. Configure IP interfaces with IPv4 addresses, and assign VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.1.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.2.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Turn IGMP on.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
3. Configure the upstream Mrouters with IPv4 addresses.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 1 address 100.0.1.2
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 1 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 2 address 100.0.2.4
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 2 enable
4. Enable IGMP Relay and add VLANs to the downstream network.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay vlan 2
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay vlan 3
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay enable
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
405
Advanced Configuration Example: IGMP Relay
Figure 33 shows an example topology. Switches B and C are configured with IGMP
Relay.
Figure 33. Topology
Multicast
Host 1
VLAN 3
VLANs 2,3
Switch B
5
1
2
VLAN 5
VLAN 2
VLAN 2
3
4
Multicast
Router 2
Switch C
Trunk 3
6
Multicast
Router 1
Multicast
Host 3
Multicast
Host 2
3
4
5
6
7 VLAN 5
1
2
Switch A
Trunk 1
Trunk 2
VLAN 2
2
1
5
4
3
VLAN 2
VLAN 2
Multicast
Server
Devices in this topology are configured as follows:

The IP address of Multicast Router 1 is 5.5.5.5

The IP address of Multicast Router 2 is 5.5.5.6

STG 2 includes VLAN2; STG 3 includes VLAN 3; STG 5 includes VLAN 5.

The multicast server sends IP multicast traffic for the following groups:



VLAN 2, 225.10.0.11 – 225.10.0.15
The multicast hosts send the following IGMP Reports:

Host 1: 225.10.0.11 – 225.10.0.12, VLAN 3

Host 2: 225.10.0.12 – 225.10.0.13, VLAN 2; 225.10.0.14 – 225.10.0.15, VLAN 3

Host 3: 225.10.0.13 – 225.10.0.14, VLAN 2
The Mrouter receives all the multicast traffic.
Prerequisites
Before you configure IGMP Relay, ensure you have performed the following
actions:

406
Configured VLANs.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Enabled IGMP.

Disabled IGMP flooding.

Disabled IGMP Snooping.
Configuration
This section provides the configuration details of the switches in Figure 33.
Switch A Configuration
1. Configure a VLAN.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure an IP interface with IPv4 address, and assign a VLAN..
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 2.2.2.10 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
3. Assign a bridge priority lower than the default bridge priority to enable the switch
to become the STP root in STG 2 and 3.
RS 8272(config)# spanning­tree stp 2 bridge priority 4096
4. Configure LACP dynamic trunk groups (portchannels).
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 100
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 3,4
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 200
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
407
Switch B Configuration
1. Configure VLANs and tagging.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­4,6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5,6
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 3
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure IP interfaces with IPv4 addresses, and assign VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 2.2.2.20 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 3.3.3.20 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 2 address 2.2.2.30 enable
3. Configure STP.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5,6
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree portfast
RS 8272(config­if)# shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# no shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
4. Configure an LACP dynamic trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 300
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
5. Configure a static trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 1 port 3,4 enable
408
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
6. Configure IGMP Relay.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay vlan 2,3
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 1 address 5.5.5.5 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 2 address 5.5.5.6 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay enable
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 3
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
Switch C Configuration
1. Configure VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1­5
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 6,7
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 5
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure IP interfaces with IPv4 addresses and assign VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 2.2.2.30 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 5.5.5.30 enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 5
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 2 address 2.2.2.20 enable
3. Configure STP.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 5,6,7
RS 8272(config­if)# spanning­tree portfast
RS 8272(config­if)# shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# no shutdown
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
4. Configure LACP dynamic trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1,2
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp key 400
RS 8272(config­if)# lacp mode active
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
409
5. Configure a static trunk group (portchannel).
RS 8272(config)# portchannel 1 port 3,4 enable
6. Enable IGMP.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp enable
7. Configure IGMP Relay.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay vlan 2,5
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 1 address 5.5.5.5 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay mrouter 2 address 5.5.5.6 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp relay enable
RS 8272(config)# vlan 2
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 5
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
Troubleshooting
This section provides the steps to resolve common IGMP Relay configuration
issues. The topology described in Figure 33 is used as an example.
Multicast traffic from non-member groups reaches the hosts or the Mrouter

Ensure IPMC flood is disabled.
RS 8272(config)# vlan <vlan id>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# no flood

Check the egress port’s VLAN membership. The ports to which the hosts and
Mrouter are connected must be used only for VLAN 2, VLAN 3, or VLAN 5.
RS 8272(config)# show vlan
Note: To avoid such a scenario, disable IPMC flooding for all VLANs enabled on
the switches (if this is an acceptable configuration).
410
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Check IGMP Reports on switches B and C for information about IGMP groups.
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp groups
If non-member IGMP groups are displayed in the table, close the application
that may be sending the IGMP Reports for these groups.
Identify the traffic source by using a sniffer on the hosts and reading the source
IP address/MAC address. If the source IP address/MAC address is unknown,
check the port statistics to find the ingress port.
RS 8272(config)# show interface port <port id> interface­counters

Ensure no static multicast MACs and static Mrouters are configured.
Not all multicast traffic reaches the appropriate receivers

Ensure hosts are sending IGMP Reports for all the groups. Check the VLAN on
which the groups are learned.
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp groups
If some of the groups are not displayed, ensure the multicast application is
running on the host device and the generated IGMP Reports are correct.

Ensure the multicast traffic reaches the switch to which the host is connected.
Close the application sending the IGMP Reports. Clear the IGMP groups by
flapping (disabling, then re-enabling) the port.
Note: To clear all IGMP groups, use the following command:
RS 8272(config)# clear ip igmp groups
However, this will clear all the IGMP groups and will influence other hosts.

Check if the multicast traffic reaches the switch.
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp ipmcgrp
If the multicast traffic group is not displayed in the table, check the link state,
VLAN membership, and STP convergence.

Ensure the multicast server is sending all the multicast traffic.

Ensure no static multicast MACs or static multicast routes are configured.

Ensure PIM is not enabled on the switches.
IGMP Reports/Leaves sent by the hosts do not reach the Mrouter

Ensure that the primary or secondary Mrouter is reachable. If not, the IGMP
Reports/Leaves are not forwarded. Note that the Mrouter may not be reachable
immediately after a trunk group failover/failback.
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp groups
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
411

Ensure the host’s multicast application is started and is sending correct IGMP
Reports/Leaves.
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp groups
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp counters
The Mrouter is reachable on the incorrect trunk group

Check link state. Trunk group 1 may be down or in STP discarding state.

Check STP convergence and port VLAN membership.

Check IP connectivity between the switch and the configured Mrouter (primary
or secondary).
Hosts receive multicast traffic at a lower rate than normal

Ensure a multicast threshold is not configured on the trunk groups.
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port id>
RS 8272(config­if)# no storm­control multicast

412
Check link speeds and network congestion.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Additional IGMP Features
The following topics are discussed in this section:

“FastLeave” on page 413

“IGMP Filtering” on page 413

“Static Multicast Router” on page 414
FastLeave
In normal IGMP operation, when the switch receives an IGMPv2 Leave message, it
sends a Group-Specific Query to determine if any other devices in the same group
(and on the same port) are still interested in the specified multicast group traffic.
The switch removes the affiliated port from that particular group, if the switch
does not receive an IGMP Membership Report within the query-response-interval.
With FastLeave enabled on the VLAN, a port can be removed immediately from
the port list of the group entry when the IGMP Leave message is received.
Note: Only IGMPv2 supports FastLeave. Enable FastLeave on ports that have only
one host connected. If more than one host is connected to a port, you may lose
some hosts unexpectedly.
Use the following command to enable FastLeave.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp fastleave <VLAN number>
IGMP Filtering
With IGMP filtering, you can allow or deny certain IGMP groups to be learned on
a port.
If access to a multicast group is denied, IGMP Membership Reports from the port are
dropped, and the port is not allowed to receive IPv4 multicast traffic from that
group. If access to the multicast group is allowed, Membership Reports from the
port are forwarded for normal processing.
To configure IGMP filtering, you must globally enable IGMP filtering, define an
IGMP filter, assign the filter to a port, and enable IGMP filtering on the port. To
define an IGMP filter, you must configure a range of IPv4 multicast groups, choose
whether the filter will allow or deny multicast traffic for groups within the range,
and enable the filter.
Configuring the Range
Each IGMP filter allows you to set a start and end point that defines the range of
IPv4 addresses upon which the filter takes action. Each IPv4 address in the range
must be between 224.0.0.0 and 239.255.255.255.
Configuring the Action
Each IGMP filter can allow or deny IPv4 multicasts to the range of IPv4 addresses
configured. If you configure the filter to deny IPv4 multicasts, then IGMP
Membership Reports from multicast groups within the range are dropped. You can
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 28: Internet Group Management Protocol
413
configure a secondary filter to allow IPv4 multicasts to a small range of addresses
within a larger range that a primary filter is configured to deny. The two filters
work together to allow IPv4 multicasts to a small subset of addresses within the
larger range of addresses.
Note: Lower-numbered filters take precedence over higher-number filters. For
example, the action defined for IGMP filter 1 supersedes the action defined for
IGMP filter 2.
Configure IGMP Filtering
1. Enable IGMP filtering on the switch.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp filtering
2. Define an IGMP filter with IPv4 information.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp profile 1 range 224.0.0.0 226.0.0.0
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp profile 1 action deny
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp profile 1 enable
3. Assign the IGMP filter to a port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 3
RS 8272(config­if)# ip igmp profile 1
RS 8272(config­if)# ip igmp filtering
Static Multicast Router
A static Mrouter can be configured for a particular port on a particular VLAN. A
static Mrouter does not have to be learned through IGMP Snooping. Any data port
can accept a static Mrouter.
When you configure a static Mrouter on a VLAN, it replaces any dynamic
Mrouters learned through IGMP Snooping.
Configure a Static Multicast Router
1. For each Mrouter, configure a port, VLAN, and IGMP version of the multicast
router.
RS 8272(config)# ip igmp mrouter 5 1 2
2. Verify the configuration.
RS 8272(config)# show ip igmp mrouter
414
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 295. Multicast Listener Discovery
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is an IPv6 protocol that a host uses to request
multicast data for a multicast group. An IPv6 router uses MLD to discover the
presence of multicast listeners (nodes that want to receive multicast packets) on its
directly attached links, and to discover specifically the multicast addresses that are
of interest to those neighboring nodes.
MLD version 1 is derived from Internet Group Management Protocol version 2
(IGMPv2) and MLDv2 is derived from IGMPv3. MLD uses ICMPv6 (IP Protocol
58) message types. See RFC 2710 and RFC 3810 for details.
MLDv2 protocol, when compared to MLDv1, adds support for source filtering—
the ability for a node to report interest in listening to packets only from specific
source addresses, or from all but specific source addresses, sent to a particular
multicast address. MLDv2 is interoperable with MLDv1. See RFC 3569 for details
on Source-Specific Multicast (SSM).
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“MLD Terms” on page 416

“How MLD Works” on page 417

“MLD Capacity and Default Values” on page 420

“Configuring MLD” on page 421
415
MLD Terms
Following are the commonly used MLD terms:

Multicast traffic: Flow of data from one source to multiple destinations.

Group: A multicast stream to which a host can join.

Multicast Router (Mrouter): A router configured to make routing decisions for
multicast traffic. The router identifies the type of packet received (unicast or
multicast) and forwards the packet to the intended destination.

Querier: An Mrouter that sends periodic query messages. Only one Mrouter on
the subnet can be elected as the Querier.

Multicast Listener Query: Messages sent by the Querier. There are three types of
queries:

General Query: Sent periodically to learn multicast address listeners from an
attached link. G8272 uses these queries to build and refresh the Multicast
Address Listener state. General Queries are sent to the link-scope all-nodes
multicast address (FF02::1), with a multicast address field of 0, and a
maximum response delay of query response interval.

Multicast Address Specific Query: Sent to learn if a specific multicast address
has any listeners on an attached link. The multicast address field is set to the
IPv6 multicast address.

Multicast Address and Source Specific Query: Sent to learn if, for a specified
multicast address, there are nodes still listening to a specific set of sources.
Supported only in MLDv2.
Note: Multicast Address Specific Queries and Multicast Address and Source
Specific Queries are sent only in response to State Change Reports, and never in
response to Current State Reports.


416
Multicast Listener Report: Sent by a host when it joins a multicast group, or in
response to a Multicast Listener Query sent by the Querier. Hosts use these
reports to indicate their current multicast listening state, or changes in the
multicast listening state of their interfaces. These reports are of two types:

Current State Report: Contains the current Multicast Address Listening State
of the host.

State Change Report: If the listening state of a host changes, the host
immediately reports these changes through a State Change Report message.
These reports contain either Filter Mode Change records and/or Source List
Change records. State Change Reports are retransmitted several times to
ensure all Mrouters receive it.
Multicast Listener Done: Sent by a host when it wants to leave a multicast group.
This message is sent to the link-scope all-routers IPv6 destination address of
FF02::2. When an Mrouter receives a Multicast Listener Done message from the
last member of the multicast address on a link, it stops forwarding traffic to this
multicast address.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
How MLD Works
The software uses the information obtained through MLD to maintain a list of
multicast group memberships for each interface and forwards the multicast traffic
only to interested listeners.
Without MLD, the switch forwards IPv6 multicast traffic through all ports,
increasing network load. Following is an overview of operations when MLD is
configured on the G8272:

The switch acts as an Mrouter when MLDv1/v2 is configured and enabled on
each of its directly attached links. If the switch has multiple interfaces connected
to the same link, it operates the protocol on any one of the interfaces.

If there are multiple Mrouters on the subnet, the Mrouter with the numerically
lowest IPv6 address is elected as the Querier.

The Querier sends general queries at short intervals to learn multicast address
listener information from an attached link.

Hosts respond to these queries by reporting their per-interface Multicast
Address Listening state, through Current State Report messages sent to a
specific multicast address that all MLD routers on the link listen to.

If the listening state of a host changes, the host immediately reports these
changes through a State Change Report message.

The Querier sends a Multicast Address Specific Query to verify if hosts are
listening to a specified multicast address or not. Similarly, if MLDv2 is
configured, the Querier sends a Multicast Address and Source Specific Query to
verify, for a specified multicast address, if hosts are listening to a specific set of
sources, or not. MLDv2 listener report messages consists of Multicast Address
Records:


INCLUDE: to receive packets from source specified in the MLDv2 message

EXCLUDE: to receive packets from all sources except the ones specified in the
MLDv2 message
A host can send a State Change Report to indicate its desire to stop listening to a
particular multicast address (or source in MLDv2). The Querier then sends a
multicast address specific query to verify if there are other listeners of the
multicast address. If there aren’t any, the Mrouter deletes the multicast address
from its Multicast Address Listener state and stops sending multicast traffic.
Similarly in MLDv2, the Mrouter sends a Multicast Address and Source Specific
Query to verify if, for a specified multicast address, there are hosts still listening
to a specific set of sources.
G8272 supports MLD versions 1 and 2.
Note: MLDv2 operates in version 1 compatibility mode when, in a specific
network, not all hosts are configured with MLDv2.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 29: Multicast Listener Discovery
417
How Flooding Impacts MLD
When flood option is disabled, the unknown multicast traffic is discarded if no
Mrouters are learned on the switch. You can set the flooding behavior by
configuring the flood and cpu options. You can optimize the flooding to ensure
that unknown IP multicast (IPMC) data packets are not dropped during the
learning phase.
The flooding options include:

flood: Enable hardware flooding in VLAN for the unregistered IPMC; This
option is enabled by default.

cpu: Enable sending unregistered IPMC to the Mrouter ports. However, during
the learning period, there will be some packet loss. The cpu option is enabled by
default. You must ensure that the flood and optflood options are disabled.

optflood: Enable optimized flooding to allow sending the unregistered IPMC
to the Mrouter ports without having any packet loss during the learning period;
This option is disabled by default; When optflood is enabled, the flood and
cpu settings are ignored.
The flooding parameters must be configured per VLAN. Enter the following
command to set the flood or cpu option:
RS 8272(config)# vlan <vlan number>
RS 8272(config­vlan)# [no] flood
RS 8272(config­vlan)# [no] cpu
RS 8272(config­vlan)# [no] optflood
MLD Querier
An Mrouter acts as a Querier and periodically (at short query intervals) sends
query messages in the subnet. If there are multiple Mrouters in the subnet, only
one can be the Querier. All Mrouters on the subnet listen to the messages sent by
the multicast address listeners, and maintain the same multicast listening
information state.
All MLDv2 queries are sent with the FE80::/64 link-local source address prefix.
Querier Election
Only one Mrouter can be the Querier per subnet. All other Mrouters will be
non-Queriers. MLD versions 1 and 2 elect the Mrouter with the numerically lowest
IPv6 address as the Querier.
If the switch is configured as an Mrouter on a subnet, it also acts as a Querier by
default and sends multiple general queries. If the switch receives a general query
from another Querier with a numerically lower IPv6 address, it sets the other
querier present timer to the other querier present timeout, and changes its state to
non-Querier. When the other querier present timer expires, it regains the Querier
state and starts sending general queries.
Note: When MLD Querier is enabled on a VLAN, the switch performs the role of
an MLD Querier only if it meets the MLD Querier election criteria.
418
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Dynamic Mrouters
The switch learns Mrouters on the ingress VLANs of the MLD-enabled interface.
All report or done messages are forwarded to these Mrouters. By default, the
option of dynamically learning Mrouters is disabled. To enable it, use the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld dmrtr enable
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 29: Multicast Listener Discovery
419
MLD Capacity and Default Values
Table 39 lists the maximum and minimum values of the G8272 variables.
Table 39. G8272 Capacity Table
Variable
Maximum Value
IPv6 Multicast Entries
256
IPv6 Interfaces for MLD
8
Note: IGMP and MLD share the IPMC table. When the IPMC table is full, you
cannot allocate additional IGMP/MLD groups.
Table 40 lists the default settings for MLD features and variables.
Table 40. MLD Timers and Default Values
420
Field
Default Value
Robustness Variable (RV)
2
Query Interval (QI)
125 seconds
Query Response Interval (QRI)
10 seconds
Multicast Address Listeners Interval
(MALI)
260 seconds [derived: RV*QI+QRI]
Other Querier Present Interval [OQPT]
255 seconds [derived: RV*QI + ½ QRI]
Start up Query Interval [SQI]
31.25 seconds [derived: ¼ * QI]
Startup Query Count [SQC]
2 [derived: RV]
Last Listener Query Interval [LLQI]
1 second
Last Listener Query Count [LLQC]
2 [derived: RV]
Last Listener Query Time [LLQT]
2 seconds [derived: LLQI * LLQT]
Older Version Querier Present Timeout:
[OVQPT]
260 seconds [derived: RV*QI+ QRI]
Older Version Host Present Interval
[OVHPT]
260 seconds [derived: RV* QI+QRI]
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuring MLD
Following are the steps to enable MLD and configure the interface parameters:
1. Turn on MLD globally.
RS 8272(config)# ipv6 mld
RS 8272(config­router­mld)# enable
RS 8272(config­router­mld)# exit
2. Create an IPv6 interface.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 address 2002:1:0:0:0:0:0:3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 prefixlen 64
3. Enable MLD on the IPv6 interface.
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld enable
4. Configure the MLD parameters on the interface: version, robustness, query
response interval, MLD query interval, and last listener query interval.
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld version <1-2>(MLD version)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld robust <1-10>(Robustness)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld qri <1-256>(In seconds)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld qintrval <1-608>(In seconds)
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 mld llistnr <1-32>(In seconds)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 29: Multicast Listener Discovery
421
422
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 30. Border Gateway Protocol
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on an
IPv4 network to share and advertise routing information with each other about the
segments of the IPv4 address space they can access within their network and with
routers on external networks. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for
a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network rather than
simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream
provider(s). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.
RackSwitch G8272s can advertise their IP interfaces and IPv4 addresses using BGP
and take BGP feeds from as many as 96 BGP router peers. This allows more
resilience and flexibility in balancing traffic from the Internet.
Note: Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 does not support IPv6 for BGP.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“Internal Routing Versus External Routing” on page 424

“Forming BGP Peer Routers” on page 428

“Loopback Interfaces” on page 430

“What is a Route Map?” on page 430

“Aggregating Routes” on page 434

“Redistributing Routes” on page 434

“BGP Attributes” on page 436

“Selecting Route Paths in BGP” on page 438

“BGP Failover Configuration” on page 439

“Default Redistribution and Route Aggregation Example” on page 441
423
Internal Routing Versus External Routing
To ensure effective processing of network traffic, every router on your network
needs to know how to send a packet (directly or indirectly) to any other
location/destination in your network. This is referred to as internal routing and can
be done with static routes or using active, internal dynamic routing protocols, such
as RIP, RIPv2, and OSPF.
Static routes must have a higher degree of precedence than dynamic routing
protocols. If the destination route is not in the route cache, the packets are
forwarded to the default gateway which may be incorrect if a dynamic routing
protocol is enabled.
It is also useful to tell routers outside your network (upstream providers or peers)
about the routes you can access in your network. External networks (those outside
your own) that are under the same administrative control are referred to as
autonomous systems (AS). Sharing of routing information between autonomous
systems is known as external routing.
External BGP (eBGP) is used to exchange routes between different autonomous
systems whereas internal BGP (iBGP) is used to exchange routes within the same
autonomous system. An iBGP is a type of internal routing protocol you can use to
do active routing inside your network. It also carries AS path information, which is
important when you are an ISP or doing BGP transit.
The iBGP peers have to maintain reciprocal sessions to every other iBGP router in
the same AS (in a full-mesh manner) to propagate route information throughout
the AS. If the iBGP session shown between the two routers in AS 20 was not
present (as indicated in Figure 34), the top router would not learn the route to AS
50, and the bottom router would not learn the route to AS 11, even though the two
AS 20 routers are connected via the RackSwitch G8272.
Figure 34. iBGP and eBGP
Internet
When there are many iBGP peers, having a full-mesh configuration results in large
number of sessions between the iBGP peers. In such situations, configuring a route
reflector eliminates the full-mesh configuration requirement, prevents route
propagation loops, and provides better scalability to the peers. For details, see
“Route Reflector” on page 425.
424
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Typically, an AS has one or more border routers—peer routers that exchange routes
with other ASs—and an internal routing scheme that enables routers in that AS to
reach every other router and destination within that AS. When you advertise routes
to border routers on other autonomous systems, you are effectively committing to
carry data to the IPv4 space represented in the route being advertised. For
example, if you advertise 192.204.4.0/24, you are declaring that if another router
sends you data destined for any address in 192.204.4.0/24, you know how to carry
that data to its destination.
Route Reflector
The Lenovo N/OS implementation conforms to the BGP Route Reflection
specification defined in RFC 4456.
As per RFC 1771 specification, a route received from an iBGP peer cannot be
advertised to another iBGP peer. This makes it mandatory to have full-mesh iBGP
sessions between all BGP routers within an AS. A route reflector—a BGP router—
breaks this iBGP loop avoidance rule. It does not affect the eBGP behavior. A route
reflector is a BGP speaker that advertises a route learnt from an iBGP peer to
another iBGP peer. The advertised route is called the reflected route.
A route reflector has two groups of internal peers: clients and non-clients. A route
reflector reflects between these groups and among the clients. The non-client peers
must be fully meshed. The route reflector and its clients form a cluster.
When a route reflector receives a route from an iBGP peer, it selects the best path
based on its path selection rule. It then does the following based on the type of peer
it received the best path from:

A route received from a non-client iBGP peer is reflected to all clients.

A route received from an iBGP client peer is reflected to all iBGP clients and
iBGP non-clients.
In Figure 35, the G8272 is configured as a route reflector. All clients and non-clients
are in the same AS.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
425
Figure 35. iBGP Route Reflector
Cluster
RR Client
RR Client
iBGP
iBGP
Route Reflector
iBGP
iBGP
iBGP
RR Non-Client
RR Non-Client
The following attributes are used by the route reflector functionality:

ORIGINATOR ID: BGP identifier (BGP router ID) of the route originator in the
local AS. If the route does not have the ORIGINATOR ID attribute (it has not
been reflected before), the router ID of the iBGP peer from which the route has
been received is copied into the Originator ID attribute.This attribute is never
modified by subsequent route reflectors. A router that identifies its own ID as
the ORIGINATOR ID, it ignores the route.

CLUSTER LIST: Sequence of the CLUSTER ID (i.e. router ID) values
representing the reflection path that the route has passed. The value configured
with the RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# cluster­id <ID> command
(or the router ID of the route reflector if the cluster-id is not configured) is
prepended to the Cluster list attribute. If a route reflector detects its own
CLUSTER ID in the CLUSTER LIST, it ignores the route. Up to 10 CLUSTER IDs
can be added to a CLUSTER LIST.
Route reflection functionality can be configured as follows:
1. Configure an AS.
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# as 22
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# enable
2. Configure a route reflector client.
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 remote­address 10.1.50.1
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 remote­as 22
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 route­reflector­client
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# no neighbor 2 shutdown
426
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Note: When a client is configured on the G8272, the switch automatically gets
configured as a route reflector.
3. Verify configuration.
RS 8272(config)# show ip bgp neighbor 2 information
BGP Peer 2 Information:
2: 10.1.50.1 , version 0, TTL 255, TTL Security hops 0
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 22, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0, Local router ID: 9.9.9.9
next­hop­self disabled
RR client enabled BGP status: connect, Old status: connect
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 0
Once configured as a route reflector, the switch, by default, passes routes between
clients. If required, you can disable this by using the following command:
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# no client­to­client reflection
You can view the route reflector BGP attributes attached to a BGP route using the
following command:
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# show ip bgp information 5.0.0.0 255.255.255.0
BGP routing table entry for 5.0.0.0/255.255.255.0
Paths: (1 available, best #1)
Multipath: eBGP
Local
30.1.1.1 (metric 0) from 22.22.1.1(17.17.17.17)
Origin: IGP, localpref 0, valid, internal, best
Originator: 1.16.0.195
Cluster list: 17.17.17.17
Restrictions
Consider the following restrictions when configuring route reflection
functionality:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

When a CLUSTER ID is changed, all iBGP sessions are restarted.

When a route reflector client is enabled/disabled, the session is restarted.
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
427
Forming BGP Peer Routers
Two BGP routers become peers or neighbors once you establish a TCP connection
between them. You can configure BGP peers statically or dynamically. While it may
be desirable to configure static peers for security reasons, dynamic peers prove to
be useful in cases where the remote address of the peer is unknown. For example
in B-RAS applications, where subscriber interfaces are dynamically created and the
address is assigned dynamically from a local pool or by using RADIUS.
For each new route, if a peer is interested in that route (for example, if a peer would
like to receive your static routes and the new route is static), an update message is
sent to that peer containing the new route. For each route removed from the route
table, if the route has already been sent to a peer, an update message containing the
route to withdraw is sent to that peer.
For each Internet host, you must be able to send a packet to that host, and that host
has to have a path back to you. This means that whoever provides Internet
connectivity to that host must have a path to you. Ultimately, this means that they
must “hear a route” which covers the section of the IPv4 space you are using;
otherwise, you will not have connectivity to the host in question.
Static Peers
You can configure BGP static peers by using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor <1-96> remote­address <IP address>
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor <1-96> remote­as <1-65535>
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# no neighbor <1-96> shutdown
Static peers always take precedence over dynamic peers. Consider the following:

If the remote address of an incoming BGP connection matches both a static peer
address and an IP address from a dynamic group, the peer is configured
statically and not dynamically.

If a new static peer is enabled while a dynamic peer for the same remote address
exists, BGP automatically removes the dynamic peer.

If a new static peer is enabled when the maximum number of BGP peers were
already configured, then BGP deletes the dynamic peer that was last created and
adds the newly created static peer. A syslog will be generated for the peer that
was deleted.
Dynamic Peers
To configure dynamic peers, you must define a range of IP addresses for a group.
BGP waits to receive an open message initiated from BGP speakers within that
range. Dynamic peers are automatically created when a peer group member
accepts the incoming BGP connection. Dynamic peers are passive. When they are
not in the established state, they accept inbound connections but do not initiate
outbound connections.
428
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
You can configure up to 6 AS numbers per group. When the BGP speaker receives
an open message from a dynamic peer, the AS number from the packet must match
one of the remote AS numbers configured on the corresponding group.
When you delete a remote AS number, all dynamic peers established from that
remote AS will be deleted.
You can define attributes for the dynamic peers only at the group level. You cannot
configure attributes for any one dynamic peer. All static peer attributes, except the
BGP passive mode, can also be configured for groups.
To set the maximum number of dynamic peers for a group that can simultaneously
be in an established state, enter the following command:
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor group <1-8> listen limit <1-96>
If you reset this limit to a lower number, and if the dynamic peers already
established for the group are higher than this new limit, then BGP deletes the last
created dynamic peer(s) until the new limit is reached.
Note: The maximum number of static and dynamic peers established
simultaneously cannot exceed the maximum peers, i.e. 96, that the switch can
support. If the maximum peers are established, no more dynamic peers will be
enabled even if the maximum dynamic peers limit you had configured for the
groups was not reached.
Given below are the basic commands for configuring dynamic peers:
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor group <1-8> listen range <IP address> <subnet mask>
(Define
IP address range)
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor group <1-8> remote­as <1-65535> alternate­as <1-65535>
(Enter up to 5
alternate AS numbers)
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# no neighbor group <1-8> shutdown
Removing Dynamic Peers
You cannot remove dynamic peers manually. However, you can stop a dynamic
peer using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# router bgp stop <neighbor number>
The stop command interrupts the BGP connection until the peer tries to
re-establish the connection.
Also, when a dynamic peer state changes from established to idle, BGP removes
the dynamic peer.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
429
Loopback Interfaces
In many networks, multiple connections may exist between network devices. In
such environments, it may be useful to employ a loopback interface for a common
BGP router address, rather than peering the switch to each individual interface.
Note: To ensure that the loopback interface is reachable from peer devices, it must
be advertised using an interior routing protocol (such as OSPF), or a static route
must be configured on the peer.
To configure an existing loopback interface for BGP neighbor, use the following
commands:
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor <#> update­source loopback <1-5>
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# exit
What is a Route Map?
A route map is used to control and modify routing information. Route maps define
conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another or
controlling routing information when injecting it in and out of BGP. For example, a
route map is used to set a preference value for a specific route from a peer router
and another preference value for all other routes learned via the same peer router.
For example, the following command is used to enter the Route Map mode for
defining a route map:
RS 8272(config)# route­map <map number> (Select a route map)
RS 8272(config­route­map)# ?
(List available commands)
A route map allows you to match attributes, such as metric, network address, and
AS number. It also allows users to overwrite the local preference metric and to
append the AS number in the AS route. See “BGP Failover Configuration” on
page 439.
Lenovo N/OS allows you to configure 255 route maps. Each route map can have up
to 32 access lists. Each access list consists of a network filter. A network filter
defines an IPv4 address and subnet mask of the network that you want to include
in the filter. Figure 36 illustrates the relationship between route maps, access lists,
and network filters.
430
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Figure 36. Distributing Network Filters in Access Lists and Route Maps
Route Maps
Network Filter
(rmap)
(nwf)
Access Lists
(alist)
Route Map 1
Route Map 2
Route Map 255
1
-------
1
32
8
1
------32
9
16
1
-------
249
32
256
Next Hop Peer IP Address
Next hop peer IP address can be configured only for route maps used in BGP.
When a route map is applied on ingress, the next hop of learnt routes is replaced
with peer IP address. When applied on egress, the next hop of the redistributed
routes is replaced with the local IP address.
RS 8272(config)# route­map <map number>
RS 8272(config­router­map)# set ip next­hop <peer IP address>
Incoming and Outgoing Route Maps
You can have two types of route maps: incoming and outgoing. A BGP peer router
can be configured to support up to eight route maps in the incoming route map list
and outgoing route map list.
If a route map is not configured in the incoming route map list, the router imports
all BGP updates. If a route map is configured in the incoming route map list, the
router ignores all unmatched incoming updates. If you set the action to deny, you
must add another route map to permit all unmatched updates.
Route maps in an outgoing route map list behave similar to route maps in an
incoming route map list. If a route map is not configured in the outgoing route
map list, all routes are advertised or permitted. If a route map in the outgoing route
map list is set to permit, matched routes are advertised and unmatched routes are
ignored.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
431
Precedence
You can set a priority to a route map by specifying a precedence value with the
following command (Route Map mode):
RS 8272(config)# route­map <map number> (Select a route map)
RS 8272(config­route­map)# precedence <1-255>(Specify a precedence)
RS 8272(config­route­map)# exit
The smaller the value the higher the precedence. If two route maps have the same
precedence value, the smaller number has higher precedence.
Configuration Overview
To configure route maps, you need to do the following:
1. Define a network filter.
RS 8272(config)# ip match­address 1 <IPv4 address> <IPv4 subnet mask>
RS 8272(config)# ip match­address 1 enable
Enter a filter number from 1 to 256. Specify the IPv4 address and subnet mask of
the network that you want to match. Enable the network filter. You can distribute
up to 256 network filters among 64 route maps each containing 32 access lists.
2. (Optional) Define the criteria for the access list and enable it.
Specify the access list and associate the network filter number configured in Step 1.
RS 8272(config)# route­map 1
RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list 1 match­address 1
RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list 1 metric <metric value> RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list 1 action deny
RS 8272(config­route­map)# access­list 1 enable
Steps 2 and 3 are optional, depending on the criteria that you want to match. In
Step 2, the network filter number is used to match the subnets defined in the
network filter. In Step 3, the autonomous system number is used to match the
subnets. Or, you can use both (Step 2 and Step 3) criteria: access list (network filter)
and access path (AS filter) to configure the route maps.
3. (Optional) Configure the AS filter attributes.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# as­path­list 1 as 1
RS 8272(config­route­map)# as­path­list 1 action deny
RS 8272(config­route­map)# as­path­list 1 enable
4. (Optional) Set up the BGP attributes.
If you want to overwrite the attributes that the peer router is sending, define the
following BGP attributes:

432
Specify up to three AS numbers that you want to prepend to a matched route
and the local preference for the matched route.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Specify the metric [Multi Exit Discriminator (MED)] for the matched route.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# as­path­preference <AS number> [<AS number>]
[<AS number>]
RS 8272(config­route­map)# local­preference <local preference value>
RS 8272(config­route­map)# metric <metric value>
5. Enable the route map.
RS 8272(config­route­map)# enable
RS 8272(config­route­map)# exit
6. Turn BGP on.
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# enable
7. Assign the route map to a peer router.
Select the peer router and then add the route map to the incoming route map list,
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 route­map in <1-255>
or to the outgoing route map list.
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 route­map out <1-255>
8. Exit Router BGP mode.
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
433
Aggregating Routes
Aggregation is the process of combining several different routes in such a way that
a single route can be advertised, which minimizes the size of the routing table. You
can configure aggregate routes in BGP either by redistributing an aggregate route
into BGP or by creating an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table.
To define an aggregate route in the BGP routing table, use the following
commands:
>> # router bgp
>> (config­router­bgp)# aggregate­address <1-16> <IPv4 address> <mask>
>> (config­router­bgp)# aggregate­address <1-16> enable
The origin code for the aggregated route is either IGP or INCOMPLETE.
An example of creating a BGP aggregate route is shown in “Default Redistribution
and Route Aggregation Example” on page 441.
Redistributing Routes
In addition to running multiple routing protocols simultaneously, N/OS software
can redistribute information from one routing protocol to another. For example,
you can instruct the switch to use BGP to re-advertise static routes. This applies to
all of the IP-based routing protocols.
You can also conditionally control the redistribution of routes between routing
domains by defining a method known as route maps between the two domains.
For more information on route maps, see “What is a Route Map?” on page 430.
Redistributing routes is another way of providing policy control over whether to
export OSPF routes, fixed routes, and static routes. For an example configuration,
see “Default Redistribution and Route Aggregation Example” on page 441.
Default routes can be configured using the following methods:

Import

Originate—The router sends a default route to peers if it does not have any
default routes in its routing table.

Redistribute—Default routes are either configured through the default gateway
or learned via other protocols and redistributed to peer routers. If the default
routes are from the default gateway, enable the static routes because default
routes from the default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are
learned from another routing protocol, make sure you enable that protocol for
redistribution.

None
The origin code for the redistributed routes is INCOMPLETE.
434
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
BGP Communities
BGP communities are attribute tags that allow controlled distribution of routing
information based on an agreement between BGP peers. Communities are
commonly used by transit service providers to enable peering customers to choose
specific routing destinations for their outgoing routes. The transit service provider
would typically publish a list of well-known or proprietary communities along
with their descriptions, and take it upon itself to advertise incoming routes
accordingly. For instance, an ISP may advertise that incoming routes tagged with
community XY:01 will be advertised only to European peers while incoming routes
tagged with community XY:02 will be advertised only to Asian peers.
The RackSwitch G8272 can be configured to manage the community tags applied
to the outgoing route updates. It does not, however, modify any routing decisions
based on the community tags.
Up to 32 community tags can be applied to prefixes that pass a route-map. Valid
values are between 0:0 and 65535:65535. Newly added communities will replace
the existing communities. To set communities to prefixes that pass the route-map,
use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# route­map <map number>
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set community {aa:nn [aa:nn]}
To remove all community tags from prefixes that pass the route-map, use the
following command:
RS 8272(config­route­map)# set community none
To propagate prefixes that pass the route-map with their original community
settings, use the following command:
RS 8272(config­route­map)# no set community
To enable or disable community tags forwarding for specific neighbors or neighbor
groups, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor 5 send­community
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# no neighbor 6 send­community
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor group 1 send­community
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
435
BGP Attributes
The following BGP attributes are discussed in this section: Local preference, metric
(Multi-Exit Discriminator), and Next hop.
Local Preference Attribute
When there are multiple paths to the same destination, the local preference
attribute indicates the preferred path. The path with the higher preference is
preferred (the default value of the local preference attribute is 100). Unlike the
weight attribute, which is only relevant to the local router, the local preference
attribute is part of the routing update and is exchanged among routers in the same
AS.
The local preference attribute can be set in one of two ways:

The following commands use the BGP default local preference method, affecting
the outbound direction only.
>> # router bgp
>> (config_router_bgp)# local­preference <0-4294967294>
>> (config_router_bgp)# exit

The following commands use the route map local preference method, which
affects both inbound and outbound directions.
>> # route­map 1
>> (config_route_map)# local­preference
>> (config_router_map)# exit
Metric (Multi-Exit Discriminator) Attribute
This attribute is a hint to external neighbors about the preferred path into an AS
when there are multiple entry points. A lower metric value is preferred over a
higher metric value. The default value of the metric attribute is 0.
Unlike local preference, the metric attribute is exchanged between ASs; however, a
metric attribute that comes into an AS does not leave the AS.
When an update enters the AS with a certain metric value, that value is used for
decision making within the AS. When BGP sends that update to another AS, the
metric is reset to 0.
Unless otherwise specified, the router compares metric attributes for paths from
external neighbors that are in the same AS.
436
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Next Hop Attribute
BGP routing updates sent to a neighbor contain the next hop IP address used to
reach a destination. In eBGP, the edge router, by default, sends its own IP address
as the next hop address. However, this can sometimes cause routing path failures
in Non-Broadcast Multiaccess Networks (NBMA) and when the edge router sends
iBGP updates.
To avoid routing failures, you can manually configure the next hop IP address. In
case of NBMA networks, you can configure the external BGP speaker to advertise
its own IP address as the next hop. In case of iBGP updates, you can configure the
edge iBGP router to send its IP address as the next hop.
Next hop can be configured on a BGP peer or a peer group. Use the following
commands:

Next Hop for a BGP Peer
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor <number> next­hop­self

Next Hop for a BGP Peer Group:
RS 8272(config)# router bgp
RS 8272(config­router­bgp)# neighbor group <number> next­hop­self
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
437
Selecting Route Paths in BGP
BGP selects only one path as the best path. It does not rely on metric attributes to
determine the best path. When the same network is learned via more than one BGP
peer, BGP uses its policy for selecting the best route to that network. The BGP
implementation on the G8272 uses the following criteria to select a path when the
same route is received from multiple peers.
1. Local fixed and static routes are preferred over learned routes.
2. With iBGP peers, routes with higher local preference values are selected.
3. In the case of multiple routes of equal preference, the route with lower AS path
weight is selected.
AS path weight = 128 x AS path length (number of autonomous systems traversed).
4. In the case of equal weight and routes learned from peers that reside in the same
AS, the lower metric is selected.
Note: A route with a metric is preferred over a route without a metric.
5. In the case of equal cost, the eBGP route is preferred over iBGP.
6. The lower cost to the next hop of routes is selected.
7. If all routes have same route type (eBGP or iBGP), the route with the lower router
ID is selected.
8. The first learned route is selected if the same router ID is present.
When the path is selected, BGP puts the selected path in its routing table and
propagates the path to its neighbors.
Equal Cost Multi-Path
BGP can be configured to load balance the traffic over multiple paths if first six
steps in path selection are identical and the next-hop of the route differs.
Multipath Relax
BGP multipath relax functionality allows load balancing across different
autonomous system paths that have equal AS path length. This functionality can
be enabled using the command:
RS 8272(config-router-bgp)# bestpath as-path multipath-relax
438
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
BGP Failover Configuration
Use the following example to create redundant default gateways for a G8272 at a
Web Host/ISP site, eliminating the possibility, if one gateway goes down, that
requests will be forwarded to an upstream router unknown to the switch.
As shown in Figure 37, the switch is connected to ISP 1 and ISP 2. The customer
negotiates with both ISPs to allow the switch to use their peer routers as default
gateways. The ISP peer routers will then need to announce themselves as default
gateways to the G8272.
Figure 37. BGP Failover Configuration Example
Switch
IP: 200.200.200.1
IP: 210.210.210.1
BladeCenter
Server 1
IP: 200.200.200.10
Server 2
IP: 200.200.200.11
On the G8272, one peer router (the secondary one) is configured with a longer AS
path than the other, so that the peer with the shorter AS path will be seen by the
switch as the primary default gateway. ISP 2, the secondary peer, is configured
with a metric of “3,” thereby appearing to the switch to be three router hops away.
1. Define the VLANs.
For simplicity, both default gateways are configured in the same VLAN in this
example. The gateways could be in the same VLAN or different VLANs.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 1
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
439
2. Define the IP interfaces with IPv4 addresses.
The switch will need an IP interface for each default gateway to which it will be
connected. Each interface must be placed in the appropriate VLAN. These
interfaces will be used as the primary and secondary default gateways for the
switch.
>> # interface ip 1
>> (config­ip­if)# ip address 200.200.200.1
>> (config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
>> (config­ip­if)# enable
>> (config­ip­if)# exit
>> # interface ip 2
>> (config­ip­if)# ip address 210.210.210.1
>> (config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
>> (config­ip­if)# enable
>> (config­ip­if)# exit
3. Enable IP forwarding.
IP forwarding is turned on by default and is used for VLAN-to-VLAN (non-BGP)
routing. Make sure IP forwarding is on if the default gateways are on different
subnets or if the switch is connected to different subnets and those subnets need to
communicate through the switch (which they almost always do).
>> # ip routing
Note: To help eliminate the possibility for a Denial of Service (DoS) attack, the
forwarding of directed broadcasts is disabled by default.
4. Configure BGP peer router 1 and 2 with IPv4 addresses.
>> # router bgp
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 remote­address 200.200.200.2
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 remote­as 100
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 remote­address 210.210.210.2
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 remote­as 200
440
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Default Redistribution and Route Aggregation Example
This example shows you how to configure the switch to redistribute information
from one routing protocol to another and create an aggregate route entry in the
BGP routing table to minimize the size of the routing table.
As illustrated in Figure 38, you have two peer routers: an internal and an external
peer router. Configure the G8272 to redistribute the default routes from AS 200 to
AS 135. At the same time, configure for route aggregation to allow you to condense
the number of routes traversing from AS 135 to AS 200.
Figure 38. Route Aggregation and Default Route Redistribution
Switch
10.1.1.135
1. Configure the IP interface.
2. Configure the AS number (AS 135) and router ID (10.1.1.135).
>> # router bgp
>> (config­router­bgp)# as 135
>> (config­router­bgp)# exit
>> # ip router­id 10.1.1.135 3. Configure internal peer router 1 and external peer router 2 with IPv4 addresses.
>> # router bgp
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 remote­address 10.1.1.4
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 remote­as 135
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 remote­address 20.20.20.2
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 2 remote­as 200
4. Configure redistribution for Peer 1.
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 redistribute default­action redistribute
>> (config­router­bgp)# neighbor 1 redistribute fixed
5. Configure aggregation policy control.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 30: Border Gateway Protocol
441
Configure the IPv4 routes that you want aggregated.
>> (config­router­bgp)# aggregate­address 1 135.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
>> (config­router­bgp)# aggregate­address 1 enable
442
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 31. OSPF
Lenovo Networking OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing
protocol. The Lenovo N/OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2
specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583, and OSPF version 3 specifications in
RFC 5340. The following sections discuss OSPF support for the RackSwitch G8272:

“OSPFv2 Overview” on page 444. This section provides information on OSPFv2
concepts, such as types of OSPF areas, types of routing devices, neighbors,
adjacencies, link state database, authentication, and internal versus external
routing.

“OSPFv2 Implementation in Lenovo N/OS” on page 449. This section describes
how OSPFv2 is implemented in N/OS, such as configuration parameters,
electing the designated router, summarizing routes, defining route maps and so
forth.

“OSPFv2 Configuration Examples” on page 459. This section provides
step-by-step instructions on configuring different OSPFv2 examples:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Creating a simple OSPF domain

Creating virtual links

Summarizing routes
“OSPFv3 Implementation in Lenovo N/OS” on page 468. This section describes
differences and additional features found in OSPFv3.
443
OSPFv2 Overview
OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an
Autonomous System (AS). The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known
as areas.
All routing devices maintain link information in their own Link State Database
(LSDB). OSPF allows networks to be grouped together into an area. The topology
of an area is hidden from the rest of the AS, thereby reducing routing traffic.
Routing within an area is determined only by the area’s own topology, thus
protecting it from bad routing data. An area can be generalized as an IP
subnetwork.
The following sections describe key OSPF concepts.
Types of OSPF Areas
An AS can be broken into logical units known as areas. In any AS with multiple
areas, one area must be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone
acts as the central OSPF area. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the
backbone. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone, which
then distributes it to other areas as needed.
As shown in Figure 39, OSPF defines the following types of areas:
444

Stub Area—an area that is connected to only one other area. The stub area
receives information from other areas, but external route information is not
distributed into stub areas.

Not-So-Stubby-Area (NSSA)—similar to a stub area with additional capabilities.
Routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit
and backbone areas. External routes from outside the AS can be advertised
within the NSSA, but external routes coming from backbone area are not
accepted.

Transit Area—an area that also carries data traffic which neither originates nor
terminates in the area itself.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Figure 39. OSPF Area Types
Backbone
Area 0
(Also a Transit Area)
ABR
ABR
ABR
Internal LSA
Routes
Stub Area
Not-So-Stubby Area
(NSSA)
No External Routes
from Backbone
Transit Area
Virtual
Link
ABR
External LSA
Routes
ASBR
Non-OSPF Area
RIP/BGP AS
ABR = Area Border Router
ASBR = Autonomous System
Boundary Router
Stub Area, NSSA,
or Transit Area
Connected to Backbone
via Virtual Link
Types of OSPF Routing Devices
As shown in Figure 40, OSPF uses the following types of routing devices:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Internal Router (IR)—a router that has all of its interfaces within the same area.
IRs maintain LSDBs identical to those of other routing devices within the local
area.

Area Border Router (ABR)—a router that has interfaces in multiple areas. ABRs
maintain one LSDB for each connected area and disseminate routing
information between areas.

Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR)—a router that acts as a gateway
between the OSPF domain and non-OSPF domains, such as RIP, BGP, and static
routes.
Chapter 31: OSPF
445
Figure 40. OSPF Domain and an Autonomous System
OSPF Autonomous System
Backbone
Area 0
BGP
External
Routes
Area 3
Inter-Area Routes
(Summary Routes)
ASBR
ABR
RIP
ABR
ASBR
Area 1
ABR
Internal
Router
Area 2
Neighbors and Adjacencies
In areas with two or more routing devices, neighbors and adjacencies are formed.
Neighbors are routing devices that maintain information about each others’ state. To
establish neighbor relationships, routing devices periodically send hello packets
on each of their interfaces. All routing devices that share a common network
segment, appear in the same area, and have the same health parameters (hello
and dead intervals) and authentication parameters respond to each other’s hello
packets and become neighbors. Neighbors continue to send periodic hello packets
to advertise their health to neighbors. In turn, they listen to hello packets to
determine the health of their neighbors and to establish contact with new
neighbors.
The hello process is used for electing one of the neighbors as the network segment’s
Designated Router (DR) and one as the network segment’s Backup Designated
Router (BDR). The DR is adjacent to all other neighbors on that specific network
segment and acts as the central contact for database exchanges. Each neighbor
sends its database information to the DR, which relays the information to the other
neighbors.
The BDR is adjacent to all other neighbors (including the DR). Each neighbor sends
its database information to the BDR just as with the DR, but the BDR merely stores
this data and does not distribute it. If the DR fails, the BDR will take over the task
of distributing database information to the other neighbors.
The Link-State Database
OSPF is a link-state routing protocol. A link represents an interface (or routable
path) from the routing device. By establishing an adjacency with other OSPF
routers, each routing device in an OSPF area maintains an identical Link-State
Database (LSDB) describing the network topology for its area.
Each routing device transmits a Link-State Advertisement (LSA) on each of its
active interfaces. LSAs are entered into the LSDB of each routing device. OSPF uses
flooding to distribute LSAs between routing devices. Interfaces may also be passive.
Passive interfaces send LSAs to active interfaces, but do not receive LSAs, hello
446
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
packets, or any other OSPF protocol information from active interfaces. Passive
interfaces behave as stub networks, allowing OSPF routing devices to be aware of
devices that do otherwise participate in OSPF (either because they do not support
it, or because the administrator chooses to restrict OSPF traffic exchange or transit).
When LSAs result in changes to the routing device’s LSDB, the routing device
forwards the changes to the adjacent neighbors (the DR and BDR) for distribution
to the other neighbors.
OSPF routing updates occur only when changes occur, instead of periodically. For
each new route, if a neighbor is interested in that route (for example, if configured
to receive static routes and the new route is indeed static), an update message
containing the new route is sent to the adjacency. For each route removed from the
route table, if the route has already been sent to a neighbor, an update message
containing the route to withdraw is sent.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
447
The Shortest Path First Tree
The routing devices use a link-state algorithm (Dijkstra’s algorithm) to calculate the
shortest path to all known destinations, based on the cumulative cost required to
reach the destination.
The cost of an individual interface in OSPF is an indication of the overhead
required to send packets across it. The cost is inversely proportional to the
bandwidth of the interface. A lower cost indicates a higher bandwidth.
Internal Versus External Routing
To ensure effective processing of network traffic, every routing device on your
network needs to know how to send a packet (directly or indirectly) to any other
location/destination in your network. This is referred to as internal routing and can
be done with static routes or using active internal routing protocols, such as OSPF,
RIP, or RIPv2.
It is also useful to tell routers outside your network (upstream providers or peers)
about the routes you have access to in your network. Sharing of routing
information between autonomous systems is known as external routing.
Typically, an AS will have one or more border routers (peer routers that exchange
routes with other OSPF networks) as well as an internal routing system enabling
every router in that AS to reach every other router and destination within that AS.
When a routing device advertises routes to boundary routers on other autonomous
systems, it is effectively committing to carry data to the IP space represented in the
route being advertised. For example, if the routing device advertises 192.204.4.0/24,
it is declaring that if another router sends data destined for any address in the
192.204.4.0/24 range, it will carry that data to its destination.
448
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
OSPFv2 Implementation in Lenovo N/OS
N/OS supports a single instance of OSPF and up to 4K routes on the network. The
following sections describe OSPF implementation in N/OS:









“Configurable Parameters” on page 449
“Defining Areas” on page 450
“Interface Cost” on page 452
“Electing the Designated Router and Backup” on page 452
“Summarizing Routes” on page 452
“Default Routes” on page 453
“Virtual Links” on page 454
“Router ID” on page 454
“Authentication” on page 455
Configurable Parameters
In N/OS, OSPF parameters can be configured through the Command Line
Interfaces (CLI/ISCLI), Browser-Based Interface (BBI), or through SNMP. For more
information, see “Switch Administration” on page 29.
The ISCLI supports the following parameters: interface output cost, interface
priority, dead and hello intervals, retransmission interval, and interface transmit
delay.
In addition to the preceding parameters, you can specify the following:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Shortest Path First (SPF) interval—Time interval between successive calculations
of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.

Stub area metric—A stub area can be configured to send a numeric metric value
such that all routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to
potentially influence routing decisions.

Default routes—Default routes with weight metrics can be manually injected
into transit areas. This helps establish a preferred route when multiple routing
devices exist between two areas. It also helps route traffic to external networks.

Passive—When enabled, the interface sends LSAs to upstream devices, but does
not otherwise participate in OSPF protocol exchanges.

Point-to-Point—For LANs that have only two OSPF routing agents (the G8272
and one other device), this option allows the switch to significantly reduce the
amount of routing information it must carry and manage.
Chapter 31: OSPF
449
Defining Areas
If you are configuring multiple areas in your OSPF domain, one of the areas must
be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone is the central OSPF
area and is usually physically connected to all other areas. The areas inject routing
information into the backbone which, in turn, disseminates the information into
other areas.
Since the backbone connects the areas in your network, it must be a contiguous
area. If the backbone is partitioned (possibly as a result of joining separate OSPF
networks), parts of the AS will be unreachable, and you will need to configure
virtual links to reconnect the partitioned areas (see “Virtual Links” on page 454).
Up to six OSPF areas can be connected to the G8272 with N/OS software. To
configure an area, the OSPF number must be defined and then attached to a
network interface on the switch. The full process is explained in the following
sections.
An OSPF area is defined by assigning two pieces of information: an area index and
an area ID. The commands to define and enable an OSPF area are as follows:
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area <area
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area <area
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
index> area­id <n.n.n.n>
index> enable
Note: The area option is an arbitrary index used only on the switch and does not
represent the actual OSPF area number. The actual OSPF area number is defined in
the area portion of the command as explained in the following sections.
Assigning the Area Index
The area <area index> option is actually just an arbitrary index (0-19) used only by
the G8272. This index number does not necessarily represent the OSPF area
number, though for configuration simplicity, it ought to where possible.
For example, both of the following sets of commands define OSPF area 0 (the
backbone) and area 1 because that information is held in the area ID portion of the
command. However, the first set of commands is easier to maintain because the
arbitrary area indexes agree with the area IDs:


450
Area index and area ID agree
area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
(Use index 0 to set area 0 in ID octet
format)
area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
(Use index 1 to set area 1 in ID octet
format)
Area index set to an arbitrary value
area 1 area­id 0.0.0.0
(Use index 1 to set area 0 in ID octet
format)
area 2 area­id 0.0.0.1
(Use index 2 to set area 1 in ID octet
format)
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Using the Area ID to Assign the OSPF Area Number
The OSPF area number is defined in the areaid <IP address> option. The octet
format is used to be compatible with two different systems of notation used by
other OSPF network vendors. There are two valid ways to designate an area ID:

Single Number
Most common OSPF vendors express the area ID number as a single number.
For example, the Cisco IOS-based router command “network 1.1.1.0
0.0.0.255 area 1” defines the area number simply as “area 1.”

Multi-octet (IP address): Placing the area number in the last octet (0.0.0.n)
Some OSPF vendors express the area ID number in multi-octet format. For
example, “area 0.0.0.2” represents OSPF area 2 and can be specified directly
on the G8272 as “area­id 0.0.0.2”.
On the G8272, using the last octet in the area ID, “area 1” is equivalent to
“area­id 0.0.0.1”.
Note: Although both types of area ID formats are supported, be sure that the area
IDs are in the same format throughout an area.
Attaching an Area to a Network
Once an OSPF area has been defined, it must be associated with a network. To
attach the area to a network, you must assign the OSPF area index to an IP interface
that participates in the area. The format for the command is as follows:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <interface
number>
index>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area <area
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
For example, the following commands could be used to configure IP interface 14 to
use 10.10.10.1 on the 10.10.10.0/24 network, to define OSPF area 1, and to attach the
area to the network:
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 14 RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.10.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
Note: OSPFv2 supports IPv4 only. IPv6 is supported in OSPFv3 (see “OSPFv3
Implementation in Lenovo N/OS” on page 468).
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
451
Interface Cost
The OSPF link-state algorithm (Dijkstra’s algorithm) places each routing device at
the root of a tree and determines the cumulative cost required to reach each
destination. Usually, the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the
interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. You can manually enter the cost for
the output route with the following command (Interface IP mode):
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf cost <cost
value (1-65535)>
Electing the Designated Router and Backup
In any area with more than two routing devices, a Designated Router (DR) is
elected as the central contact for database exchanges among neighbors, and a
Backup Designated Router (BDR) is elected in case the DR fails.
DR and BDR elections are made through the hello process. The election can be
influenced by assigning a priority value to the OSPF interfaces on the G8272. The
command is as follows:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf priority <priority
value (0-255)>
A priority value of 255 is the highest, and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0
specifies that the interface cannot be used as a DR or BDR. In case of a tie, the
routing device with the highest router ID wins. Interfaces configured as passive do
not participate in the DR or BDR election process:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf passive­interface
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
Summarizing Routes
Route summarization condenses routing information. Without summarization,
each routing device in an OSPF network would retain a route to every subnet in the
network. With summarization, routing devices can reduce some sets of routes to a
single advertisement, reducing both the load on the routing device and the
perceived complexity of the network. The importance of route summarization
increases with network size.
Summary routes can be defined for up to 16 IP address ranges using the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range <range
number> address <IP address> <mask>
where <range number> is a number 1 to 16, <IP address> is the base IP address for the
range, and <mask> is the IP address mask for the range. For a detailed configuration
example, see “Example 3: Summarizing Routes” on page 466.
452
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Default Routes
When an OSPF routing device encounters traffic for a destination address it does
not recognize, it forwards that traffic along the default route. Typically, the default
route leads upstream toward the backbone until it reaches the intended area or an
external router.
Each G8272 acting as an ABR automatically inserts a default route into each
attached area. In simple OSPF stub areas or NSSAs with only one ABR leading
upstream (see Area 1 in Figure 41), any traffic for IP address destinations outside
the area is forwarded to the switch’s IP interface, and then into the connected
transit area (usually the backbone). Since this is automatic, no further
configuration is required for such areas.
Figure 41. Injecting Default Routes
If the switch is in a transit area and has a configured default gateway, it can inject a
default route into rest of the OSPF domain. Use the following command to
configure the switch to inject OSPF default routes (Router OSPF mode):
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# default­information <metric
value> <metric type (1 or 2)>
In this command, <metric value> sets the priority for choosing this switch for
default route. The value none sets no default and 1 sets the highest priority for
default route. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions
for external routes.
When the switch is configured to inject a default route, an AS-external LSA with
link state ID 0.0.0.0 is propagated throughout the OSPF routing domain. This LSA
is sent with the configured metric value and metric type.
The OSPF default route configuration can be removed with the command:
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# no default­information
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
453
Virtual Links
Usually, all areas in an OSPF AS are physically connected to the backbone. In some
cases where this is not possible, you can use a virtual link. Virtual links are created
to connect one area to the backbone through another non-backbone area (see
Figure 39 on page 445).
The area which contains a virtual link must be a transit area and have full routing
information. Virtual links cannot be configured inside a stub area or NSSA. The
area type must be defined as transit using the following command:
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area
<area index> type transit
The virtual link must be configured on the routing devices at each endpoint of the
virtual link, though they may traverse multiple routing devices. To configure a
G8272 as one endpoint of a virtual link, use the following command:
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link <link number> neighbor­router <router ID>
where <link number> is a value between 1 and 3, <area index> is the OSPF area index
of the transit area, and <router ID> is the IP address of the virtual neighbor, the
routing device at the target endpoint. Another router ID is needed when
configuring a virtual link in the other direction. To provide the G8272 with a router
ID, see the following section Router ID.
For a detailed configuration example on Virtual Links, see “Example 2: Virtual
Links” on page 462.
Router ID
Routing devices in OSPF areas are identified by a router ID. The router ID is
expressed in IP address format. The IP address of the router ID is not required to be
included in any IP interface range or in any OSPF area, and may even use the
G8272 loopback interface.
The router ID can be configured in one of the following two ways:
Dynamically—OSPF protocol configures the lowest IP interface IP address as the
router ID (loopback interface has priority over the IP interface). This is the
default.
 Statically—Use the following command to manually configure the router ID:

RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# ip router­id <IPv4 address>
If there is a loopback interface, its IP address is always preferred as the router
ID, instead of an IP interface address. The ip router­id command is the
preferred method to set the router ID and it is always used in preference to the
other methods.
To modify the router ID from static to dynamic, set the router ID to 0.0.0.0, save
the configuration, and reboot the G8272.
 To view the router ID, use the following command:

RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# show ip ospf
454
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Authentication
OSPF protocol exchanges can be authenticated so that only trusted routing devices
can participate. This ensures less processing on routing devices that are not
listening to OSPF packets.
OSPF allows packet authentication and uses IP multicast when sending and
receiving packets. Routers participate in routing domains based on pre-defined
passwords. N/OS supports simple password (type 1 plain text passwords) and
MD5 cryptographic authentication. This type of authentication allows a password
to be configured per area.
We strongly recommend that you implement MD5 cryptographic authentication as
a best practice.
Figure 42 shows authentication configured for area 0 with the password test.
Simple authentication is also configured for the virtual link between area 2 and
area 0. Area 1 is not configured for OSPF authentication.
Figure 42. OSPF Authentication
Switch 2
Switch 1
Switch 3
Switch 5
key=blade
Switch 4
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
455
Configuring Plain Text OSPF Passwords
To configure simple plain text OSPF passwords on the switches shown in Figure 42
use the following commands:
1. Enable OSPF authentication for Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 authentication­type password
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
2. Configure a simple text password up to eight characters for each OSPF IP interface
in Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf key test
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf key test
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf key test
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
3. Enable OSPF authentication for Area 2 on switch 4.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 2 authentication­type password
4. Configure a simple text password up to eight characters for the virtual link
between Area 2 and Area 0 on switches 2 and 4.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 key blade
Configuring MD5 Authentication
Use the following commands to configure MD5 authentication on the switches
shown in Figure 42:
1. Enable OSPF MD5 authentication for Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 authentication­type md5
2. Configure MD5 key ID for Area 0 on switches 1, 2, and 3.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# message­digest­key 1 md5­key test
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
456
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
3. Assign MD5 key ID to OSPF interfaces on switches 1, 2, and 3.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf message­digest­key 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf message­digest­key 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf message­digest­key 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
4. Enable OSPF MD5 authentication for Area 2 on switch 4.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 authentication­type md5
5. Configure MD5 key for the virtual link between Area 2 and Area 0 on switches 2
and 4.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# message­digest­key 2 md5­key test
6. Assign MD5 key ID to OSPF virtual link on switches 2 and 4.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 message­digest­key 2
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
Host Routes for Load Balancing
N/OS implementation of OSPF includes host routes. Host routes are used for
advertising network device IP addresses to external networks, accomplishing the
following goals:

ABR Load Sharing
As a form of load balancing, host routes can be used for dividing OSPF traffic
among multiple ABRs. To accomplish this, each switch provides identical
services but advertises a host route for a different IP address to the external
network. If each IP address serves a different and equal portion of the external
world, incoming traffic from the upstream router must be split evenly among
ABRs.

ABR Failover
Complementing ABR load sharing, identical host routes can be configured on
each ABR. These host routes can be given different costs so that a different ABR
is selected as the preferred route for each server and the others are available as
backups for failover purposes.

Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP)
With equal cost multipath, a router potentially has several available next hops
towards any given destination. ECMP allows separate routes to be calculated for
each IP Type of Service. All paths of equal cost to a given destination are
calculated, and the next hops for all equal-cost paths are inserted into the
routing table.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
457
Loopback Interfaces in OSPF
A loopback interface is an IP interface which has an IP address, but is not
associated with any particular physical port. The loopback interface is thus always
available to the general network, regardless of which specific ports are in
operation. Because loopback interfaces are always available on the switch,
loopback interfaces may present an advantage when used as the router ID.
If dynamic router ID selection is used (see “Router ID” on page 454) loopback
interfaces can be used to force router ID selection. If a loopback interface is
configured, its IP address is automatically selected as the router ID, even if other IP
interfaces have lower IP addresses. If more than one loopback interface is
configured, the lowest loopback interface IP address is selected.
Loopback interfaces can be advertised into the OSPF domain by specifying an
OSPF host route with the loopback interface IP address.
To enable OSPF on an existing loopback interface:
RS 8272(config)# interface loopback <1-5>
RS 8272(config­ip­loopback)# ip ospf area <area ID> enable
RS 8272(config­ip­loopback)# exit
OSPF Features Not Supported in This Release
The following OSPF features are not supported in this release:
458

Summarizing external routes

Filtering OSPF routes

Using OSPF to forward multicast routes

Configuring OSPF on non-broadcast multi-access networks (such as frame relay,
X.25, or ATM)
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
OSPFv2 Configuration Examples
A summary of the basic steps for configuring OSPF on the G8272 is listed here.
Detailed instructions for each of the steps is covered in the following sections:
1. Configure IP interfaces.
One IP interface is required for each desired network (range of IP addresses) being
assigned to an OSPF area on the switch.
2. (Optional) Configure the router ID.
The router ID is required only when configuring virtual links on the switch.
3. Enable OSPF on the switch.
4. Define the OSPF areas.
5. Configure OSPF interface parameters.
IP interfaces are used for attaching networks to the various areas.
6. (Optional) Configure route summarization between OSPF areas.
7. (Optional) Configure virtual links.
8. (Optional) Configure host routes.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
459
Example 1: Simple OSPF Domain
In this example, two OSPF areas are defined—one area is the backbone and the
other is a stub area. A stub area does not allow advertisements of external routes,
thus reducing the size of the database. Instead, a default summary route of IP
address 0.0.0.0 is automatically inserted into the stub area. Any traffic for IP
address destinations outside the stub area will be forwarded to the stub area’s IP
interface, and then into the backbone.
Figure 43. A Simple OSPF Domain
Network
10.10.7.0/24
Network
10.10.12.0/24
Follow this procedure to configure OSPF support as shown in Figure 43:
1. Configure IP interfaces on each network that will be attached to OSPF areas.
In this example, two IP interfaces are needed:

Interface 1 for the backbone network on 10.10.7.0/24

Interface 2 for the stub area network on 10.10.12.0/24
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.7.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.12.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
Note: OSPFv2 supports IPv4 only. IPv6 is supported in OSPFv3 (see “OSPFv3
Implementation in Lenovo N/OS” on page 468).
2. Enable OSPF.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
3. Define the backbone.
The backbone is always configured as a transit area using areaid 0.0.0.0.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 enable
460
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. Define the stub area.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 type stub
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
5. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
6. Attach the network interface to the stub area.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
461
Example 2: Virtual Links
In the example shown in Figure 44, area 2 is not physically connected to the
backbone as is usually required. Instead, area 2 will be connected to the backbone
via a virtual link through area 1. The virtual link must be configured at each
endpoint.
Figure 44. Configuring a Virtual Link
Switch 1
Switch 2
Note: OSPFv2 supports IPv4 only. IPv6 is supported in OSPFv3 (see “OSPFv3
Implementation in Lenovo N/OS” on page 468).
Configuring OSPF for a Virtual Link on Switch #1
1. Configure IP interfaces on each network that will be attached to the switch.
In this example, two IP interfaces are needed:

Interface 1 for the backbone network on 10.10.7.0/24

Interface 2 for the transit area network on 10.10.12.0/24
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.7.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.12.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure the router ID.
A router ID is required when configuring virtual links. Later, when configuring the
other end of the virtual link on Switch 2, the router ID specified here will be used as
the target virtual neighbor (nbr) address.
RS 8272(config)# ip router­id 10.10.10.1 3. Enable OSPF.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
462
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
4. Define the backbone.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 enable
5. Define the transit area.
The area that contains the virtual link must be configured as a transit area.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
6. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
7. Attach the network interface to the transit area.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
8. Configure the virtual link.
The nbr router ID configured in this step must be the same as the router ID that
will be configured for Switch #2 in Step 2 on page 464.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 area 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 neighbor­router 10.10.14.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 enable
Configuring OSPF for a Virtual Link on Switch #2
1. Configure IP interfaces on each network that will be attached to OSPF areas.
In this example, two IP interfaces are needed:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Interface 1 for the transit area network on 10.10.12.0/24
Chapter 31: OSPF
463

Interface 2 for the stub area network on 10.10.24.0/24
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.12.2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.24.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure the router ID.
A router ID is required when configuring virtual links. This router ID must be the
same one specified as the target virtual neighbor (nbr) on switch 1 in Step 8 on
page 463.
RS 8272(config)# ip router­id 10.10.14.1 3. Enable OSPF.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
4. Define the backbone.
This version of N/OS requires that a backbone index be configured on the
non-backbone end of the virtual link as follows:
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 enable
5. Define the transit area.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 enable
6. Define the stub area.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 2 area­id 0.0.0.2
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 2 type stub
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 2 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
7. Attach the network interface to the transmit area.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
464
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
8. Attach the network interface to the stub area.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
9. Configure the virtual link.
The nbr router ID configured in this step must be the same as the router ID that
was configured for switch #1 in Step 2 on page 462.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 area 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 neighbor­router 10.10.10.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­virtual­link 1 enable
Other Virtual Link Options
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

You can use redundant paths by configuring multiple virtual links.

Only the endpoints of the virtual link are configured. The virtual link path may
traverse multiple routers in an area as long as there is a routable path between
the endpoints.
Chapter 31: OSPF
465
Example 3: Summarizing Routes
By default, ABRs advertise all the network addresses from one area into another
area. Route summarization can be used for consolidating advertised addresses and
reducing the perceived complexity of the network.
If network IP addresses in an area are assigned to a contiguous subnet range, you
can configure the ABR to advertise a single summary route that includes all
individual IP addresses within the area.
The following example shows one summary route from area 1 (stub area) injected
into area 0 (the backbone). The summary route consists of all IP addresses from
36.128.192.0 through 36.128.254.255 except for the routes in the range 36.128.200.0
through 36.128.200.255.
Note: OSPFv2 supports IPv4 only. IPv6 is supported in OSPFv3 (see “OSPFv3
Implementation in Lenovo N/OS” on page 468).
Figure 45. Summarizing Routes
Note: You can specify a range of addresses to prevent advertising by using the
hide option. In this example, routes in the range 36.128.200.0 through
36.128.200.255 are kept private.
Use the following procedure to configure OSPF support as shown in Figure 45:
1. Configure IP interfaces for each network which will be attached to OSPF areas.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.7.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 36.128.192.1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip netmask 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Enable OSPF.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# enable
466
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
3. Define the backbone.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 0 enable
4. Define the stub area.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 type stub
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area 1 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
5. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
6. Attach the network interface to the stub area.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
7. Configure route summarization by specifying the starting address and mask of the
range of addresses to be summarized.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 1 address 36.128.192.0 255.255.192.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 1 area 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 1 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
8. Use the hide command to prevent a range of addresses from advertising to the
backbone.
RS 8272(config)# router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 2 address 36.128.200.0 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 2 area 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 2 hide RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
Verifying OSPF Configuration
Use the following commands to verify the OSPF configuration on your switch:
show ip ospf show ip ospf neighbor  show ip ospf database database­summary
 show ip ospf routes 

Refer to the Lenovo Networking OS Command Reference for information on the
preceding commands.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
467
OSPFv3 Implementation in Lenovo N/OS
OSPF version 3 is based on OSPF version 2, but has been modified to support IPv6
addressing. In most other ways, OSPFv3 is similar to OSPFv2: They both have the
same packet types and interfaces, and both use the same mechanisms for neighbor
discovery, adjacency formation, LSA flooding, aging, and so on. The administrator
must be familiar with the OSPFv2 concepts covered in the preceding sections of
this chapter before implementing the OSPFv3 differences as described in the
following sections.
Although OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 are very similar, they represent independent
features on the G8272. They are configured separately, and both can run in parallel
on the switch with no relation to one another, serving different IPv6 and IPv4
traffic, respectively.
The Lenovo N/OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 3
authentication/confidentiality specifications in RFC 4552.
OSPFv3 Differences from OSPFv2
Note: When OSPFv3 is enabled, the OSPF backbone area (0.0.0.0) is created by
default and is always active.
OSPFv3 Requires IPv6 Interfaces
OSPFv3 is designed to support IPv6 addresses. This requires IPv6 interfaces to be
configured on the switch and assigned to OSPF areas, in much the same way IPv4
interfaces are assigned to areas in OSPFv2. This is the primary configuration
difference between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2.
See “Internet Protocol Version 6” on page 357 for configuring IPv6 interfaces.
OSPFv3 Uses Independent Command Paths
Though OSPFv3 and OSPFv2 are very similar, they are configured independently.
OSPFv3 command paths are located as follows:

In the ISCLI
RS 8272(config)# ipv6 router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# ?
(OSPFv3 router config mode)
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>(Configure
468
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf ?
OSPFv3)
(OSPFv3 interface config)
RS 8272# show ipv6 ospf ?
(Show OSPFv3 information)
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
OSPFv3 Identifies Neighbors by Router ID
Where OSPFv2 uses a mix of IPv4 interface addresses and Router IDs to identify
neighbors, depending on their type, OSPFv3 configuration consistently uses a
Router ID to identify all neighbors.
Although Router IDs are written in dotted decimal notation, and may even be
based on IPv4 addresses from an original OSPFv2 network configuration, it is
important to realize that Router IDs are not IP addresses in OSPFv3, and can be
assigned independently of IP address space. However, maintaining Router IDs
consistent with any legacy OSPFv2 IPv4 addressing allows for easier
implementation of both protocols.
Other Internal Improvements
OSPFv3 has numerous improvements that increase the protocol efficiency in
addition to supporting IPv6 addressing. These improvements change some of the
behaviors in the OSPFv3 network and may affect topology consideration, but have
little direct impact on configuration. For example:

Addressing fields have been removed from Router and Network LSAs.

Flexible treatment of unknown LSA types to make integration of OSPFv3 easier.

Interface network type can be specified using the command: RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf network {broadcast|non­broadcast|point­to­multipoint|point­to­point}

For an interface network type that is not broadcast or NBMA, link LSA
suppression can be enabled so link LSA is not originated for the interface. Use
the command: RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf linklsasuppress
OSPFv3 Limitations
N/OS 8.2 does not currently support multiple interfaces of OSPFv3 on the same
link.
OSPFv3 Configuration Example
The following example depicts the OSPFv3 equivalent configuration of
“Example 3: Summarizing Routes” on page 466 for OSPFv2.
In this example, one summary route from area 1 (stub area) is injected into area 0
(the backbone). The summary route consists of all IP addresses from the 36::0/32
portion of the 36::0/56 network, except for the routes in the 36::0/8 range.
Figure 46. Summarizing Routes
Backbone
Stub Area
Area 0
(0.0.0.0)
Area 1
(0.0.0.1)
IF 3
10::1
Summary Route
10::0/56
Network
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
IF 4
36::1
ABR
36::0/32
(- 36::0/8)
36::0/56
Network
Chapter 31: OSPF
469
Note: You can specify a range of addresses to prevent advertising by using the
hide option. In this example, routes in the 36::0/8 range are kept private.
Use the following procedure to configure OSPFv3 support as shown in Figure 45:
1. Configure IPv6 interfaces for each link which will be attached to OSPFv3 areas.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 address 10:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 prefixlen 56
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 4
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 36:0:0:0:0:0:1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 prefixlen 56
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
This is equivalent to configuring the IP address and netmask for IPv4 interfaces.
2. Enable OSPFv3.
RS 8272(config)# ipv6 router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# enable
This is equivalent to the OSPFv2 enable option in the router ospf command
path.
3. Define the backbone.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 enable
This is identical to OSPFv2 configuration.
4. Define the stub area.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 1 area­id 0.0.0.1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 1 type stub
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 1 enable
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# exit
This is identical to OSPFv2 configuration.
5. Attach the network interface to the backbone.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf area 0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
The ipv6 command path is used instead of the OSPFv2 ip command path
6. Attach the network interface to the stub area.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 4
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf area 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
470
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The ipv6 command path is used instead of the OSPFv2 ip command path
7. Configure route summarization by specifying the starting address and prefix
length of the range of addresses to be summarized.
RS 8272(config)# ipv6 router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area­range 1 address 36:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 32
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area­range 1 area 0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area­range 1 enable
This differs from OSPFv2 only in that the OSPFv3 command path is used, and the
address and prefix are specified in IPv6 format.
8. Use the hide command to prevent a range of addresses from advertising to the
backbone.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 2 address 36:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 8
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 2 area 0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# area­range 2 hide RS 8272(config­router­ospf)# exit
This differs from OSPFv2 only in that the OSPFv3 command path is used, and the
address and prefix are specified in IPv6 format.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 31: OSPF
471
Neighbor Configuration Example
When using NBMA or point to multipoint interfaces, you must manually configure
neighbors. Following example includes the steps for neighbor configuration.
1. Configure IPv6 interface parameters:
RS 8272(config# interface ip 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 address 10:0:0:0:0:0:0:12 64
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf area 0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf retransmit­interval 5
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf transmit­delay 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf priority 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf hello­interval 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf dead­interval 40
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf network point­to­multipoint
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf poll­interval 120
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ipv6 ospf enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Enable OSPFv3:
RS 8272(config# ipv6 router ospf
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# router­id 12.12.12.12
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# enable
3. Define the backbone.
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 area­id 0.0.0.0
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 stability­interval 40
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 default­metric 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 default­metric type 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 translation­role candidate
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 type transit
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# area 0 enable
4. Configure neighbor entry:
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# neighbor 1 address fe80:0:0:0:dceb:ff:fe00:9
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# neighbor 1 interface 10
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# neighbor 1 priority 1
RS 8272(config­router­ospf3)# neighbor 1 enable
472
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 32. Service Location Protocol
Service Location Protocol (SLP) allows the switch to provide dynamic directory
services that help users find servers by attributes rather than by name or address.
SLP eliminates the need for a user to know the name of a network host supporting
a service. SLP allows the user to bind a service description to the network address
of the service.
Service Location Protocol is described in RFC 2608.
SLP defines specialized components called agents that perform tasks and support
services as follows:

User Agent (UA) supports service query functions. It requests service
information for user applications. The User Agent retrieves service information
from the Service Agent or Directory Agents. A Host On-Demand client is an
example of a User Agent.

Service Agent (SA) provides service registration and service advertisement.
Note: In this release, SA supports UA/DA on Linux with SLPv2 support.

Directory Agent (DA) collects service information from Service Agents to
provide a repository of service information in order to centralize it for efficient
access by User Agents. There can only be one Directory Agent present per given
host.
The Directory Agent acts as an intermediate tier in the SLP architecture, placed
between the User Agents and the Service Agents, so they communicate only with
the Directory Agent instead of with each other. This eliminates a large portion of
the multicast request or reply traffic on the network, and it protects the Service
Agents from being overwhelmed by too many service requests.
Services are described by the configuration of attributes associated with a type of
service. A User Agent can select an appropriate service by specifying the attributes
that it needs in a service request message. When service replies are returned, they
contain a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) pointing to the service desired, and
other information, such as server load, needed by the User Agent.
Active DA Discovery
When a Service Agent or User Agent initializes, it can perform Active Directory
Agent Discovery using a multicast service request and specifies the special,
reserved service type (service:directory-agent). Active DA Discovery is
achieved through the same mechanism as any other discovery using SLP.
The Directory Agent replies with unicast service replies, which provides the URLs
and attributes of the requested service.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 32: Service Location Protocol
473
SLP Configuration
Use the following ISCLI commands to configure SLP for the switch:
Table 41. SLP ISCLI Commands
Command Syntax and Usage
[no] ip slp enable
Enables or disables SLP on the switch.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip slp active-da-discovery enable
Enables or disables Active DA Discovery.
Command mode: Global configuration
clear ip slp directory-agents
Clears all Directory Agents learned by the switch.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip slp information
Displays SLP information.
Command mode: All
show ip slp directory­agents Displays Directory Agents learned by the switch.
Command mode: All
show ip slp user­agents Displays User Agents information.
Command mode: All
show ip slp counter
Displays SLP statistics.
Command mode: All
clear ip slp counters
Clears all Directory Agents learned by the switch.
Command mode: Global configuration
474
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 33. Protocol Independent Multicast
Lenovo Networking OS supports Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) in Sparse
Mode (PIM-SM) and Dense Mode (PIM-DM).
Note: Lenovo N/OS 8.2 does not support IPv6 for PIM.
The following sections discuss PIM support for the RackSwitch G8272:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“PIM Overview” on page 476

“Supported PIM Modes and Features” on page 477

“Basic PIM Settings” on page 478

“Additional Sparse Mode Settings” on page 481

“Using PIM with Other Features” on page 484

“PIM Configuration Examples” on page 485
475
PIM Overview
PIM is designed for efficiently routing multicast traffic across one or more IPv4
domains. This has benefits for application such as IP television, collaboration,
education, and software delivery, where a single source must deliver content (a
multicast) to a group of receivers that span both wide-area and inter-domain
networks.
Instead of sending a separate copy of content to each receiver, a multicast derives
efficiency by sending only a single copy of content toward its intended receivers.
This single copy only becomes duplicated when it reaches the target domain that
includes multiple receivers, or when it reaches a necessary bifurcation point
leading to different receiver domains.
PIM is used by multicast source stations, client receivers, and intermediary routers
and switches, to build and maintain efficient multicast routing trees. PIM is
protocol independent; It collects routing information using the existing unicast
routing functions underlying the IPv4 network, but does not rely on any particular
unicast protocol. For PIM to function, a Layer 3 routing protocol (such as BGP,
OSPF, RIP, or static routes) must first be configured on the switch.
PIM-SM is a reverse-path routing mechanism. Client receiver stations advertise
their willingness to join a multicast group. The local routing and switching devices
collect multicast routing information and forward the request toward the station
that will provide the multicast content. When the join requests reach the sending
station, the multicast data is sent toward the receivers, flowing in the opposite
direction of the original join requests.
Some routing and switching devices perform special PIM-SM functions. Within
each receiver domain, one router is elected as the Designated Router (DR) for
handling multicasts for the domain. DRs forward information to a similar device,
the Rendezvous Point (RP), which holds the root tree for the particular multicast
group.
Receiver join requests as well as sender multicast content initially converge at the
RP, which generates and distributes multicast routing data for the DRs along the
delivery path. As the multicast content flows, DRs use the routing tree information
obtained from the RP to optimize the paths both to and from send and receive
stations, bypassing the RP for the remainder of content transactions if a more
efficient route is available.
DRs continue to share routing information with the RP, modifying the multicast
routing tree when new receivers join, or pruning the tree when all the receivers in
any particular domain are no longer part of the multicast group.
476
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Supported PIM Modes and Features
For each interface attached to a PIM network component, PIM can be configured to
operate either in PIM Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) or PIM Dense Mode (PIM-DM).

PIM-SM is used in networks where multicast senders and receivers comprise a
relatively small (sparse) portion of the overall network. PIM-SM uses a more
complex process than PIM-DM for collecting and optimizing multicast routes,
but minimizes impact on other IP services and is more commonly used.

PIM-DM is used where multicast devices are a relatively large (dense) portion of
the network, with very frequent (or constant) multicast traffic. PIM-DM requires
less configuration on the switch than PIM-SM, but uses broadcasts that can
consume more bandwidth in establishing and optimizing routes.
The following PIM modes and features are not currently supported in N/OS 8.2:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Hybrid Sparse-Dense Mode (PIM-SM/DM). Sparse Mode and Dense Mode may
be configured on separate IP interfaces on the switch, but are not currently
supported simultaneously on the same IP interface.

PIM Source-Specific Multicast (PIM-SSM)

Anycast RP

PIM RP filters

Only configuration via the switch CLI is supported. PIM configuration is
currently not available using the BBI or via SNMP.
Chapter 33: Protocol Independent Multicast
477
Basic PIM Settings
To use PIM the following is required:
The PIM feature must be enabled globally on the switch.
PIM network components and PIM modes must be defined.
 IP interfaces must be configured for each PIM component.
 PIM neighbor filters may be defined (optional).
 If PIM-SM is used, define additional parameters:



Rendezvous Point

Designated Router preferences (optional)

Bootstrap Router preferences (optional)
Each of these tasks is covered in the following sections.
Note: In N/OS 8.2, PIM can be configured through the switch CLI only. PIM
configuration and information are not available using the BBI or via SNMP.
Globally Enabling or Disabling the PIM Feature
By default, PIM is disabled on the switch. PIM can be globally enabled or disabled
using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# [no] ip pim enable
Defining a PIM Network Component
The G8272 can be attached to a maximum of two independent PIM network
components. Each component represents a different PIM network, and can be
defined for either PIM-SM or PIM-DM operation. Basic PIM component
configuration is performed using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component <1-2>
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# mode {sparse|dense}
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# exit
The sparse option will place the component in Sparse Mode (PIM-SM). The
dense option will place the component in Dense Mode (PIM-DM). By default, PIM
component 1 is configured for Sparse Mode. PIM component 2 is unconfigured by
default.
Note: A component using PIM-SM must also be configured with a dynamic or
static Rendezvous Point (see “Specifying the Rendezvous Point” on page 481).
Defining an IP Interface for PIM Use
Each network attached to an IP interface on the switch may be assigned one of the
available PIM components. The same PIM component can be assigned to multiple
IP interfaces. The interfaces may belong to the same VLAN, and they may also
belong to different VLANs as long as their member IP addresses do not overlap.
478
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
To define an IP interface for use with PIM, first configured the interface with an
IPv4 address and VLAN as follows:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address <IPv4 address> <IPv4 mask>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan <VLAN number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
Note: The PIM feature currently supports only one VLAN for each IP interface.
Configurations where different interfaces on different VLANs share IP addresses
are not supported.
Next, PIM must be enabled on the interface, and the PIM network component ID
must be specified:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim component­id <1-2>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
By default, PIM component 1 is automatically assigned when PIM is enabled on
the IP interface.
Note: While PIM is enabled on the interface, the interface VLAN cannot be
changed. To change the VLAN, first disable PIM on the interface.
PIM Neighbor Filters
The G8272 accepts connection to up to 24 PIM interfaces. By default, the switch
accepts all PIM neighbors attached to the PIM-enabled interfaces, up to the
maximum number (72 neighbors). Once the maximum is reached, the switch will
deny further PIM neighbors.
To ensure that only the appropriate PIM neighbors are accepted by the switch, the
administrator can use PIM neighbor filters to specify which PIM neighbors may be
accepted or denied on a per-interface basis.
To turn PIM neighbor filtering on or off for a particular IP interface, use the
following commands:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# [no] ip pim neighbor­filter
When filtering is enabled, all PIM neighbor requests on the specified IP interface
will be denied by default. To allow a specific PIM neighbor, use the following
command:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim neighbor­addr <neighbor IPv4 address> allow
To remove a PIM neighbor from the accepted list, use the following command.
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim neighbor­addr <neighbor IPv4 address> deny
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 33: Protocol Independent Multicast
479
You can view configured PIM neighbor filters globally or for a specific IP interface
using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# show ip pim neighbor­filters
RS 8272(config)# show ip pim interface <Interface number> neighbor­filters
480
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Additional Sparse Mode Settings
Specifying the Rendezvous Point
Using PIM-SM, at least one PIM-capable router must be a candidate for use as a
Rendezvous Point (RP) for any given multicast group. If desired, the G8272 can act
as an RP candidate. To assign a configured switch IP interface as a candidate, use
the following procedure.
1. Select the PIM component that will represent the RP candidate:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component <1-2>
2. Configure the IPv4 address of the switch interface which will be advertised as a
candidate RP for the specified multicast group:
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# rp­candidate rp­address <group address> <group address mask> <candidate IPv4 address>
The switch interface will participate in the election of the RP that occurs on the
Bootstrap Router, or BSR (see “Specifying a Bootstrap Router” on page 482).
3. If using dynamic RP candidates, configure the amount of time that the elected
interface will remain the RP for the group before a re-election is performed:
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# rp­candidate holdtime <0-255>
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# exit
Static RP
If RP no election is desired, the switch can provide a static RP. Use the following
commands:
1. Enable static RP configuration.
RS 8272(config)# ip pim static­rp enable
2. Select the PIM component that will represent the RP candidate:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component <1-2>
3. Configure the static IPv4 address.
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# rp­static rp­address <group address> <group address
mask> <static IPv4 address>
Influencing the Designated Router Selection
Using PIM-SM, All PIM-enabled IP interfaces are considered as potential
Designate Routers (DR) for their domain. By default, the interface with the highest
IP address on the domain is selected. However, if an interface is configured with a
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 33: Protocol Independent Multicast
481
DR priority value, it overrides the IP address selection process. If more than one
interface on a domain is configured with a DR priority, the one with the highest
number is selected.
Use the following commands to configure the DR priority value (Interface IP
mode):
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim dr­priority <value (0-4294967294)>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
Note: A value of 0 (zero) specifies that the G8272 will not act as the DR. This
setting requires the G8272 to be connected to a peer that has a DR priority setting of
1 or higher to ensure that a DR will be present in the network.
Specifying a Bootstrap Router
Using PIM-SM, a Bootstrap Router (BSR) is a PIM-capable router that hosts the
election of the RP from available candidate routers. For each PIM-enabled IP
interface, the administrator can set the preference level for which the local interface
becomes the BSR:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip <Interface number>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim cbsr­preference <0 to 255>
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
A value of 255 highly prefers the local interface as a BSR. A value of 0 indicates that
the PIM CBSR preference is not configured on the switch.
Configuring a Loopback Interface
Loopback interfaces can be used in PIM Sparse Mode for Rendezvous Points (RPs)
and Bootstrap Routers (BSRs). For example:

As a static RP
interface loopback 1
ip address 55.55.1.1 255.255.255.0
enable
exit
ip pim static­rp enable
ip pim component 1
rp­static rp­address 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 55.55.1.1
interface loopback 1
ip pim enable
exit
482
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

As a candidate RP
interface loopback 1
ip address 55.55.1.1 255.255.255.0
enable
exit
ip pim component 1
rp­candidate holdtime 60
rp­candidate rp­address 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0 55.55.1.1
interface loopback 1
ip pim enable
exit

As a BSR
interface loopback 1
ip address 55.55.1.1 255.255.255.0
enable
exit
interface loopback 1
ip pim enable
ip pim cbsr­preference 2
exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 33: Protocol Independent Multicast
483
Using PIM with Other Features
PIM with ACLs or VMAPs
If using ACLs or VMAPs, be sure to permit traffic for local hosts and routers.
PIM with IGMP
If using IGMP (see “Internet Group Management Protocol” on page 387):

IGMP static joins can be configured with a PIM-SM or PIM-DM multicast group
IPv4 address. Using the ISCLI:
RS 8272(config)# ip mroute <multicast group IPv4 address> <VLAN> <port>

IGMP Querier is disabled by default. If IGMP Querier is needed with PIM, be
sure to enable the IGMP Query feature globally, as well as on each VLAN where
it is needed.

If the switch is connected to multicast receivers and/or hosts, be sure to enable
IGMP snooping globally, as well as on each VLAN where PIM receivers are
attached.
PIM with VLAG
If using VLAG, see “VLAG with PIM” on page 185.
484
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
PIM Configuration Examples
Example 1: PIM-SM with Dynamic RP
This example configures PIM Sparse Mode for one IP interface, with the switch
acting as a candidate for dynamic Rendezvous Point (RP) selection.
1. Globally enable the PIM feature:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim enable
2. Configure a PIM network component with dynamic RP settings, and set it for PIM
Sparse Mode:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component 1
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# mode sparse
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# rp­candidate rp­address 225.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.10.1.1
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# rp­candidate holdtime <0-255>
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# exit
Where 225.1.0.0 is the multicast group base IP address, 255.255.0.0 is the multicast
group address mask, and 10.10.1.1 is the switch RP candidate address.
Note: Because, Sparse Mode is set by default for PIM component 1, the mode
command is needed only if the mode has been previously changed.
3. Define an IP interface for use with PIM:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 111
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.1.1 255.255.255.255
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 11
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
The IP interface represents the PIM network being connected to the switch. The
IPv4 addresses in the defined range must not be included in another IP interface on
the switch under a different VLAN.
4. Enable PIM on the IP interface and assign the PIM component:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim component­id 1
Note: Because, PIM component 1 is assigned to the interface by default, the
component­id command is needed only if the setting has been previously
changed.
5. Set the Bootstrap Router (BSR) preference:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim cbsr­preference 135
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 33: Protocol Independent Multicast
485
Example 2: PIM-SM with Static RP
The following commands can be used to modify the prior example configuration to
use a static RP:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim static­rp enable
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component 1
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# rp­static rp­address 225.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.10.1.1
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# exit
Where 225.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 is the multicast group base address and mask, and
10.10.1.1 is the static RP address.
Note: The same static RP address must be configured for all switches in the group.
Example 3: PIM-DM
This example configures PIM Dense Mode (PIM-DM) on one IP interface. PIM-DM
can be configured independently, or it can be combined with the prior PIM-SM
examples (which are configured on a different PIM component) as shown in
Figure 47.
Figure 47. Network with both PIM-DM and PIM-SM Components
PIM-SM
PIM-DM
Multicast
225.1.0.0/16
Multicast
239.1.0.0/16
PIM Enabled
Switch
IP Interface 11
IP Interface 22
IP 10.10.1.1
VLAN 101
Component 1
IP 10.10.2.1
VLAN 102
Component 2
Media
Servers
486
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
1. Configure the PIM-SM component as shown in the prior examples, or if using
PIM-DM independently, enable the PIM feature.
RS 8272(config)# ip pim enable
2. Configure a PIM component and set the PIM mode:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim component 2
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# mode dense
RS 8272(config­ip­pim­comp)# exit
3. Define an IP interface for use with PIM:
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 22
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.10.2.1 255.255.255.255
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 102
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
4. Enable PIM on the IP interface and assign the PIM component:
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim component­id 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
5. (Optional) Configure PIM border router if the IPMC traffic is flowing between PIM
domains:
RS 8272(config)# ip pim pmbr enable
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 22
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip pim border­bit
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
Note: For PIM Dense Mode, the DR, RP, and BSR settings do not apply.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 33: Protocol Independent Multicast
487
488
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 6: High Availability
Fundamentals
Internet traffic consists of myriad services and applications which use the Internet
Protocol (IP) for data delivery. However, IP is not optimized for all the various
applications. High Availability goes beyond IP and makes intelligent switching
decisions to provide redundant network configurations.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
489
490
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 34. Basic Redundancy
Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 includes various features for providing basic link or
device redundancy:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“Trunking for Link Redundancy” on page 492

“Virtual Link Aggregation” on page 492

“Hot Links” on page 493
491
Trunking for Link Redundancy
Multiple switch ports can be combined together to form robust, high-bandwidth
trunks to other devices. Since trunks are comprised of multiple physical links, the
trunk group is inherently fault tolerant. As long as one connection between the
switches is available, the trunk remains active.
In Figure 48, four ports are trunked together between the switch and the enterprise
routing device. Connectivity is maintained as long as one of the links remain
active. The links to the server are also trunked, allowing the secondary NIC to take
over in the event that the primary NIC link fails.
Figure 48. Trunking Ports for Link Redundancy
Enterprise
Routing Switch
Server
NIC 1
Internet
NIC 2
Trunk
Trunk
For more information on trunking, see “Ports and Trunking” on page 129.
Virtual Link Aggregation
Using the VLAG feature, switches can be paired as VLAG peers. The peer switches
appear to the connecting device as a single virtual entity for the purpose of
establishing a multi-port trunk. The VLAG-capable switches synchronize their
logical view of the access layer port structure and internally prevent implicit loops.
The VLAG topology also responds more quickly to link failure and does not result
in unnecessary MAC flooding.
VLAGs are useful in multi-layer environments for both uplink and downlink
redundancy to any regular LAG-capable device. They can also be used in for
active-active VRRP connections.
For more information on VLAGs, see “Virtual Link Aggregation Groups” on
page 165.
492
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Hot Links
Hot Links provides basic link redundancy with fast recovery.
Hot Links consists of up to 25 triggers. A trigger consists of a pair of layer 2
interfaces, each containing an individual port, trunk, or LACP adminkey. One
interface is the Master, and the other is a Backup. While the Master interface is set
to the active state and forwards traffic, the Backup interface is set to the standby
state and blocks traffic until the Master interface fails. If the Master interface fails,
the Backup interface is set to active and forwards traffic. Once the Master interface
is restored, it regains its active state and forwards traffic. The Backup transitions to
the standby state.
You may select a physical port, static trunk, or an LACP adminkey as a Hot Link
interface.
Forward Delay
The Forward Delay timer allows Hot Links to monitor the Master and Backup
interfaces for link stability before selecting one interface to transition to the active
state. Before the transition occurs, the interface must maintain a stable link for the
duration of the Forward Delay interval.
For example, if you set the Forward delay timer to 10 seconds, the switch will select
an interface to become active only if a link remained stable for the duration of the
Forward Delay period. If the link is unstable, the Forward Delay period starts
again.
Preemption
You can configure the Master interface to resume the active state whenever it
becomes available. With Hot Links preemption enabled, the Master interface
transitions to the active state immediately upon recovery. The Backup interface
immediately transitions to the standby state. If Forward Delay is enabled, the
transition occurs when an interface has maintained link stability for the duration of
the Forward Delay period.
FDB Update
Use the FDB update option to notify other devices on the network about updates to
the Forwarding Database (FDB). When you enable FDB update, the switch sends
multicasts of addresses in the forwarding database (FDB) over the active interface,
so that other devices on the network can learn the new path. The Hot Links FDB
update option uses the station update rate to determine the rate at which to send
FDB packets.
Configuration Guidelines
The following configuration guidelines apply to Hot links:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015
When Hot Links is turned on, STP must be turned off on the Hot Links ports.
Chapter 34: Basic Redundancy
493

A port that is a member of the Master interface cannot be a member of the
Backup interface. A port that is a member of one Hot Links trigger cannot be a
member of another Hot Links trigger.

An individual port that is configured as a Hot Link interface cannot be a
member of a trunk.
Configuring Hot Links
Use the following commands to configure Hot Links.
RS 8272(config)# hotlinks trigger 1 enable (Enable Hot Links Trigger 1)
RS 8272(config)# hotlinks trigger 1 master port 1 (Add port to Master interface)
RS 8272(config)# hotlinks trigger 1 backup port 2 (Add port to Backup interface)
RS 8272(config)# hotlinks enable 494
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
(Turn on Hot Links)
Chapter 35. Layer 2 Failover
The primary application for Layer 2 Failover is to support Network Adapter
Teaming. With Network Adapter Teaming, all the NICs on each server share the
same IP address, and are configured into a team. One NIC is the primary link, and
the other is a standby link. For more details, refer to the documentation for your
Ethernet adapter.
Note: Only two links per server can be used for Layer 2 Trunk Failover (one
primary and one backup). Network Adapter Teaming allows only one backup NIC
for each server blade.
Monitoring Trunk Links
Layer 2 Failover can be enabled on any trunk group in the G8272, including LACP
trunks. Trunks can be added to failover trigger groups. Then, if some specified
number of monitor links fail, the switch disables all the control ports in the switch.
When the control ports are disabled, it causes the NIC team on the affected servers
to failover from the primary to the backup NIC. This process is called a failover
event.
When the appropriate number of links in a monitor group return to service, the
switch enables the control ports. This causes the NIC team on the affected servers
to fail back to the primary switch (unless Auto-Fallback is disabled on the NIC
team). The backup switch processes traffic until the primary switch’s control links
come up, which can take up to five seconds.
Figure 49 is a simple example of Layer 2 Failover. One G8272 is the primary, and
the other is used as a backup. In this example, all ports on the primary switch
belong to a single trunk group, with Layer 2 Failover enabled, and Failover Limit
set to 2. If two or fewer links in trigger 1 remain active, the switch temporarily
disables all control ports. This action causes a failover event on Server 1 and Server
2.
Figure 49. Basic Layer 2 Failover
Enterprise
Routing Switches
Primary
Switch
Trigger 1
Server 1
NIC 1
NIC 2
Backup
Switch
Internet
Trigger 1
Server 2
NIC 1
NIC 2
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
495
Setting the Failover Limit
The failover limit lets you specify the minimum number of operational links
required within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event. For
example, if the limit is two, a failover event occurs when the number of operational
links in the trigger is two or fewer. When you set the limit to zero, the switch
triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational.
496
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Manually Monitoring Port Links
The Manual Monitor allows you to configure a set of ports and trunks to monitor
for link failures (a monitor list), and another set of ports and trunks to disable
when the trigger limit is reached (a control list). When the switch detects a link
failure on the monitor list, it automatically disables the items in control list. When
server ports are disabled, the corresponding server’s network adapter can detect
the disabled link, and trigger a network-adapter failover to another port or trunk
on the switch, or another switch.
The switch automatically enables the control list items when the monitor list items
return to service.
Monitor Port State
A monitor port is considered operational as long as the following conditions are
true:
The port must be in the Link Up state.
 If STP is enabled, the port must be in the Forwarding state.
 If the port is part of an LACP trunk, the port must be in the Aggregated state.

If any of these conditions is false, the monitor port is considered to have failed.
Control Port State
A control port is considered Operational if the monitor trigger is up. As long as the
trigger is up, the port is considered operational from a teaming perspective, even if
the port itself is actually in the Down state, Blocking state (if STP is enabled on the
port), or Not Aggregated state (if part of an LACP trunk).
A control port is considered to have failed only if the monitor trigger is in the Down
state.
To view the state of any port, use one of the following commands:
>> # show interface link
(View port link status)
port STP status)
(View port LACP status)
>> # show interface port <x> spanning­tree stp <x>(View
>> # show lacp information
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 35: Layer 2 Failover
497
L2 Failover with Other Features
L2 Failover works together with static trunks, Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP), and with Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), as described in the next sections.
Static Trunks
When you add a portchannel (static trunk group) to a failover trigger, any ports in
that trunk become members of the trigger. You can add up to 64 static trunks to a
failover trigger, using manual monitoring.
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows the switch to form dynamic trunks. You
can use the admin key to add up to two LACP trunks to a failover trigger using
automatic monitoring. When you add an admin key to a trigger, any LACP trunk
with that admin key becomes a member of the trigger.
Spanning Tree Protocol
If Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is enabled on the ports in a failover trigger, the
switch monitors the port STP state rather than the link state. A port failure results
when STP is not in a Forwarding state (such as Learning, Discarding, or No Link)
in all the Spanning Tree Groups (STGs) to which the port belongs. The switch
automatically disables the appropriate control ports.
When the switch determines that ports in the trigger are in STP Forwarding state in
any one of the STGs it belongs to, then it automatically enables the appropriate
control ports. The switch fails back to normal operation.
For example, if a monitor port is a member of STG1, STG2, and STG3, a failover
will be triggered only if the port is not in a forwarding state in all the three STGs.
When the port state in any of the three STGs changes to forwarding, then the
control port is enabled and normal switch operation is resumed.
498
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuration Guidelines
This section provides important information about configuring Layer 2 Failover.

Any specific failover trigger can monitor ports only, static trunks only, or LACP
trunks only. The different types cannot be combined in the same trigger.

A maximum of 64 LACP keys can be added per trigger.

Management ports cannot be monitored.

Control ports for different triggers must not overlap. Monitor ports may
overlap.
Configuring Layer 2 Failover
Use the following procedure to configure a Layer 2 Failover Manual Monitor.
1. Specify the links to monitor.
RS 8272(config)# failover trigger 1 mmon monitor member 1­5
2. Specify the links to disable when the failover limit is reached.
RS 8272(config)# failover trigger 1 mmon control member 6­10
3. Configure general Failover parameters.
RS 8272(config)# failover enable
RS 8272(config)# failover trigger 1 enable
RS 8272(config)# failover trigger 1 limit 2
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 35: Layer 2 Failover
499
500
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 36. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
The RackSwitch G8272 (G8272) supports IPv4 high-availability network topologies
through an enhanced implementation of the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP).
Note: Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 does not support IPv6 for VRRP.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“VRRP Overview” on page 502. This section discusses VRRP operation and
Lenovo N/OS redundancy configurations.

“Failover Methods” on page 505. This section describes the three modes of high
availability.

“Lenovo N/OS Extensions to VRRP” on page 506. This section describes VRRP
enhancements implemented in N/OS.

“Virtual Router Deployment Considerations” on page 507. This section
describes issues to consider when deploying virtual routers.

“High Availability Configurations” on page 509. This section discusses the more
useful and easily deployed redundant configurations.
501
VRRP Overview
In a high-availability network topology, no device can create a single
point-of-failure for the network or force a single point-of-failure to any other part
of the network. This means that your network will remain in service despite the
failure of any single device. To achieve this usually requires redundancy for all
vital network components.
VRRP enables redundant router configurations within a LAN, providing alternate
router paths for a host to eliminate single points-of-failure within a network. Each
participating VRRP-capable routing device is configured with the same virtual
router IPv4 address and ID number. One of the virtual routers is elected as the
master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared
virtual router IPv4 address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers
will take control of the virtual router IPv4 address and actively process traffic
addressed to it.
With VRRP, Virtual Interface Routers (VIR) allow two VRRP routers to share an IP
interface across the routers. VIRs provide a single Destination IPv4 (DIP) address
for upstream routers to reach various servers, and provide a virtual default
Gateway for the servers.
VRRP Components
Each physical router running VRRP is known as a VRRP router.
Virtual Router
Two or more VRRP routers can be configured to form a virtual router (RFC 2338).
Each VRRP router may participate in one or more virtual routers. Each virtual
router consists of a user-configured virtual router identifier (VRID) and an IPv4
address.
Virtual Router MAC Address
The VRID is used to build the virtual router MAC Address. The five highest-order
octets of the virtual router MAC Address are the standard MAC prefix
(00-00-5E-00-01) defined in RFC 2338. The VRID is used to form the lowest-order
octet.
Owners and Renters
Only one of the VRRP routers in a virtual router may be configured as the IPv4
address owner. This router has the virtual router’s IPv4 address as its real interface
address. This router responds to packets addressed to the virtual router’s IPv4
address for ICMP pings, TCP connections, and so on.
There is no requirement for any VRRP router to be the IPv4 address owner. Most
VRRP installations choose not to implement an IPv4 address owner. For the
purposes of this chapter, VRRP routers that are not the IPv4 address owner are
called renters.
502
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Master and Backup Virtual Router
Within each virtual router, one VRRP router is selected to be the virtual router
master. See “Selecting the Master VRRP Router” on page 504 for an explanation of
the selection process.
Note: If the IPv4 address owner is available, it will always become the virtual
router master.
The virtual router master forwards packets sent to the virtual router. It also
responds to Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) requests sent to the virtual router's
IPv4 address. Finally, the virtual router master sends out periodic advertisements
to let other VRRP routers know it is alive and its priority.
Within a virtual router, the VRRP routers not selected to be the master are known
as virtual router backups. If the virtual router master fails, one of the virtual router
backups becomes the master and assumes its responsibilities.
Virtual Interface Router
At Layer 3, a Virtual Interface Router (VIR) allows two VRRP routers to share an IP
interface across the routers. VIRs provide a single Destination IPv4 (DIP) address
for upstream routers to reach various destination networks, and provide a virtual
default Gateway.
Note: Every VIR must be assigned to an IP interface, and every IP interface must
be assigned to a VLAN. If no port in a VLAN has link up, the IP interface of that
VLAN is down, and if the IP interface of a VIR is down, that VIR goes into INIT
state.
VRRP Operation
Only the virtual router master responds to ARP requests. Therefore, the upstream
routers only forward packets destined to the master. The master also responds to
ICMP ping requests. The backup does not forward any traffic, nor does it respond
to ARP requests.
If the master is not available, the backup becomes the master and takes over
responsibility for packet forwarding and responding to ARP requests.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 36: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
503
Selecting the Master VRRP Router
Each VRRP router is configured with a priority between 1–254. A bidding process
determines which VRRP router is or becomes the master—the VRRP router with
the highest priority.
The master periodically sends advertisements to an IPv4 multicast address. As
long as the backups receive these advertisements, they remain in the backup state.
If a backup does not receive an advertisement for three advertisement intervals, it
initiates a bidding process to determine which VRRP router has the highest
priority and takes over as master. In addition to the three advertisement intervals, a
manually set holdoff time can further delay the backups from assuming the master
status.
If, at any time, a backup determines that it has higher priority than the current
master does, it can preempt the master and become the master itself, unless
configured not to do so. In preemption, the backup assumes the role of master and
begins to send its own advertisements. The current master sees that the backup has
higher priority and will stop functioning as the master.
A backup router can stop receiving advertisements for one of two reasons—the
master can be down, or all communications links between the master and the
backup can be down. If the master has failed, it is clearly desirable for the backup
(or one of the backups, if there is more than one) to become the master.
Note: If the master is healthy but communication between the master and the
backup has failed, there will then be two masters within the virtual router. To
prevent this from happening, configure redundant links to be used between the
switches that form a virtual router.
504
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Failover Methods
With service availability becoming a major concern on the Internet, service
providers are increasingly deploying Internet traffic control devices, such as
application switches, in redundant configurations. N/OS high availability
configurations are based on VRRP. The N/OS implementation of VRRP includes
proprietary extensions.
Active-Active Redundancy
In an active-active configuration, shown in Figure 50, two switches provide
redundancy for each other, with both active at the same time. Each switch
processes traffic on a different subnet. When a failure occurs, the remaining switch
can process traffic on all subnets.
For a configuration example, see “High Availability Configurations” on page 509.
Figure 50. Active-Active Redundancy
Active (subnet A and C)
Switch 1
Servers
Internet
Enterprise
Routing Switch
Switch 2
Active (subnet B and D)
Virtual Router Group
The virtual router group ties all virtual routers on the switch together as a single
entity. As members of a group, all virtual routers on the switch (and therefore the
switch itself), are in either a master or standby state.
A VRRP group has the following characteristics:

When enabled, all virtual routers behave as one entity, and all group settings
override any individual virtual router settings.

All individual virtual routers, once the VRRP group is enabled, assume the
group’s tracking and priority.

When one member of a VRRP group fails, the priority of the group decreases,
and the state of the entire switch changes from Master to Standby.
Each VRRP advertisement can include up to 16 addresses. All virtual routers are
advertised within the same packet, conserving processing and buffering resources.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 36: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
505
Lenovo N/OS Extensions to VRRP
This section describes VRRP enhancements that are implemented in N/OS.
N/OS supports a tracking function that dynamically modifies the priority of a
VRRP router, based on its current state. The objective of tracking is to have,
whenever possible, the master bidding processes for various virtual routers in a
LAN converge on the same switch. Tracking ensures that the selected switch is the
one that offers optimal network performance. For tracking to have any effect on
virtual router operation, preemption must be enabled.
N/OS can track the attributes listed in Table 42 (Router VRRP mode):
Table 42. VRRP Tracking Parameters
Parameter
Description
Number of IP interfaces on the
switch that are active (“up”)
Helps elect the virtual routers with the
most available routes as the master. (An IP
interface is considered active when there
tracking­priority­increment is at least one active port on the same
interfaces
VLAN.) This parameter influences the
VRRP router's priority in virtual interface
routers.
Helps elect the virtual routers with the
most available ports as the master. This
parameter influences the VRRP router's
tracking­priority­increment priority in virtual interface routers.
ports
Number of active ports on the same
VLAN
Useful for ensuring that traffic for any
particular client/server pair is handled by
the same switch, increasing routing
tracking­priority­increment efficiency. This parameter influences the
virtual­routers
VRRP router's priority in virtual interface
routers.
Number of virtual routers in master
mode on the switch
A health check mechanism that is used to
track the next hop. This parameter
virtual­router <x> next­hop influences the VRRP router’s priority
<IP address> [ICMP|ARP] based on the availability of the next hop.
[<interval>] [<retries>]
Next hop tracking
Each tracked parameter has a user-configurable weight associated with it. As the
count associated with each tracked item increases (or decreases), so does the VRRP
router's priority, subject to the weighting associated with each tracked item. If the
priority level of a standby is greater than that of the current master, then the
standby can assume the role of the master.
See “Configuring the Switch for Tracking” on page 507 for an example on how to
configure the switch for tracking VRRP priority.
506
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Virtual Router Deployment Considerations
Assigning VRRP Virtual Router ID
During the software upgrade process, VRRP virtual router IDs will be
automatically assigned if failover is enabled on the switch. When configuring
virtual routers at any point after upgrade, virtual router ID numbers must be
assigned. The virtual router ID may be configured as any number between 1 and
128. Use the following command to configure the virtual router ID:
RS 8272(config)# router vrrp
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 virtual­router­id <1-128>
Configuring the Switch for Tracking
Tracking configuration largely depends on user preferences and network
environment. Consider the configuration shown in Figure 50 on page 505. Assume
the following behavior on the network:

Switch 1 is the master router upon initialization.

If switch 1 is the master and it has one fewer active servers than switch 2, then
switch 1 remains the master.
This behavior is preferred because running one server down is less disruptive
than bringing a new master online and severing all active connections in the
process.

If switch 1 is the master and it has two or more active servers fewer than switch
2, then switch 2 becomes the master.

If switch 2 is the master, it remains the master even if servers are restored on
switch 1 such that it has one fewer or an equal number of servers.

If switch 2 is the master and it has one active server fewer than switch 1, then
switch 1 becomes the master.
You can implement this behavior by configuring the switch for tracking as follows:
1. Set the priority for switch 1 to 101.
2. Leave the priority for switch 2 at the default value of 100.
3. On both switches, enable tracking based on ports, interfaces, next hops, or virtual
routers. You can choose any combination of tracking parameters, based on your
network configuration.
Note: There is no shortcut to setting tracking parameters. The goals must first be
set and the outcomes of various configurations and scenarios analyzed to find
settings that meet the goals.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 36: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
507
VRRP - Next Hop Tracking
VRRP can be configured to track next hops. A health check mechanism, using
ICMP ping or ARP requests, is used to track the next hop. If the health check
succeeds or fails, the priority of the virtual router, for which the next hop tracking
was configured, changes based on the configured tracking-priority-increment
value.
A VRRP group’s priority is calculated as the sum of all priorities for all active next
hops. If an active next hop belongs to two virtual routers, then that next-hop’s
priority is added twice.
VRRP next hop tracking can be configured using the following commands:
Enable VRRP tracking on next hop:
RS 8272(config-vrrp)# virtual-router <x> track next-hops
Configure next hop IP address:
RS 8272(config-vrrp)# virtual-router <x> next-hop <IP address> [ICMP|ARP]
[<interval>] [<retries>]
Default Values:
Health check protocol: ICMP
Interval: 2 seconds
Retries: 3
Note: A maximum of four unique next-hop IP addresses can be configured.
Configure priority for each next hop.
The value is added to the virtual router’s priority when the next hop is active, and
subtracted, when the next hop goes down:
RS 8272(config-vrrp)# tracking-priority-increment next-hop <0-254>
508
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
High Availability Configurations
VRRP High-Availability Using Multiple VIRs
Figure 51 shows an example configuration where two G8272s are used as VRRP
routers in an active-active configuration. In this configuration, both switches
respond to packets.
Figure 51. Active-Active Configuration using VRRP
L2 Switch
VIR 1: 192.168.1.200 (Master) Server 1
VIR 2: 192.168.2.200 (Backup)
1
2
Internet
NIC 1: 10.0.1.1/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.1/24
Server 2
Switch 1
NIC 1: 10.0.1.2/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.2/24
4
Server 3
4
Enterprise
Routing Switch
1
2
L2 Switch
Server 4
Switch 2
VIR 1: 192.168.1.200 (Backup)
VIR 2: 192.168.2.200 (Master)
NIC 1: 10.0.1.3/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.3/24
NIC 1: 10.0.1.4/24
NIC 2: 10.0.2.4/24
Although this example shows only two switches, there is no limit on the number of
switches used in a redundant configuration. It is possible to implement an
active-active configuration across all the VRRP-capable switches in a LAN.
Each VRRP-capable switch in an active-active configuration is autonomous.
Switches in a virtual router need not be identically configured.
In the scenario illustrated in Figure 51, traffic destined for IPv4 address 10.0.1.1 is
forwarded through the Layer 2 switch at the top of the drawing, and ingresses
G8272 1 on port 1. Return traffic uses default gateway 1 (192.168.1.1), which must
be in the same network.
If the link between G8272 1 and the Layer 2 switch fails, G8272 2 becomes the
Master because it has a higher priority. Traffic is forwarded to G8272 2, which
forwards it to G8272 1 through port 4. Return traffic uses default gateway 2
(192.168.2.2), and is forwarded through the Layer 2 switch at the bottom of the
drawing.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 36: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
509
To implement the active-active example, perform the following switch
configuration.
Task 1: Configure G8272 1
1. Configure client and server interfaces.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 192.168.1.100 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 192.168.2.101 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.0.1.100 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 4
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.0.2.101 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure the default gateways. Each default gateway points to a Layer 3 router.
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 1 address 192.168.1.1
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 1 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 2 address 192.168.2.1
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 2 enable
3. Turn on VRRP and configure two Virtual Interface Routers.
RS 8272(config)# router vrrp
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# enable
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 virtual­router­id 1
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 interface 1
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 address 192.168.1.200
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 enable
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 virtual­router­id 2
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 interface 2
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 address 192.168.2.200
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 enable
4. Enable tracking on ports. Set the priority of Virtual Router 1 to 101, so that it
becomes the Master.
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 track ports
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 priority 101
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 track ports
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# exit
510
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
5. Configure ports.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 10
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 20
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
6. Turn off Spanning Tree Protocol globally.
RS 8272(config)# no spanning­tree stp 1
Task 2: Configure G8272 2
1. Configure client and server interfaces.
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 1
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 192.168.1.101 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 2
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 192.168.2.100 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 3
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.0.1.101 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface ip 4
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# ip address 10.0.2.100 255.255.255.0
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# enable
RS 8272(config­ip­if)# exit
2. Configure the default gateways. Each default gateway points to a Layer 3 router.
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 1 address 192.168.2.1
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 1 enable
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 2 address 192.168.1.1
RS 8272(config)# ip gateway 2 enable
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 36: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
511
3. Turn on VRRP and configure two Virtual Interface Routers.
RS 8272(config)# router vrrp
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# enable
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 virtual­router­id 1
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 interface 1
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 address 192.168.1.200
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 enable
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 virtual­router­id 2
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 interface 2 RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 address 192.168.2.200
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 enable
4. Enable tracking on ports. Set the priority of Virtual Router 2 to 101, so that it
becomes the Master.
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 1 track ports
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 track ports
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# virtual­router 2 priority 101
RS 8272(config­vrrp)# exit
5. Configure ports.
RS 8272(config)# vlan 10
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 10
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
RS 8272(config)# vlan 20
RS 8272(config­vlan)# exit
RS 8272(config)# interface port 2
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport mode trunk
RS 8272(config­if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 20
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
6. Turn off Spanning Tree Protocol globally.
RS 8272(config)# no spanning­tree stp 1
512
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
VRRP High-Availability Using VLAGs
VRRP can be used in conjunction with VLAGs and LACP-capable servers and
switches to provide seamless redundancy.
Figure 52. Active-Active Configuration using VRRP and VLAGs
VRRP Master
Server 1
VLAG Peer 1
Layer 3
Router
VLAG 1
VIR: 10.0.1.100
1
10
10.0.1.1
11
2
Internet
4
5
4
5
VLAG 2
12
ISL
10.0.1.2
10
1
Server 2
11
12
VLAG 3
Server 3
2
Layer 3
Router
VRRP Backup
10.0.1.3
VLAG Peer 2
VIR: 10.0.1.100
Network 10.0.1.0/24
See “VLAGs with VRRP” on page 176 for a detailed configuration example.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 36: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
513
514
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 7: Network
Management
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
515
516
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 37. Link Layer Discovery Protocol
The Lenovo Networking OS software support Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP). This chapter discusses the use and configuration of LLDP on the switch:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“LLDP Overview” on page 518

“Enabling or Disabling LLDP” on page 519

“LLDP Transmit Features” on page 520

“LLDP Receive Features” on page 524

“LLDP Example Configuration” on page 528
517
LLDP Overview
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is an IEEE 802.1AB-2005 standard for
discovering and managing network devices. LLDP uses Layer 2 (the data link
layer), and allows network management applications to extend their awareness of
the network by discovering devices that are direct neighbors of already known
devices.
With LLDP, the G8272 can advertise the presence of its ports, their major
capabilities, and their current status to other LLDP stations in the same LAN.
LLDP transmissions occur on ports at regular intervals or whenever there is a
relevant change to their status. The switch can also receive LLDP information
advertised from adjacent LLDP-capable network devices.
In addition to discovery of network resources, and notification of network changes,
LLDP can help administrators quickly recognize a variety of common network
configuration problems, such as unintended VLAN exclusions or mis-matched
port aggregation membership.
The LLDP transmit function and receive function can be independently configured
on a per-port basis. The administrator can allow any given port to transmit only,
receive only, or both transmit and receive LLDP information.
The LLDP information to be distributed by the G8272 ports, and that which has
been collected from other LLDP stations, is stored in the switch’s Management
Information Base (MIB). Network Management Systems (NMS) can use Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to access this MIB information.
LLDP-related MIB information is read-only.
Changes, either to the local switch LLDP information or to the remotely received
LLDP information, are flagged within the MIB for convenient tracking by
SNMP-based management systems.
For LLDP to provide expected benefits, all network devices that support LLDP
must be consistent in their LLDP configuration.
518
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Enabling or Disabling LLDP
Global LLDP Setting
By default, LLDP is enabled on the G8272. To turn LLDP on or off, use the
following command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] lldp enable
(Turn LLDP on or off globally)
Transmit and Receive Control
The G8272 can also be configured to transmit or receive LLDP information on a
port-by-port basis. By default, when LLDP is globally enabled on the switch, G8272
ports transmit and receive LLDP information (see the tx_rx option in the
following example). To change the LLDP transmit and receive state, the following
commands are available:
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# lldp admin­status tx_rx
RS 8272(config­if)# lldp admin­status tx_only
RS 8272(config­if)# lldp admin­status rx_only
RS 8272(config­if)# no lldp admin­status
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
(Select a switch port)
(Transmit and receive LLDP)
(Only transmit LLDP)
(Only receive LLDP)
(Do not participate in LLDP)
(Exit port mode)
To view the LLDP transmit and receive status, use the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# show lldp port
RS 8272(config)# show interface port <n> lldp
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
(status of all ports)
(status of selected port)
Chapter 37: Link Layer Discovery Protocol
519
LLDP Transmit Features
Numerous LLDP transmit options are available, including scheduled and
minimum transmit interval, expiration on remote systems, SNMP trap notification,
and the types of information permitted to be shared.
Scheduled Interval
The G8272 can be configured to transmit LLDP information to neighboring devices
once each 5 to 32768 seconds. The scheduled interval is global; the same interval
value applies to all LLDP transmit-enabled ports. However, to help balance LLDP
transmissions and keep them from being sent simultaneously on all ports, each
port maintains its own interval clock, based on its own initialization or reset time.
This allows switch-wide LLDP transmissions to be spread out over time, though
individual ports comply with the configured interval.
The global transmit interval can be configured using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# lldp refresh­interval <interval>
where interval is the number of seconds between LLDP transmissions. The range is
5 to 32768. The default is 30 seconds.
Minimum Interval
In addition to sending LLDP information at scheduled intervals, LLDP
information is also sent when the G8272 detects relevant changes to its
configuration or status (such as when ports are enabled or disabled). To prevent
the G8272 from sending multiple LLDP packets in rapid succession when port
status is in flux, a transmit delay timer can be configured.
The transmit delay timer represents the minimum time permitted between
successive LLDP transmissions on a port. Any interval-driven or change-driven
updates will be consolidated until the configured transmit delay expires.
The minimum transmit interval can be configured using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# lldp transmission­delay <interval>
where interval is the minimum number of seconds permitted between successive
LLDP transmissions on any port. The range is 1 to one-quarter of the scheduled
transmit interval (lldp refresh­interval <value>), up to 8192. The default is 2
seconds.
Time-to-Live for Transmitted Information
The transmitted LLDP information is held by remote systems for a limited time. A
time-to-live parameter allows the switch to determine how long the transmitted
data is held before it expires. The hold time is configured as a multiple of the
configured transmission interval.
RS 8272(config)# lldp holdtime­multiplier <multiplier>
520
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
where multiplier is a value between 2 and 10. The default value is 4, meaning that
remote systems will hold the port’s LLDP information for 4 x the 30-second
transmission interval value, or 120 seconds, before removing it from their MIB.
Trap Notifications
If SNMP is enabled on the G8272 (see “Using Simple Network Management
Protocol” on page 38), each port can be configured to send SNMP trap notifications
whenever LLDP transmissions are sent. By default, trap notification is disabled for
each port. The trap notification state can be changed using the following
commands (Interface Port mode):
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# [no] lldp trap­notification
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
In addition to sending LLDP information at scheduled intervals, LLDP
information is also sent when the G8272 detects relevant changes to its
configuration or status (such as when ports are enabled or disabled). To prevent
the G8272 from sending multiple trap notifications in rapid succession when port
status is in flux, a global trap delay timer can be configured.
The trap delay timer represents the minimum time permitted between successive
trap notifications on any port. Any interval-driven or change-driven trap notices
from the port will be consolidated until the configured trap delay expires.
The minimum trap notification interval can be configured using the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# lldp trap­notification­interval <interval>
where interval is the minimum number of seconds permitted between successive
LLDP transmissions on any port. The range is 1 to 3600. The default is 5 seconds.
If SNMP trap notification is enabled, the notification messages can also appear in
the system log. This is enabled by default. To change whether the SNMP trap
notifications for LLDP events appear in the system log, use the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# [no] logging log lldp
Changing the LLDP Transmit State
When the port is disabled, or when LLDP transmit is turned off for the port using
the LLDP admin-status command options (see “Transmit and Receive Control” on
page 519), a final LLDP packet is transmitted with a time-to-live value of 0.
Neighbors that receive this packet will remove the LLDP information associated
with the G8272 port from their MIB.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 37: Link Layer Discovery Protocol
521
In addition, if LLDP is fully disabled on a port and then later re-enabled, the G8272
will temporarily delay resuming LLDP transmissions on the port to allow the port
LLDP information to stabilize. The reinitialization delay interval can be globally
configured for all ports using the following command:
RS 8272(config)# lldp reinit­delay <interval>
where interval is the number of seconds to wait before resuming LLDP
transmissions. The range is between 1 and 10. The default is 2 seconds.
Types of Information Transmitted
When LLDP transmission is permitted on the port (see “Enabling or Disabling
LLDP” on page 519), the port advertises the following required information in
type/length/value (TLV) format:
Chassis ID
Port ID
 LLDP Time-to-Live


LLDP transmissions can also be configured to enable or disable inclusion of
optional information, using the following command (Interface Port mode):
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# [no] lldp tlv <type>
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
where type is an LLDP information option from Table 43:
Table 43. LLDP Optional Information Types
522
Type
Description
Default
portdesc
Port Description
Enabled
sysname
System Name
Enabled
sysdescr
System Description
Enabled
syscap
System Capabilities
Enabled
mgmtaddr
Management Address
Enabled
portvid
IEEE 802.1 Port VLAN ID
Disabled
portprot
IEEE 802.1 Port and Protocol VLAN ID
Disabled
vlanname
IEEE 802.1 VLAN Name
Disabled
protid
IEEE 802.1 Protocol Identity
Disabled
macphy
IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status, including the
auto-negotiation, duplex, and speed
status of the port.
Disabled
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Table 43. LLDP Optional Information Types (continued)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Type
Description
Default
powermdi
IEEE 802.3 Power via MDI, indicating the
capabilities and status of devices that
require or provide power over
twisted-pair copper links.
Disabled
linkaggr
IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation status for
the port.
Disabled
framesz
IEEE 802.3 Maximum Frame Size for the
port.
Disabled
dcbx
Data Center Bridging Capability
Exchange Protocol (DCBX) for the port.
Enabled
all
Select all optional LLDP information for
inclusion or exclusion.
Disabled
Chapter 37: Link Layer Discovery Protocol
523
LLDP Receive Features
Types of Information Received
When the LLDP receive option is enabled on a port (see “Enabling or Disabling
LLDP” on page 519), the port may receive the following information from
LLDP-capable remote systems:








Chassis Information
Port Information
LLDP Time-to-Live
Port Description
System Name
System Description
System Capabilities Supported/Enabled
Remote Management Address
The G8272 stores the collected LLDP information in the MIB. Each remote
LLDP-capable device is responsible for transmitting regular LLDP updates. If the
received updates contain LLDP information changes (to port state, configuration,
LLDP MIB structures, deletion), the switch will set a change flag within the MIB for
convenient notification to SNMP-based management systems.
Viewing Remote Device Information
LLDP information collected from neighboring systems can be viewed in numerous
ways:
Using a centrally-connected LLDP analysis server
 Using an SNMP agent to examine the G8272 MIB
 Using the G8272 Browser-Based Interface (BBI)
 Using commands on the G8272

The following command displays remote LLDP information:
RS 8272(config)# show lldp remote­device [<index number>]
To view a summary of remote information, omit the Index number parameter. For
example:
RS 8272(config)# show lldp remote­device
LLDP Remote Devices Information
Legend(possible values in DMAC column) :
NB ­ Nearest Bridge ­ 01­80­C2­00­00­0E
NnTB ­ Nearest non­TPMR Bridge ­ 01­80­C2­00­00­03
NCB ­ Nearest Customer Bridge ­ 01­80­C2­00­00­00
Total number of current entries: 2
LocalPort|Index|Remote Chassis ID |Remote Port|Remote System Name|DMAC
­­­­­­­­­|­­­­­|­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ |­­­­­­­­­­­|­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­|­­­­­
MGT | 1 | 00 00 00 00 11 00| 5 | C12 | NB
20 | 2 | 74 99 75 1c 75 00| 44 | C3+ | NB
524
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
To view detailed information for a remote device, specify the Index number as
found in the summary. For example, in keeping with the sample summary, to list
details for the first remote device (with an Index value of 1), use the following
command:
RS 8272(config)# show lldp remote­device 1
Local Port Alias: 3
Remote Device Index : 1
Remote Device TTL : 99
Remote Device RxChanges : false
Chassis Type : Mac Address
Chassis Id : 00­18­b1­33­1d­00
Port Type : Locally Assigned
Port Id : 23
Port Description : 7
System Name :
System Description
: Lenovo Networking Operating System RackSwitch G8272, Lenovo Networking OS: version 8.2.1, Boot Image: version 8.2.1
System Capabilities Supported : bridge, router
System Capabilities Enabled
: bridge, router
Remote Management Address:
Subtype Address Interface Subtype
Interface Number Object Identifier
: IPv4
: 10.100.120.181
: ifIndex
: 128
:
Note: Received LLDP information can change very quickly. When using show
commands, it is possible that flags for some expected events may be too short-lived
to be observed in the output.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 37: Link Layer Discovery Protocol
525
To view detailed information of all remote devices, use the following command:
RS 8272# show lldp remote­device detail
Local Port Alias: MGTA Remote Device Index
: 1
Remote Device TTL
: 4678
Remote Device RxChanges
: false
Chassis Type
: Mac Address
Chassis Id
: 08­17­f4­a1­db­00
Port Type
: Locally Assigned
Port Id
: 25
Port Description
: MGTA
System Name
:
System Description
: Lenovo Networking Operating System RackSwitch G8272, Lenovo Networking OS: version 8.2.1, Boot Image: version 8.2.1
System Capabilities Supported : bridge, router
System Capabilities Enabled
: bridge, router
Remote Management Address:
Subtype
Address
Interface Subtype
Interface Number
Object Identifier
: IPv4
: 10.38.22.23
: ifIndex
: 127
:
Local Port Alias: 2
Remote Device Index
Remote Device TTL
Remote Device RxChanges
Chassis Type
Chassis Id
Port Type
Port Id
Port Description
: 2
: 4651
: false
: Mac Address
: 08­17­f4­a1­db­00
: Locally Assigned
: 2
: 2
System Name :
System Description
: Lenovo Networking Operating System RackSwitch G8272, Lenovo Networking OS: version 8.2.1, Boot Image: version 8.2.1
System Capabilities Supported : bridge, router
System Capabilities Enabled
: bridge, router
Remote Management Address:
Subtype
Address
Interface Subtype
Interface Number
Object Identifier
: IPv4
: 10.38.22.23
: ifIndex
: 127
:
Total entries displayed: 2
Time-to-Live for Received Information
Each remote device LLDP packet includes an expiration time. If the switch port
does not receive an LLDP update from the remote device before the time-to-live
clock expires, the switch will consider the remote information to be invalid, and
will remove all associated information from the MIB.
526
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Remote devices can also intentionally set their LLDP time-to-live to 0, indicating to
the switch that the LLDP information is invalid and must be immediately
removed.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 37: Link Layer Discovery Protocol
527
LLDP Example Configuration
1. Turn LLDP on globally.
RS 8272(config)# lldp enable
2. Set the global LLDP timer features.
RS 8272(config)# lldp transmission­delay 2
(Transmit each 30 seconds)
(No more often than 2 sec.)
RS 8272(config)# lldp holdtime­multiplier 4
(Remote hold 4 intervals)
RS 8272(config)# lldp reinit­delay 2
(Wait 2 sec. after reinit.)
RS 8272(config)# lldp refresh­interval 30
RS 8272(config)# lldp trap­notification­interval 5
(Minimum 5 sec. between)
3. Set LLDP options for each port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port <n>
(Select a switch port)
RS 8272(config­if)# lldp admin­status tx_rx
(Transmit and receive LLDP)
RS 8272(config­if)# lldp trap­notification
(Enable SNMP trap notifications)
RS 8272(config­if)# lldp tlv all RS 8272(config­if)# exit
(Transmit all optional information)
4. Enable syslog reporting.
RS 8272(config)# logging log lldp
5. Verify the configuration settings:
RS 8272(config)# show lldp
6. View remote device information as needed.
RS 8272(config)# show lldp remote­device or
RS 8272(config)# show lldp remote­device <index number>
or
RS 8272(config)# show lldp remote­devices detail
528
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 38. Simple Network Management Protocol
Lenovo Networking OS provides Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
version 1, version 2, and version 3 support for access through any network
management software, such as IBM Director or HP-OpenView.
Note: SNMP read and write functions are enabled by default. For best security
practices, if SNMP is not needed for your network, it is recommended that you
disable these functions prior to connecting the switch to the network.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
529
SNMP Version 1 & Version 2
To access the SNMP agent on the G8272, the read and write community strings on
the SNMP manager must be configured to match those on the switch. The default
read community string on the switch is public and the default write community
string is private.
The read and write community strings on the switch can be changed using the
following commands on the CLI:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server read­community <1-32 characters>
-andRS 8272(config)# snmp­server write­community <1-32 characters>
The SNMP manager must be able to reach the management interface or any one of
the IP interfaces on the switch.
For the SNMP manager to receive the SNMPv1 traps sent out by the SNMP agent
on the switch, configure the trap host on the switch with the following command:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server trap­source <trap source IP interface>
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server host <IPv4 address> <trap host community string>
Note: You can use a loopback interface to set the source IP address for SNMP
traps. Use the following command to apply a configured loopback interface:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server trap­source loopback <1-5>
530
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
SNMP Version 3
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an enhanced version of the Simple Network
Management Protocol, approved by the Internet Engineering Steering Group in
March, 2002. SNMPv3 contains additional security and authentication features that
provide data origin authentication, data integrity checks, timeliness indicators and
encryption to protect against threats such as masquerade, modification of
information, message stream modification and disclosure.
SNMPv3 allows clients to query the MIBs securely.
SNMPv3 configuration is managed using the following command path menu:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server ?
For more information on SNMP MIBs and the commands used to configure SNMP
on the switch, see the Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 Command Reference.
Default Configuration
Lenovo N/OS has three SNMPv3 users by default. All the three users have access to
all the MIBs supported by the switch:
User 1 name is adminmd5 (password adminmd5). Authentication used is MD5.
Privacy protocol used is DES.
 User 2 name is adminsha (password adminsha). Authentication used is SHA.
Privacy protocol used is DES.
 User 3 name is adminshaaes (password Edpq132x!#9Zpx432w). Authentication used is SHA. Privacy protocol used is AES-128.

In boot strict mode (See “Boot Strict Mode” on page 45), Lenovo N/OS has one
SNMPv3 user:

User 1 name is adminshaaes (password Edpq132x!#9Zpx432w). Authentication used is SHA. Privacy protocol used is AES-128.
Up to 16 SNMP users can be configured on the switch. To modify an SNMP user,
enter the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user <1-16> name <1-32 characters>
Users can be configured to use the authentication/privacy options. The G8272
support two authentication algorithms: MD5 and SHA, as specified in the
following command:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user <1-16> authentication­protocol {md5|sha} authentication­password
-orRS 8272(config)# snmp­server user <1-16> authentication­protocol none
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
531
User Configuration Example
1. To configure a user with name “admin,” authentication type MD5, and
authentication password of “admin,” privacy option DES with privacy password
of “admin,” use the following CLI commands.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 5 name admin
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 5 authentication­protocol md5 authentication­password
Changing authentication password; validation required: Enter current admin password:
<admin. password>
Enter new authentication password:
<auth. password; Should be more than 18 characters >
Re­enter new authentication password: <auth. password>
New authentication password accepted.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 5 privacy­protocol des privacy­password
Changing privacy password; validation required:
Enter current admin password:
<admin. password>
Enter new privacy password:
Re­enter new privacy password:
New privacy password accepted.
<privacy password; Should be more than 18 characters>
<privacy password>
2. Configure a user access group, along with the views the group may access. Use the
access table to configure the group’s access level.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 5 name admingrp
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 5 level authpriv
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 5 read­view iso
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 5 write­view iso
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 5 notify­view iso
Because the read view, write view, and notify view are all set to “iso,” the user type
has access to all private and public MIBs.
3. Assign the user to the user group. Use the group table to link the user to a
particular access group.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 5 user­name admin
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 5 group­name admingrp
532
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Configuring SNMP Trap Hosts
SNMPv1 Trap Host
1. Configure a user with no authentication and password.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 10 name v1trap
2. Configure an access group and group table entries for the user. Use the following
menu to specify which traps can be received by the user:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access <user number>
In the following example the user will receive the traps sent by the switch.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 10
name v1trap
security snmpv1
notify­view iso
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 10
security snmpv1
user­name v1trap
group­name v1trap
(Access group to view SNMPv1 traps)
(Assign user to the access group)
3. Configure an entry in the notify table.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server notify 10 name v1trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server notify 10 tag v1trap
4. Specify the IPv4 address and other trap parameters in the targetAddr and
targetParam tables. Use the following commands to specify the user name
associated with the targetParam table:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 10 name v1trap address 10.70.70.190
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 10 parameters­name v1param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 10 taglist v1param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 name v1param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 user­name v1trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 message snmpv1
Note: N/OS 8.2 supports only IPv4 addresses for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap
hosts.
5. Use the community table to specify which community string is used in the trap.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server community 10
index v1trap
name public
user­name v1trap © Copyright Lenovo 2015
(Define the community string) Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
533
SNMPv2 Trap Host Configuration
The SNMPv2 trap host configuration is similar to the SNMPv1 trap host
configuration. Wherever you specify the model, use snmpv2 instead of snmpv1.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 10 name v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 10 security snmpv2
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 10 user­name v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 10 group­name v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 10 name v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 10 security snmpv2
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 10 notify­view iso
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server notify 10 name v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server notify 10 tag v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 10 name v2trap address 100.10.2.1
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 10 taglist v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 10 parameters­name v2param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 name v2param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 message snmpv2c
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 user­name v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 10 security snmpv2
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server community 10 index v2trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server community 10 user­name v2trap
Note: N/OS 8.2 supports only IPv4 addresses for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 trap
hosts.
534
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
SNMPv3 Trap Host Configuration
To configure a user for SNMPv3 traps, you can choose to send the traps with both
privacy and authentication, with authentication only, or without privacy or
authentication.
This is configured in the access table using the following commands:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access <1-32> level
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters <1-16> level
Configure the user in the user table accordingly.
It is not necessary to configure the community table for SNMPv3 traps because the
community string is not used by SNMPv3.
The following example shows how to configure an SNMPv3 user v3trap with
authentication only:
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 11 name v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server user 11 authentication­protocol md5 authentication­password
Changing authentication password; validation required: Enter current admin password:
<admin. password>
Enter new authentication password:
<auth. password>
Re­enter new authentication password: <auth. password>
New authentication password accepted.
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 11 notify­view iso
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 11 level authNopriv
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server access 11 name v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 11 user­name v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server group 11 group­name v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server notify 11 name v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server notify 11 tag v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 11 name v3trap address 47.81.25.66
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 11 taglist v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­address 11 parameters­name v3param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 11 name v3param
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 11 user­name v3trap
RS 8272(config)# snmp­server target­parameters 11 level authNoPriv
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
535
SNMP MIBs
The N/OS SNMP agent supports SNMP version 3. Security is provided through
SNMP community strings. The default community strings are “public” for SNMP
GET operation and “private” for SNMP SET operation. The community string can
be modified only through the Command Line Interface (CLI). Detailed SNMP
MIBs and trap definitions of the N/OS SNMP agent are contained in the N/OS
enterprise MIB document.
The N/OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs:

























dot1x.mib
ieee8021ab.mib
ieee8023ad.mib
rfc1213.mib
rfc1215.mib
rfc1493.mib
rfc1573.mib
rfc1643.mib
rfc1657.mib
rfc1757.mib
rfc1850.mib
rfc1907.mib
rfc2037.mib
rfc2233.mib
rfc2465.mib
rfc2571.mib
rfc2572.mib
rfc2573.mib
rfc2574.mib
rfc2575.mib
rfc2576.mib
rfc2790.mib
rfc3176.mib
rfc4133.mib
rfc4363.mib
The N/OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC
1215:
ColdStart
WarmStart
 LinkDown
 LinkUp
 AuthenticationFailure


The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493:


536
NewRoot
TopologyChange
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in N/OS:
Table 44. Lenovo N/OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Trap Name
Description
swLoginFailure
Signifies that someone failed to
enter a valid username/password
combination.
swTrapDisplayString specifies
whether the login attempt was from
CONSOLE or TELNET. In case of
TELNET login it also specifies the
IP address of the host from which
the attempt was made.
swValidLogin
Signifies that a user login has
occurred.
swApplyComplete
Signifies that new configuration has
been applied.
swSaveComplete
Signifies that new configuration has
been saved.
swFwDownloadSucess
Signifies that firmware has been
downloaded to
[image1|image2|boot image].
swFwDownloadFailure
Signifies that firmware
downloaded failed to
[image1|image2|boot image].
swValidLogout
Signifies that a user logout has
occurred.
swPrimaryPowerSupplyFailure
Signifies that the primary power
supply has failed.
swPrimaryPowerSupplyFixed
Signifies that the primary power
supply has been restored.
swDefAdminDisable
Signifies that the default admin
account has been disabled.
swAcntStrngPswdNotMet
Signifies that the configured
password does not match strong
password complexity.
swAcntLocked Signifies that account has been
locked.
swAcntUnlocked Signifies that account has been
unlocked.
swStgNewRoot
Signifies that the bridge has become
the new root of the STG.
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
537
Table 44. Lenovo N/OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps (continued)
538
Trap Name
Description
swCistNewRoot
Signifies that the bridge has become
the new root of the CIST.
swStgTopologyChanged
Signifies that there was a STG
topology change.
swCistTopologyChanged
Signifies that there was a CIST
topology change.
swHotlinksMasterUp
Signifies that the Master interface is
active.
swHotlinksMasterDn
Signifies that the Master interface is
not active.
swHotlinksBackupUp
Signifies that the Backup interface
is active.
swHotlinksBackupDn
Signifies that the Backup interface
is not active.
swHotlinksNone
Signifies that there are no active
interfaces.
swTeamingCtrlUp
Signifies that the teaming is up.
swTeamingCtrlDown
Signifies that the teaming control is
down.
swTeamingCtrlDownTearDownBlked
Signifies that the teaming control is
down but teardown is blocked.
swTeamingCtrlError
Signifies error, action is undefined.
swLACPPortBlocked
Signifies that LACP is operationally
down on a port, and traffic is
blocked on the port.
swLACPPortUnblocked
Signifies that LACP is operationally
up on a port, and traffic is no longer
blocked on the port.
swLFDPortErrdisabled
Signifies that a port is
error-disabled due to excessive link
flaps.
swVlagInstanceUp
Signifies that VLAG instance is up
identified in the trap message.
swVlagInstanceRemoteUp
Signifies that VLAG is down but
instance on the remote instance is
up.
swVlagInstanceLocalUp
Signifies that VLAG is down but
local instance is up.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Table 44. Lenovo N/OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps (continued)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Trap Name
Description
swVlagInstanceDown
Signifies that VLAG instance is
down identified in the trap
message.
swVlagIslUp
Signifies that connection between
VLAG switches is up.
swVlagIslDown
Signifies that connection between
VLAG switches is down.
sw8021x
Signifies 802.1x feature is enabled.
swDefGwUp
Signifies that the default gateway is
alive. ipCurCfgGwIndex is the
index of the Gateway in
ipCurCfgGwTable. The range for
ipCurCfgGwIndex is from 1 to
ipGatewayTableMax.
ipCurCfgGwAddr is the IP address
of the default gateway.
swDefGwDown
Signifies that the default gateway is
down. ipCurCfgGwIndex is the
index of the Gateway in
ipCurCfgGwTable. The range for
ipCurCfgGwIndex is from 1 to
ipGatewayTableMax.
ipCurCfgGwAddr is the IP address
of the default gateway.
swDefGwInService
Signifies that the default gateway is
up and in service.
ipCurCfgGwIndex is the index of
the Gateway in ipCurCfgGwTable.
The range for ipCurCfgGwIndex is
from 1 to ipGatewayTableMax.
ipCurCfgGwAddr is the IP address
of the default gateway.
swDefGwNotInService
Signifies that the default gateway is
alive but not in service.
ipCurCfgGwIndex is the index of
the Gateway in ipCurCfgGwTable.
The range for ipCurCfgGwIndex is
from 1 to ipGatewayTableMax.
ipCurCfgGwAddr is the IP address
of the default gateway.
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
539
Table 44. Lenovo N/OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps (continued)
540
Trap Name
Description
swVrrpNewMaster
Indicates that the sending agent has
transitioned to “Master” state.
vrrpCurCfgVirtRtrIndx is the
VRRP virtual router table index
referenced in
vrrpCurCfgVirtRtrTable. The range
is from 1 to
vrrpVirtRtrTableMaxSize.
vrrpCurCfgVirtRtrAddr is the
VRRP virtual router IP address.
swVrrpNewBackup
Indicates that the sending agent has
transitioned to “Backup” state.
vrrpCurCfgVirtRtrIndx is the
VRRP virtual router table index
referenced in
vrrpCurCfgVirtRtrTable. The range
is from 1 to
vrrpVirtRtrTableMaxSize.
vrrpCurCfgVirtRtrAddr is the
VRRP virtual router IP address.
swVrrpAuthFailure
Signifies that a packet has been
received from a router whose
authentication key or
authentication type conflicts with
this router's authentication key or
authentication type.
vrrpCurCfgIfIndx is the VRRP
interface index. This is equivalent to
ifIndex in RFC 1213 mib. The range
is from 1 to vrrpIfTableMaxSize.
vrrpCurCfgIfPasswd is the
password for authentication. It is a
DisplayString of 0 to 7 characters.
swTcpHoldDown
Signifies that new TCP connection
requests from a particular client
will be blocked for a
pre-determined amount of time
since the rate of new TCP
connections from that client has
reached a pre-determined
threshold. The fltCurCfgSrcIp is the
client source IP address for which
new TCP connection requests will
be blocked. The swTrapRate
specifies the amount of time in
minutes that the particular client
will be blocked.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Table 44. Lenovo N/OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps (continued)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Trap Name
Description
swNTPSyncFailed
Signifies that synchronization with
the NTP server has failed.
swNTPUpdateClock
Signifies that the system clock is
updated with NTP server.
swECMPGatewayUp
Signifies that the ECMP gateway is
up.
swECMPGatewayDown
Signifies that the ECMP gateway is
down.
swTempExceedThreshold
Signifies that the switch
temperature has exceeded
maximum safety limits.
swFanFailure
Signifies that the fan failure has
been detected.
swFanFailureFixed
Signifies that the fan failure has
been fixed.
swTempReturnThreshold
Signifies that the switch
temperature has returned to under
maximum safety limits.
swVMGroupVMotion
Signifies that a virtual machine has
moved from a port to another.
swVMGroupVMOnline
Signifies that an advance
provisioned virtual machine has
came online.
swVMGroupVMVlanChange
Signifies that a virtual machine has
entered a VLAN, or changed the
VLAN.
swVmCheckSpoofedvm
Signifies that a spoofed VM MAC
was found.
swOflowConnectControllerFailure
Signifies that the connection to
OpenFlow controller is broken.
swOflowConnectControllerSuccess
Signifies that the connection to
OpenFlow controller is successful.
swOflowEmergencyState
Signifies that the OpenFlow switch
has moved to emergency state.
swOflowNoEmergencyState
Signifies that the OpenFlow switch
is out of emergency state.
swOflowSwitchOflowMode
Signifies that the device is working
in OpenFlow switch mode.
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
541
Table 44. Lenovo N/OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps (continued)
542
Trap Name
Description
swOflowSwitchNomalMode
Signifies that the device is working
in normal switch mode.
swOflowSwitchFlowtableClr
Signifies that the flow table entries
are cleared from the device.
swOflowSwitchStatsClr
Signifies that the OpenFlow
statistics are cleared from the
device.
swOflowFlowtableEntryUnavail
Signifies that the device is unable to
add flow entry in OpenFlow due to
unavailability of system resources.
swOflowFlowtableLimit
Signifies that the device has
reached its configured flow limit.
swOflowPortDownController
Signifies that the port is
operationally down by OpenFlow
controller.
swOflowPortUpController
Signifies that the port is
operationally up by OpenFlow
controller.
swOflowVersionNegotiationError
Signifies that the device is unable to
connect to controller either due to
bad version, or negotiation/hello
failure.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Switch Images and Configuration Files
This section describes how to use MIB calls to work with switch images and
configuration files. You can use a standard SNMP tool to perform the actions, using
the MIBs listed in Table 45.
Table 45 lists the MIBs used to perform operations associated with the Switch
Image and Configuration files.
Table 45. MIBs for Switch Image and Configuration Files
MIB Name
MIB OID
agTransferServer
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.1
agTransferImage
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.2
agTransferImageFileName
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.3
agTransferCfgFileName
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.4
agTransferDumpFileName
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.5
agTransferAction
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.6
agTransferLastActionStatus
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.7
agTransferPort
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.8
agTransferUserName
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.9
agTransferPassword
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.10
agTransferTSDumpFileName
1.3.6.1.4.1.26534.2.7.6.1.1.7.11
The following SNMP actions can be performed using the MIBs listed in Table 45.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Load a new Switch image (boot or running) from a FTP/TFTP server

Load a previously saved switch configuration from a FTP/TFTP server

Save the switch configuration to a FTP/TFTP server

Save a switch dump to a FTP/TFTP server
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
543
Loading a New Switch Image
To load a new switch image with the name “MyNewImage­1.img” into image2,
follow these steps. This example shows an FTP/TFTP server with the IPv4 address
192.168.10.10, though IPv6 is also supported.
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the switch image resides:
Set agTransferServer.0 "192.168.10.10"
2. Set the area where the new image will be loaded:
Set agTransferImage.0 "image2"
3. Set the name of the image:
Set agTransferImageFileName.0 "MyNewImage­1.img"
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTransferUserName.0 "MyName"
5. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTransferPassword.0 "MyPassword"
6. Initiate the transfer. To transfer a switch image, enter 2 (gtimg):
Set agTransferAction.0 "2"
Loading a Saved Switch Configuration
To load a saved switch configuration with the name “MyRunningConfig.cfg” into
the switch, follow these steps. This example shows a TFTP server at IPv4 address
192.168.10.10, though IPv6 is also supported.
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the switch configuration file resides:
Set agTransferServer.0 "192.168.10.10"
2. Set the name of the configuration file:
Set agTransferCfgFileName.0 "MyRunningConfig.cfg"
3. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTransferUserName.0 "MyName"
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTransferPassword.0 "MyPassword"
5. Initiate the transfer. To restore a running configuration, enter 3:
Set agTransferAction.0 "3"
544
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Saving the Switch Configuration
To save the switch configuration to a FTP/TFTP server follow these steps. This
example shows a FTP/TFTP server with the IPv4 address 192.168.10.10, though
IPv6 is also supported.
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the configuration file is saved:
Set agTransferServer.0 "192.168.10.10"
2. Set the name of the configuration file:
Set agTransferCfgFileName.0 "MyRunningConfig.cfg"
3. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTransferUserName.0 "MyName"
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTransferPassword.0 "MyPassword"
5. Initiate the transfer. To save a running configuration file, enter 4:
Set agTransferAction.0 "4"
Saving a Switch Dump
To save a switch dump to a FTP/TFTP server, follow these steps. This example
shows an FTP/TFTP server with the 192.168.10.10, though IPv6 is also supported.
1. Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the dump file will be saved:
Set agTransferServer.0 "192.168.10.10"
2. Set the name of the dump file:
Set agTransferDumpFileName.0 "MyDumpFile.dmp"
3. If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTransferUserName.0 "MyName"
4. If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTransferPassword.0 "MyPassword"
5. Initiate the transfer. To save a dump file, enter 5:
Set agTransferAction.0 "5"
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 38: Simple Network Management Protocol
545
546
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 39. NETCONF
The Network Configuration Protocol (NETCONF) provides a mechanism to
manage the G8272, retrieve or modify existing configuration data, and upload new
configuration data. See RFC 4741 for details on NETCONF.
NETCONF operates in a client/server model. The NETCONF client establishes a
session with the switch (acting as a NETCONF server) using a Remote Procedure
Call (RPC). NETCONF is based on the Extensible Markup Language (XML) for
encoding data and for exchanging configuration and protocol messages.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

“NETCONF Overview” on page 548

“XML Requirements” on page 549

“Installing the NETCONF Client” on page 550

“Using Juniper Perl Client” on page 552

“Establishing a NETCONF Session” on page 553

“NETCONF Operations” on page 555

“Protocol Operations Examples” on page 556
547
NETCONF Overview
NETCONF provides a method to quickly configure the switch. It also allows you to
implement a configuration across multiple switches, thereby saving time and
reducing the chances of configuration errors.
The NETCONF protocol defines basic operations that are equivalent to the switch
ISCLI commands.
Note: The current implementation of NETCONF supports only ISCLI commands.
NETCONF is a connection-oriented protocol. See Figure 53 for an overview of
NETCONF operation.
Figure 53. NETCONF Operations Procedure
<hello>
<capabilities/>
</hello>
<hello>
<capabilities/>
</hello>
<rpc>
<operation/>
</rpc>
NETCONF
Client
<rpc-reply>
<operation-response/>
</rpc-reply>
<rpc>
<close-session/>
</rpc>
NETCONF
Server
<rpc-reply>
<ok/>
</rpc-reply>
Session
• Session-ID
Transport Layer
Protocol
Connection
• Authentication
• Data integrity
• Confidentiality
Transport Layer
Protocol
1. The client establishes a transport layer connection to the switch (acting as a
NETCONF server).
2. The client and switch exchange hello messages to declare their capabilities.
3. The client sends a request via rpc message to the switch.
4. The switch sends a response via rpc­reply message to the client.
Note: Steps 3 and 4 must be repeated for each request that the client sends to the
switch.
5. The client sends a close­session message to the switch to end the NETCONF
session and the transport layer connection.
6. The switch sends an ok response.
548
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
XML Requirements
XML is the encoding format used within NETCONF. When using XML for
NETCONF:

All NETCONF protocol elements are defined in the following namespace:
urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0

NETCONF capability names must be Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs):
urn:ietf:params:netconf:capability:{name}:1.0
where {name} is the name of the capability.

Document type declarations must not appear in the NETCONF content.

For Secure Shell (SSH), you must use a special message termination sequence of
six characters to provide message framing:
]]>]]>
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 39: NETCONF
549
Installing the NETCONF Client
You can download the required NETCONF Client installation files from
www.ibm.com. Select Support & downloads > Fixes, updates and drivers.
Follow instructions on the IBM Support Portal page to find the files.
Before installing the NETCONF client, ensure you have completed the following
tasks:

Install a supported version of Python (Python 2.6 or higher, up to but not
including Python 3.0) in the folder C:\.

Install the PyCrypto application appropriate to the Python version you are
using.
Note: The following steps are for the Windows operating systems.
Follow these steps to install the Blade NETCONF Python Client (BNClient):
1. Extract the file blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1.zip to the root (C:\)
folder.
You will see two folders under the root folder
C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1:

blade­netconf­python­client

python­ssh­library
Note: Ensure you see Paramiko version 1.7.4 or higher in the folder
C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\python­ssh­library\
2. Open the command prompt (Select Start > Run > cmd).
3. Enter the following command to install the SSH library:
python C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\python­ssh­library\
paramiko­1.7.6\setup.py install
Note: If the python command does not work from the command prompt, you
may need to add a system variable to set the path to the directory where you have
installed Python. You can add the system variable at the following location: My
Computer > Properties > Advanced > Environment Variables
Follow these steps to install BNClient as a python script:
1. Enter the following command for help:
python C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\blade­netconf­python­
client\bnclient\bnclient.py –h
2. Enter the following command to establish a NETCONF session:

Using SSH to connect to default port 830:
python C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\blade­netconf­python­
client\bnclient\bnclient.py {switch IP address} –u admin –p admin –o get
550
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

Using SSH to connect to port 22:
python C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\blade­netconf­python­
client\bnclient\bnclient.py {switch IP address}:22 –u admin –p admin –o get
Follow these steps to install BNClient as a python library:
1. Open the file C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\blade­netconf­
python­client\example\get.py in a Python editor (For example, IDLE).
2. Change the IP address in the hostname field to the switch IP address, and save the
file.
3. Enter the following command to establish a session:
python C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\blade­netconf­python­
client\setup.py install
4. Enter the following command to get the running configuration:
python C:\blade­netconf­python­client­v0.1\blade­netconf­python­
client\example\get.py
Note: The file get.py is an example of a NETCONF operation python script. You
can edit the script or write a new script as per your requirements.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 39: NETCONF
551
Using Juniper Perl Client
You can use Juniper Perl client instead of BNClient to communicate with the
NETCONF feature on the switch. Follow these steps to use the Juniper Perl client.
Note: You must use the Linux operating system for the Juniper Perl client.
1. Extract the file juniper­netconf­perl­client.zip to the folder
/home/user/.
You will see two folders:

juniper­netconf­perl­client

blade­netconf­perl­scripts
2. Follow these steps to install the Juniper Perl client:
As a Perl library:
a. Change to the following directory:
/home/user/juniper­netconf­perl­client
b. Extract the following file:
netconf­perl­10.0R2.10.tar.gz
c. Change to the following directory:
/home/user/juniper­netconf­perl­client/netconf­perl­10.0R2
.10
d. Install the client as per the instructions in the README file.
Note: If the prerequisites package installation fails, manually install each file in
/home/user/juniper­netconf­perl­client\netconf­perl­prereqs­
patch.
As a Perl script:
a. Change to the following directory:
/home/user/blade­netconf­perl­scripts/
b. Enter the following command:
perl get/get.pl ­l admin ­p admin {swich IP address}
Note: The file get.pl is an example of a NETCONF operation Perl script. You can
edit the script or write a new script as per your requirement.
552
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Establishing a NETCONF Session
SSH is the widely used protocol for NETCONF sessions. The default SSH port for
NETCONF is 830. The client may also connect to the switch through SSH port 22.
Follow these steps to establish a NETCONF session. Enter commands in the client
Linux Shell.
Note: You can open a maximum of four simultaneous sessions.
1. Enter the following command to open an SSH connection:
ssh admin@{switch IP address} ­p 830 ­s netconf
2. Type or paste the following hello message:
<hello>
<capabilities>
<capability>urn:ietf:params:netconf:base:1.0</capability>
</capabilities>
</hello>
]]>]]>
The switch returns a hello message:
<hello xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<capabilities>
<capability>urn:ietf:params:netconf:base:1.0</capability>
<capability>urn:ietf:params:netconf:capability:writable­running:1.0</capab
ility>
<capability>urn:ietf:params:netconf:capability:rollback­on­error:1.0</capa
bility>
<capability>urn:ietf:params:netconf:capability:startup:1.0</capability>
</capabilities> <session­id>102</session­id> </hello> ]]>]]>
3. Type or paste the following rpc message. The get operation is used as an example.
<rpc message­id=“100”>
<get>
<filter type=“subtree”>
<configuration­text/>
</filter>
</get>
</rpc>
]]>]]> © Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 39: NETCONF
553
The switch sends an rpc­reply message:
<rpc­reply message­id=“100”>
<data>
<configuration­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”> version “8.2.1”
switch­type “Lenovo Networking Operating System RackSwitch G8272”
!
!
no system dhcp mgta
!
!
interface ip 127 ip address 172.31.36.51
enable
exit
!
ip gateway 3 address 172.31.1.1
ip gateway 3 enable
!
!
end
</configuration­text>
</data>
</rpc­reply>
]]>]]>
Note: Repeat Step 3 for each request you need to send to the switch.
4. Type or paste the following close­session message to close the NETCONF
session and terminate the SSH connection.
<rpc message­id=“101”>
<close­session/>
</rpc>
]]>]]>
The switch sends the following response:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
]]>]]>
554
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
NETCONF Operations
The NETCONF protocol provides a set of operations to manage and retrieve
switch configuration. Table 46 provides a list of protocol operations supported by
the switch.
Table 46. Protocol Operations
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Operation
Description
get­config
Retrieve all or part of the running or startup
configuration.
edit­config
Load all or part of a specified configuration
to the running or startup configuration.
copy­config
Replace the target running or startup
configuration with a source running or
startup configuration.
delete­config
Delete startup configuration.
lock
Lock the running configuration to prevent
other users (via another NETCONF session)
from changing it.
unlock
Release a locked running configuration.
get
Retrieve running configuration and device
state information.
close­session
Request graceful termination of a
NETCONF session.
kill­session
Force the termination of a NETCONF
session.
get­configuration
Retrieve configuration data from the
switch.
get­interface­information
Retrieve interface status information.
Chapter 39: NETCONF
555
Protocol Operations Examples
Following are examples of the NETCONF protocol operations supported by the
G8272.
<get-config>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<get­config>
<source>
<running/>
</source>
<filter type=“subtree”>
<configuration­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”/>
</filter>
</get­config>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<data>
<configuration­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”>
<!­­ configuration text... ­­>
</configuration­text>
</data>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 47 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 47. get­config Tag Element Values
556
Tag Element
Description
Value
source
The configuration text you
want to retrieve.
running/
or
startup/
filter type=“subtree”
The filter type.
subtree
!­­configuration text...­­
Contains the running
configuration in ISCLI format.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
<edit-config>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<edit­config>
<target>
<running/>
</target>
<default­operation>
<merge/>
</default­operation>
<error­option>
<stop­on­error/>
</error­option>
<config­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”>
<configuration­text>hostname Router</configuration­text>
</config­text>
</edit­config>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 48 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 48. edit­config Tag Element Values
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Tag Element
Description
Value
target
The configuration you
want to edit.
running/ or startup/
Chapter 39: NETCONF
557
Table 48. edit­config Tag Element Values
Tag Element
Description
Value
default­operation Set the default
 merge: The new
operation for the
configuration is merged
edit­config request.
with the target
configuration at the
corresponding level.
error­option
558
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide

replace: The new
configuration replaces the
target configuration.

none: The target
configuration does not
change unless the
configuration data in the
configuration­text
parameter uses the
operation attribute to
request a different
operation.
Set the option to handle  stop­on­error: Abort
configuration error.
the edit­config
operation on first error.
This is the default
error-option.

continue­on­error:
Continue to process
configuration data on error.

rollback­on­error:
Abort the edit­config
operation on first error and
discard the requested
configuration changes.
<copy-config>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<copy­config>
<target>
<startup/>
</target>
<source>
<running/>
</source>
</copy­config>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 49 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 49. copy­config Tag Element Values
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Tag Element
Description
Value
target
Configuration that needs to be changed. running/ or
startup/
source
Source configuration.
running/ or
startup/
Chapter 39: NETCONF
559
<delete-config>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<delete­config>
<target>
<startup/>
</target>
</delete­config>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 50 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 50. delete­config Tag Element Values
Tag Element
Description
Value
target
Configuration that needs to be deleted.
startup/
<lock>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<lock>
<target>
<running/>
</target>
</lock>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 51 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 51. lock Tag Element Values
560
Tag Element
Description
Value
target
Configuration that needs to be edited.
running/
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
<unlock>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<unlock>
<target>
<running/>
</target>
</unlock>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 52 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 52. unlock Tag Element Values
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Tag Element
Description
Value
target
Configuration being edited.
running/
Chapter 39: NETCONF
561
<get>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<get>
<filter type=“subtree”>
<!­­ request a text version of the configuration ­­>
<configuration­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”/>
</filter>
</get>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<data>
<configuration­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”>
<!­­ configuration text... ­­>
</configuration ­text>
</data>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 53 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 53. get Tag Element Values
562
Tag Element
Description
Value
filter
Filter type.
subtree
configuration­text
Configuration in ISCLI format.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
<close-session>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<close­session/>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
<kill-session>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<kill­session>
<session­id>4</session­id>
</kill­session>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<ok/>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 54 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 54. kill­session Tag Element Values
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Tag Element
Description
session­id
ID number of the session to be killed
Chapter 39: NETCONF
563
<get-configuration>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<get­configuration database=“commited” format=“text”/>
</rpc>
Response from the switch:
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<data>
<configuration­text xmlns=“http://www.ibm.com/netconf/1.0/config­text”>
<!­­ configuration text... ­­>
</configuration ­text>
</data>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 55 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 55. get­configuration Tag Element Values
Tag Element
Description
Attributes
get­configuratio
n
Retrieve the
configuration.
database - supports only
committed
format - supports only text
564
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
<get-interface-information>
Usage:
<rpc message­id=“101”>
<get­interface­information>
<interface­name> port xx </interface­name>
<brief/>
</get­interface­information>
</rpc>
Response from switch:

Port detail information
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<interface­information>
<physical­interface>
<name></name> <admin­status></admin­status>
<oper­status></oper­status>
<local­index></local­index>
<if­type></if­type>
<link­level­type></link­level­type>
<mtu></mtu>
<speed></speed>
<link­type></link­type>
<traffic­statistics>
<input­bytes></input­bytes>
<output­bytes></output­bytes>
<input­packets></input­packets>
<output­packets></output­packets>
</traffic­statistics>
<input­error­list>
<input­errors></input­errors>
<framing­errors></framing­errors>
<input­giants></input­giants>
<input­discards></input­discards>
</input­error­list>
<output­error­list>
<output­collisions></output­collisions> <output­errors></output­errors>
<output­drops></output­drops>
</output­error­list>
</physical­interface>
</interface­information>
</rpc­reply>
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 39: NETCONF
565

IP detail information
<rpc­reply message­id=“101” xmlns=“urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:netconf:base:1.0”>
<interface­information>
<physical­interface>
<logical­interface>
<name></name>
<local­index></local­index>
<address­family>
<address­family­name></address­family­name>
<mtu></mtu>
<interface­address>
<ifa­destination></ifa­destination>
<ifa­local></ifa­local>
<ifa­broadcast></ifa­broadcast>
</interface­address>
</address­family>
</logical­interface>
</physical­interface>
</interface­information>
</rpc­reply>
See Table 56 for the tag elements and their values.
Table 56. get­interface­information Tag Element Values
566
Tag Element
Description
interface­name
Interface name or number. You can use the tags
brief/ or detail/ to specify the amount of
information you need.
name
Name of the port or IP interface.
admin­status
Administration status of port interface; shutdown
or no shutdown.
oper­status
Operational status of port interface; link-up or
link-down.
local­index
Local index of port.
if­type
Type of port; GE, XGE.
link­level­type
Ethernet
mtu
9216 for port; 1500 for IP interface.
speed
Speed of port; 1000M, 10000M.
link­type
Type of duplex port; full, half.
input­bytes
Number of bytes received at the port.
output­bytes
Number of bytes sent from the port.
input­packets
Number of frames received at port.
output­packets
Number of frames sent out from the port.
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Table 56. get­interface­information Tag Element Values
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Tag Element
Description
input­errors
Sum of discarded frames and FCS Errors.
framing­errors
Number of failed frames received.
input­giants
Number of frames that are too long.
input­discards
Number of frames in discarding state.
output­collisions
Number of Ethernet collisions.
output­errors
Sum of the outgoing frame aborts and FCS errors.
output­drops
Number of frames dropped.
address­family­name
inet
ifa­destination
Protocol network address of the interface.
ifa­local
Protocol host address on the interface.
ifa­broadcast
Network broadcast address.
Chapter 39: NETCONF
567
568
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 8: Monitoring
The ability to monitor traffic passing through the G8272 can be invaluable for
troubleshooting some types of networking problems. This sections cover the
following monitoring features:
 Remote Monitoring (RMON)
 sFlow
 Port Mirroring
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
569
570
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 40. Remote Monitoring
Remote Monitoring (RMON) allows network devices to exchange network
monitoring data.
RMON allows the switch to perform the following functions:

Track events and trigger alarms when a threshold is reached.

Notify administrators by issuing a syslog message or SNMP trap.
RMON Overview
The RMON MIB provides an interface between the RMON agent on the switch and
an RMON management application. The RMON MIB is described in RFC 1757.
The RMON standard defines objects that are suitable for the management of
Ethernet networks. The RMON agent continuously collects statistics and
proactively monitors switch performance. RMON allows you to monitor traffic
flowing through the switch.
The switch supports the following RMON Groups, as described in RFC 1757:
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Group 1: Statistics

Group 2: History

Group 3: Alarms

Group 9: Events
571
RMON Group 1—Statistics
The switch supports collection of Ethernet statistics as outlined in the RMON
statistics MIB, in reference to etherStatsTable. You can configure RMON statistics
on a per-port basis.
RMON statistics are sampled every second, and new data overwrites any old data
on a given port.
Note: RMON port statistics must be enabled for the port before you can view
RMON statistics.
Example Configuration
1. Enable RMON on a port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# rmon
2. View RMON statistics for the port.
RS 8272(config­if)# show interface port 1 rmon­counters
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
RMON statistics for port 1:
etherStatsDropEvents: NA
etherStatsOctets: 7305626
etherStatsPkts: 48686
etherStatsBroadcastPkts: 4380
etherStatsMulticastPkts: 6612
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: 22
etherStatsUndersizePkts: 0
etherStatsOversizePkts: 0
etherStatsFragments: 2
etherStatsJabbers: 0
etherStatsCollisions: 0
etherStatsPkts64Octets: 27445
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: 12253
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: 1046
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: 619
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets: 7283
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 38
572
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
RMON Group 2—History
The RMON History Group allows you to sample and archive Ethernet statistics for
a specific interface during a specific time interval. History sampling is done per
port.
Note: RMON port statistics must be enabled for the port before an RMON History
Group can monitor the port.
Data is stored in buckets, which store data gathered during discreet sampling
intervals. At each configured interval, the History index takes a sample of the
current Ethernet statistics, and places them into a bucket. History data buckets
reside in dynamic memory. When the switch is re-booted, the buckets are emptied.
Requested buckets are the number of buckets, or data slots, requested by the user
for each History Group. Granted buckets are the number of buckets granted by the
system, based on the amount of system memory available. The system grants a
maximum of 50 buckets.
You can use an SNMP browser to view History samples.
History MIB Object ID
The type of data that can be sampled must be of an ifIndex object type, as
described in RFC 1213 and RFC 1573. The most common data type for the History
sample is as follows:
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.<x>
The last digit (x) represents the number of the port to monitor.
Configuring RMON History
Perform the following steps to configure RMON History on a port.
1. Enable RMON on a port.
RS 8272(config)# interface port 1
RS 8272(config­if)# rmon
RS 8272(config­if)# exit
2. Configure the RMON History parameters for a port.
RS 8272(config)# rmon history 1 interface­oid 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.<x>
RS 8272(config)# rmon history 1 requested­buckets 30
RS 8272(config)# rmon history 1 polling­interval 120
RS 8272(config)# rmon history 1 owner "rmon port 1 history"
where <x> is the number of the port to monitor. For example, the full OID for port
1 would be:
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.129
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 40: Remote Monitoring
573
3. View RMON history for the port.
RS 8272(config)# show rmon history
RMON History group configuration:
Index IFOID Interval Rbnum Gbnum
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­
1 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.129 120 30 30
Index Owner
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1 rmon port 1 history
RMON Group 3—Alarms
The RMON Alarm Group allows you to define a set of thresholds used to
determine network performance. When a configured threshold is crossed, an
alarm is generated. For example, you can configure the switch to issue an alarm if
more than 1,000 CRC errors occur during a 10-minute time interval.
Each Alarm index consists of a variable to monitor, a sampling time interval, and
parameters for rising and falling thresholds. The Alarm Group can be used to track
rising or falling values for a MIB object. The object must be a counter, gauge,
integer, or time interval.
Use one of the following commands to correlate an Alarm index to an Event index:
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm <alarm number> rising­crossing­index <event number>
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm <alarm number> falling­crossing­index <event number>
When the alarm threshold is reached, the corresponding event is triggered.
Alarm MIB objects
The most common data types used for alarm monitoring are ifStats: errors,
drops, bad CRCs, and so on. These MIB Object Identifiers (OIDs) correlate to the
ones tracked by the History Group. An example statistic follows:
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.129 – mgmt.icmp.icmpInMsgs
This value represents the alarm’s MIB OID, as a string. Note that for non-tables,
you must supply a .0 to specify end node.
Configuring RMON Alarms
Configure the RMON Alarm parameters to track ICMP messages.
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 oid 1.3.6.1.2.1.5.8.0
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 alarm­type rising
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 rising­crossing­index 110
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 interval 60
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 rising­limit 200
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 sample delta
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm 1 owner "Alarm for icmpInEchos"
574
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
This configuration creates an RMON alarm that checks icmpInEchos on the
switch once every minute. If the statistic exceeds 200 within a 60 second interval, an
alarm is generated that triggers event index 110.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Chapter 40: Remote Monitoring
575
RMON Group 9—Events
The RMON Event Group allows you to define events that are triggered by alarms.
An event can be a log message, an SNMP trap, or both.
When an alarm is generated, it triggers a corresponding event notification. Use the
following commands to correlate an Event index to an alarm:
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm <alarm number> rising­crossing­index <event number>
RS 8272(config)# rmon alarm <alarm number> falling­crossing­index <event number>
RMON events use SNMP and syslogs to send notifications. Therefore, an SNMP
trap host must be configured for trap event notification to work properly.
RMON uses a syslog host to send syslog messages. Therefore, an existing syslog
host must be configured for event log notification to work properly. Each log event
generates a syslog of type RMON that corresponds to the event.
For example, to configure the RMON event parameters.
RS 8272(config)# rmon event 110 type log
RS 8272(config)# rmon event 110 description "SYSLOG_this_alarm"
RS 8272(config)# rmon event 110 owner "log icmpInEchos alarm"
This configuration creates an RMON event that sends a syslog message each time it
is triggered by an alarm.
576
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 41. sFlow
The G8272 supports sFlow technology for monitoring traffic in data networks. The
switch includes an embedded sFlow agent which can be configured to provide
continuous monitoring information of IPv4 traffic to a central sFlow analyzer.
The switch is responsible only for forwarding sFlow information. A separate sFlow
analyzer is required elsewhere on the network to interpret sFlow data.
Note: Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 does not support IPv6 for sFlow.
sFlow Statistical Counters
The G8272 can be configured to send network statistics to an sFlow analyzer at
regular intervals. For each port, a polling interval of 5 to 60 seconds can be
configured, or 0 (the default) to disable this feature.
When polling is enabled, at the end of each configured polling interval, the G8272
reports general port statistics and port Ethernet statistics.
sFlow Network Sampling
In addition to statistical counters, the G8272 can be configured to collect periodic
samples of the traffic data received on each port. For each sample, 128 bytes are
copied, UDP-encapsulated, and sent to the configured sFlow analyzer.
For each port, the sFlow sampling rate can be configured to occur once each 256 to
65536 packets, or 0 to disable (the default). A sampling rate of 256 means that one
sample will be taken for approximately every 256 packets received on the port. The
sampling rate is statistical, however. It is possible to have slightly more or fewer
samples sent to the analyzer for any specific group of packets (especially under
low traffic conditions). The actual sample rate becomes most accurate over time,
and under higher traffic flow.
sFlow sampling has the following restrictions:

Sample Rate—The fastest sFlow sample rate is 1 out of every 256 packets.

ACLs—sFlow sampling is performed before ACLs are processed. For ports
configured both with sFlow sampling and one or more ACLs, sampling will
occur regardless of the action of the ACL.

Port Mirroring—sFlow sampling will not occur on mirrored traffic. If sFlow
sampling is enabled on a port that is configured as a port monitor, the mirrored
traffic will not be sampled.

Egress traffic—sFlow sampling will not occur on egress traffic.
Note: Although sFlow sampling is not generally a CPU-intensive operation,
configuring fast sampling rates (such as once every 256 packets) on ports under
heavy traffic loads can cause switch CPU utilization to reach maximum. Use larger
rate values for ports that experience heavy traffic.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
577
sFlow Example Configuration
1. Specify the location of the sFlow analyzer (the server and optional port to which
the sFlow information will be sent):
RS 8272(config)# sflow server <IPv4 address>(sFlow
RS 8272(config)# sflow port <service port>
RS 8272(config)# sflow enable
server address)
(Set the optional service port)
(Enable sFlow features)
By default, the switch uses established sFlow service port 6343.
To disable sFlow features across all ports, use the no sflow enable command.
2. On a per-port basis, define the statistics polling rate:
RS 8272(config)# interface port <port>
RS 8272(config­if)# sflow polling <polling rate>(Statistics
polling rate)
Specify a polling rate between 5 and 60 seconds, or 0 to disable. By default, polling
is 0 (disabled) for each port.
3. On a per-port basis, define the data sampling rate:
RS 8272(config­if)# sflow sampling <sampling rate>(Data
sampling rate)
Specify a sampling rate between 256 and 65536 packets, or 0 to disable. By default,
the sampling rate is 0 (disabled) for each port.
4. Save the configuration.
578
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Chapter 42. Port Mirroring
The Lenovo Networking OS port mirroring feature allows you to mirror (copy) the
packets of a target port, and forward them to a monitoring port. Port mirroring
functions for all layer 2 and layer 3 traffic on a port. This feature can be used as a
troubleshooting tool or to enhance the security of your network. For example, an
IDS server or other traffic sniffer device or analyzer can be connected to the
monitoring port to detect intruders attacking the network.
The G8272 supports a “many to one” mirroring model. As shown in Figure 54,
selected traffic for ports 1 and 2 is being monitored by port 3. In the example, both
ingress traffic and egress traffic on port 2 are copied and forwarded to the monitor.
However, port 1 mirroring is configured so that only ingress traffic is copied and
forwarded to the monitor. A device attached to port 3 can analyze the resulting
mirrored traffic.
Figure 54. Mirroring Ports
Mirrored Ports
Monitor Port
Ingress
Both
Traffic
Connected to
sniffer device
1
2
3
4
Specified traffic is copied
and forwarded to Monitor Port
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
579
The G8272 supports four monitor ports. Each monitor port can receive mirrored
traffic from any number of target ports.
Lenovo N/OS does not support “one to many” or “many to many” mirroring
models where traffic from a specific port traffic is copied to multiple monitor ports.
For example, port 1 traffic cannot be monitored by both port 3 and 4 at the same
time, nor can port 2 ingress traffic be monitored by a different port than its egress
traffic.
Ingress and egress traffic is duplicated and sent to the monitor port after
processing.
Configuring Port Mirroring
The following procedure may be used to configure port mirroring for the example
shown in Figure 54 on page 579:
1. Specify the monitoring port, the mirroring port(s), and the port-mirror direction.
RS 8272(config)# port­mirroring monitor­port 3 mirroring­port 1 in
RS 8272(config)# port­mirroring monitor­port 3 mirroring­port 2 both
2. Enable port mirroring.
RS 8272(config)# port­mirroring enable
3. View the current configuration.
RS 8272# show port­mirroring Port Monitoring : Enabled
Monitoring Ports
580
Mirrored Ports
3
1, in
2, both
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Part 9: Appendices
 Glossary
 Getting help and technical assistance
 Notices
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
581
582
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Appendix A. Glossary
CNA
Converged Network Adapter. A device used for I/O consolidation such as that in
Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) environments implementing Fibre Channel
over Ethernet (FCoE). The CNA performs the duties of both a Network Interface Card
(NIC) for Local Area Networks (LANs) and a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) for Storage
Area Networks (SANs).
DIP
The destination IP address of a frame.
Dport
The destination port (application socket: for example, http-80/https-443/DNS-53)
HBA
Host Bus Adapter. An adapter or card that interfaces with device drivers in the host
operating system and the storage target in a Storage Area Network (SAN). It is
equivalent to a Network Interface Controller (NIC) from a Local Area Network
(LAN).
NAT
Network Address Translation. Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP
or destination IP address to another address, network address translation can be said
to have taken place. In general, half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP
address is changed from one address to another. Full NAT is when both addresses are
changed from one address to another. No NAT is when neither source nor destination
IP addresses are translated.
Preemption
In VRRP, preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into
backup if a peer Virtual Router starts advertising with a higher priority.
Priority
In VRRP, the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s).
Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. Default is 100. A higher number will
win out for master designation.
Proto (Protocol)
The protocol of a frame. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header
adherent to the IP specification (for example, TCP, UDP, OSPF, ICMP, and so on.)
SIP
The source IP address of a frame.
SPort
The source port (application socket: for example, HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53).
Tracking
In VRRP, a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master
designation (with preemption enabled). Tracking can be very valuable in an
active/active configuration.
You can track the following:
Active IP interfaces on the Web switch (increments priority by 2 for each)
Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each)
 Number of virtual routers in master mode on the switch


VIR
Virtual Interface Router. A VRRP address is an IP interface address shared between
two or more virtual routers.
Virtual Router
A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP, as defined in RFC 2338. One
virtual router is associated with an IP interface. This is one of the IP interfaces that the
switch is assigned. All IP interfaces on the G8272s must be in a VLAN. If there is more
than one VLAN defined on the Web switch, then the VRRP broadcasts will only be
sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
583
VRID
Virtual Router Identifier. In VRRP, a numeric ID is used by each virtual router to
create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address.
The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-<VRID>.
If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing, then the VRID number
needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows
with whom to share.
VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's
proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. The reason for both of these protocols is
so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available. Two or more
devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements.
These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as
224.0.0.18.
With VRRP, one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The master
is always advertising via the broadcasts. The backup switch is always listening for the
broadcasts. If the master stops advertising, the backup will take over ownership of the
VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. The switch announces
this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP, and
advertisements. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2
devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in
the network. For a more detailed description, refer to RFC 2338.
584
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Appendix B. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about Lenovo products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from
Lenovo to assist you.
Use this information to obtain additional information about Lenovo and Lenovo
products, and determine what to do if you experience a problem with your Lenovo
system or optional device.
Note: This section includes references to IBM web sites and information about
obtaining service. IBM is Lenovo's preferred service provider for the System x, Flex
System, and NeXtScale System products.
Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself.
If you believe that you require warranty service for your Lenovo product, the
service technicians will be able to assist you more efficiently if you prepare before
you call.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.

Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.

Check for updated software, firmware, and operating-system device drivers for
your Lenovo product. The Lenovo Warranty terms and conditions state that
you, the owner of the Lenovo product, are responsible for maintaining and
updating all software and firmware for the product (unless it is covered by an
additional maintenance contract). Your service technician will request that you
upgrade your software and firmware if the problem has a documented solution
within a software upgrade.

If you have installed new hardware or software in your environment, check the
IBM ServerProven website to make sure that the hardware and software is
supported by your product.

Go to the IBM Support portal to check for information to help you solve the
problem.

Gather the following information to provide to the service technician. This data
will help the service technician quickly provide a solution to your problem and
ensure that you receive the level of service for which you might have contracted.

Hardware and Software Maintenance agreement contract numbers, if
applicable

Machine type number (if applicable–Lenovo 4-digit machine identifier)

Model number

Serial number

Current system UEFI and firmware levels

Other pertinent information such as error messages and logs
585

Start the process of determining a solution to your problem by making the
pertinent information available to the service technicians. The IBM service
technicians can start working on your solution as soon as you have completed
and submitted an Electronic Service Request.
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that Lenovo provides in the online help or in the
Lenovo product documentation. The Lenovo product documentation also
describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform. The documentation for most
systems, operating systems, and programs contains troubleshooting procedures
and explanations of error messages and error codes. If you suspect a software
problem, see the documentation for the operating system or program.
586
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Appendix C. Notices
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for
information on the products and services currently available in your area.
Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or
imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program,
or service.
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
Lenovo (United States), Inc.
1009 Think Place - Building One
Morrisville, NC 27560
U.S.A.
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some
jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation
or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death
to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change
Lenovo product specifications or warranties.
Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or
indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All
information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and
is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments
may vary.
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo
product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
587
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on
development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will
be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements
may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of
this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
588
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Trademarks
Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, Flex System, System x, NeXtScale System, and
X-Architecture are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Internet Explorer, Microsoft, and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group
of companies.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of
others.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Appendix C: Notices
589
Important Notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1 024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for 1 073
741 824 bytes.
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard-disk-drive bays with the
largest currently supported drives that are available from Lenovo.
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an
optional memory module.
Each solid-state memory cell has an intrinsic, finite number of write cycles that the
cell can incur. Therefore, a solid-state device has a maximum number of write
cycles that it can be subjected to, expressed as total bytes written (TBW). A device
that has exceeded this limit might fail to respond to system-generated commands
or might be incapable of being written to. Lenovo is not responsible for
replacement of a device that has exceeded its maximum guaranteed number of
program/erase cycles, as documented in the Official Published Specifications for
the device.
Lenovo makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-Lenovo
products. Support (if any) for the non-Lenovo products is provided by the third
party, not Lenovo.
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not
include user manuals or all program functionality.
590
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Recycling Information
Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a
variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT
products. For information on recycling Lenovo products, go to:
http://www.lenovo.com/recycling
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Appendix C: Notices
591
Particulate Contamination
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive
gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as
humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the device that is described in this
document.
Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate levels or
concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the device to
malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for
particulates and gases that are intended to avoid such damage. The limits must not
be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous other factors, such as
temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates
or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of
specific limits that are set forth in this document, you must implement practices
that maintain particulate and gas levels that are consistent with the protection of
human health and safety. If Lenovo determines that the levels of particulates or
gases in your environment have caused damage to the device, Lenovo may
condition provision of repair or replacement of devices or parts on implementation
of appropriate remedial measures to mitigate such environmental contamination.
Implementation of such remedial measures is a customer responsibility..
Contaminant
Limits
Particulate
• The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric
dust spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.21.
• Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or
greater, using high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet
MIL-STD-282.
• The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination
must be more than 60%2.
• The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc whiskers.
Gaseous
• Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19853
• Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days
1
ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
2 The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity
at which the dust absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.
3 ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control systems:
Airborne contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, U.S.A.
592
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Telecommunication Regulatory Statement
This product may not be certified in your country for connection by any means
whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks. Further
certification may be required by law prior to making any such connection. Contact
a Lenovo representative or reseller for any questions.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Appendix C: Notices
593
Electronic Emission Notices
When you attach a monitor to the equipment, you must use the designated
monitor cable and any interference suppression devices that are supplied with the
monitor.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used to meet FCC
emission limits. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference
caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
might cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de Conformité à la Réglementation d'Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for
any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of
option cards from other manufacturers.
594
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022.
The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.
Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia
Germany Class A Statement
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli
2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten),
bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für Geräte der
Klasse A.
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland)
GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse
A.
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür
aufzukommen.”
Nach dem EMVG: Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der
Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den
EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben
zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo übernimmt keine
Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt
ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten
von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
Deutschland:
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von
Betriebsmittein
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln” EMVG (früher “Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten"). Dies ist die Umsetzung der
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik
Deutschland.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Appendix C: Notices
595
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli
2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten),
bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für Geräte der
Klasse A.
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland)
GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse
A.
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür
aufzukommen."
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört
sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und
Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und Telekommunikation
betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen
Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4).
Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit
der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in
den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
Japan VCCI Class A Statement
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council
for Interference (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio
interference may occur, in which case the user may be required to take corrective
actions.
596
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA) Statement
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
Confirmed Harmonics Guidelines (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase)
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
Confirmed Harmonics Guidelines with Modifications (products greater than 20 A
per phase).
Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement
This is electromagnetic wave compatibility equipment for business (Type A).
Sellers and users need to pay attention to it. This is for any areas other than home.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Appendix C: Notices
597
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A statement
598
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
People’s Republic of China Class A electronic emission
statement
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Appendix C: Notices
599
Taiwan Class A compliance statement
600
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
Index
Symbols
[ ] 26
Numerics
40GbE ports 130
802.1p QoS 268
802.1Q VLAN tagging 120, 284
802.1Qaz ETS 284
802.1Qbb PFC 281
802.1Qbg. See EVB
802.3x flow control 281
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 423
attributes 436
failover configuration 439
route aggregation 434
route maps 430
selecting route paths 438
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) 146
broadcast domains 117
broadcast storm control 114
Browser-Based Interface 30, 449
BSR, PIM 482
C
A
Access Control List (ACL) 189
Access Control Lists. See ACLs.
accessing the switch
Browser-based Interface 30, 35
LDAP authentication 92
RADIUS authentication 84
security 75, 83
TACACS+ 88
ACL metering 190
ACLs 103, 189
FCoE 271
FIP snooping 265, 266, 270
Policy-based routing 341
active-active redundancy 505
administrator account 42, 86
advertise flag (DCBX) 291
aggregating routes 434
example 441
AH 372
anycast address, IPv6 360
application ports 105
assistance, getting 581, 585
Australia Class A statement 594
authenticating, in OSPF 455
Authentication Header (AH) 372
autoconfiguration
IPv6 362
link 56
auto-negotiation
setup 56
autonomous systems (AS) 448
B
bandwidth allocation 268, 286
BBI 30
See Browser-Based Interface 449
Bootstrap Router, PIM 482
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Canada Class A electronic emission statement 594
CEE 263, 267
802.1p QoS 268
bandwidth allocation 268
DCBX 264, 267, 290
ETS 263, 268, 284
FCoE 266, 267
LLDP 267
on/off 267
PFC 263, 269, 281
priority groups 285
China Class A electronic emission statement 599
Cisco EtherChannel 133, 135
CIST 160
Class A electronic emission notice 594
Class of Service queueCOS queue 198
CNA 266
command conventions 26
Command Line Interface 449
Command-Line Interface (CLI) 51
Community VLANPrivate VLANs
Community VLAN 127
component, PIM 478
configuration rules
CEE 267
FCoE 266
Trunking 133
configuring
BGP failover 439
DCBX 292
ETS 287
FIP snooping 273
IP routing 328
OSPF 459
PFC 282
port trunking 134
spanning tree groups 156, 162
contamination, particulate and gaseous 592
Converged Enhanced Ethernet. See CEE.
Converged Network Adapter. See CNA.
Index
601
D
Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange. See DCBX.
date
setup 54
DCBX 264, 267, 290
default gateway 327
configuration example 330
default password 42, 86
default route
OSPF 453
Dense Mode, PIM 477, 478, 486
Designated Router, PIM 476, 481
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) 191
digital certificate 373
generating 375
importing 374
downloading software 66
DR, PIM 476, 481
DSCP 191
E
EAPoL 96
ECMP route hashing 337
ECP 295
Edge Control Protocol. See ECP
Edge Virtual Bridging. See EVB
electronic emission Class A notice 594
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) 372
End user access control
configuring 80
Enhanced Transmission Selection. See ETS.
ENodes 266, 270
ESP 372
EtherChannel 132
as used with port trunking 133, 135
Ethernet Nodes (FCoE). See ENodes.
ETS 263, 268, 284
bandwidth allocation 268, 286
configuring 287
DCBX 292
PGID 268, 285
priority groups 285
priority values 286
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement
594
EVB 295
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN 96
external routing 424, 448
F
factory default configuration 44, 52
failover 495
overview 505
FC-BB-5 265
FCC Class A notice 594
FCC, Class A 594
602
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
FCF 263, 266, 270, 275
detection mode 271
FCoE 263, 265
CEE 266, 267
CNA 266
ENodes 266
FCF 266
FIP snooping 263, 265, 266, 270
FLOGI 271
point-to-point links 265
requirements 266
SAN 265, 267
topology 265
VLANs 272
FCoE Forwarder. See FCF.
FCoE Initialization Protocol snooping. See FIP snooping.
Fibre Channel over Ethernet. See FCoE.
Final Steps 63
FIP snooping 263, 265, 266, 270
ACL rules 271
ENode mode 271
FCF mode 271
timeout 271
first-time configuration 44, 51 to ??
FLOGI 271
flow control 281
setup 56
frame size 118
frame tagging. See VLANs tagging.
G
gaseous contamination 592
gateway. See default gateway.
Germany Class A statement 595
getting help 585
H
help
sources of 585
help, getting 585
high-availability 501
Host routes
OSPF 457
Hot Links 493
HP-OpenView 38, 529
I
IBM DirectorSNMP
IBM Director 38, 529
ICMP 104
IEEE standards
802.1D 144
802.1p 197
802.1Q 120
802.1Qaz 284
802.1Qbb 281
802.1Qbg 295
802.1s 160
802.1x 96
802.3x 281
IGMP 104, 387
PIM 484
Querier 391, 418
IGMP Relay 404
IGMPv3 392
IKEv2 372
digital certificate 373, 374, 375
preshared key 373, 375
IKEv2 proposal 374
image
downloading 66
INCITS T11.3 265
incoming route maps 431
internal routing 424, 448
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 387
Internet Key Exchange Version 2 (IKEv2) 372
Internet Protocol Security
See also IPsec 371
IP address 59
IP interface 59
routing example 328
IP configuration via setup 59
IP interfaces 59
example configuration 328, 330
IP routing 59
cross-subnet example 326
default gateway configuration 330
IP interface configuration 328, 330
IP subnets 326
NAT mapping 332
subnet configuration example 327
switch-based topology 327
IP subnet mask 59
IP subnets 327
routing 326, 327
VLANs 117
IPsec 371
key policy 375
maximum traffic load 373
IPv6 addressing 357, 359
ISL Trunking 132
Isolated VLANPrivate VLANs
Isolated VLAN 127
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association statement 597
JEITA statement 597
jumbo frames 118
K
Korea Class A electronic emission statement 597
L
LACP 136
Layer 2 Failover 495
LDAP
authentication 92
Link Aggregation Control Protocol 136
Link Layer Discovery Protocol 517
LLDP 267, 290, 517
logical segment. See IP subnets.
lossless Ethernet 265, 267
LSAs 446
M
manual style conventions 26
Maximum Transmission Unit 118
meter 107
meter (ACL) 190
mirroring ports 579
modes, PIM 477
monitoring ports 579
MSTPMultiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 160
MTU 118
multi-links between switches
using port trunking 129
multiple spanning tree groups 151
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 160
N
Neighbor Discovery, IPv6 364
network component, PIM 478
Network Load Balancing, See NLB,
network management 30, 38, 529
New Zealand Class A statement 594
NLB 303
notes, important 590
notices 587
J
Japan Class A electronic emission statement 596
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Index
603
O
OSPF
area types 444
authentication 455
configuration examples 460
default route 453
external routes 458
filtering criteria 104
host routes 457
link state database 446
neighbors 446
overview 444
redistributing routes 434
route maps 430, 432
route summarization 452
router ID 454
virtual link 454
outgoing route maps 431
P
packet size 118
particulate contamination 592
password
administrator account 42, 86
default 42, 86
user account 42, 86
passwords 42
payload size 118
PBR.See Policy-Based Routing
People’s Republic of China Class A electronic emission
statement 599
Per Hop Behavior (PHB)PHB 192
PFC 263, 269, 281
DCBX 291
PGID 268, 285
PIM 475 to 487
Bootstrap Router (BSR) 482
component 478
Dense Mode 477, 478, 486
Designated Router (DR) 476, 481
examples 485 to 487
IGMP 484
modes 477, 478
overview 476
Rendezvous Point (RP) 476, 481
Sparse Mode 476, 477, 478
PIM-DM 477, 478, 486
PIM-SM 476, 477, 478
Policy-Based Routing 341
Health Check 343
port flow control. See flow control.
port mirroring 579
port modes 130
Port Trunking 133
604
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide
port trunking
configuration example 134
description 135
EtherChannel 132
ports
configuration 56
for services 105
monitoring 579
physical. See switch ports.
preshared key 373
enabling 375
priority groups 285
priority value (802.1p) 269, 284
Priority-based Flow Control. See PFC.
Private VLANs 127
promiscuous port 127
Protocol Independant Multicast (see PIM) 475 to 487
protocol types 104
PVID (port VLAN ID) 119
Q
QoS 187, 547
QSFP+ 130
Quality of Service 187, 547
Querier (IGMP) 391, 418
R
RADIUS
authentication 84
port 1812 and 1645 105
port 1813 105
SSH/SCP 79
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 158
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)RSTP 158
receive flow control 56
redistributing routes 434, 441
redundancy
active-active 505
re-mark 107, 190
Rendezvous Point, PIM 476, 481
restarting switch setup 53
RIP (Routing Information Protocol)
advertisements 382
distance vector protocol 382
hop count 382
TCP/IP route information 23, 381
version 1 382
RMON alarms 574
RMON events 576
RMON History 573
RMON statistics 572
route aggregation 434, 441
route maps 430
configuring 432
incoming and outgoing 431
route paths in BGP 438
Routed Ports 349
Router ID
OSPF 454
routers 326, 330
border 448
peer 448
port trunking 132
switch-based routing topology 327
routes, advertising 448
routing 424
internal and external 448
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
RP candidate, PIM 476, 481
RSA keys 79
RSTP 158
Russia Class A electronic emission statement 598
rx flow control 56
S
SA 372
SAN 265, 267
security
LDAP authentication 92
port mirroring 579
RADIUS authentication 84
TACACS+ 88
VLANs 117
security association (SA) 372
segmentation. See IP subnets.
segments. See IP subnets.
server ports 240
service and support
before you call 585
service ports 105
setup facility 44, 51
IP configuration 59
IP subnet mask 59
port auto-negotiation mode 56
port configuration 56
port flow control 56
restarting 53
Spanning-Tree Protocol 55
starting 52
stopping 53
system date 54
system time 54
VLAN name 58
VLAN tagging 56
VLANs 58
SNMP 30, 38, 449, 529
HP-OpenView 38, 529
SNMP Agent 529
software
image 65
Source-Specific MulticastSSM 392
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Spanning-Tree Protocol
multiple instances 151
setup (on/off) 55
Sparse Mode, PIM 476, 477, 478
SSH/SCP
configuring 76
RSA host and server keys 79
starting switch setup 52
Static ARP 303
stopping switch setup 53
Storage Area Network. See SAN.
subnet mask 59
subnets 59
summarizing routes 452
switch failover 505
switch ports VLANs membership 119
T
TACACS+ 88
tagging. See VLANs tagging.
Taiwan Class A electronic emission statement 600
TCP 104
technical assistance 585
technical terms
port VLAN identifier (PVID) 120
tagged frame 120
tagged member 120
untagged frame 120
untagged member 120
VLAN identifier (VID) 120
Telnet support
optional setup for Telnet support 64
text conventions 26
time
setup 54
trademarks 589
transmit flow control 56
Trunking
configuration rules 133
tx flow control 56
typographic conventions 26
U
UDP 104
United States FCC Class A notice 594
upgrade, switch software 65
uplink ports 240
USB drive 68
user account 42, 86
V
VDP 295
vDS. See virtual Distributed Switch
VEB 295
VEPA 295
Index
605
virtual Distributed Switch 248
Virtual Ethernet Bridging. See VEB
Virtual Ethernet Port Aggregator.See VEPA
virtual interface router (VIR) 502
virtual link, OSPF 454
Virtual Local Area Networks. See VLANs.
virtual router group 505
virtual router ID numbering 507
Virtual Station Interface.See VSI
VLAN tagging
setup 56
VLANs 59
broadcast domains 117
default PVID 119
example showing multiple VLANs 124
FCoE 272
ID numbers 118
interface 59
IP interface configuration 330
multiple spanning trees 145
multiple VLANs 120
name setup 58
port members 119
PVID 119
routing 328
security 117
setup 58
Spanning-Tree Protocol 145
tagging 56, 119 to 125
topologies 124
VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
active-active redundancy 505
overview 502
virtual interface router 502
virtual router ID numbering 507
vrid 502
VSI 295
VSI Database.See VSIDB
VSI Discovery and Configuration Protocol.See VDP
VSIDB 296
W
willing flag (DCBX) 291
606
RackSwitch G8272: Application Guide